Proficy* HMI/SCADA - iFIX

Proficy* HMI/SCADA - iFIX
CREATING PICTURES
Version 5.8
November 2013
Disclaimer of Warranties and Liability
The information contained in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, GE Intelligent Platforms,
Inc. assumes no responsibilities for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies whatsoever. Without limiting the foregoing,
GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. disclaims any and all warranties, expressed or implied, including the warranty of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the information contained in this manual and the
equipment or software described herein. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of such information,
equipment and software, is upon the buyer or user. GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. shall not be liable for any damages,
including special or consequential damages, arising out of the user of such information, equipment and software, even
if GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. has been advised in advance of the possibility of such damages. The user of the
information contained in the manual and the software described herein is subject to the GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.
standard license agreement, which must be accepted by the buyer or user before the use of such information,
equipment or software.
Trademark Notices
©2013 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Proficy is a registered trademark of GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. a wholly-owned subsidiary of General Electric
Company.
*Trademark of GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.
All other brands or names are property of their respective owners.
All other product names and marks identified throughout this book are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. They are used throughout this book in editorial fashion only. No such use, or the use of any
trade names is intended to convey endorsement or affiliation.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form, or stored in a database or retrieval system, or transmitted or
distributed in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical photocopying, recordings or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of GE Intelligent Platforms, Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
We want to hear from you. If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about our documentation, send them to the
following email address:
doc@ge.com
Table of Contents
About this Guide .......................................................................................................................... 1
Reference Documents ......................................................................................................... 1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 2
Picture Coordinate Systems..................................................................................................... 2
Creating Pictures with Purpose ................................................................................................ 2
Getting Started ............................................................................................................................ 4
Before You Begin .................................................................................................................... 4
Creating and Opening Pictures ................................................................................................ 4
Opening Existing Pictures .................................................................................................... 5
Saving Pictures .................................................................................................................... 5
Picture Coordinate Systems..................................................................................................... 6
Logical Coordinate System .................................................................................................. 6
Enhanced Coordinate System .............................................................................................. 7
Zoom to Fit .......................................................................................................................... 7
Button Caption Converter..................................................................................................... 8
Coordinate System Summary............................................................................................... 8
The Object-oriented Nature of Pictures .................................................................................... 9
How Objects Behave in Pictures ........................................................................................ 11
Using Basic Drawing Tools .................................................................................................... 13
Using Drawing Cursors ...................................................................................................... 14
Using Toolbars................................................................................................................... 16
Using the Toolbox .............................................................................................................. 18
Using the Object Pop-up Menu .......................................................................................... 19
Using the Properties Window ............................................................................................. 24
Using the Color Box ........................................................................................................... 26
Using the Find Mouse Coordinates Tool ............................................................................. 27
iii
Creataing Pictures
Using the Animations Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 28
Using Basic Functions in Pictures .......................................................................................... 30
Showing a Picture .............................................................................................................. 30
Refreshing a Picture .......................................................................................................... 31
Refreshing a Thumbnail ..................................................................................................... 31
Closing a Picture................................................................................................................ 31
Using the Picture Pop-up Menu.......................................................................................... 31
Using the Picture Properties Window ................................................................................. 33
Defining the Picture Height and Width ................................................................................ 33
Setting the Picture Background and Fade Colors ............................................................... 34
Setting Gradient Fill Properties........................................................................................... 34
Viewing Your Picture in the Run-time Environment ............................................................. 38
Upgrading Pictures to Enhanced Coordinates .................................................................... 39
Upgrading Hardcoded Values in Animations....................................................................... 41
Converting Button Captions ............................................................................................... 42
Restoring a Picture to the Logical Coordinate System ........................................................ 44
Selecting Zoom to Fit ......................................................................................................... 45
Performing Advanced Functions in Pictures ........................................................................... 46
Sharing Picture Files .......................................................................................................... 46
Changing the Picture View ................................................................................................. 46
Tiling and Cascading Pictures ............................................................................................ 47
Creating Pictures without Title bars .................................................................................... 49
Overview Checklist ................................................................................................................ 49
How Do I................................................................................................................................ 50
Changing Your Window Size.............................................................................................. 51
Setting the Fade Type of a Picture ..................................................................................... 51
Setting the Gradient Angle of a Picture's Fade Type ........................................................... 52
Zooming In and Out of Pictures .......................................................................................... 52
iv
Table of Contents
Updating the Window Location ........................................................................................... 52
Viewing all Picture and Dynamo Set Thumbnails at Once ................................................... 52
Enabling or Disabling Window Properties ........................................................................... 53
Resolving Pictures ............................................................................................................. 53
Saving Thumbnails with Previously Created Pictures or Dynamo Sets................................ 53
Importing Windows Metafiles ............................................................................................. 54
Assigning Pictures to a Security Area ................................................................................. 54
Defining the Attributes of a Custom Picture ........................................................................ 55
Using Specified Dimensions ............................................................................................... 55
Modifying Picture Properties .............................................................................................. 55
Using the Dimensions of an Existing Picture....................................................................... 57
Setting the Options on the Workspace Appearance Page ................................................... 57
Tracking Cursor Coordinates ............................................................................................. 58
Using the Grid.................................................................................................................... 58
Implementing Pictures in Your Process ...................................................................................... 60
What Makes Up Your Picture ................................................................................................. 60
The Document ................................................................................................................... 61
The Viewport ..................................................................................................................... 62
The Window....................................................................................................................... 64
Planning Your Pictures .......................................................................................................... 65
Determining a Window Size ............................................................................................... 65
Tips: Sizing and Locating a Picture .................................................................................... 69
Controlling a Picture's Magnification ................................................................................... 70
Selecting Window Properties ............................................................................................. 74
Selecting Additional Picture Properties ............................................................................... 76
Designing Your Pictures ........................................................................................................ 77
Design Tips........................................................................................................................ 77
Finding and Replacing Data in Pictures .............................................................................. 78
v
Creataing Pictures
Using Process Assistants ................................................................................................... 79
Working with Color ............................................................................................................. 79
Securing Your Pictures ...................................................................................................... 83
Using the Create Picture Wizard ............................................................................................ 84
Accessing the Create Picture Wizard ................................................................................. 84
Common Elements of the Create Picture Wizard ................................................................ 85
Types of Pictures in the Create Picture Wizard ................................................................... 86
Overview of the Create Picture Wizard Process ................................................................. 87
How Do I... ......................................................................................................................... 89
Working with Other Applications............................................................................................. 95
Working with ActiveX Controls ........................................................................................... 95
Working with Bitmaps ........................................................................................................ 95
Working with Windows Metafiles ........................................................................................ 97
Creating Alarms Using Pictures.......................................................................................... 97
Optimizing Picture Performance............................................................................................. 97
Resolving Pictures ............................................................................................................. 98
Blinking Alarms .................................................................................................................. 99
Using the Picture Converter Utility.......................................................................................... 99
Running Picture Converter ................................................................................................. 99
Updating Picture Components.......................................................................................... 100
Reusing FIX32 Command Buttons in iFIX ........................................................................ 102
Using Picture Caching ......................................................................................................... 102
System Requirements...................................................................................................... 102
Enabling Picture Caching ................................................................................................. 103
Preloading Pictures .......................................................................................................... 104
Run-time Pictures ............................................................................................................ 105
Making Changes to Pictures at Run Time ............................................................................ 106
Disabling Picture Caching for Individual Pictures .............................................................. 107
vi
Table of Contents
Resizing Pictures ................................................................................................................. 107
Maximizing the WorkSpace on Open ................................................................................... 109
Changing Picture Settings in the FixUserPreferences.ini File ............................................... 109
Configuring Whether a Prompt Appears on Close for Changes in Run Mode .................... 110
Changing the Nudge Settings........................................................................................... 110
Allowing a Group Click Event ........................................................................................... 111
Disabling the Right-Click Menu ........................................................................................ 112
Developing Objects in Pictures ................................................................................................ 113
Adding Objects to Pictures ................................................................................................... 113
Drawing Shapes .............................................................................................................. 116
Adding a Chart ................................................................................................................. 117
Adding Text ..................................................................................................................... 119
Adding a Bitmap Image .................................................................................................... 120
Adding Data Links............................................................................................................ 120
Adding Historical Datalinks to Pictures ............................................................................. 124
Adding an Alarm Summary Object ................................................................................... 125
Adding Push Buttons ....................................................................................................... 126
Adding Variable Objects................................................................................................... 126
Adding OLE Objects ........................................................................................................ 127
Adding a Proficy Portal Control ........................................................................................ 128
Adding a Proficy Plant Applications Dynamo .................................................................... 130
Adding Timer Objects ...................................................................................................... 131
Adding Event Objects ...................................................................................................... 131
Performing Basic Functions with Objects ............................................................................. 131
Using Shortcut Keys ........................................................................................................ 132
Selecting Objects ............................................................................................................. 132
Moving Objects ................................................................................................................ 133
Editing Objects................................................................................................................. 134
vii
Creataing Pictures
Renaming Objects ........................................................................................................... 136
Changing Object Names in Scripts ................................................................................... 136
Performing Advanced Functions with Objects ...................................................................... 136
Manipulating Objects Using Toolbars ............................................................................... 137
Resizing Objects .............................................................................................................. 141
Rotating Objects .............................................................................................................. 142
Manipulating Objects with Points ...................................................................................... 143
Reshaping Objects........................................................................................................... 143
Coloring and Styling Objects ............................................................................................ 145
Aligning Objects ............................................................................................................... 151
Flipping Objects ............................................................................................................... 154
Splitting Polylines and Pipes ............................................................................................ 155
Extending Lines to Intersect ............................................................................................. 158
Trimming Lines at the Intersection.................................................................................... 162
Converting Lines to Polyline ............................................................................................. 163
Making Lines Horizontal or Vertical .................................................................................. 164
Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe ............................................................................ 165
Modifying Pipe Characteristics ......................................................................................... 166
Adding and Deleting Connection Points ........................................................................... 168
Default Connection Points................................................................................................ 170
Using the Connector Tools ............................................................................................... 171
Creating Complex Objects ................................................................................................... 177
Stacking........................................................................................................................... 177
Bringing to Front and Sending to Back ............................................................................. 178
Layering and Visibility ...................................................................................................... 178
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ................................................................................... 180
Pictures Dialog Boxes .......................................................................................................... 183
Add Ack Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 184
viii
Table of Contents
Add Alarm Extension Field1 Dialog Box ........................................................................... 184
Add Alarm Extension Field2 Dialog Box ........................................................................... 185
Add Area Dialog Box........................................................................................................ 186
Add ColorSet Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 186
Add Date In Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 187
Add Date Last Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 188
Add Description Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 189
Add Node Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 190
Add Priority Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 190
Add Time In Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 192
Add Time Last Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 193
Advanced Animations Dialog Box..................................................................................... 194
Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box ........................................................................ 263
Basic Animation Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 272
Button Caption Converter Dialog Box ............................................................................... 277
Chart Customization Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 277
Color Selection Dialog Box............................................................................................... 286
Create Picture Wizard Dialog Box .................................................................................... 287
Historical Datalink Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 337
Modify Area Dialog Box.................................................................................................... 341
Modify Configuration Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 342
Modify Pipe Characteristics Dialog Box ............................................................................ 343
New Level Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 344
Select BackgroundColor Dialog Box ................................................................................. 345
How Do I... ....................................................................................................................... 350
Using Process Assistants to Expedite Pictures......................................................................... 410
Using Wizards and Experts .................................................................................................. 410
Running Wizards ............................................................................................................. 411
ix
Creataing Pictures
Running Experts .............................................................................................................. 412
Multiple Command Script Wizard ..................................................................................... 421
Experts Summary ............................................................................................................ 421
Modify Database Block Expert ......................................................................................... 468
Using Dynamos ............................................................................................................... 484
Using Global Subroutines................................................................................................. 484
Performing Functions with Toolbars ................................................................................. 484
Controlling Object Properties ............................................................................................... 484
How Properties Work ....................................................................................................... 485
Defining and Modifying Properties .................................................................................... 485
Animating Object Properties ................................................................................................ 489
How Animations Work...................................................................................................... 489
Defining Data Sources ..................................................................................................... 494
Animating Properties Using Color ........................................................................................ 502
Color by Analog Value ..................................................................................................... 503
Color by Digital Value ...................................................................................................... 504
Color by Current Alarm .................................................................................................... 504
Color by Latched Alarm.................................................................................................... 505
Using Blinking Thresholds ................................................................................................ 505
Using Shared Thresholds ................................................................................................. 505
Animating Object Properties with Visual Basic ..................................................................... 506
Animating a Grouped Object ................................................................................................ 506
Modifying Animations........................................................................................................... 507
Deleting Animations ............................................................................................................. 509
Building Expressions ........................................................................................................... 509
Using the Expression Builder Dialog Box.......................................................................... 509
Customizing the Expression Builder ................................................................................. 511
Specifying Tolerance, Deadband, and Refresh Rate ........................................................ 511
x
Table of Contents
Mathematical Operators ................................................................................................... 514
How Do I.............................................................................................................................. 519
Accessing the Animation Dialog Boxes ............................................................................ 520
Selecting a Data Source from a List ................................................................................. 520
Working with Basic Animations Overview ......................................................................... 521
Working with Advanced Animations Overview .................................................................. 522
Modifying Properties ........................................................................................................ 523
Using Expressions Overview............................................................................................ 524
Using Data Conversions, Error Defaults, and Threshold Tables........................................ 526
Running Your Pictures ............................................................................................................. 530
Working with Objects in the Run-time Environment .............................................................. 530
Interacting with Alarm Summaries at Run Time ................................................................ 531
Interacting with Charts in Run Time.................................................................................. 531
Locating Objects .............................................................................................................. 532
Using the Global Time Control ......................................................................................... 532
Using Experts to Expedite Pictures at Run Time .................................................................. 535
Multiple Picture Instances and Run Mode ............................................................................ 537
Important Information About Run Mode ............................................................................ 538
Using Tag Status and Quick Trend Pictures ............................................................................. 539
Accessing Tag Status, Quick Trend, and Tag Control Panel Pictures ................................... 540
The Tag Status Picture .................................................................................................... 541
The Quick Trend Picture .................................................................................................. 542
The Tag Control Panel Picture ......................................................................................... 543
Translating Picture Text ....................................................................................................... 545
Language File Exporter Dialog Box .................................................................................. 545
Examples of How to Switch Between Languages ............................................................. 546
How Do I... ....................................................................................................................... 551
Using Tag Groups in Pictures .............................................................................................. 555
xi
Creataing Pictures
Using the Tag Group Editor.............................................................................................. 556
Using Tag Group Symbols in Pictures .............................................................................. 561
Entering a Symbol in a Picture ......................................................................................... 562
Importing and Exporting Tag Group Files ......................................................................... 566
Tag Group Editor Dialog Boxes ........................................................................................ 567
How Do I.............................................................................................................................. 570
Working with Dynamo Objects ............................................................................................. 580
Master Dynamos and Dynamo Instances ......................................................................... 581
Pre-Built Dynamos and Dynamos Created Before iFIX 4.5 ............................................... 581
Determining Which Dynamo Sets Contain Dynamo Objects ............................................. 582
Converting Dynamos to Dynamo Objects in Pictures ........................................................ 585
Using the Dynamo Toolbar............................................................................................... 587
Creating Dynamo Objects ................................................................................................ 588
Creating Dynamo Sets ..................................................................................................... 616
Using a Dynamo Object in Pictures .................................................................................. 618
Updating Dynamo Objects in Pictures .............................................................................. 618
Changing the Configuration of a Dynamo ......................................................................... 620
Dynamo Dialog Boxes...................................................................................................... 621
How Do I... ....................................................................................................................... 637
Using Key Macros................................................................................................................ 660
Do You Need Key Macros? .............................................................................................. 660
Introduction to the Key Macro Editor ................................................................................ 661
Defining Key Macros ........................................................................................................ 665
Managing Macros ............................................................................................................ 671
Overriding WorkSpace Shortcuts in Run Time.................................................................. 672
Tips And Tricks ................................................................................................................ 672
Key Macro Editor Dialog Boxes ........................................................................................ 673
How Do I... ....................................................................................................................... 674
xii
Table of Contents
Index ....................................................................................................................................... 685
xiii
About this Guide
The Creating Pictures manual is intended for process control engineers, integrators, and developers responsible
for designing and creating operator displays, and configuring the development and run-time environments. The
manual assumes familiarity with the process database and the iFIX® WorkSpace.
Reference Documents
For related information on iFIX®, refer to the following manuals:

Building a SCADA System

Understanding iFIX

Writing Scripts

Implementing Alarms and Messages

Trending Historical Data
1
Creataing Pictures
Introduction
iFIX® allows developers and process engineers to create dynamic pictures with minimal effort. By providing an
open-environment, ActiveX format, iFIX lets you incorporate internet controls (OCXs), reuse elements from
other sources (such as bitmaps), or embed other OLE automation applications into your pictures.
While creating pictures in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can utilize features that give you the control you
need to customize your drawings. You can view your pictures by merely switching to the run-time environment
with the click of a mouse.
Picture Coordinate Systems
Before creating or editing pictures or dynamo sets, it is important to be aware of the coordinate system you are
using. iFIX 5.8 supports the following two coordinate systems:

Logical

Enhanced
The Logical Coordinate System is the legacy system that supports graphics created with iFIX 5.5 or earlier. The
Logical Coordinate System uses logical units for measurement, and provides graphic scaling that is dependent
on the screen resolution (or aspect ratio) of the terminal used to create the graphic; thus, graphics may not
accurately scale to different screen sizes.
The Enhanced Coordinate System is a feature of iFIX 5.8, which uses postscript points for units of
measurement instead of logical units. The Enhanced Coordinate System is a screen independent coordinate
system, which accurately scales across different screens sizes. When the screen resolution (or aspect ratio)
changes, the picture automatically adjusts to the new resolution (or aspect ratio).
iFIX 5.8 also provides a means to easily upgrade Logical Coordinate System graphics to the Enhanced
Coordinate System. For more information on this feature, refer to the Picture Coordinate System section.
Creating Pictures with Purpose
Whether you are a new or an expert user, iFIX gives you the power and flexibility to create pictures that provide
solutions to your process needs. Let's take two scenarios to illustrate this concept:
2
Using Key Macros

Joe. Joe is a system developer for a small shop. He is slightly intimidated by Visual Basic and would
prefer not to learn scripting to create and control his pictures. However, he wants to take advantage of
VBA's capabilities by customizing a few objects in his picture.
Joe's Solution. Using iFIX Experts, Joe attaches scripts to the objects in his picture without leaving his
development screen or entering the VBA environment. Experts give him a simple means to perform
the processes he wants.

Janet. Janet is a Process Manager for a large processing plant. She is well-versed in VBA, and is more
than eager to unleash the power of iFIX using her knowledge of Visual Basic. Specifically, Janet wants
the ability to override the default property settings of a series of existing objects and create her own
properties, including complex animations from several different data sources and algorithms. She also
wants to add custom controls and toolbars to simplify the process for her developers.
Janet's Solution. iFIX provides the tools that Janet needs to fully customize her environment and finetune the control she has over her application. Using the Animations dialog box, she animates certain
properties of her objects by specifying a data source and conversion method. Then, by writing VBA
scripts, she overrides existing defaults, inserts custom controls, and creates a development toolbar that
saves her developers time.
Having all the power you need doesn't mean it should be difficult to use. Developing complex pictures using
process automation software was once a tedious and intimidating venture, as it required you to use proprietary
command languages and graphics formats that, in the end, gave you limited flexibility. iFIX offers an alternate
solution – an easy-to-implement and use, object and task-oriented development tool that lets you create pictures
with purpose.
This manual details all of the concepts introduced in the above example. The following table helps you locate
specific concepts throughout the various chapters.
iFIX Picture Concepts
To learn about...
Refer to the section...
In the chapter...
Experts
Using Wizards and Experts
Using Process Assistants to
Expedite Pictures
Pictures as ActiveX
Documents
What Makes up Your Picture
Implementing Pictures in Your
Process
The run-time
environment
Working with Objects in the Run-time
Environment
Running Your Pictures
Using animations
Connecting to a Data Source
Animating Object Properties
3
Creataing Pictures
Getting Started
This chapter shows you how to start creating and drawing pictures right away. Some of the basic concepts of
iFIX pictures are also described.

Creating and Opening Pictures

The Object-oriented Nature of Pictures

Using Basic Drawing Tools

Using Basic Functions in Pictures

Performing Advanced Functions in Pictures
Before You Begin
Before you start creating pictures, make sure you have started the iFIX WorkSpace. It is also helpful to know
which data sources you want to connect to ahead of time.
Creating and Opening Pictures
When you start the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you are ready to develop your picture. You can start by creating a
new picture or opening an existing one.
Before you begin, it is important to know which coordinate system the picture uses. Typically, legacy pictures
(iFIX 5.5 or earlier) use the Logical Coordinate System and new pictures (iFIX 5.8 or greater) use the Enhanced
Coordinate System. For more information on coordinate systems, refer to the Picture Coordinate System
section.
For Classic view, to create a new picture, click the New Picture button on the Standard toolbar as shown:
For Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture. Or, click Picture in the New
group, on the Home tab.
By default, the Create Picture Wizard appears and guides you through the picture creation process.
If a single untitled picture appears when you click the New Picture button, the Create Picture wizard has been
disabled. Enable it by selecting the following check box on the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences
dialog box: Show Picture Wizard from New Picture Menu.
4
Using Key Macros
For more information on the Create Picture wizard, refer to the Using the Create Picture Wizard section in the
Implementing Pictures in Your Process chapter.
Opening Existing Pictures
To open an existing picture, double-click the picture from the Pictures folder in the system tree. By default, the
system tree is docked on the left side of the screen, and the picture appears to the right of it. To create more
room for your picture, you can do any of the following:

Dock the system tree on the other side of the screen by dragging it

Set the system tree to float on top of your picture by dragging it away from the sides of the screen.

Hide the system tree completely so that the picture appears to fit the full screen.
For more information on using the system tree of the WorkSpace, refer to the Using the Proficy iFIX
WorkSpace chapter of the Understanding iFIX manual.
If the picture you opened has links to an external data source, such as a Proficy Historian server, which is not
configured in the WorkSpace, you will receive an error message indicating that the data source is not configured
in WorkSpace.
Saving Pictures
In Classic view, to save your drawing, click the Save button on the Standard toolbar. In Ribbon view, to save
your drawing, click the Application button, and then click Save. You can save your picture as either a .GRF file
or .SVG file. Both file types are stored, by default, in the PIC folder in the path where iFIX is installed, but only
.GRF files are displayed in the system tree. You can save .SVG files in any location but you cannot open them
in iFIX Workspace, as these files are used for exporting to third-party applications, such as Proficy Real-Time
Information Portal.
When saving picture files, as either file type, you must follow the guidelines of VBA naming constraints. For
example, do not use:

Anything but a letter as the first character.

Any of the following characters in a name: space, period, exclamation mark, @, &, $, #.

A name that exceeds 31 characters.

A name used by any object in your iFIX application. For example, you cannot have both a picture and
a rectangle named test.
5
Creataing Pictures
Also, we recommend that you do not use any names that are common to other objects, functions, statements, or
methods in Visual Basic, as you may cancel one of the keywords in the code. For more information on VBA
Naming Conventions, refer to the VBA Naming Conventions section in the Writing Scripts manual.
Picture Coordinate Systems
The picture coordinate systems uniquely determine the position of a point or other geometric element in a picture.
All coordinates used by a picture, Dynamo Set, or animation are measured in the document's coordinate system,
which can be either:

Logical

Enhanced
Logical Coordinate System
The Logical Coordinate System is a legacy system that was used for pictures created with iFIX 5.5 or earlier.
With the Logical Coordinate System, the screen resolution is measured in logical units. The logical unit value is
derived from the screen resolution of the terminal on which the picture was originally created. When viewing
this picture on a terminal with a different screen resolution, the picture may not automatically scale to the new
screen resolution.
The Logical Coordinate System uses the following properties to identify the logical units used for the height
and width of the document as displayed in the Property window.
Property
Description
DocumentHeight
Specifies the height of the document in logical units.
DocumentWidth
Specifies the width of the document in logical units.
With the Logical Coordinate System, the Auto Scale option allows you to move pictures between screens with
the same resolution. However, when viewed on a screen with a different resolution, the picture many not scale
as desired. When moving pictures to a screen with a different resolution, it is recommended to use the Enhanced
Coordinate System.
6
Using Key Macros
Enhanced Coordinate System
The Enhanced Coordinate System is provided for iFIX 5.8 and greater. With the Enhanced Coordinate System,
you can create a picture that provides independence from restricted screen resolution. For the Enhanced
Coordinate System, the dimension and position of a picture are measured in postscript points. The Enhanced
Coordinate System features automatic scaling of a picture when viewed on a screen with a resolution that is
different from the screen on which the picture was originally created. Once a picture is created with the
Enhanced Coordinate System, the picture retains its original aspects even when viewed on screens with
different resolutions.
The Enhanced Coordinate System uses the following properties to reflect the height, width, and coordinate
system of the graphic. Refer to the iFIX Automation Reference e-book for more information on these
properties.
Property
Description
DocumentHeightEx
Specifies the document height in postscript points.
DocumentWidthEx
Specifies the document width in postscript points.
EnhancedCoordinates
Identifies the picture coordinate system as either - True (Enhanced Coordinate
System) or False (Logical Coordinate System).
You can upgrade a picture created with the Logical Coordinate System to the Enhanced Coordinate System.
The Enhanced Coordinate System expert converts the picture from logical units to postscript points. During the
upgrade process, the picture in the Logical Coordinate System is saved to a Backup folder before the picture is
upgraded. This allows you to revert back to the original picture in logical units if you want to. Also, when a
picture is upgraded, the icon changes to indicate the upgraded picture.
By default, the Enhanced Coordinate System is enabled for new pictures. Existing legacy pictures remain in the
Logical Coordinate System until you upgrade them to the Enhanced Coordinate System.
Zoom to Fit
The Enhanced Coordinate System provides a Zoom to Fit viewing preference that is enabled for run mode. Zoom To
Fit suppresses scroll bars while allowing you to view the entire picture on your screen. The objects within the
picture do not change their position and dimensions even when the picture is brought to a new screen resolution,
which is different from the resolution on which the picture was developed. Zoom to Fit does not change the location
of the objects/shapes within your picture, but scales the picture for viewing only. For more information on using
Zoom to Fit, refer to the Selecting Zoom to Fit section.
7
Creataing Pictures
By default, Zoom to Fit is enabled for run mode. You may wish to disable this preference for a special purpose.
To disable Zoom to Fit in run mode, for all pictures de-select the Zoom to Fit in Run mode check box on the
General tab of the User Preference dialog Box. To disable this preference for a specific picture, put a script
under the picture initialization code to call "ME.ZoomToFit False." For more information on this script, refer to
the ZoomToFit Method Example in the iFIX Automation Reference e-book.
NOTE: Zoom to Fit does not apply to a document that uses the Logical Coordinate System.
IMPORTANT: iFIX screens depend on the Dots Per Inch (DPI) setting of the physical display monitor and
should always be at the recommended setting. Failure to do so may cause the picture to display improperly.
Button Caption Converter
The Button Caption Converter allows you to scale command button captions (text) when used in a picture with
a screen resolution that is different from the resolutions in which the picture and command button caption were
created. When text does not scale properly for a command button, the Button Caption Converter expert converts
the caption text to scale across zoom factors and screen resolutions and places an overlay on the original
command button caption. Using the Button Caption Converter expert, you can scale one, some, or all of the
command button captions in a picture. This is useful when viewing pictures and text with Zoom to Fit. The
Button Caption Converter expert supports the Enhanced Coordinate System only. The Button Caption
Converter does not apply to a document that uses the Logical Coordinate System. For more information on
using the Button Caption Converter, refer to the Converting Button Captions section.
Coordinate System Summary
The following table summarizes the characteristics of each coordinate system.
Characteristic
Logical Coordinate
System
Enhanced Coordinate
System
iFIX support
Version 5.5 or earlier
Version 5.8
NOTE: Pictures
using the Logical
Coordinate System
can be viewed and
edited with iFIX
5.8.
Measurement used for screen dimensions
8
logical units
postscript points
Using Key Macros
Characteristic
Logical Coordinate
System
Enhanced Coordinate
System
Default picture size (height and width)
100 x 75 logical units
postscript points, calculation
based on the screen
resolution
Picture height property
DocumentHeight
DocumentHeightEx
Picture width property
DocumentWidth
DocumentWidthEx
EnhancedCoordinates property
False
True
Views picture in entire screen option
Auto Scale
Zoom to Fit
Legacy picture backup and restore
No
Yes
Picture Icon
Dynamo Icon
The Object-oriented Nature of Pictures
Many graphics programs work by giving you tools to manipulate pixels, a series of tiny dots that make up your
computer monitor. When you add shapes to your drawing, the program translates these shapes into a matrix of
dots, and changes the color of the screen pixels to match the dot matrixes. These dot matrixes are called
bitmaps.
Although bitmaps are a common graphic format, they are limited in that once you create the image, there is very
little you can do to change it. You can erase or partially erase a bitmap, or paint a new bitmap on top of the old
one. But changing bitmaps takes almost as much time as creating them.
9
Creataing Pictures
iFIX pictures, on the other hand, work with objects instead of individual pixels. An object-oriented graphic
consists of an image and image attributes, such as size, color, and position, that define the properties of the
object. By providing this object-oriented foundation, iFIX precludes your having to work with individual pixels.
Rather, you interact with tools, menus, and dialog boxes to add and change object properties, while iFIX
automatically adjusts the object and its property data for you. This gives you an enormous amount of control
and flexibility when drawing and modifying your pictures.
For example, many other graphics packages allow you to save object-oriented graphics as a Windows Metafile.
iFIX allows you to import the metafile (in .WMF format) into a picture. The advantage of using a .WMF format
is that the imported image consists of individual objects, giving you greater control of your picture.
The following figures illustrate some additional examples of the control and flexibility you have with iFIX
pictures.
The Control You Have With Your Pictures
In an iFIX picture, you can modify specific objects of
a group without separating the objects from the
group, and without losing scripts or animations
applied to the group.
This concept is referred to as drilling down.
10
Using Key Macros
The Flexibility You Have With Your Pictures
Given the popularity of bitmap formats, you may
have an existing bitmap that you want to add to your
picture.
iFIX makes this easy by letting you import the image
into a picture as an object. Now you can control the
image's properties like any other iFIX object.
For more information on adding a bitmap to a
picture, refer to the Implementing Pictures in Your
Process chapter.
How Objects Behave in Pictures
An object is anything that you create or import into an iFIX picture that has properties, methods, and events. In
the next section we talk more about how objects work. After you have created an object in the Proficy iFIX
WorkSpace's configuration environment, you can control its attributes and view its behavior in the run-time
environment.
An object can be any of the following:

Shapes – Shapes are integral to adding precise detail to your pictures. Shapes include rectangles,
rounded rectangles, ovals, lines, polylines, polygons, arcs, chords, pies, and pipes.

Text – Text added to an iFIX picture becomes an object, containing properties that allow you to format
or control the text.

Bitmaps – Bitmaps are images constructed of dot matrixes. They can be imported into an iFIX picture
and controlled like any other object.

Charts – Charts are compound objects made of lines, text, and rectangles that display real-time and
historical trend data.
11
Creataing Pictures

Data links – Data links display text and values from process databases.

Alarm Summaries – An Alarm Summary object displays real-time alarm status information based on
your alarming and SCADA configuration. An Alarm Summary object is a Proficy iFIX OCX.

Push Buttons – A push button is a tool that lets you execute an action easily with the click of a mouse.
A push button is an OCX supplied Microsoft.

Timers – Timers perform an action based on a specified time duration.

Events– Events allow you to perform an operation based on a specific action.

Variables – Variables allow you to specify different values that let you store and display process data
in various ways.

ActiveX Controls – compiled software components based on the component object model (COM).
Any imported ActiveX control (OCX) becomes an iFIX object in the WorkSpace.

Applications – Any OLE-compatible application, such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, can be
imported as a document object within the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace.

Animations – When you animate an object's properties, iFIX adds animation objects to the object
containing those properties.
An iFIX picture can contain many types of objects. The following figure illustrates the concept of objects inside
an iFIX picture.
Example of Objects in an iFIX Picture
12
Using Key Macros
Objects consist of the following image attributes:

Properties

Methods

Events
These attributes are described in the sections that follow.
Properties
All objects have properties. Properties are object attributes you can control, such as the foreground fill color or
the object's size or position. These properties can be modified by animating the object or by writing a script.
Methods and Events
Objects also contain methods and events.
A method is a task that affects one or more objects. For example, a rectangle can be moved, rotated, and scaled,
and these are all methods of the rectangle.
An event is a signal that an object generates that we respond to. For example, if you click the left mouse button
or press a key on the keyboard, the object generates an event which you would respond to, typically by
executing a script. Note that the action which triggers an event does not have to be a user action, it can be
another script, an application, or the operating system.
Typically, when drawing pictures you work with properties more than methods and events. However, you may
want to access an object's methods and events in order to write scripts for the objects you create. For more
information on properties, refer to the Controlling Object Properties chapter.
Using Basic Drawing Tools
The iFIX configuration environment contains several tools that help you access, modify, and apply an object's
characteristics into your picture design. These tools are described in the following sections.

Using Drawing Cursors

Using Toolbars

Using the Toolbox

Using the Object Pop-up Menu

Using the Properties Window

Using the Color Box

Using the Find Mouse Coordinates Tool

Using the Animations Dialog Box
13
Creataing Pictures
Using Drawing Cursors
When you draw pictures, you have many different cursors to use depending on what you are trying to do. Many
of these cursors appear when you have selected an object and place the cursor over the object's handles. The
handles of an object provide points that control the movement of the object. Object handles appear in three
types, depending on the operation you are trying to perform:

Resize Handles – Allow you to resize an object. These automatically appear when you initially add
most objects.

Reshape Handles – Allow you to reshape an object. These automatically appear when you initially
add lines, arcs, chords, and pies.

Rotate Handles – Allow you to rotate an object. These handles appear only when you rotate a
particular object (excluding ovals, rounded rectangles, charts, and bitmaps).
The following example illustrates a rectangle with resize handles. There are four diagonal handles, two left and
right handles, and two top and bottom handles, as shown. When you initially add an object, object handles
appear. If you select outside the object, its handles disappear. Place the cursor on the object and click (select)
the object to display the handles again.
Object Handles
For examples of reshape and rotate handles, refer to the Reshaping Objects and Rotating Objects sections,
respectively. When you display the object's handles, you can control that object on the screen. Notice that when
you display the handles, that object's name is highlighted in the system tree. The following table shows each
cursor that is available, where it can be accessed in the iFIX WorkSpace, and what the cursor allows you to do.
14
Using Key Macros
Using Drawing Cursors
The
Cursor...
Positioned...
Does this...
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace
document outside of an object;
or anywhere in the system tree.
Selects an object or folder in the system tree, begins
clicking and dragging objects (left-click), or displays a
picture pop-up window (right-click).
Anywhere on your screen.
Alerts you that the system is working and no input can
currently be processed.
On an object or group of
objects.
Selects an object (single-click), displays the pop-up
menu (right-click), moves an object by clicking and
dragging, or displays the Animations dialog box
(double-click).
On the up/down object handle,
or at the top or bottom edge of
the picture.
Resizes an object or picture up or down.
On the left/right object handle,
or at the left or right edge of the
picture.
Resizes an object or picture left or right.
On the diagonal object handle,
or at corner edges of the
picture.
Resizes an object or picture diagonally.
Right edge of the system tree.
Expands the system tree.
In system tree, dragging into
picture.
Drags and drops objects or Dynamos to a picture. The
second cursor indicates that the location you are
dropping to is not valid.
In the Edit Color palette when
customizing colors.
Selects a color range.
15
Creataing Pictures
Using Drawing Cursors
The
Cursor...
Positioned...
Does this...
On objects with points.
Adds or deletes a point to an object. The white cursors
on the left indicate that a point cannot be added or
deleted. The black cursors on the right indicate a point
can be added or deleted.
On pipe and polyline objects.
Splits pipes or polylines. The yellow cursor on the left
indicates that a pipe can be split at that point. Note that
the yellow cursor can actually be any contrasting
color, depending on the color of the pipe object.
The black cursor on the right indicates that a polyline
can be split at that point. The white cursors indicate
that pipes and polylines cannot be split at those points.
Anywhere when adding or
reshaping shapes or charts.
Provides a starting point to add or reshape a shape or
chart by clicking and dragging to a location.
Also appears on an object's
center of rotation circle.
As a rotation cursor, selects the center of rotation so
that you can relocate it by clicking and dragging the
circle.
Anywhere when adding data
links, current date, or current
time.
Adds a data link, current date, or current time.
Using Toolbars
iFIX provides both WorkSpace and Picture toolbars to help you perform various functions. Although both
WorkSpace and Picture toolbars help you perform actions in your picture, the Picture toolbars contain specific
tools to help you create and modify objects and their properties. The following table describes the Picture
toolbars available to you for drawing pictures.
NOTE: Although hidden by default, you can access and use toolbars in Ribbon view. To access a toolbar in
Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click Toolbars. You can also
open a toolbar from the WorkSpace tree, by opening the Project Toolbar Files folder and double-clicking the
toolbar you want to open.
16
Using Key Macros
Using Toolbars to Create and Modify Pictures
The
toolbar...
Which can be accessed
in Ribbon view...
Lets you...
Shapes
From the Insert tab, in
the Shapes group, in the
Shapes list.
Add shapes to your pictures. Refer to the Adding Objects to
Pictures section for a list of the shapes you create.
Edit
From the Home tab, in
the Clipboard and Editing
groups.
Perform basic functions with objects, including cutting,
copying, pasting, and undoing an action. Refer to the
Performing Basic Functions with Objects section for more
information on these functions.
Tools
From the Format tab, in
the Arrange group.
Perform functions with objects in your pictures such as
aligning or grouping them. Refer to the Performing
Advanced Functions with Objects section for a description of
the functions you can perform.
Experts
From the Tools tab, in
the Tasks/Experts group,
from the Tasks/Experts
list.
Perform advanced functions with objects in the picture or the
picture itself, such as rotate, scale, or position. Refer to the
Using Wizards and Experts section for more information on
using experts.
Toolbox
From the Format tab, all
groups and from the
Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group.
Select the most commonly used toolbar buttons from a
resizable box. Refer to the Using the Toolbox section for
more information.
CAD
Toolbar
From the Format tab, in
the Picture group, in the
Drawing Tools list.
Perform functions with line objects in the picture, such as
extending and trimming lines, converting lines to polylines,
converting lines to pipes, or adding/deleting connection
points. Refer to the Performing Advanced Functions with
Objects section for more information on these functions.
To show or hide a Picture toolbar, select Toolbars from the WorkSpace menu, select Picture in the Owner area,
and then select or deselect the appropriate toolbars. You must have a picture open in order to select Picture from
the Owner area. For more information on toolbars, refer to the Understanding Toolbars section of the
Understanding iFIX manual.
You can also create your own toolbars, or write scripts for custom buttons in toolbars. For more information on
creating and customizing toolbars, refer to the Understanding Toolbars chapter of the Understanding iFIX
manual. For information on writing scripts to customize toolbars, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
17
Creataing Pictures
Using the Toolbox
By default, many of the toolbar buttons appear in a Toolbox, allowing you to quickly select the buttons you
want from one place. The Toolbox is also a convenient way to save space in your picture by not having several
individual toolbars open. You can click and drag the Toolbox to position it anywhere in the picture, or click and
drag one of its edges to resize it.
If you would rather select buttons from specific toolbars, simply deselect the Toolbox in the Toolbars dialog
box.
The following table lists the names of the toolbar buttons found in the Toolbox. The layout of the cells in the
table mimics the layout of the corresponding buttons in the Toolbox. The following layout is the default layout
of the Toolbox.
18
Pointer
Selection
Cut
Copy
Paste
Time
Date
Rectangle
Rounded
Rectangle
Oval
Chord
Polygon
Pie
Pipe
Arc
Line
Polyline
Text
Pushbutton
OLE Object
Datalink
Stamper
Alarm
Summary
Variable
Object
Timer
Event
Chart
Bitmap
Set Color
Set Font
Toggle Grid
Space Evenly
Vertical
Space Evenly
Horizontal
Align Top
Align Left
Align Bottom
Align Right
Align
Horizontal
Center
Align
Vertical
Center
Group
Ungroup
Bring to
Front
Send to Back
Set Layer
Display
Layers
Foreground
Color Expert
Fill Expert
Rotate Expert
Position
Expert
Scale Expert
Visibility
Expert
Create Picture
Wizard
Open
Picture
Expert
Close Picture
Expert
Replace
Picture Expert
Refresh Rate
Expert
Using Key Macros
Data Entry
Expert
VisiconX Data
Control
VisiconX
Grid Control
VisiconX
List Box
Control
VisiconX
Combo Box
Control
Undo
Using the Object Pop-up Menu
As you create a picture, you can display a pop-up menu for the picture or an object in the picture. To display an
object's pop-up menu, right-click the object. This menu provides quick access to the object's properties and
animations, as well as common operations you can perform with the object, such as copying and pasting.
You can also access this menu by right-clicking the object in the Pictures directory of the system tree. This is an
effective way to view or adjust properties for invisible objects (which only appear in the system tree) added
during animation.
NOTE: The pop-up menu for objects differs somewhat from the picture pop-up menu. Refer to the Using the
Picture Pop-up Menu section for more information on the picture pop-up menu.
The following table shows the functions that are available from the object pop-up menu. Depending on the
object you have selected, additional operations may be available.
Use the
operation...
To...
Animations
Display the Animations dialog box, which allows you to animate the properties of an
object or several objects.
Resize
Display handles around the object so you can resize it.
Reshape
Display handles around the object so you can reshape it.
Rotate
Display rotate handles around the object so you can move the object around its center
of rotation.
Add Connection
Point
Display a square green cursor with a smaller square inside it and a crosshair when you
are close to or moving over the object. This menu item displays as Add Point when
you right-click a polyline or pipe object.
Dynamo
Displays a Dynamo
19
Creataing Pictures
Use the
operation...
To...
Delete
Connection
Point
Display a square, solid red cursor with a cross hair when you are close to a connection
point that can be deleted. When not close, the cursor becomes a red square with a
minus sign and a crosshair. This menu item displays as Delete Point when you rightclick a polyline or pipe object.
Split Polyline
Display a splitting cursor that changes to black when you are close to the polyline. A
black cursor indicates that you can split the polyline at that point.
Convert to Pipe
Convert the line or polyline to a pipe object.
Split Pipe
Display a splitting cursor that changes to a contrasting color when you are inside the
edge of the pipe. A colored cursor indicates that you can split the pipe at that point.
Make Horizontal
Make the line horizontal.
Make Vertical
Make the line vertical.
Undo
Cancel the previous operation. If a particular task cannot be undone, the Undo
command is unavailable after you complete the action.
Cut
Remove the object from the picture and places it into the clipboard.
Copy
Create a duplicate copy of the object and place it into the clipboard.
Delete
Remove the object from the picture.
Duplicate
Create a duplicate copy of the object and place it slightly offset from the original.
Group
Combine one or more objects into one grouped object.
Bring to Front
Move the selected object to the front or top of the picture.
NOTE: This function may not work as expected with Enhanced Charts. For more
information, see Use Z-Order to Layer Controls.
20
Using Key Macros
Use the
operation...
To...
Send to Back
Move the selected object to the back or bottom of the picture.
NOTE: This function may not work as expected with Enhanced Charts. For more
information, see Use Z-Order to Layer Controls.
Color
Define fade, foreground, background, and edge colors using a color palette.
Fill Style
Specify a fill style of one of the following:

Solid

Hollow

Horizontal

Vertical

Downward Diagonal

Upward Diagonal

Cross Hatch

Diagonal Cross Hatch

Gradient
Refer to the Coloring and Style section for further information on fill styles.
Edge Style
Specify an edge style of one of the following:

Solid – Applies a solid line style

Dash – Applies a dashed pen line style

Dot – Applies a dotted pen line style

Dash Dot – Applies a dash-dot combination line style

Dash Dot Dot – Applies a dash-dot-dot combination line style

No Edge – Specifies that the object contains no edge style

Inside Frame – Applies a solid line style inside the frame of the object
NOTE: If you set the edge width to greater than 1, it displays as Solid regardless of
the selected edge style in the pop-up menu or the Shape Preferences tab on the User
Preferences dialog box.
21
Creataing Pictures
Use the
operation...
To...
Background
Style
Specify a background style of either opaque or transparent.
Fade Type
Specify a fade type of one of the following:

Linear – Applies a vertically linear fade type inside the frame of the object.

Reflected – Applies a horizontally reflected fade type inside the frame of the
object.

Radial – Applies a radial fade type inside the frame of the object.

Concentric – Applies a concentric fade type inside the frame of the object.
Refer to the Coloring and Styling Objects section for further information on fade
types.
Edit Script
Open the Visual Basic Editor, which allows you to edit Visual Basic scripts.
KeyMacros
Open the Key Macro Editor, which allows you to add and edit key macros.
Property
Window
Display the Properties Window, which allows you to view and change property values.
Elbow Style
Specify an elbow style for a pipe object. These styles include:
Start Cap Style
22

Round – Applies rounded edges to the bends in a pipe object.

Square – Applies squared edges to the bends in a pipe object.
Specify a start cap style for a pipe object. These styles include:

Round – Applies a rounded cap at the starting point of the pipe object.

Square – Applies a square cap at the starting point of the pipe object.

Horizontal Diagonal – Applies a horizontally diagonal cap at the starting point
of the pipe object.

Vertical Diagonal – Applies a vertically diagonal cap at the starting point of the
pipe object.
Using Key Macros
Use the
operation...
To...
End Cap Style
Specify an end cap style for a pipe object. These styles include:

Round – Applies a rounded cap at the ending point of the pipe object.

Square – Applies a squared cap at the ending point of the pipe object.

Horizontal Diagonal – Applies a horizontally diagonal cap at the ending point
of the pipe object.

Vertical Diagonal – Applies a vertically diagonal cap at the ending point of the
pipe object.
Modify Pipe
Characteristics
Open the Modify Pipe Characteristics dialog box, which allows you to edit the styles
of pipe objects.
Edit
CommandButton
Object
Place a text cursor in the push button object to allow you to enter text.
Depending on the object you add, the pop-up menu may vary to include operations specific to that object. For
example, if you add a chart, you can access the Chart Customization dialog box from the object pop-up menu.
Tag Status Pop-up Menu
When you associate database tags with an object, you can switch to the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace run-time
environment to view and test the object's configuration. The run-time object provides a menu you can display
by right-clicking the object. The options on the menu depend on the number of tags you associate with the
object.
If you have associated tags with your objects, the following functions are available from the object pop-up
menu in the run-time environment.
Run-time Object Pop-up Menu Commands
Use the
operation...
Tag Status
To...
Open the Tag Status picture of the tag associated with the selected object.
23
Creataing Pictures
Run-time Object Pop-up Menu Commands
Use the
operation...
To...
If multiple tags are associated with the selected object, open the Tag Status picture of
the first associated tag, or open the Tag Control Panel picture, which lists the Tag
Status pictures of all tags associated with the selected object.
Quick
Trend
Open the Quick Trend picture of the tag(s) associated with the selected object(s). The
Quick Trend picture displays up to eight pens when multiple tags are associated with
the selected object(s).
Using the Properties Window
You can display the properties of an object with the Properties window. This window displays a two-column list
of the selected object's properties that accept data. The Properties window is modeless, meaning that you can
jump to different positions in the picture and the window will stay on your screen. This is a convenient way to
quickly read properties of several objects in your picture or a picture itself. If no object is selected, the current
picture's properties are shown in the window. See the following examples.
24
Using Key Macros
You can also display a different set of properties by selecting the object or picture from the drop-down list at the
top of the window.
To display the Properties window of an object, right-click the object and select Property Window from the popup menu. You can also access this menu by right-clicking the object in the Pictures directory in the system tree,
or by selecting Property Window from the View menu.
For more information on selecting properties, refer to the Controlling Object Properties chapter.
25
Creataing Pictures
Using the Color Box
The iFIX color box contains all the tools you need to assign colors to your objects and create customized color
schemes. The color box offers over 16 million color possibilities for use in your pictures, and can be accessed
from anywhere in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace.
There are two color boxes you can choose from depending on how you want to apply colors. The first option is
a Select Color box that lets you select fade, foreground, background, or edge colors for a specific object. This
dialog box, shown in the following figure, is accessed by right-clicking the object, pointing to Color then
choosing Fade, Foreground, Background, or Edge from the menu.
NOTE: Refer to the Setting Gradient Fill Properties section, for more information about accessing the Select
FadeColor and Select ForegroundColor dialog boxes.
The second option is the Color Selection box. This box is modeless, allowing you to select different shapes in
your picture while the dialog box remains on your screen. You can color as many objects as you like using this
box, and you can choose which property of the selected object or objects you want to modify. Additionally, you
can use a color palette to customize a color set. The Color Selection dialog box, shown in the following figure,
is accessed by clicking the Color button on the Tools toolbar (Classic view) or on the Format tab in the Styles
group (Ribbon view) or the Toolbox, if enabled.
26
Using Key Macros
NOTE: Any time you open the Select Color or Color Selection dialog box, the undo stack is removed.
For more information on applying color to your pictures, refer to the Working with Color section.
Using the Find Mouse Coordinates Tool
The Find Mouse Coordinates Tool is available to track the x,y coordinates of the mouse cursor in the iFIX
WorkSpace. This is helpful if you want to open a picture in a specific location in the WorkSpace, but do not
want to spend a lot of time guessing the coordinates of the location. This is especially useful if you are spanning
an iFIX display across multiple monitors.
In Classic view, to access the Find Mouse Coordinates Tool, click the following icon in the iFIX WorkSpace,
on the Utilities toolbar:
In Ribbon view, you may access the Find Mouse Coordinates Tool from the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts
group, in the Pictures list or from the Applications tab, in the Utilities group, in the Utilities list.
The Find Mouse Coordinates Tool appears in the WorkSpace, as shown in the following figure.
27
Creataing Pictures
To stop tracking the cursor, click anywhere in the WorkSpace. To start tracking again, click the Resume tracking
button. To copy the cursor coordinates to the clipboard, click the Copy coordinates button. After you copy the
coordinates to the clipboard, you can paste them into your OpenPicture command, for example, as the coordinates
for the top left corner of your picture.
Using the Animations Dialog Box
iFIX provides a Basic Animation dialog box, shown in the following figure, allowing you to access many
commonly used Animation Experts in one location. These Animation Experts include Color, Movement, Fill,
Click Command, and Visibility Animation Experts as well as providing a link to the Advanced Animations
dialog box. The Advanced Animations dialog box allows you to access all of the available object animations
and change properties by entering values into one of the tabbed pages.
Basic Animation Dialog Box
To access the Basic Animation dialog box, double-click on an object or select Animations from the object's
right-click menu.
You can also access the Advanced Animations dialog box by clicking the Configure button in the Basic
Animation dialog box. The Advanced Animations dialog box, shown in the following figure, allows you to
access all of the property animations available to the selected object and also provides a more detailed interface
for adding or modifying property animations.
28
Using Key Macros
Advanced Animations Dialog Box
To always open the Advanced Animations dialog box by default, clear the Always Show Basic Animation
dialog check box in the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
NOTE: Any time you open the Animations dialog box, the undo stack is removed. This is because certain
property changes take effect even if the dialog box is closed using the Cancel button.
Refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter for more information on animating objects.
29
Creataing Pictures
Using Basic Functions in Pictures
There are several functions you can perform in your picture, regardless of the objects it contains. These
functions are described in the following sections.

Showing a Picture

Refreshing a Picture

Refreshing a Thumbnail

Closing a Picture

Using the Picture Pop-up Menu

Using the Picture Properties Window

Defining the Picture Height and Width

Setting the Picture Background and Fade Color

Setting Gradient Fill Properties

Viewing Your Picture in the Run-time Environment

Upgrading the Picture to the Enhanced Coordinate System

Upgrading Hardcoded Values in Animations

Converting Button Captions

Restoring a Picture to the Logical Coordinate System

Selecting Zoom to Fit
Showing a Picture
If you have more than one picture open in the WorkSpace, you can easily view a picture that is behind another
one by doing one of the following:

Double-clicking the picture name in the system tree.

Right-clicking the picture name in the system tree and selecting Show from the pop-up menu.

Select the picture name from the Window menu.
Another effective strategy for showing multiple pictures is using the tiling and cascading functions, described in
the Tiling and Cascading Pictures section.
30
Using Key Macros
Refreshing a Picture
You can refresh a picture by right-clicking the picture name in the system tree and selecting Refresh from the
pop-up menu. You can also select Refresh from the View menu (Classic view) or from the View tab, in the
Picture group, in the View list (Ribbon view). When you refresh a picture, iFIX repaints the current picture on
the screen.
Refreshing a Thumbnail
You can refresh a thumbnail by right-clicking the picture name in the system tree and selecting Refresh
Thumbnail from the pop-up menu. When you refresh a thumbnail, iFIX saves the picture with a thumbnail (if it
did not already exist), and repaints the current thumbnail on the System Tree.
Closing a Picture
You can close a picture by right-clicking the picture name in the system tree and selecting Close from the popup menu.
Using the Picture Pop-up Menu
When creating pictures, you can display a pop-up menu for that picture by right-clicking the picture name in the
system tree, or by right-clicking any area in the picture outside of an object. The pop-up menu provides quick
access to the picture's specific properties and animations, as well as common operations you can perform within
the picture, such as selecting all objects.
The following table shows the functions that are available from the picture pop-up menu.
NOTE: Functions apply to both the Logical and Enhanced Coordinate Systems unless stated otherwise.
Picture Pop-Up Menu Functions
Use the
Operation...
To...
Animations
Display the Animations dialog box that lets you animate properties of the picture.
Undo
Cancel the previous operation. If a particular task cannot be undone, the Undo
command is unavailable after you complete the action.
Paste
Place the most recently copied object into your picture.
Select All
Select all objects in the picture window.
31
Creataing Pictures
Picture Pop-Up Menu Functions
Use the
Operation...
To...
Bring to Front
Move the selected picture to the front of the stack.
Send to Back
Move the selected picture to the back of the stack.
Space Evenly
Tile the open pictures in one of the following ways:

Horizontal

Vertical
Zoom
Change the width and height of the viewport by 50%, 150%, or 200% of the window
size, or return the viewport size to 100% of the window size. The viewport is
described in the Implementing Pictures in Your Process chapter.
Default View
Restore the original view of the picture before the window's size was changed.
NOTE: This function applies only to Logical Coordinate System pictures. This
function does not apply to Enhanced Coordinate System pictures.
Full View
Expand the window to occupy the entire client-area.
NOTE: This function applies only to Logical Coordinate System pictures. This
function does not apply to Enhanced Coordinate System pictures.
Fit Picture to
Window
Resize the picture to fit inside the picture window, if necessary.
NOTE: This function applies only to Logical Coordinate System pictures. This
function does not apply to Enhanced Coordinate System pictures.
Fit Window to
Picture
Resize the window to fit the size of the picture, if necessary.
NOTE: This function applies only to Logical Coordinate System pictures. This
function does not apply to Enhanced Coordinate System pictures.
Update Window
Location
32
Preserve the current view of the picture so that, after being saved, it will look exactly
the same way it did on the screen as when you closed it.
Using Key Macros
Picture Pop-Up Menu Functions
Use the
Operation...
To...
Refresh
Repaint the current picture in the picture window.
KeyMacros
Open the Key Macro Editor, which allows you to view and edit key macros.
Property Window
Display the Properties window for the current picture.
Picture
Display the Edit Picture dialog box, which allows you to change window properties.
Edit Script
Open the Visual Basic Editor, which allows you to edit Visual Basic scripts.
Enable Scripts
Reference all selected objects into Visual Basic scripts.
NOTE: The pop-up menu for pictures differs somewhat from the object pop-up menu. Refer to the Using the
Object Pop-up Menu section for more information on the object pop-up menu.
Using the Picture Properties Window
To display the Properties window of a picture, right-click the picture name in the system tree and select
Property Window from the pop-up menu. For more information on Properties, refer to the Controlling Object
Properties chapter.
Defining the Picture Height and Width
You can define the height and width of the window in your picture using the Edit Picture dialog box.
The window dimensions are specified as percentages. For more information on implementing pictures, see the
Implementing Pictures in Your Process section.
To define the picture height and width:
1.
Right click the picture name in the system tree.
2.
Select Picture from the pop-up menu.
-OrIn Classic view, select Picture from the Edit menu.
-Or-
33
Creataing Pictures
In Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, in the Properties list, click Picture.
3.
In the Properties section, type in the new Window Width or Window Height as percentages.
4.
Click on the Apply button.
5.
View the picture. Make any additional changes as you wish.
6.
When you do not want to make any more changes, click the OK button to save the picture.
The Picture Preferences dialog box contains the default picture preferences that apply to newly created pictures.
Setting the Picture Background and Fade Colors
You can set the background and fade colors of your picture using an unlimited selection of colors. This is useful
for customizing your screens to complement multi-colored objects in your picture and to give your pictures a
three-dimensional look. The default background and fade colors are displayed in the Picture Preferences dialog
box when you create a new picture. You can change the default colors by clicking the Background Color or
Fade Color buttons and choosing a color from the Select Color dialog box.
For more information on using color in your pictures, refer to the Working with Color section.
Setting Gradient Fill Properties
The gradient fill features allow you to illustrate your real-world objects, like tanks and pipes, with a threedimensional look. A gradient fill can also be used for the picture itself. The gradient fill is composed of fade
color, fade type, blend percentage of fade color, and gradient angle of fade color. For more information about
applying fade color, see Setting the Picture Background and Fade Colors and Working with Color.
Like the behavior of other fill styles, you can animate the gradient effect with the shape; for example, rotate,
scale, fill, and translate with the shape; however, you cannot animate gradient effects in your picture.
You can right-click an object and apply the individual gradient fill properties after you have set the fill style to
Gradient. You can also apply the properties all at once using the gradient preview dialog box. The gradient
preview dialog box for shapes contains the tools you need to preview and apply gradient fill properties.
The type of object you select determines the properties available for your use. For example, pipe objects have a
different gradient preview dialog box where the properties specific to pipe objects are available, as well as
gradient fill properties. For other shapes, only gradient fill properties are available.
Clicking the Foreground or Fade color buttons opens the Select Color box where you can choose the colors you
want to apply to your shape or pipe. For more information about choosing colors for your shapes, refer to Using
the Color Box.
When you choose Fade from the Color pop-up menu on a shape object, the Gradient preview tab of the Select
FadeColor dialog box appears. The fields on this dialog box allow you to apply gradient fill properties to the
object. These fields are available only when you select a single shape object. If you select multiple objects, you
can only choose a color from the Select Color dialog box.
34
Using Key Macros
Shape Gradient Preview Dialog Box
When you choose Fade from the Color pop-up menu on a pipe object, the Gradient preview tab of the Select
FadeColor dialog box appears. The fields on this dialog box allow you to apply pipe and gradient fill properties
to the pipe object.
Pipe Gradient Preview Dialog Box
These dialog boxes offer a central place to apply gradient fill properties rather than making individual changes
using the right-click pop-up menu. However, you cannot make gradient fill changes to multiple shape objects.
35
Creataing Pictures
For more information about making changes to multiple pipe objects, refer to Modifying Pipe Characteristics.
The following sections describe the different gradient fill features that you can apply to your shape objects.
Fade Type
Fade type blends the fade color with the foreground and background colors to produce the three-dimensional
appearance in the shape. You can apply the following fade types to your objects and pictures:
Fade Type
Description
Linear
The foreground color fades to the fade color from one end of the shape to the other.
Reflected
The foreground color converges to the fade color in the center of the shape in a linear
fashion.
NOTE: This fade type may not display in long, narrow rectangular shapes.
Radial
The foreground color is darkest around the edges and recedes radially towards the
center.
Concentric
The foreground color is darkest along the edges and center with a concentric band of
fade color in between.
Linear
36
Reflected
Using Key Macros
Radial
Concentric
Blend Percentage of Fade Color
When you use gradient fill, you can change the way colors are mixed to achieve different effects. The blend
percentage is the amount of fade color that is applied to the fade type. The higher the percentage, the more fade
color is visible. The following diagrams show different blend percentages.
20% Blend
50% Blend
75% Blend
Gradient Angle of Fade Color
Gradient angle is the angle, in degrees, of the gradient brush. The default gradient angle is 0° and is always on
the right side of the shape. You can apply as precise an angle as you need using the Gradient Angle slider.
37
Creataing Pictures
0° Angle
90° Angle
180° Angle
135° Angle
270° Angle
Viewing Your Picture in the Run-time Environment
To view a picture, you do not have to leave the application you are in or shut anything down. You can switch
environments directly from the WorkSpace with the click of the mouse. To view your picture, use one of the
following methods:

Click the Switch to Run button on the Standard toolbar (Classic view).

Click Switch to Run in the WorkSpace group on the Home tab (Ribbon view).

Press CTRL+W on your keyboard.
You can also control other preferences at run-time using the User Preferences dialog box. Refer to the Using the
Proficy iFIX WorkSpace chapter of the Understanding iFIX manual for more information on iFIX WorkSpace
preferences and on switching environments.
38
Using Key Macros
Upgrading Pictures to Enhanced Coordinates
The Enhanced Coordinate System allows you to upgrade one or more pictures (or Dynamo Sets) created with
the Logical Coordinate System.
IMPORTANT:
It is recommended to upgrade your pictures in groups, verifying the upgrade along the way to ensure
that pictures are upgrading in accordance with your expectations. Also, because the upgrade process
is resource intensive, it is recommended to refrain from other CPU intensive tasks during the time of
upgrade.
When using constant numeric values in scripting for object dimension and position, you may need to
edit the script to implement the Enhanced Coordinate System. For more information, refer to the
Upgrading Hardcoded Values in Animations section.
If your iFIX project is configured in a path other than the LOCAL directory in the SCU or if you have
multiple SCUs in different locations (for example, Terminal Services or iPower setup), you must
upgrade the iFIX default files. When you upgrade from iFIX 5.5 or earlier with this scenario, the listed
new Utility toolbar options related to the Enhanced Coordinate System will not appear on your screen
or work properly. To fix this situation, first upgrade to iFIX 5.8 and then follow the directions to
upgrade the iFIX default files.
NOTE: This procedure must be performed for every project.
1.
Start the SCU.
2.
On the Configure menu, click Paths to open the Path Configuration dialog box to make your
changes.
3.
Click Change Project. A message box appears asking if you want to generate the default iFIX
files to the project.
4.
Click Yes and then OK.
Before You Upgrade the Picture
Prior to upgrading the picture (or Dynamo Set) to the Enhanced Coordinate System, open the picture in the
screen resolution in which the picture was created or displayed (with the Logical Coordinate System). Make
sure that the picture opens without errors and displays as desired before you start the upgrade process. The
picture you view on the screen resolution with the Logical Coordinate System is exactly what will be upgraded
to the Enhanced Coordinate System; that is, if the picture contains a scaling issue, that issue is converted to the
Enhanced Coordinate System. Fix any errors that display when opening the picture or Dynamo Set, such as
those for missing references, as this will prevent the picture or Dynamo Set from upgrading successfully. When
you are satisfied with the picture, continue with the upgrade process.
To upgrade a picture:
1.
Close all pictures and Dynamo Sets. A warning message appears when a picture or Dynamo Set is
open.
39
Creataing Pictures
2.
In Classic view, on the Utilities toolbar, click the Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates
icon.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Applications tab, in the Utilities menu, click Upgrade Files to Enhanced
Coordinates.
The Upgrade Pictures to Screen Independent Enhanced Coordinates dialog box appears with the
Upgrade Files option selected.
A list of eligible files from the default folder displays in the Select Files window depending on the File
Type selected.
3.
Select the File Type you wish to display in the Select Files window.
4.
To display files from a different directory,in the Pictures and Dynamos Set Folder Path window
specify the new directory. Then, select the Refresh File List button. You can also browse and select an
available folder by using the Browse button followed by the Refresh Files List button.
5.
Select the appropriate file(s) you wish to upgrade from the Select Files window. The Upgrade button
becomes enabled.
6.
Press the Upgrade button. This operation backs up the files selected for upgrading, and then upgrades
the files. The upgraded files are removed from the Select Files list when the upgrade is completed.
7.
Confirm that the picture was upgraded by using the Properties Window to examine the
EnhancedCoordinates property for that picture (where "True" indicates the file was upgraded
successfully), or by checking the picture or Dynamo icon in the system tree.
To cancel the upgrade while it is in progress, click the Cancel button. Files that were upgraded remain
upgraded. Files that were to be upgraded are not upgraded.
For information on restoring upgraded files, refer to the Restoring a Picture to the Logical Coordinate System
section.
After You Upgrade the Picture
Make sure all the objects within the picture are located at the right positions and that the picture is a valid size.
In some cases, upgraded pictures may contain objects that reside outside of the document extents. After
upgrading these pictures, the objects may not display correctly when viewing the picture in Zoom to Fit in the
Enhanced Coordinate System. If this occurs, modify the document extents by editing the picture properties
DocumentHeightEx and DocumentWidthEx.
The Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinate expert checks the position of each object in the picture as it is
upgraded. When an object resides outside of the document extents, a message is written to the log file,
UpgradeCoordinatesLog_<date time>, which recommends new settings for these properties. The log file resides
in the current project’s configured Alarm (ALM) folder. A new log file is created each time an upgrade is run.
A sample log file for an upgrade that requires modifications is as follows:
2013_8_29 23_14_49 iFIX Enhanced Coordinates Upgrade Expert
40
Using Key Macros
5.8.10367.0Copyright(c) 2013, GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
2013_8_29 23_14_49 Upgrade started Thursday, August 29, 2013 2:14:49 PM.
2013_8_29 23_14_49 Upgrade Picture Path: C:\PROGRAM FILES (X86)\PROFICY\PROFICY
IFIX\PIC\
2013_8_29 23_14_49 Some upgraded objects in file TestPicture3 are outside of
the new document extents and may not be visible. To fix this:
2013_8_29 23_14_49
Set the value of DocumentHeightEx in the property
window to be greater than or equal to 452.700000.
2013_8_29 23_14_49
Set the value of DocumentWidthEx in the property
window to be greater than or equal to 616.500000.
2013_8_29 23_14_52 Upgrade completed Thursday, August 29, 2013 2:14:52 PM.
Closing the log file.
A sample log file for an upgrade that does not require changes is as follows:
2013_8_29 23_20_54 iFIX Enhanced Coordinates Upgrade Expert 5.8.10367.0
Copyright(c) 2013, GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2013_8_29 23_20_54 Upgrade started Thursday, August 29, 2013 2:20:54 PM.
2013_8_29 23_20_54 Upgrade Picture Path: C:\PROGRAM FILES (X86)\PROFICY\PROFICY
IFIX\PIC\
2013_8_29 23_20_58 Upgrade completed Thursday, August 29, 2013 2:20:58 PM.
Closing the log file.
To verify the picture upgraded correctly:
1.
Check the log files to determine if changes need to be made to the picture(s) properties in the
Properties window. The log file (UpgradeCoordinatesLog_201x_x_xx xx_xx_xx) resides in the current
project's configured ALM folder. This log file name contains the current date and time when the
Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinate expert was run.
2.
Examine the log files to determine if the picture(s) needs to be changed.
3.
If necessary, modify the document extents (DocumentHeightEx and DocumentWidthEx) so that
window sizes are calculated correctly.
4.
Verify that the picture displays correctly.
Upgrading Hardcoded Values in Animations

Position (horizontal/vertical) and dimension (height/width) properties for an animation within a picture
that was upgraded to the Enhanced Coordinate System may not work as expected when you have
hardcoded values that are either:
41
Creataing Pictures

Used in the Expression Builder for the position and dimensions animation of objects.

Assigned via scripts for the position and dimensions of objects.
To upgrade the animation to work correctly, you must modify the animation with valid values for the Enhanced
Coordinate System.
To modify the animation, perform one of the following:

Change the hardcoded value in the Expression Editor to reflect the Enhanced Coordinates value in
postscript points.
Place a sample script into the same picture that needs the hardcoded values updated. For example, the
following sample script contains a value of 10 for the horizontal position:
Private Sub Rectl_Edit()
MsgBox Me.ConvertToEnhanced Coordinates (10, True)
EndSub
Then, replace the value in the Expression Editor for your animation with the value that displays in the
message box.
NOTE: The script to derive the Enhanced Coordinate value must be placed under the same picture
that requires the edits for the animation.

Place Me.ConvertToEnhancedCoordinates( ) around the hardcoded value in a script.
For more information, see the example in the ConvertToEnhancedCoordinates Method Example
section in the iFIX Automation Reference e-book.
Converting Button Captions
The Button Caption Converter allows you to scale one or more button captions (text) in an active picture. When
converted, the caption text automatically scales to the resolution of the target screen and sits directly on top of
the command button as an overlay.
NOTE: If you have a button with long caption strings and a button caption appears in multiple lines with the
WordWrap property enabled, edit the button caption by entering a new line (Shift-Enter) where you want the
string to wrap. Then, convert the Button Caption. The Button Caption Converter should make the button and
text for multiple lines appear as you desire.
Before you Convert a Button Caption
After you upgrade a picture to use Enhanced Coordinates and before you convert a button caption, make sure all
the objects within the picture are located at the right positions and that the picture is a valid size. In some cases,
upgraded pictures may contain objects that reside outside of the document extents. After upgrading these
pictures to use Enhanced Coordinates, the objects may not display correctly when viewing the picture with
Zoom to Fit. If this occurs, modify the document extents by editing the picture properties DocumentHeightEx
42
Using Key Macros
and DocumentWidthEx. For a description of the DocumentHeightEx and DocumentWidthEx properties, refer to
the DocumentHeightEx and DocumentWidthEx sections in the iFIX Automation Reference e-book.
The upgrade expert checks the position of each object in the picture as it is upgraded. When an object resides
outside of the document extents, a message is written to the log file, UpgradeCoordinatesLog_<date time>,
which recommends new settings for these properties. The log file resides in the current project's configured
Alarms path folder. A new log file is created each time an upgrade is run. For log file examples, see the
information in the Upgrading a Picture to Enhanced Coordinates section.
IMPORTANT: If you choose to relocate the command button caption within the picture, you must move both
the original command button and the newly created overlay together. Otherwise, the exact placement the
overlay on top of the command button is lost. If you choose to modify any button property or caption, you must
first edit the button object and then convert the button object again.
To convert a selected button caption:
1.
Open the picture that contains the button caption you wish to convert.
2.
Select a button object to convert.
3.
In Classic view, click on the Convert a Selected Button's Caption icon
in the Utilities toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Applications tab select the Utilities button. From the Utilities drop-down
menu, select Convert a Selected Button's Caption.
The Button Caption is converted and scales to Zoom to Fit view.
4.
Verify that the button caption was converted by viewing the graphic with the converted text.
To convert multiple button captions:
1.
Open the picture that contains the button captions you wish to convert.
2.
In Classic view, click on the Multiple Button Caption Converter Expert icon
in the Utilities toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Applications tab select the Utilities button. From the Utilities drop-down
menu, select Multiple Button Caption Converter Expert.
The Button Caption Converter dialog box appears. A listing of button captions eligible for conversion
display in the "Push button found in picture' dialog box.
3.
From the list of eligible objects, select the button object you wish to convert. You can confirm that the
button is selected by looking in the picture, or clicking on "Find Next" to confirm the conversion of
each button object individually.
4.
Click the Convert Button Caption button. The selected button object is converted.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4, or click 'Convert All' to convert all the button objects.
43
Creataing Pictures
6.
Verify that the button captions were converted by viewing the graphic with the converted text.
NOTES:

When you need to modify the button caption, color, animations, move or delete groups, first
edit the button object and then convert the button object.

The number of buttons selected during the conversion process may impact the picture loading
time. For efficient picture loading, it is recommended to minimize the number of button
conversions.

If you want to change the button Foreground and Background color properties from the
default, select the color from the system default color selection in the Property Window, or
from the Advanced Animation dialog box.

WordWrap properties are not applied. Instead, you must insert a CR (Shirt-Enter) to make a
caption to be multiple lines in the button before the conversion.
Restoring a Picture to the Logical Coordinate System
You can restore an upgraded Enhanced Coordinate System picture to a Logical Coordinate System picture.
Prior to upgrading to the Enhanced Coordinate System, pictures are backed-up to a Backup directory for this
purpose.
NOTE: Make sure the picture file is closed both locally and remotely before you attempt to restore a picture.
Picture files that are open in a local or a remote session are not eligible for restoration, and will not display in
the Select Files window until the picture is closed.
To restore a picture to the Logical Coordinate System:
1.
Close all pictures and Dynamo Sets. A warning message appears when there are files open and need to
be closed before you can proceed.
2.
In Classic view, on the Utilities toolbar, click the Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates
icon.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Applications tab, in the Utilities drop-down menu, click Upgrade File to
Enhanced Coordinates.
The Upgrade Pictures to Screen Independent Enhanced Coordinates dialog box appears with the
Upgrade Files option selected. A list of eligible files from the default folder display in the Select Files
window (depending on the File Type selected).
44
3.
Select the Restore Files from Backup option. A list of eligible files from the Backup directory display.
4.
To display files in a different directory, specify the new directory in the Pictures and Dynamos Set
Folder Path window. Then, select the Refresh File List button. You can also browse and select an
alternate folder by using the Browse button followed by the Refresh Files List button.
5.
Select the appropriate file(s) from the Select Files window. The Restore Files button becomes enabled.
Using Key Macros
6.
Click the Restore Files button. This restores the file(s) to the Logical Coordinate System. The restored
files are removed from the Select Files list when the operation completes.
7.
Confirm that the picture was restored by using the Property Window to examine the
EnhancedCoordinates property for the picture. (False - indicates the file was restored to the Logical
Coordinate System successfully.)
Selecting Zoom to Fit
Zoom to Fit is an Enhanced Coordinate System option that automatically resizes the picture area to fit the entire
window and also suppresses scroll bars. The Zoom to Fit option is only for viewing pictures and does not allow
you to edit the picture.
NOTES:

When using Zoom to Fit in Configuration mode, edits to the file are disabled and grids are also
disabled.

When using Zoom to Fit on a picture with a lower resolution that was converted to the Enhanced
Coordinate System, be sure to verify that all the objects are visible. Check the height and width of the
picture in run mode. If all the objects are not visible, change the height and width of the picture to see
all the objects. Then, Save the picture. By default Zoom to Fit is enabled in run mode. To disable
Zoom to Fit, press Ctrl+B. All objects should appear in the picture.
To select Zoom to Fit to view a picture:
1.
Open the picture you want to use for Zoom to Fit.
2.
In Classic view, select the Windows menu and then Zoom to Fit — or press Ctrl+B.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the View tab and in the Zoom group, click Zoom to Fit — or press Ctrl+B.
The Workspace displays a message box to inform you that:
3.

Zoom to Fit is view only and edits are disabled.

Turn Zoom to Fit off (Ctrl+B) to enable editing.
Click OK to continue.
The picture automatically scales to fit the entire window and suppresses the scroll bars.
A small toolbar appears, which you can select to close Zoom to Fit, or you can enter Ctrl+B to toggle
Zoom to Fit.
45
Creataing Pictures
Performing Advanced Functions in Pictures
iFIX gives you complete control of your pictures by allowing you to easily perform advanced procedures. The
sections that follow introduce some of the functions that are available, many of which are accessible from the
picture pop-up menu. The Implementing Pictures in Your Process chapter expands on these concepts and details
additional features for controlling how your pictures look.

Sharing Picture Files

Replacing a Picture

Changing the Picture View

Tiling and Cascading Pictures

Creating Pictures without Title bars
Sharing Picture Files
iFIX lets you share picture files so that other users can access pictures on a different system. You can do
this by placing the files on a file server and sharing a path. For more information on sharing files, refer to
the Sharing Replacing a Picture Files section in the Understanding iFIX manual.
To replace a picture with another picture, use the Replace Picture Expert, located on the Experts toolbar
(Classic view) or on the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts area, click Tasks/Experts (Ribbon view). This Expert
allows you to close a picture and replace it with another picture in both the configuration and run-time
environments. If desired, you can specify an alias to the picture that is automatically assigned as the new picture
name. For more information on Experts, refer to the Using Process Assistants to Expedite Pictures chapter.
Changing the Picture View
By giving you control of the window, iFIX makes it easy to change a picture's magnification. There are several
different views you can create using the picture pop-up menu. These include:

Zoom

Default View

Full View

Fit Picture to Window

Fit Window to Picture

Zoom to Fit
Refer to the Controlling a Picture's Magnification section for more information on specifying viewing options.
46
Using Key Macros
Tiling and Cascading Pictures
As you create and modify pictures, you may want to have several pictures open at once. Depending on the size
and position of the pictures opened, this can result in one or more pictures hidden behind the top picture.
Although you can use the Show function to switch from one to another, or manually move or resize a picture,
you may want to view more than one at a time. A fast, easy way to arrange multiple pictures is to tile or cascade
them using the Window menu. (Both Tile and Cascade are found on the View tab in ribbon view.)
When you tile two or more pictures, iFIX arranges each picture so that they do not overlap and resizes each
window so that all the pictures fit in the available client area. You can tile pictures horizontally or vertically. To
do this select Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical from the Window menu. Both methods of tiling are shown in the
following figures.
Tiling Horizontally
47
Creataing Pictures
Tiling Vertically
You can open as many pictures as you want, limited only by the amount of memory in your computer.
When you cascade two or more pictures, the pictures are staggered and resized equally so that you can select
each picture by its title bar. This is illustrated in the following figure. To cascade pictures, select Cascade from
the Window menu.
Cascading Pictures
48
Using Key Macros
Creating Pictures without Title bars
You can also create pictures with no title bars. This is a particularly helpful feature when you want to view your
pictures as is in your operator display. The following figure illustrates a picture without a title bar.
Picture without a Title bar
You cannot tile or cascade a picture without a title bar.
If you want to create a full screen picture without a title bar make sure that you deselect the Title bar check box.
To create a full screen picture without a title bar:
1.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
2.
Click the Picture Preferences tab.
3.
Deselect the Titlebar check box.
4.
Click OK.
NOTE: If you intend to autoscale pictures created without titlebars, the picture must be started titleless.
There are many additional style options for the picture window. For more information on these window
properties, refer to the Planning Your Pictures section.
Overview Checklist
The list below describes the tasks to create a picture.
49
Creataing Pictures
To create a picture:
1.
In Classic view, on the Standard toolbar, click the New Picture button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
2.
Using the Shapes toolbar, add objects to the picture. In Ribbon view you may also add objects form the
Insert tab from the Shapes group. If you want to use a pre-configured object, add a Dynamo. If you
want to attach a script to the object, run an Expert.
3.
Using the Animations dialog box, modify or animate the object's properties.
4.
If desired, write an event-based script for your pictures and objects.
5.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click Switch to Run to view your picture in the run-time
environment.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Run.
6.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click Switch to Configure to switch back to the
configuration environment.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Configure.
How Do I...
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with pictures:
50

Changing Your Window Size

Setting the Fade Type of a Picture

Setting the Gradient Angle of a Picture's Fade Type

Zooming In and Out of Pictures

Updating the Window Location

View All Thumbnails

Enabling or Disabling Window Properties

Resolving Pictures

Saving Thumbnails for Previously Created Pictures or Dynamo Sets

Importing Windows Metafiles

Assigning Pictures to a Security Area

Defining the Attributes of a Custom Picture
Using Key Macros

Using Specified Dimensions

Modifying Picture Properties

Using the Dimensions of an Existing Picture

Setting the Options on the WorkSpace Appearance Page

Tracking Cursor Coordinates

Using the Grid

Upgrade Pictures to the Enhanced Coordinate System

Convert Button Captions

Restore Pictures to the Logical Coordinate System
Changing Your Window Size
The window size is always defined as a percentage of the screen. By sizing a window by the percentage of the
screen, iFIX scales your picture while maintaining its coordinate system and displays the picture with its
original aspects regardless of the monitor's resolution on which it is viewed. Both the Window Width and
Window Height must be within 0-100 percent.
To change your window size:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Edit menu, click Picture.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Properties, and then click Picture.
2.
In the Window Width field, enter a picture width as a percentage.
NOTE: Be careful when entering a percentage as its meaning is different for each coordinate system.
For more information on percentages for both coordinate systems, refer to the Controlling a Picture's
Magnification section.
3.
In the Window Height field, enter a picture height as a percentage.
4.
Click the Apply button to view the change.
5.
Continue to adjust the percentages and apply the changes until you have the picture as you want it to
be.
6.
Click the OK button to save the window settings.
Setting the Fade Type of a Picture
To set the fade type of a picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Edit menu, click Picture.
51
Creataing Pictures
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Properties, and then click Picture.
2.
Select the Gradient enabled check box and then select the fade type you want to apply to the gradient.
NOTE: The Gradient enabled check box is automatically selected in this dialog box if it has been
selected in the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Setting the Gradient Angle of a Picture's Fade Type
To set the gradient angle of a picture's fade type:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Edit menu, click Picture.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Properties, and then click Picture.
2.
Select the Gradient enabled check box and then select the fade type you want to apply to the gradient.
3.
Move the Gradient Angle slider to the angle you want applied to the fade type.
Zooming In and Out of Pictures
To zoom in and out of a picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click any area in the picture outside of an object, point to Zoom and
choose the desired magnification.
2.
To zoom out, repeat step 1.
Updating the Window Location
To update the window location:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, adjust the picture window size and location.
2.
Right-click any area in the picture outside of an object and choose Update Window Location.
3.
Save the picture. When you open the picture later, or switch back to the configuration environment
after viewing it at run-time, the picture will appear with the same size and location you set in step 1.
Viewing all Picture and Dynamo Set Thumbnails at Once
To view all picture and Dynamo set thumbnails at once:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Standard toolbar, click the Open Picture Folder button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group click Open Picture Folder.
52
Using Key Macros
2.
Select the folder that contains your iFIX pictures.
NOTE: The PIC folder is the default folder location.
3.
Click OK. A window opens that displays thumbnails, if they exist, for all pictures and dynamo sets.
Enabling or Disabling Window Properties
To enable or disable a window property:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Edit menu, click Picture.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Properties, and then click Picture.
2.
Select or clear one or more check boxes corresponding to the window properties you want to enable or
disable.
Resolving Pictures
To resolve a picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Utilities toolbar, click the Resolve Files button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Utilities, and then click Resolve
Files.
2.
In the File Types area, select the Pictures check box.
3.
In the Directories area, verify that your picture directory is correct. If not, enter the correct path in the
Pictures field.
4.
In the Resolve Files area, select the picture file you want to resolve. To select every file in the list,
click Select All.
5.
Click the Update Picture Files button.
Saving Thumbnails with Previously Created Pictures or Dynamo Sets
To save thumbnails with a picture or Dynamo set:
NOTE: You will not be able to view thumbnails if you are using Windows Vista and the Vista Basic Theme for
your display.
1.
In Classic view, the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Utilities toolbar, click the Save Files With Thumbnail
Preference button.
-Or-
53
Creataing Pictures
In Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Utilities, and then click Save Files
With Thumbnail Preference.
2.
In the File Types area, select the Pictures and/or Dynamo Sets check box.
3.
In the Directories area, verify that your directory is correct. If not, enter the correct path in the
directory field.
4.
In the Save Files With area, select the picture or dynamo file you want to save. To select every file in
the list, click Select All.
5.
Click OK.
Importing Windows Metafiles
To import a Windows Metafile:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the Insert menu, select Bitmap.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects Links, and then click
Bitmap.
2.
In the Files of type field, select Win Metafile (*.wmf) and select the folder where the file resides.
3.
Click Open.
TIP: If you want to insert a Windows Metafile (WMF) as a grouped object and not as a flat Bitmap, do not
import it directly. Instead, insert the WMF picture into Microsoft Excel using the Insert menu. Right-click the
picture and select Edit Picture. A message box appears requesting that you convert the picture to a Microsoft
drawing object. Click Yes, and then copy the converted object from Excel. In the iFIX WorkSpace, and select
Paste > Paste Special. From the Paste Special dialog box, select Enhanced Metafile and click OK. The grouped
object should now appear in your picture.
Assigning Pictures to a Security Area
To assign a picture to a security area:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, open the picture you want to modify.
2.
In Classic view, from the View menu, select Property Window.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the View tab, in the Window group, click Properties.
3.
54
In the Security Area field, enter the security area you want to use.
Using Key Macros
Defining the Attributes of a Custom Picture
To define the attributes of a custom picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, run the Create Picture Wizard and create a custom picture.
2.
Proceed through the wizard until you reach the Define Custom Picture Attributes page.
3.
Select or clear the check boxes for the following attributes:
4.

Show Title Bar – Adds a title bar to your picture.

Show System Menu – Adds system menus to your picture.

Resizable – Adds sizing borders to the picture.

Always on Top – Configures the window so that it is always on top when you open it.

Allow this picture to be cached – Configures the window so that when it is opened and
closed it is held in memory and, when reopened, is read from memory.
Click the Background Color button to set the actual background color of the picture. This color appears
in the preview pane.
Using Specified Dimensions
To use specified dimensions:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, run the Create Picture Wizard and create a custom picture.
2.
Proceed through the wizard until you reach the Define Custom Picture page.
3.
Select this option to enter specific dimensions for your custom picture.
4.
You must enter all four dimensions: Top, Width, Left, and Height.
5.
Select Percentage Units or Pixel Units. The default is set from the previous time the wizard was run
and saved.
Modifying Picture Properties
To modify the properties of a picture:

In the iFIX WorkSpace system tree, right-click on a picture and choose Picture. The Edit Picture dialog
box appears. In the Edit Picture dialog box, you can apply the following modifications to the picture:

Change the window size

Change the window styles

Set the gradient and fade type

Set the background color
55
Creataing Pictures

Set the fade color

Set the blend percentage

Set the gradient angle

Disable picture caching
To change the window size:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, enter a percentage in the Window Width and Window Height fields.
To change window styles:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, select the check box of the Window Style you want to enable. Use the
What's This? help for information on each window style.
To set the gradient and fade type for a picture:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, select the Gradient enabled check box and then select the fade type you
want to apply to the picture.
To set the background color of a picture:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, click the Background Color button and select the color you want from the
Select BackgroundColor dialog box.
To set the fade color for a picture:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, click the Fade Color button and select the color you want from the Select
FadeColor dialog box.
To set the blend percentage of the fade color:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, move the Blend slider to the percentage you want applied to the fade
color.
To set the gradient angle of the fade type:

In the Edit Picture dialog box, move the Gradient Angle slider to the angle you want applied to the fade
type.
To disable picture caching for this picture:

56
In the Edit Picture dialog box, click the Disable caching for this picture check box. For more
information on picture caching, refer to the Creating Pictures manual.
Using Key Macros
Using the Dimensions of an Existing Picture
To use dimensions of an existing picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, run the Create Picture Wizard and create a custom picture.
2.
Proceed through the wizard until you reach the Define Custom Picture page.
3.
Select the Use Dimensions of Existing Picture option to copy the dimensions from another picture.
4.
Click the Browse (...) button to browse existing .GRF files, beginning at your default iFIX pictures
directory. If you enter a filename directly into the field, the filename is checked for existence and
validity.
NOTE: The existing picture should be able to fit without scroll bars in the work area of the WorkSpace
in configure mode. If the existing picture is larger than the work area of the WorkSpace in configure
mode, the Create Picture wizard will create a new picture that is the size of the work area in configure
mode, not the size of the existing picture in run mode.
Setting the Options on the Workspace Appearance Page
To set the options on the WorkSpace Appearance page:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, click the New Picture button on the toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
2.
Select either Create Picture from a Predefined Configuration, or Create a Custom Picture.
3.
Select the Show WorkSpace Appearance Page check box and click Next.
4.
Select the options you want to set:

WorkSpace Full Screen in Run Mode – When you select this option, the WorkSpace hides
its title bar, menu bar, and status bar in the run environment. If you clear this option, you can
select any of the other options on the page.

Show WorkSpace Title Bar – Displays the title bar across the top of the screen in run mode.

Show WorkSpace Menu Bar – This is available only if Show WorkSpace Title Bar is
enabled. Select this option to display the menu bar across the screen under the title bar in run
mode.

Show Status Bar – Displays the status bar across the bottom of the screen in run mode.
The preview pane reflects the currently selected WorkSpace options. Changing these options affects
existing pictures.
57
Creataing Pictures
Tracking Cursor Coordinates
To track mouse cursor coordinates:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Utilities toolbar, click the Find Mouse Coordinates
button
.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Applications tab, in the Utilities group, click Utilities, and then click Find
Mouse Coordinates.
2.
Drag the mouse to the location you want to find the coordinates for. As you move the mouse, the
coordinates change in the Find Mouse Coordinates dialog box.
3.
When the mouse cursor is in the location you want, click in the WorkSpace, and then click the Copy
coordinates button to copy the cursor coordinates to the clipboard.
To stop tracking the cursor, click anywhere in the WorkSpace. To start tracking again, click the
Resume tracking button.
Using the Grid
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with the grid feature:

Displaying the Grid

Disabling the Grid

Snapping an Object to a Grid Point

Changing the Grid Spacing

Enabling Grids for All Future Pictures
Displaying the Grid
To display the grid:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Format menu, select Grid Settings.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Grid, and then click Grid Settings.
2.
58
Select the Show the Grid check box and click OK.
Using Key Macros
Disabling the Grid
To disable the grid:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Format menu, select Grid Settings.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Grid, and then click Grid Settings.
2.
Clear the Show the Grid check box and click OK.
Snapping an Object to a Grid Point
To snap an object to a grid point:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object(s) you want to snap to a grid point.
2.
In Classic view, on the Format menu, select Snap Objects to Grid.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Grid, and then click Snap Objects to
Grid.
Changing the Grid Spacing
To change the spacing of the grid:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Format menu, select Grid Settings.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Grid, and then click Grid Settings.
2.
In the Grid Interval field, enter the desired spacing for the grid, in pixels.
Enabling Grids for All Future Pictures
To enable grids for all future pictures:
1.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, select User Preferences and click the Picture Preferences
tab.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
2.
In the Window Properties area, select the Grid Enabled check box.
59
Creataing Pictures
3.
In the Properties area, enter a value in the Grid Interval field. The value must be entered in pixels.
NOTES:

When zooming in and out of pictures, grids may not appear in the picture properly.

When using Zoom to Fit in Configuration mode, grids are disabled.
Implementing Pictures in Your Process
This chapter presents several picture development strategies using iFIX. Included in the chapter are ways to
plan, develop, and use pictures to satisfy process requirements, and design tips to help you take full advantage
of iFIX. The chapter begins with a comprehensive discussion of how pictures are constructed.

What Makes Up Your Picture

Planning Your Pictures

Designing Your Pictures

Using the Create Picture Wizard

Working with Other Applications

Optimizing Picture Performance

Using the Picture Converter Utility

Using Picture Caching

Making Changes to Pictures at Runtime
To expedite the process of creating pictures and groups of pictures, you can use the Create Picture wizard. This
wizard allows you to configure the size, location, and properties of your pictures. You can also use and create
predefined configurations of pictures. For more information on the Create Picture wizard, refer to the Using the
Create Picture Wizard section.
What Makes Up Your Picture
A picture consists of the following components:
60

Document

Viewport

Window
Using Key Macros
The Document
A picture is a document object. When you open a new picture in iFIX, you create a document. The document is
the ActiveX container for your iFIX picture. Look at the document as the entire landscape of your picture. The
document is created using either the Logical or Enhanced Coordinate Systems. Only pictures created in releases
earlier than iFIX 5.8 use the Logical Coordinate system. Pictures created in iFIX 5.8 or later, or pictures from
earlier releases that have been upgraded will use Enhanced Coordinates.
Logical Coordinate System
To understand what this means, let's go back to the discussion of object-oriented graphics in the Getting Started
section. This section discussed how iFIX uses object-oriented, rather than pixel-based, graphics. The iFIX
picture sizing methodology works in a similar way. A Logical Coordinate System picture size means that your
document size is based on logical units, not pixels. The number of this unit of measurement is arbitrary; that is,
you can use any number of logical units you want. iFIX makes this possible by calculating a one-to-one
relationship between the pixel size of your monitor and the logical units of your document, while maintaining
the dpi (dots per inch) ratio of your monitor.
For example, a standard VGA monitor consists of 640x480 pixels. In iFIX, the default size of your picture,
viewed with this monitor, is not 640x480. Rather, it is 100x75 (logical units), as illustrated in the following
calculation.
Autoscaling
An iFIX document that uses the Logical Coordinate System establishes the logical-units-to-pixels ratio when
you create a new picture, and automatically adjusts the ratio when you change the resolution of your screen.
This way, your picture appears to scale no matter what monitor you view it on. When you make any changes to
the document, viewport, or window size, iFIX maintains the 4:3 ratio so that your objects maintain a consistent
size on your screen.
Enhanced Coordinate System
With the Enhanced Coordinate System, your document size is based on postscript points, not logical units. The
number of this unit of measurement is arbitrary; that is, you can use any number of postscript points you want.
Since the document size is based on the resolution of the screen on which the picture is created, you are
recommended to develop a document using the screen resolution of the monitor on which the picture is to be
viewed when implemented. (For example, to create a document for a screen with 1920x1080 resolution, you
must create your pictures using a computer with a screen resolution of 1920x1080.)
Once created, the document size and shape remains constant when used on a screen with a different resolution.
In addition, iFIX allows you to upgrade documents created with the Logical Coordinate System to the Enhanced
Coordinate System while maintaining a backup copy of the original document.
61
Creataing Pictures
Zoom to Fit
Zoom to Fit is an Enhanced Coordinate System viewing option. The Zoom to Fit feature automatically scales the
document view to fit the current window while suppressing scroll bars.
The Viewport
The viewport is the mapping system for the Logical Coordinate System document. Like the document, it reads
the picture's logical coordinates to determine its size, and then maps the logical coordinates onto the window.
NOTE: The Viewport mapping does not apply to pictures that use the Enhanced Coordinate System.
CAUTION: If you resize a picture, then modify the viewport width or height (ViewPortHeight and
ViewPortWidth properties), the picture's Logical Coordinate System is remapped. When this happens, objects in
your pictures may appear skewed when resizing or autoscaling. If you are using custom scripts to manipulate
these properties, these scripts become obsolete after an upgrade to the Enhanced Coordinates System. To avoid
this problem, it is recommended that you either:

Do not modify the viewport height or width once you have resized a picture using the Logical
Coordinate System.

Upgrade the picture to the Enhanced Coordinate System.
Logical Coordinate System Example
For example, when using a picture with a width of 100 logical units (or postscript points) and a height of 75
logical units (or postscript points) maintains a logical ratio with coordinates 0, 0 at the top left corner of the
picture. This is illustrated in the following diagram.
62
Using Key Macros
The Logical Coordinate System
Look at the viewport as the lens of a camera. For example, if you have a picture containing a circle and a
rectangle, and you define the viewport to begin as shown in the following picture:
Then the picture will be displayed as shown in the following figure:
63
Creataing Pictures
The Window
The window is the available screen area of the document; it sets the boundaries for what you can display in your
picture. The window preserves a portion of the screen for various window decorations, such as title bars and
sizing borders, for displaying your picture. If the document is the landscape, and the viewport is the camera
lens, than the window is the viewfinder; it is what you actually see on the screen. For more information on
window decorations, refer to the Selecting Window Properties section.
The following figure shows the relationship between the window and screen in an iFIX picture.
The Window and Screen in an iFIX Document
64
Using Key Macros
Planning Your Pictures
To prepare your development strategy, you must first plan the size of your window, the area of your screen that
contains your picture. The sections that follow describe how to custom-design your window so that your
pictures look the way you want them to.

Determining a Window Size

Tips: Sizing and Locating a Picture

Controlling a Picture's Magnification

Selecting Window Properties

Selecting Additional Picture Properties
Determining a Window Size
When adjusting your picture size, you work with the window property, and you define the size as a percentage
of screen:

Full Screen

1/2 Screen Height

1/2 Screen Width

1/4 Screen
By sizing a window by the percentage of the screen, iFIX scales your picture, maintaining its coordinate system
and displaying the picture at its original aspects regardless of the monitor resolution it is viewed on.
The default window and document properties are displayed in the Picture Preferences tab of the User
Preferences dialog box. These properties are applied when you create a new picture. The new picture's viewport
is automatically set to display the maximum viewable amount of your picture at a 100% zoom ratio. For more
information on zooming, refer to the Controlling a Picture's Magnification section.
To change the size of your window for all new pictures to be created, select a window size in the Window Size
field.
Logical Coordinate System
For the Logical Coordinate System, when you want to modify the default document width or height (100 x 75),
make sure that the ratio between the width and height remains at 4:3. You can select any units you want; however, if
you choose not to maintain the 4:3 ratio, objects with an identical width and height do not appear as such in the
window. For more information on the logical-units-to-pixels ratio, refer to the section, The Document.
Enhanced Coordinate System
For the Enhanced Coordinate System, the document width and height is calculated in postscript points. When
determining a window size, it is important to use the resolution on thecomputer where the pictures are intended to be
65
Creataing Pictures
viewed. For example, you might create a picture for viewing on a high-definition computer with a resolution of
1920 x 1080, which assumes a wide screen aspect ratio of 16:9.
Once you create a picture, you can change its size by changing the percentage of the Window Height and
Window Width properties in the Edit Picture dialog box. In the Edit Picture dialog box, you can specify the
desired percentage to represent the size your picture. iFIX automatically preserves the size of the objects on the
screen.
You can have a window that is full screen, half the height of your screen, half the width of the screen, or one
quarter of the screen's size. These sizes are illustrated in the following figures.
Full Screen Window Size
66
Using Key Macros
Half Screen Height Window Size
Half Screen Width Window Size
67
Creataing Pictures
Quarter Screen Window Size
Manually Changing the Picture Size of a Logical Coordinate System Picture
By manually adjusting the size of the window, you can quickly change the view of your picture, when you use
the Logical coordinate System.
Before you attempt to adjust the size, make sure you know what document components you are changing in the
picture. The following table shows what key sequences or mouse actions that change your picture size, and
what part of the document you actually modify.
NOTE: The key sequences apply only to pictures that use the Logical Coordinate System. They do not apply to
pictures that use the Enhanced Coordinate System.
Key Sequences That Change the Picture Size of a Logical Coordinate System Picture
68
Pressing the key
sequence...
While...
Does the
following...
And changes...
Shift
Clicking and dragging the
mouse on an edge of the
window
Adjusts the size of
the picture
The window and
the viewport.
Using Key Macros
Key Sequences That Change the Picture Size of a Logical Coordinate System Picture
Pressing the key
sequence...
While...
Does the
following...
And changes...
Ctrl+Shift
Clicking and dragging the
mouse on an edge of the
window
Adjusts the size of
the picture
The window.
None
Clicking an arrow on the scroll
bar
Scrolls the picture
The viewport.
Tips: Sizing and Locating a Picture
The way that a picture appears in Run mode can be very different from the way it appears in Configure mode,
especially if the WorkSpace will not be full screen in Run mode. Before you create a picture, use the following
tips in Configure mode to coordinate the appearances of the picture in configure mode and in run mode:

If you will be using the WorkSpace full screen in Run mode, maximize the WorkSpace in Configure
mode in Classic view by selecting Full Screen from the WorkSpace menu. To maximize the
WorkSpace in Configure mode in Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Full
Screen.

Float or hide toolbars. To modify settings for toolbars, in Classic view, select the Toolbars option from
the WorkSpace menu. In Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings and
then click Toolbars.

Float or hide the system tree. To toggle the display of the system tree, in Classic view, select System
Tree from the WorkSpace menu. In Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click
Show/Hide and then click System Tree.

Set the Windows taskbar to appear the same as when iFIX is in the run-time environment. To toggle
the display of the Windows taskbar, click the right mouse button in the taskbar and select Properties.
TIP: For Ribbon view, to ensure access to the taskbar, after you set the toggle property, minimize and
then maximize the WorkSpace.

Set the Status bar to the same appearance as when iFIX is in the run-time environment. To toggle the
display of the status bar, in Classic view, select Status Bar from the WorkSpace menu. In Ribbon view,
on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Show/Hide and then click Status Bar.

Use Zoom to Fit to suppress scroll bars and view the entire graphic of pictures created with or
upgraded to the Enhanced Coordinate System.
69
Creataing Pictures

When creating new pictures with the Enhanced Coordinate System, consider the following
recommendations:

Develop pictures on the screen resolutions where they are to be viewed.

When there are multiple display resolutions on the target devices, it is recommended to
develop those pictures using the minimum resolution at which they will be displayed.

Mobile devices require you to develop separate pictures designed specifically for the mobile
displays.
If you set Run-time Environment Protection to disable the title bar or the menu bar, you will not be able to set
up Configuration mode to appear exactly as it would in run mode. To set run-time protection, access the
Environment Protection Preferences tab in the User Preferences dialog box.
When you open an existing picture in run mode, the picture will adjust to the WorkSpace run-time Environment
Protection preferences and settings that are currently enabled.
Controlling a Picture's Magnification
iFIX gives you many ways to change the appearance of your picture on screen or, conversely, keep it looking
exactly the same so you don't lose the perfect view. For example, you may want to magnify your picture so that
objects change size, perhaps allowing you to study them in more detail. The following sections show you how
to work with different window views.
Most of the functions described can be accessed using the View menu or tab, or using the picture pop-up menu.
You can also change certain picture properties using VBA. Refer to the Writing Scripts manual for more
information.
Zooming In and Out of Pictures
The viewing area of a picture is like an adjustable camera lens; it allows you to magnify or reduce the image on
the screen. Magnifying an image (zooming in) lets you work on detailed areas of your picture. Reducing an
image (zooming out) lets you work on the overall structure of the picture.
You can choose four different percentages of magnification when zooming in and out of pictures – 50%, 100%,
150%, or 200%. By default, the viewport is set at 100% view magnification, giving you the maximum viewable
amount of your picture. When you change the magnification of the picture using the zoom function, you change
the width and height of the picture's viewport, but not the size of the objects in the picture. Objects appear to
get bigger or smaller, allowing you to view more or less detail, but they are actually the same size.
NOTE: When zooming in and out of pictures, grids may not appear in the picture properly.
70
Using Key Macros
You can use Zoom with both Logical and Enhanced Coordinate Systems; however, Zoom acts differently with
each coordinate system. That is, with the legacy Logical Coordinate System, you had to decrease the Zoom
Factor to increase the Zoom Percentage. With the Enhanced Coordinate System, you must increase the Zoom
Factor to increase the Zoom Percentage.

With the Logical Coordinate System - Zooming In (greater than 100%) is applied by reducing or
decreasing the viewport; thus, the zoom factor is less than 1. ZoomOut increases the viewport, thus,
the Zoom Factor is greater than 1.

With the Enhanced Coordinate System - Zooming In to a picture increases the Zoom Factor, and
Zooming Out reduces or decreases the Zoom Factor.
The following table lists examples of zoom percentage and corresponding zoom factor for each coordinate
system. For example, a zoom percentage of 200% is represented as a Zoom Factor of 0.5 for the Logical
Coordinate and 2.0 with the Enhanced Coordinates System.
Zoom Factor
Zoom Percentage
Logical Coordinate
Enhanced Coordinate
50%
1.5
0.5
100%
1.0
1.0
150%
0.75
1.5
200%
0.5
2.0
IMPORTANT: Scripts written in for Logical Coordinate System must be changed for the Enhanced Coordinate
System. In particular, when using the Zoom Property with scripts in pictures that have been upgraded to use the
Enhanced Coordinate System, you must change the script to reflect the new behavior. For more information on
Zoom Property and changing scripts, refer to the iFIX Automation Reference e-book.
NOTE: For Logical Coordinate System pictures only, you can accomplish the same function of a zoom by
simply pressing CTRL/SHIFT while clicking and dragging a corner of the window. This makes the object
appear to change shape without changing the viewport, just like a zoom. For pictures that use the Logical
Coordinate System, refer to the Key Sequences that Change the Picture Size table in the Determining a Window
Size section. This key sequence does not apply to pictures that use the Enhanced Coordinate System.
71
Creataing Pictures
Default View and Full View
NOTE: This option does not apply to pictures that use the Enhanced Coordinate System.
If your picture uses the Logical Coordinate System and you make changes to your window, you may decide that
you prefer the original view. To restore the original view, use one of the following methods:

Right-click the picture and select Default View from the pop-up menu.

Select Default View from the View menu (Classic view).

Click View and then Default View from the Picture group on the View tab (Ribbon view).

Your picture will appear as you originally created it before making any changes.
If you make the size of your window smaller, you can return the window to full view by selecting Full View.
The Full View function expands the size of the window and changes the viewport. You can also perform a full
view by pressing <Shift> and dragging the window to fill the screen of the window.
Fitting the Picture to Window or Window to Picture
NOTE: This option does not apply to pictures that use the Enhanced Coordinate System.
If your picture uses the Logical Coordinate System and you adjust the window size of your picture, you may
want the objects in the picture to be accurately represented within the new window size. To fit the picture to the
new window, use one of the following methods:

Right-click the picture name in the system tree and select Fit Picture to Window from the pop-up
menu.

Select Fit Picture to Window from the View menu (Classic view).

Click Window and then Fit Picture to Window from the Picture group on the View tab (Ribbon View).

The picture is adjusted to the new window size, so that the objects in the picture are the same size
relative to the new window.
To adjust the size of the window to fit as much of your picture as possible:

right-click the picture name in the system tree and select Fit Window to Picture from the pop-up menu,

select Fit Window to Picture from the View menu (Classic view), or

click Window and then Fit Window to Picture from the group Picture on the View tab (Ribbon View)
If the viewport stretches beyond the boundary of the picture, scroll bars are added to the picture.
NOTE: Scroll bars may be added when a picture is created using the Picture wizard in Classic view and then
opened in Ribbon view. If this occurs in a picture using legacy Logical Coordinates, select Fit Picture To
Window from the right mouse menu and save the picture to eliminate the scroll bars. Use Zoom To Fit for
Enhanced Coordinate pictures.
72
Using Key Macros
Updating Window Location
The Update Window Location function allows you to retain a specific picture configuration, maintaining the
document, window, and viewport sizes that you create. When you open the picture later, or switch back to the
configuration environment after viewing it at run-time, the picture appears exactly as it did on the screen when
you originally created it.
In this way, Update Window Location is not the same as saving your picture. Saving alone does not retain
window properties, and does not guarantee that your picture will look exactly the same when you re-open it
again at a later date. So be sure to save your picture after you have updated the window location to your exact
specifications.
Update Window Location is an effective way to create pop-up windows for your application that appear exactly
the same, regardless of what resolution they are viewed on. To use this function, employ one of the following
methods:

Right-click the picture in the system tree and select Update Window Location from the pop-up menu.

Select Update Window Location from the View menu (Classic view).

Click Window and then Update Window Location from the Picture group on the View tab (Ribbon
View).

Next, save your picture.
Zoom to Fit
When pictures are created or upgraded with the Enhanced Coordinate System, the Zoom to Fit option automatically
scales the entire picture to fit within the current screen while suppressing scroll bars. Objects are not distorted and
retain their original shape. Zoom to Fit is only available for viewing pictures, edits are not permitted. Zoom to Fit
can be used in both Configuration and Runtime modes.
Changing the Screen Resolutions
If you change the screen resolution for a picture in Zoom to Fit, the picture looks differently even though the
aspect ratio remains unchanged. The objects within the picture appear to have changed size because the Zoom
to Fit option makes the best use of the available screen space. If you change the resolution from:

a lower resolution to a higher resolution, the objects in your picture appear larger

a higher resolution to a lower resolution, the objects in your picture appear smaller
If you choose to disable Zoom to Fit (Ctrl+B) for the picture in the new resolution, the scroll bar becomes
enabled and the objects within the pictures appear differently as the software accommodates the adjusted screen
space.
For example:

As shown in sequence A, changing the screen resolution from 800 x600 to the new 1920 x 1080
resolution, makes the objects appear larger. When you disable Zoom to Fit, scroll bars are enabled and
the images appear smaller.
73
Creataing Pictures

As shown in sequence B, changing the screen resolution from 1920 x 1080 to the new 800 x 600
resolution, makes the objects appear smaller. When you disable Zoom to Fit, scroll bars are enabled
and the images appear larger or may not appear on the screen.
Viewing Overlaid Objects
When overlaying objects in a graphic (in configuration mode), make sure the alignment of each object is as you
expect it. When overlaid objects are not aligned properly, viewing these objects in Zoom to Fit (in run mode) may
not display as you expect. For example, if text is overlaid on a rectangle object and the text object is not aligned
during configuration mode, when you view the objects with Zoom to Fit (in run mode), the text size may increase
and hide one of the rectangle's edges. If this occurs, return to configuration mode and adjust the overlays to align
properly.
Selecting Window Properties
As discussed in the previous sections, the area of the window that you can resize is called the client area.
Essentially, the screen is the window less decorative properties, or decorations. To give your pictures a custom
design and look, you can select or modify the following window decorations:

Title bars – Adds a title bar to your picture.

System menus – Adds system menus to your picture.

Sizing borders – Adds sizing borders so that you can resize (or scroll) your window.
To show or hide the decorations listed above, select or deselect the appropriate check boxes in the Edit Picture
dialog box. The window decorations enabled by default appear on the Picture Preferences tabbed page when
you open a new picture.
74
Using Key Macros
Additionally, you can add the following window properties to your picture:

Always on Top – Configures the window so that it is always on top when you open it. You can select
this feature in the Edit Picture dialog box, from the picture preferences tab in the User Preferences
dialog box and the Property Window.

Click and Stick Enabled – Allows you to view which objects can be selected, can perform actions, or
can have actions performed on them. You can select this feature from the picture preferences tab in the
User Preferences dialog box. You cannot select this feature from the Property Window.

Grid Enabled – Displays a grid on the window. You can select this feature in the Edit Picture dialog
box, from the picture preferences tab in the User Preferences dialog box and the Property Window.

Snap to Grid – Allows objects to snap to a grid point in a grid. You can select this feature from the
picture preferences tab in the User Preferences dialog box and the Property Window.

Runtime Visible – Allows you to run a picture in memory without a visible display in the run-time
environment. You can select this feature in the Edit Picture dialog box and the Property Window.

Disable caching for this picture – allows you to disable picture caching for an individual picture. You
can select this feature in the Edit Picture dialog box. See the Using Picture Caching section for more
information about picture caching.
Each of the available properties can be turned on or off, allowing you to create the exact look and feel you want.
For example, you can:

Simulate dialog boxes by creating a window with the title bar and system menu enabled.

Create a tool palette for operators using a window with the sizing borders and system menu disabled.

Create an opening title screen by creating a window with the full screen enabled, and the other window
properties disabled.

Simulate an alarm condition where an object makes a sound when the cursor passes over an object. Do
this by creating a window with Click and Stick Enabled selected.
Creating Picture Types Using Window Properties
Use the following table as a guideline to help you define your picture properties.
Creating Picture Types Using Window Properties
To create a...
Select these properties...
Dialog box
Titlebar
System Menu
Resizeable
75
Creataing Pictures
Creating Picture Types Using Window Properties
To create a...
Select these properties...
Toolbar
Titlebar
System Menu
Resizeable
Always on Top
Palette or control panel
Titlebar
Always on Top
Non-movable banner
Always on Top
Detail window
Titlebar
System Menu
Resizeable
Pop-up alarm messages
Titlebar
System Menu
Resizeable
Always on Top
Resizeable picture with hidden objects, not displayed at run-time
Resizeable
For more information on the window and screen in an iFIX document, refer to the section, The Window.
Selecting Additional Picture Properties
The User Preferences dialog box contains several additional properties you can apply to your pictures. To
access them click the Picture Preferences tab. The following properties are available in the right column of the
Properties area:
76

Highlight Timeout Interval – When Click and Stick is enabled, this time period defines how long
before the highlight around an object disappears when it is not selected.

Grid Interval – When the grid is enabled, this interval (entered in pixels) determines the distance
between the dots in the grid.
Using Key Macros

Using Click and Stick – Click and Stick allows you to view which objects can be selected,
highlighted, or modified at run-time. As the mouse moves over an object, a single highlighted box
clicks around the object if it is selectable. If the object is highlighted, use the mouse to select or stick
the object and it becomes the current object. To enable or disable Click and Stick, select or deselect the
Click and Stick Enabled check box.
Designing Your Pictures
Developing a strategy for your pictures is a lot more than defining a picture type and window size. You can
apply many strategies to help you achieve the maximum performance from your pictures. Employing these
strategies can make your development easier and less costly.
Some of the more effective strategies you can implement include:

Speeding development time.

Improving performance by using the tools that iFIX gives you.

Making the design flexible so that you can easily maintain pictures.

Securing pictures so they are accessible to specific users.
The sections that follow describe some of the strategies that you can use.

Design Tips

Finding and Replacing Data in Pictures

Using Process Assistants

Working with Color

Securing Your Pictures
Design Tips
We recommend that you keep the following tips in mind when designing your pictures.
General Tips
The following tips are for developing pictures with either the Logical or Enhanced Coordinate Systems.

Use the tools that iFIX provides you to accomplish the job. Using the tools available to you helps
you quickly implement your process development strategy. Examples: using Dynamo objects for
common object groups; using screen regions to determine color schemes; using Find and Replace to
locate and change data; using Experts to add scripts to objects.
77
Creataing Pictures

Get data once. Because iFIX allows you to obtain your data from a variety of sources and use that
data throughout the open environment of the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you only need to hook to that
data source once. So, for example, if you want to attach a data source to many objects in your picture,
you can do so by distributing the data from one object throughout your picture. There is no need to
fetch data again or retransform that data to assign or animate properties throughout your picture.

Use color only when it enhances the picture and makes it easier to use. Overusing colors, or using
an ineffective color strategy, can do more harm than good to your picture design. For help in designing
a coloring strategy, refer to the Working with Color section.

Instead of creating pictures to monitor points, use the Scheduler. Using pictures to monitor the
value of a point can be ineffective, as scripts may run continuously and never run to completion.
Rather than run a looping script, the Scheduler waits for an event to occur before it triggers a point. For
more information on the Scheduler, refer to the Mastering iFIX manual.

Use the extensive resources available to you for help. The Help and Information folder in the system
tree contains comprehensive information to help you learn about a concept or perform a procedure.
This information includes Automation Interfaces and Database Manager help, as well as a complete
electronic book with context-sensitive help.
Enhanced Coordinate System Tips
The following tips are for developing pictures with the Enhanced Coordinate System:

Design Enhanced Coordinate pictures for the terminal on which they will be viewed. When
designing the picture for a specific resolution, you should use a terminal with that same resolution for
your development.

Use the minimum resolution when designing for a wide range of resolution for target devices.
When creating pictures that will be used on multiple resolutions, it is recommended to develop those
pictures using the minimum resolution at which the picture will be displayed.

When upgrading pictures to Enhanced Coordinates, be sure the existing picture displays as you
want it to view on the screen. When upgrading pictures from the Logical Coordinate System to the
Enhanced Coordinate system, make sure the existing picture views as you wish before you upgrade the
picture. Since the upgrade process uses the dimensions of the existing picture, any issues with the
existing picture are transferred to the upgraded picture.

Develop separate pictures for mobile devices. When developing an Enhanced Coordinate system
picture for a mobile device, create a separate picture; that is, do not use the same picture that you use
for a wide screen or other full size target devices.
Finding and Replacing Data in Pictures
Many process environments are expansive, and their size may require that pictures have multiple links to many
data sources. Should managers need to reroute certain data to another node, or globally change a data source
throughout a plant, they need to do so quickly, without disrupting operation or utilizing valuable resources. The
Find and Replace feature in iFIX makes this possible.
To search and replace data in your pictures, select Find and Replace from the Edit menu (Classic view) or on
the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Find and Replace, and complete the appropriate fields on the Find and
78
Using Key Macros
Replace dialog box. For detailed information on Finding and Replacing data, refer to the Finding and Replacing
Data section in the Understanding iFIX manual.
Using Process Assistants
Process assistants can simplify picture development. These assistants include the following:

Wizards

Experts

Dynamos

Global Subroutines

Toolbars
For more information on how Process assistants can help you develop your pictures more easily, refer to the
Using Process Assistants to Expedite Pictures chapter.
Working with Color
Using color is an effective way to enhance your pictures. iFIX allows you to select from millions of colors
(including 24-bit), and lets you customize your colors to give you more flexibility. With iFIX colors there are
no limitations; you have all the colors you want available to all objects, all the time. Using these colors, you
can:

View colors by name. By clicking a tab, you can view all of the available colors by name, giving you
an easy way to select across a color spectrum without choosing from a palette.

Customize your colors. You can assign unique colors and create a custom palette. If you are using
named colors, you can give the color a specific name.

Color as you go. Using the Color Selection dialog box, you can edit as many objects as you like while
the dialog box remains on your screen.

Select which property you want to modify. You can select the property you want to modify
(foreground, background, or edge color).

Animate your colors using a Color Expert. Using one of the Color Experts on the Experts toolbar,
you can animate a foreground, background, or edge color with ease.
Modal versus Modeless Color Selection
You can incorporate color to your objects in two ways:

Selecting a fade, foreground, background, or edge color for a specific object using the modal Select
Color dialog box. The modal color box is used to apply a color only to the object selected. Once you
select a color, you click OK and the dialog box closes.
79
Creataing Pictures

Selecting a color to one or more objects, or designing a custom color set, using the modeless Color
Selection dialog box. The modeless color box is used to color as many objects as you like, as it stays
on your screen as you jump from object to object in your picture.
The following sections detail how to incorporate colors into your pictures using both methods.
Adding Colors to a Selected Object
You can specify fade, foreground, background, and edge colors using the modal Select Color box, shown in the
following figure.
This dialog box is accessed by right-clicking an object, pointing to Color and selecting Foreground,
Background, or Edge from the pop-up menu. It is also accessed when you click either the Foreground or Fade
button on the Select Color dialog box shown below. This dialog box contains two tabs that let you choose your
color from a palette or from a list of names. You select a color by either clicking the color in the palette or by
clicking the name in the list.
You can specify all of the gradient fill settings at one time using the Select FadeColor dialog box, as shown in
the following diagram.
80
Using Key Macros
The Select FadeColor d`ialog box is accessed by right-clicking an object, pointing to Color, and selecting Fade
from the pop-up menu. This dialog box also appears if you select Foreground from the pop-up menu when the
object's fill style is Gradient. When you click either the Foreground or Fade color button the Select Color dialog
box appears, as shown in the first diagram above.
Default color selections appear in the Shape Preferences tabbed page of the User Preferences dialog box.
NOTE: You can also specify a background color for your picture using the Edit Picture dialog box or Shape
Preferences tabbed page. For more information, refer to the Setting the Picture Background and Fade Colors
section.
Adding Colors to Multiple Objects
You can specify foreground, background, and edge colors to as many objects as you like using the modeless
Color Selection box, shown in the following figure.
81
Creataing Pictures
Because the Color Selection box remains on your screen as you add or modify objects in your picture, you can
make changes to your objects without having to exit and re-enter the dialog box. To access the Color Selection
dialog box, click the Color button on the Tools toolbar (Classic view) or on the Format tab, in the Styles group
(Ribbon view) or the Toolbox, if enabled.
The Color Selection dialog box contains two tabs that allow you to display the default system colors in either a
color palette or a list. To select a color, click a color in the palette or click a name in the list.
The ColorSet field displays the current default color set being used, and it also contains any custom sets you
may have created. You can create a new custom set from the list provided, or create your own custom set using
a customized palette. All palettes are automatically saved when the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace shuts down.
In the Property field, you can choose the foreground, background, or edge property to assign to the selected
color. That property changes when you change a color in the dialog box.
Using Custom Colors in Duplicated Objects
If you tie a custom color to the foreground of an object and duplicate the object, the custom color link will not
be retained in the duplicates of the object. The duplicates will only take the color of the custom color at the time
they were duplicated, future changes to the custom color will only update the original object.
Using Named Colors
Each color in the color box is named based on its location in the color spectrum. Changing a color in a palette
changes the name of that color in the name list. When creating custom color sets, you can assign custom names
to colors. Each color name appears in a list, allowing you to select across multiple palettes quickly and easily. If
an object uses a named color and the color is deleted or renamed, the object reverts to the 24-bit color value.
The list of named colors is saved when the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace shuts down.
Using the Edit Color Palette
The Edit Color palette is a grid of colors ranging from red to violet that let you select a custom color of your
choice. You can select any color from the palette by clicking the mouse. A four-mark cursor appears.
The slider to the right of the matrix is called a mixer bar. To specify the shade of the color spectrum you
selected in the matrix, adjust the mixer bar. A black arrow appears next to the area you have selected. You can
also change the shade of the color by adjusting the mixer bar up and down, as the following figure shows.
82
Using Key Macros
Using the Color Experts
Color Experts are convenient process assistants that help you easily animate colors of your objects. By entering
a data source and specifying certain options, you can make foreground, background, or edge colors behave in a
way that benefits your process application. For information on the dialog fields on the Expert, click Help on the
dialog box. For more details on the Experts that iFIX provides, refer to the Using Process Assistants to Expedite
Pictures chapter.
Applying Background Colors
When specifying background colors for your objects, be aware that certain colors or fill patterns may not work
effectively, as they may be hidden or offset by the foreground. You can also set a background color for your
pictures. For more information, refer to the Setting the Picture Background and Fade Color section.
Securing Your Pictures
iFIX's picture protection prevents unauthorized users from accessing or modifying pictures, or performing
unauthorized actions on the pictures. To configure security for your picture, enter a security area in the
Properties window. For more information on configuring security for your specific environment, refer to the
Configuring Security Features manual.
Secure Containment
iFIX offers a unique security feature called secure containment, which protects your pictures in the Proficy iFIX
WorkSpace in the event that a third-party control fails.
For example, if you add an OCX to your picture in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, and the OCX crashes, an
exception is created. The Proficy iFIX WorkSpace detects this exception and isolates it so that your system
keeps running. By securing your application as part of the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, iFIX ensures that your
pictures are saved even during an unlikely, yet potentially troublesome, event.
83
Creataing Pictures
Using the Create Picture Wizard
iFIX provides the Create Picture wizard to allow you to more easily step through some of the details inherent in
creating pictures. Although the underlying picture properties are the same whether you create pictures manually
or use the wizard, you can use the Create Picture wizard to easily generate pictures of a particular size, location,
or configuration. You can access the Create Picture wizard by clicking the Create Picture button on the
Toolbox.
The sections that follow describe the aspects of the Create Picture Wizard.

Accessing the Create Picture Wizard

Types of Pictures in the Create Picture Wizard

Overview of the Create Picture Wizard Process
Special Considerations
It is recommended that you ensure the following characteristics are the same for both the machine on which you
create the pictures and the machine on which you deploy the pictures:

Monitor resolution

Desktop Theme (especially for users who have a mixed Windows environment)

Font

WorkSpace Full Screen in Run Mode

UI configuration (Title bar height, window border size, status bar)

Environment Protection settings (title bar, menu bar)
After you have created a picture with the Create Picture Wizard, you will need to understand the concepts found
in the following sections to resize, relocate, or change the attributes of the picture:

What Makes Up Your Picture

Planning Your Pictures

Designing Your Pictures
Accessing the Create Picture Wizard
You can access the Create Picture wizard from the File menu (Classic View only), from the Ribbon (Ribbon
view only), from the Task Wizard, and on several toolbars. The following table lists the most common ways to
access the Create Picture wizard:
84
Using Key Macros
From the...
Do this...
Menu Bar
(Classic view
only)
Select New from the File menu, then select Picture from the New list.
Ribbon
(Ribbon view
only)
Click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
System Tree
Click the right mouse button on the Pictures folder in the System tree.
Task Wizard
Click the Task Wizard button from the Standard toolbar. Select Picture from the Task
Categories list box. Select Create Picture Wizard from the Tasks list.
Experts
Toolbar
Click the Create Picture Wizard button from the Experts toolbar.
Standard
Toolbar
Click the Create Picture Wizard button from the Standard toolbar.
Toolbox
Click the Create Picture Wizard button from the Toolbox.
NOTE: To access the Create Picture wizard from the Menu Bar, the Ribbon, the System Tree, or the Standard
toolbar, you must have the Show Picture Wizard from New Picture Menu check box enabled. You can enable
this option in the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Common Elements of the Create Picture Wizard
As you can see in the Introduction Page of the Create Picture Wizard, there are several elements of the Create
Picture wizard that you will see on every page, including the following:
Preview Pane – Shows a picture configuration based on the currently selected options.
Help Button – Launches the Help topics for the Create Picture wizard.
Cancel Button – Exits the Create Picture wizard without creating any new pictures, or changing
WorkSpace appearance.
Previous Button – Returns you to the previous page in the wizard.
Next Button – Sends you to the next page in the wizard.
85
Creataing Pictures
Finish Button – Creates the new pictures that you have specified, and sets the WorkSpace appearance as
you have specified. This button is only enabled when the wizard has enough information to
successfully create new pictures.
Types of Pictures in the Create Picture Wizard
There are three types of pictures that you can create using the Create Picture wizard:

Pictures from a Predefined Configuration

Custom Picture

Default Untitled Picture
Pictures from a Predefined Configuration
Many implementations of iFIX require a configuration of pictures that need to occupy certain areas of the
screen. These pictures have different uses; some of the pictures within the configuration may be standard across
the installation, and some of the pictures may differ depending on the node or the day. The Create Picture
wizard provides you with a number of predefined configurations, which you can modify to suit your needs.
Each configuration consists of some combination of the following default pictures:
Main – Occupies the entire client screen space, excluding any application title bars, menu bars, headers,
footers, and left navigation pictures. You can use the sizes tab to change the height, width, and
position of this picture.
Header – Runs across the top of the configuration. You can change the height of this picture.
Footer – Runs across the bottom of the configuration. You can change the height of this picture.
Left – Runs along the left side of the configuration. You can change the width of this picture.
Faceplate – Typically used as a pop-up or informational window. You can select the screen location of this
picture, but the size is controlled by the configuration. This picture is created separately from the
other default pictures.
Additionally, the Create Picture wizard now provides two predefined configurations for the most common
handheld device screen resolutions: 240x320 and 320x240. These forms are specifically designed for handhelds
that have Terminal Services capabilities. For more information on using them with Terminal Server, refer to
Optimizing New iFIX Pictures for Use with Terminal Service Capable Devices.
Once you have created pictures of the correct size and shape, you can use them as templates. You can open
them, edit them, and save them as different pictures to suit your needs.
86
Using Key Macros
Custom Picture
When you choose to create a custom picture, you can set all the properties for that picture as you step through
the wizard. The end result is a single picture of the size, location, and name that you define in the Create Picture
wizard.
Default Untitled Picture
Select this option to create the same picture that would ordinarily be created in the WorkSpace if you did not
have the Create Picture wizard enabled. This picture will take on the size and properties that are currently set in
the WorkSpace, and named Untitled.
Overview of the Create Picture Wizard Process
The Create Picture wizard allows you to select the type of picture that you want to create, configure the
WorkSpace settings for the way you want it to appear in run mode, and then specify the attributes, size, and
location of each picture. The pictures are created in configure mode and added to the system tree. This section
provides an overview of the process.
When you invoke the Create Picture wizard, the Introduction page appears, as shown in the following figure.
On this page, you select the type of picture that you want to create. You also can elect to exit the wizard and
disable its access from the menu bar, the system tree, and the Standard toolbar. For a description of each type of
picture, see the Types of Pictures in the Create Picture Wizard section.
Introduction Page of the Create Picture Wizard
87
Creataing Pictures
After you complete the Introduction page and click Next, the WorkSpace Appearance page appears, as shown in
the following figure. This page allows you to set the visibility of the Title Bar, the Menu Bar, and the Status Bar
in run mode, and whether the WorkSpace will be full screen in run mode.
NOTE: This page only appears if you selected the Show WorkSpace Appearance Page check box on the
Introduction page.
WorkSpace Appearance Page of the Create Picture Wizard
If you change the settings on this page, the WorkSpace preferences are automatically updated in your system
when you exit the wizard. You should only need to complete the WorkSpace Appearance page once. The next
time you use the Create Picture wizard, you can clear the check box on the Introduction page for Show
WorkSpace Appearance Page. For more information on setting WorkSpace preferences, refer to the Setting
User Preferences section in the Understanding iFIX manual.
The wizard then steps you through other pages, depending on whether you are creating a custom picture or
pictures from a predefined configuration. These pages allow you to specify the size, location, attributes, and
filename of each picture you create.
Once you have completed the picture specification pages, the Summary page appears, as shown in the following
figure. This page presents a layout preview of the pictures you are creating, and lists the filename of each
picture. From this page you can return to the picture specification pages, or click Finish to generate the pictures
and add them to the system tree.
88
Using Key Macros
Summary Page of the Create Picture Wizard
For information about modifying the attributes of pictures once you have created them, refer to the Using Basic
Functions in Pictures section.
How Do I...
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with the Create Picture Wizard:

Accessing the Create Picture Wizard

Creating Pictures with the Create Picture Wizard

Creating Pictures from a Predefined Configuration

Modifying a Predefined Configuration

Creating Pictures with a Custom Configuration

Changing the Attributes of Predefined Pictures

Changing the Dimensions of Predefined Pictures
Accessing the Create Picture Wizard
To access the Create Picture Wizard:

Use any of the following methods in the iFIX WorkSpace to access the Create Picture Wizard:
89
Creataing Pictures

Menu Bar – On the File menu, point to New and then click Picture (Classic View only).

Ribbon – Click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture (Ribbon View
only).

System Tree – Right-click the Pictures folder in the System tree and select New from the
pop-up menu.

Task Wizard – Click the Task Wizard button on the Standard toolbar, select Picture from the
Task Categories list box, then select Create Picture Wizard from the Tasks list.

Experts Toolbar – Click the Create Picture Wizard button on the Experts toolbar.

Standard Toolbar – Click the New Picture button on the Standard toolbar.

Toolbox – Click the Create Picture Wizard button on the Toolbox.
NOTE: To access the Create Picture Wizard from the Menu Bar, the Ribbon, the System Tree, or the
Standard toolbar, you must have the Show Picture Wizard from New Picture Menu check box enabled
on the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Creating Pictures with the Create Picture Wizard
To create pictures with the Create Picture Wizard:
1.
Maximize the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace.
2.
In Classic view, click the New Picture button on the Standard toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
The Create Picture Wizard appears.
If the Create Picture Wizard does not appear, you may need to enable the Create Picture Wizard:
a.
In Classic view, select User Preferences from the WorkSpace menu.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
3.
90
b.
Select the Picture Preferences tab from the User Preferences dialog box.
c.
Select the Show Picture Wizard from New Picture Menu check box.
Select the type of picture configuration you want to create. The Create Picture Wizard allows you to
create the following types of pictures:

Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration

Create a Custom Picture

Create a Default 'Untitled' Picture (When you select this option and then the Finish button, the
wizard exits and creates a picture the current size of your WorkSpace.)
Using Key Macros
4.
Select or clear the Show WorkSpace Appearance Page check box and then click Next. If you selected
this check box, the WorkSpace Appearance page appears. If you cleared the check box, go to step 6.
5.
Set the options on the WorkSpace Appearance page.
This page configures general properties for new pictures. It only needs to be accessed once per
WorkSpace session.
6.
The next pages in the Wizard depend on the type of picture you chose to create. Follow the procedures
associated with Step 3.
7.
Click Next. If you are creating pictures from a predefined configuration, select which of the pictures in
the configuration you want to create, and specify the filename for each picture on the Select Filenames
page.

To disable a picture, clear the check box next to the generic name. Disabled pictures will not
be created.

Enter a filename in the field next to each enabled picture.

If you are creating a custom picture, enter a filename in the Custom field.
8.
Click Next. The Summary page lists the configuration name, the generic pictures that will be created
when you click Finish, and the filename of each picture.
9.
Optionally, select the Do Not Show Wizard check box to prevent the wizard from running the next
time you select New Picture from the File menu.
10. Click Previous to change your pictures, or Finish to exit and add the new picture files to your system
tree.
Creating Pictures from a Predefined Configuration
To create pictures from a predefined configuration:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, click the New Picture button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
2.
On the Introduction page, select Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration. Click Next. The
Choose Configuration page appears.
NOTE: If you selected the Show WorkSpace Appearance Page check box on the Introduction page, the
WorkSpace Appearance page appears before the Choose Configuration page.
3.
Select a picture configuration from the list.
4.
Click the Modify Configuration button to customize the predefined configuration, if needed. The
Modify Configuration dialog box appears. Make the modifications and return to the Choose
Configuration page.
5.
Click Next. The Select Filenames page appears.
91
Creataing Pictures
6.
Select which of the pictures in the configuration you want to create and specify filenames for those
pictures.

To disable a picture, clear the check box next to the generic name. Disabled pictures will not
be created.

Enter a filename in the field next to each enabled picture.
7.
Click Next. The Summary page lists the name of the predefined configuration, the generic pictures that
will be created when you click Finish, and the filename of each picture.
8.
Optionally, select the Do Not Show Wizard check box to prevent the wizard from running the next
time you select New Picture from the File menu.
9.
Click Previous to change your configuration, or Finish to exit and add the new pictures to your system
tree.
Modifying a Predefined Configuration
To modify a predefined configuration:
1.
In the Create Picture Wizard, from the Choose Configuration page, click the Modify Configuration
button. The Modify Configuration dialog box appears.
NOTE: The Create Picture Wizard's Choose Configuration page is only available if you select Create
Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration in the Introduction page.
2.
On the Attributes tab, select the attributes for each picture within the configuration.
3.
On the Sizes tab, change the size or position of each picture.
4.
To save your modified configuration, select one of the following options:

Save – Saves the changes for this picture only.

Save As – Saves the current options as a new configuration. When you select this option, the
Enter New Configuration Name dialog box appears. Enter the name for the new configuration
(up to 80 characters) in the Name field, then click OK to return to the Modify Configuration
dialog box.
5.
Click Return to Wizard. If you have unsaved changes, choose whether you want to save them or not.
Click Yes to save the changes for this picture only, or click No to cancel the changes you made to the
configuration and reset the attributes and sizes to their previous settings
6.
The Choose Configuration page of the Create Picture Wizard reappears. Notice that the name you
entered (if you saved the configuration under a new name) is displayed in the list on the Choose
Configuration page.
TIP: If you mistakenly save a predefined configuration, select the unwanted configuration from the list
on the Choose Configuration page and click Delete Configuration.
92
Using Key Macros
Creating Custom Pictures
To create a custom picture:
1.
In Classic view, click the New Picture button on the Standard toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and then click Picture.
2.
On the Introduction page, select Create a Custom Picture.
NOTE: If you selected the Show WorkSpace Appearance Page check box on the Introduction page, the
WorkSpace Appearance page appears before the Choose Configuration page.
3.
Select either of the following options:

Use Specified Dimensions

Use Dimensions of Existing Picture
4.
Click Next.
5.
Select the attributes that you would like for the picture.
6.
Click Next.
7.
Specify a filename for the picture, then click Next. The Summary page lists the filename of the picture
that will be created when you click Finish.
8.
Optionally, select the Do Not Show Wizard check box to prevent the wizard from running the next
time you select New Picture from the File menu.
9.
Click Previous to change your picture, or Finish to exit and add the new picture to your system tree.
Changing the Dimensions of Predefined Pictures
Tochange the dimensions of predefined pictures:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, click the New Picture button on the toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, select New, and click Picture.
2.
Proceed through the Create Picture Wizard until the Choose Configuration page appears.
NOTE: You must select Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration from the Introduction page
to be able to change the attributes of predefined pictures.
3.
On the Choose Configuration page, click the Modify Configuration button.
4.
From the Sizes tab, select a predefined picture, then edit the active fields for that picture.
There are only certain fields that you can change for each predefined picture. The following list
indicates the active fields for each predefined picture:
93
Creataing Pictures
5.

Main – top, left, width, or height

Header – height

Footer – height

Left Navigation – width
For Faceplate pictures, select the location of the picture on the screen, as shown in the icons on the
Sizes tab. There is no resizing available for faceplates.
Each picture within a predefined configuration is dependent on the other pictures. If you change the
dimensions of one picture, the adjacent pictures automatically change their dimensions to remain
adjacent. The configuration as a whole also continues to occupy the entire screen.
For example, the Header picture is adjacent to the Main picture along the top of the Main picture. If
you change the height of the Main picture, the bottom border of the Header picture remains adjacent to
the top border of the Main picture, and the height of the Header stretches to occupy the space from the
top of the screen to the top of the Main picture.
Changing the Attributes of Predefined Pictures
To change the attributes of predefined pictures:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, click the New Picture button on the toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, click the WorkSpace button, click New, and click Picture.
2.
Proceed through the Create Picture Wizard until the Choose Configuration page appears.
NOTE: You must select Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration from the Introduction page
to be able to change the attributes of predefined pictures.
3.
On the Choose Configuration page, click the Modify Configuration button.
4.
From the Attributes tab, select a predefined picture, then enable or clear the check boxes for the
following attributes:
5.
94

Show Title Bar – Adds a title bar to your picture.

Show System Menu – Adds system menus to your picture.

Resizable – Adds sizing borders to the picture.

Always on Top – Configures the window so that it is always on top when you open it.

Allow this picture to be cached – Configures the window so that when it is opened and
closed it is held in memory and, when reopened, is read from memory.
Click the Background Color button to set the actual background color of the picture. This color will not
appear in the preview pane, since the colors in the preview pane are used only in the Create Picture
Wizard.
Using Key Macros
Working with Other Applications
The open architecture of iFIX lets you easily incorporate features of external applications. The following
sections detail how to add other applications into iFIX pictures.

Working with ActiveX Controls

Working with Bitmaps

Working with Windows Metafiles

Creating Alarms Using Pictures
Working with ActiveX Controls
iFIX graphics are created and saved as ActiveX documents, which allows you to view your pictures in any
application that supports ActiveX controls, such as the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace or Internet Explorer. In fact,
you can think of the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace simply as a container for ActiveX controls.
Working with Bitmaps
You can import bitmaps from another drawing application directly into a picture. Once a bitmap is pasted into your
picture, you can work with the image as you would any iFIX object. In fact, you have additional options for a
bitmap. When you right-click a bitmapped object, you can select the operations listed in the following table.
Bitmap Operations Available Through the Pop-Up Menu
Use this
Operation...
To...
Animations
Animate a bitmap using the Animations dialog box.
Undo
Cancel the previous operation.
Cut
Remove the bitmap from the picture and places it into the clipboard.
Copy
Copy the bitmap to the clipboard.
Delete
Remove the bitmap from the picture.
Duplicate
Create a duplicate copy of the bitmap and place it slightly offset from the original.
Group
Combine one or more bitmaps into one grouped object.
95
Creataing Pictures
Bitmap Operations Available Through the Pop-Up Menu
Use this
Operation...
To...
Bring to Front
Move the selected bitmap to the front or top of the picture.
Send to Back
Move the selected bitmap to the back or bottom of the picture.
Load Image
Load a primary or secondary bitmap, either from a file or from the clipboard, that
can be displayed in your picture.
Enable/Disable
Transparency
Enables or disables the Transparency property in the bitmap.
Transparent Color
Assign a color to the Transparency of the bitmap.
If you have your display configured for true colors, transparent bitmaps may not
display properly. This may be related to the type of video card in your PC. To avert
this problem, change your Windows display settings to 65536.
Button Styles
Assign a button style (No Button, PushButton, or MultiState) to the bitmap.
Edge Style
Assign an edge style (None, Sunken, Raised, Etched, Bump) to the bitmap.
Edit Script
Open the Visual Basic Editor, which allows you to edit Visual Basic scripts.
Property Window
Display the Properties Window, which allows you to view and change property
values.
Let's say you want to import a bitmap, and then be able to easily view a different image related to the first. You
can do this using the Load Image operation from the bitmap's pop-up menu as follows:
To use the Load Image operation:
1.
In Classic view, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Bitmap button, if enabled.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Insert group, click Objects/Links and then click Bitmap.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Bitmap button on the Toolbox.
96
Using Key Macros
2.
Select the desired directory and bitmap and click Open. The image is added to the picture with object
handles.
3.
With the image selected, right-click the mouse and select Load Image - Secondary from the object's
pop-up menu.
4.
Select the file from the Open File dialog box, and click Open.
5.
To switch from one image to another, right-click the bitmap and select Display Primary or Display
Secondary from the pop-up menu.
Bitmaps can also be resized. To resize an imported bitmap, select it and then drag one of the sizing handles in
any direction. Bitmaps can be resized with little or no loss in picture quality.
NOTES:

You can copy another object as a bitmap and paste it into another graphics application such as
Microsoft Paint, or copy and paste an existing object as a bitmap. You can also change the properties
of a bitmap by selecting the bitmap, and then selecting a property from the Object menu.

Bitmaps up to 24-bit graphics resolution are supported. If a picture contains a large 24-bit bitmap,
there may be a short delay when opening the picture in iFIX.
Working with Windows Metafiles
Another powerful feature of iFIX is that it lets you directly import Windows metafiles (files with the extension
.WMF) into your picture. When importing metafiles, you can improve your performance by copying the object as a
bitmap and then pasting it into the picture. Refer to the Working with Bitmaps section for more information on how
to do this. The bitmap will use much less system memory than the metafile.
Creating Alarms Using Pictures
You can create pictures to monitor and display alarm conditions. For example, using animations and a color by
alarm strategy, you can set up thresholds to visually alert an operator that a data source is in a particular alarm
state.
For more information, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter. Refer to the Implementing Alarms and
Messages manual for detailed information on how to employ an alarming strategy.
Optimizing Picture Performance
iFIX provides you with a performance-oriented picture development tool that is open and easy to use. Because
it is an event-driven system, iFIX does not allocate memory or use processor speed when it is not necessary.
When an event occurs, only then does the system access the CPU. This makes the drawing environment of iFIX
more efficient. You can draw a shape and link it to a live I/O source in a matter of seconds. And, using the
design considerations outlined in the previous section, you can save even more time in your development and
implementation.
97
Creataing Pictures
Still, external to iFIX software, there are some guidelines that you should abide by to make iFIX perform more
effectively for your specific needs.
The two easiest ways to optimize the performance of your pictures are to make your pictures open faster and
update faster. Common to both attributes are:
Processor Speed – The faster the machine's processor, the faster your applications perform.
RAM – To avoid disk swapping, your computer must have enough memory to contain all applications,
databases, and cached pictures. If the computer does not have enough memory, Windows swaps the
applications to disk.
To optimize the speed at which iFIX initially displays pictures, iFIX includes a Resolve feature, described in the
Resolving Pictures section that follows. To further optimize the speed at which your pictures are dynamically
updated based on changes in process conditions, try doing one or more of the following:

Use computers that have a local bus video.

Update to a faster graphics card, if necessary.

Avoid blinking alarms. For more information, refer to the Blinking Alarms section.

Use exception-based processing in your database.

Change the refresh rate. For more information, refer to the Increasing the Refresh Rate section in the
Setting up the Environment manual.
Resolving Pictures
Database information for each data source in a picture is saved as part of the picture file on disk. When a picture
is displayed in the run-time environment, and the database information is not up-to-date, iFIX queries the
database and resolves the tag definitions. This can be a time-consuming process which slows the opening of the
picture.
Resolving pictures removes the need for iFIX to query the database. Therefore, resolved pictures open faster in
the run-time environment. The Resolve feature is available for both pictures and schedules, and can be accessed
using the Utilities toolbar or the Picture category of the Task Wizard (Classic view), or on the Applications tab,
in the Utilities group, in the Utilities list (Ribbon view).
When you resolve a picture that requires autoscaling, the iFIX Resolve Task Wizard now opens the picture
while resolving.
NOTE: If you delete tags from the process database after you resolve a picture, you need to run Resolve again.
98
Using Key Macros
Blinking Alarms
Instead of using blinking alarms, use a color-by alarm or color-by value strategy to indicate alarm status.
Blinking is a very time-intensive operation because the blinking object and the surrounding objects need to be
redrawn each time the picture is refreshed at the specified picture refresh rate, even though the information in
the object has not changed. For more information on employing a color-by alarm strategy, refer to the
Implementing Alarms and Messages manual.
Using the Picture Converter Utility
You can update pictures from previous versions of the FIX to iFIX Version 2.5 and later, using the Picture
Converter utility. This utility (PictureConverter.exe) is installed along with the iFIX product. To use this utility,
open the Migration Tools toolbar.
You can update pictures from the following versions with this utility:

FIX 5.65

FIX 6.0

FIX 6.12

FIX 6.15

FIX v7.0
The following sections detail how to use the Picture Converter utility.

Running Picture Converter

Updating Picture Components

Reusing FIX32 Command Buttons in iFIX
For more information on the Picture Converter and other migration tools, refer to the Migrating from FIX32 to
iFIX guide (MG.chm). The MG.chm file can be found on your iFIX product DVD in the MigrationTools folder,
or with your installed iFIX documentation. By default, this folder is: C:\Program
Files\Proficy\ProficyDoc\1033\iFIX.
Running Picture Converter
The Picture Converter (pictureconverter.exe) converts FIX32 .ODF files into iFIX compatible .GRF files that
use the Enhanced Coordinate System. The steps below describe how to run the Picture Converter.
For more information on the Picture Converter and other migration tools, refer to the Migrating from FIX32 to
iFIX guide (MG.chm). The MG.chm file can be found on your iFIX product DVD in the MigrationTools folder,
or with your installed iFIX documentation. By default, this folder is: C:\Program
Files\Proficy\ProficyDoc\1033\iFIX.
99
Creataing Pictures
To run the Picture Converter:
1.
On the Migration Tools toolbar, click the Picture Converter button, the second button on the toolbar.
The Picture Converter appears.
2.
On the File menu, click Set Destination Directory. Or, you can click the Set Destination Directory
button on the toolbar. The Destination Registry dialog box appears.
3.
Enter or Browse for the iFIX PIC folder. If you installed iFIX to the default location, the path to this
folder is C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC.
4.
Click OK.
5.
On the File menu, click Open ODF File to Convert. Or, you can click the Select ODF Files button on
the toolbar. The Select Picture Files for Conversion dialog box appears.
6.
Select the ODF file(s) for the FIX picture(s) that you want to convert, and click Open. A message box
appears requesting a color palette selection.
7.
If you have a custom color palette stored as a .PLT file, click Custom to select it. Otherwise, click
Default. The picture conversion process begins.
8.
The overall progress is tracked in the status bar, and messages appear in the bottom half of the screen
as the conversion completes. Additionally, error and warning information is written to the
PictureName.log file, where PictureName refers to the actual name of the picture file.
Updating Picture Components
The following list describes the picture components that are converted, as well as the picture components that
are not converted.
Only MultiPen charts will be converted – since only MultiPen charts exist in the iFIX object set, any
other type of chart contained in a 6.x picture will be ignored. More specifically, the following charts
will be ignored: Multi-bar, XY Plot, X-Bar, R-Bar, S-Bar, and Histogram charts. A warning will be
logged.
Tag Groups and variable references are not converted – the object and its dynamic property will be
created in the new iFIX picture, but the animation will be tied to a data source that doesn't exist. A
warning will be logged.
Command language code will not be converted to Visual Basic code – command language scripts will
be pasted into the appropriate event on the iFIX object. Each line will be commented out since the
code will undoubtedly not compile under Visual Basic. You will have to manually upgrade your
scripts to VB code.
Alarm Summary objects are converted without properties – Alarm Summary objects will be created in
the new iFIX picture and correctly placed, but the other properties such as Node, Filtering, etc. will
not be converted. A warning will be logged.
100
Using Key Macros
Charts with no pens will not be converted – if a chart exists that no pens can be created for, because the
sources of the pens could not be connected to or because of other problems, the chart will not be
created in the new iFIX picture. A warning will be logged.
Dynamo Sets must be upgraded by the user – to upgrade a 6.x Dynamo Set, the user must first rename
the set to have the picture .odf extension. Use the Picture Converter utility to upgrade the renamed
Dynamo Set. All the prompts will be lost. Open the new iFIX picture containing the Dynamo objects
and drag them into a new iFIX Dynamo Set.
Group tags are not upgraded – the Group Tag property of groups in 6.x pictures will be ignored when
creating the group in the new iFIX picture.
Tag Group conversion – the first character of tag groups will be changed from a `?' to a `@' to correspond
with the new iFIX naming convention.
Picture properties Grid Settings and Security Area are not converted.
Numeric data entry is the only type converted – Datalinks using other types of data entry will be
converted to datalinks using numeric data entry. iFIX does not convert any other types of data entry
for datalinks. This includes slider entry, pushbutton entry, and ramp value entry.
Datalink Setpoints are converted to comments within VBA click events – to complete the conversion,
examine the comments and add the appropriate VBA code to handle these parameters.
DataLink SQL open script is not converted.
DataLink Controllable property is not converted – there is no mapping property in iFIX.
Font size may appear 1 pt smaller – in some cases font size will appear 1 pt smaller in the new iFIX
picture.
Text on buttons may be clipped – since the space allowed for text in 6.x buttons and iFIX buttons differs
greatly, text in iFIX buttons may be clipped. You can fix this by making the button bigger or making
the font smaller.
Flash on new alarm for datalinks is not converted.
101
Creataing Pictures
Reusing FIX32 Command Buttons in iFIX
When converting pictures created in FIX32 and earlier, command buttons are converted automatically to bitmap
buttons in iFIX. Because the caption of the new buttons is a bitmap instead of text, keep the following in mind:

To avoid distortion of the caption text, create a new iFIX button instead of resizing a bitmap button.

To use a picture containing a bitmap button on screens of different resolutions, convert a new picture
for each resolution.

To make a bitmap button always appear on top, stack the button object so that it is on the top.
Using Picture Caching
iFIX provides a picture caching capability that optimizes the performance of the WorkSpace when opening
pictures by eliminating the need for picture files to be read from the disk drive. Instead, pictures that have been
previously opened and closed are held in memory and, when reopened, are read from memory.
With picture caching, you can:

Preload pictures that will always remain in the cache.

Set the number of pictures to be reopened from the cache.
There are two types of pictures you can cache: run-time pictures and preload pictures. Run-time pictures are
loaded into the cache when they are closed. When the number of cached pictures exceeds the cache size setting,
the oldest picture is dropped from the cache and is replaced with the most recently closed picture. Preload
pictures are loaded when the WorkSpace is started and have a property of AlwaysLoaded. They are never
dropped from the cache while you are in run mode.
In a new installation of iFIX, picture caching is enabled by default with a picture count of five. In upgrades to
iFIX 2.5 and later, picture caching is not enabled by default.

System Requirements

Enabling Picture Caching

Preloading Pictures

Run-time Pictures
System Requirements
System requirements for picture caching depend on the number of pictures you choose to cache.
The current version of iFIX requires 128 megabytes of physical memory to run. However, as your cache size
increases, your memory requirements will increase. Use the following as a guide for memory requirements
when caching pictures. Memory should increase:
102
Using Key Macros

2 to 3 times the file size for each picture that does not include bitmaps and controls.

3 to 4 times the file size for each picture that includes bitmaps and controls.
For example, a 2 megabyte file that does not include bitmaps and controls requires a 4 to 6 megabyte increase in
memory. A 2 megabyte file that includes bitmaps and controls requires an increase in the memory of 6 to 8
megabytes.
Enabling Picture Caching
You must enable picture caching in order to preload pictures into the cache or to cache pictures at run time. You
enable picture caching in the User Preferences Dialog box, shown in the figure below.
If you disable picture caching, the most recently used cache is disabled, no pictures will be preloaded, and all
pictures will be fully closed when the file is closed.
NOTE: Picture caching, by default, is disabled when you upgrade from a previous version of iFIX to the
current version. If you are installing iFIX 2.6 or later for the first time, picture caching, by default, is enabled,
with a default cache size of five.
Most users will not notice any difference in the way the system behaves with cache enabled. However, if you
have done extensive VBA scripting in your application, there will be a few minor differences in the system
behavior. If you are upgrading from a previous version of iFIX, you should review and understand these
changes before enabling picture caching. See the Making Changes to Pictures at Run Time section of this
document for more information.
103
Creataing Pictures
Preloading Pictures
You can preload frequently used pictures directly into the picture cache when the WorkSpace starts in run
mode. In order to do this, you need to modify the FixUserPreferences.ini file, located in the C:\Program
Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\LOCAL directory. Use a text editor to modify this file. The following two
configuration parameters are located in the [AppPreloadPicturePreferences] section of the
FixUserPreferences.ini file. These parameters are required to preload pictures.
TotalPreloadPicturePath=<nn>
PicturePath#0=Firstpicture.grf
104
Using Key Macros
TotalPreloadPicturePath indicates the number of pictures you want to preload in the cache. PicturePath#N
indicates the file name of each picture you want to preload. For example, to preload two pictures into the cache,
enter the following lines to the FixUserPreferences.ini file:
[AppPreloadPicturePreferences]
TotalPreloadPicturePath=2
PicturePath#0=Firstpicturename.grf
PicturePath#1=Secondpicturename.grf
NOTE: The WorkSpace will only preload pictures when picture caching is enabled and the Start WorkSpace in
Run mode check box is enabled. WorkSpace does not preload pictures when switching from configure mode to
run mode.
Ensure that the number of pictures you enter to preload in the FixUserPreferences.ini file does not exceed the
Cache Size you have set in the WorkSpace User Preferences dialog box.
Save and close the FixUserPreferences.ini file after making your changes. Restart the WorkSpace to load the
new preferences settings.
Preloaded pictures are designated as always loaded by definition. They will not be dropped from the cache
while you are in run mode. Displays are preloaded only when the WorkSpace is initially started in run mode.
Run-time Pictures
At run time, you can also cache pictures that you open and then close.
When picture caching is enabled, the WorkSpace maintains a list of the most recently closed files. When you
close a file, that document is placed on the list of most recently closed files. If this list of closed files exceeds
the cache size, the first file closed is unloaded from memory and completely closed. However, preloaded
pictures are not dropped from the cache. You can view a list of cached pictures by pressing Ctrl + Shift + C.
The following figure shows the picture caching process.
105
Creataing Pictures
How Picture Caching Works
NOTE: You cannot delete a picture that is closed into the cache. You must wait until that picture is dropped or
flushed from the cache before deleting.
Picture Caching only functions when the WorkSpace is in run mode. If you switch to configure mode, the most
recently closed cache is flushed and any files in the cache are fully closed. All preloaded pictures in the loaded
state are then closed. If you switch back to run mode, pictures in the preload list are not loaded into memory.
If you disable picture caching, the most recently used cache is disabled, no pictures are preloaded, and all
pictures are then fully closed when the file is closed.
Making Changes to Pictures at Run Time
During run time, VBA allows you to write a script to change the properties of any object contained in a picture.
These changes are not written to the stored file, but are temporary changes made to the displayed picture in
memory. If picture caching is disabled, those changes are gone when you close the picture.
When you enable picture caching, some of your run-time changes are preserved while your picture remains
cached. If you change any object properties (such as foreground color) through VBA or make changes to a chart
106
Using Key Macros
through a chart dialog in run mode, you will still see those changes when you close the picture and reopen it
from cache. However, your changes are not written to the stored file, and once the picture drops from the cache,
your changes are lost. If you use scripts to make those changes, you should retest your displays with caching
enabled.
All other behavior involving tag groups, or changing alarm summary sort or filter configurations, are not
preserved regardless of whether picture caching is enabled or disabled.
Disabling Picture Caching for Individual Pictures
iFIX also allows you to disable picture caching for individual pictures so that changes made during run time
will not persist when the picture is reopened.
To disable picture caching for a picture:
1.
Right-click the picture name in the system tree, or right-click any area in the picture outside of an
object to display the pop-up menu.
2.
Select Picture... to display the Edit Picture dialog.
3.
Check the Disable caching for this picture check box from the Edit Picture dialog box.
Resizing Pictures
You can resize a picture in configure mode, so that every time you go into run mode the picture appears in the
location you want it to.
NOTE: The type of coordinate system (Logical or Enhanced) is not relevant.
In addition, you can resize a picture through VBA. For instance, you can create a push button with code behind
it that, when clicked in run-mode, resizes the picture. The steps below provide more details.
To resize a picture in configure mode:
1.
In Classic view, in configure mode, on the WorkSpace menu, click User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, in the Settings list, click User Preferences.
2.
Click the Picture Preferences tab.
3.
In the Window Properties area, make sure that the Title and Resizable check boxes are selected.
NOTE: After you resize the picture, you can enable these options again, if required.
4.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click Full Screen.
-Or-
107
Creataing Pictures
In Ribbon view, in the WorkSpace group, click Full Screen.
5.
Click and drag a corner or side of the picture to resize it.
6.
When the picture is in the desired location, right-click it and select Update Window Location.
7.
Click Close Full Screen.
8.
Save the picture.
TIP: For Logical Coordinate System pictures only, if you want to restore the default picture height
and width values, in configure mode, right-click the picture and select Full View. You can now repeat
steps 4-8 to resize the picture again. (Full View is not available for Enhanced Coordinate System
pictures.)
9.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, select Run.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Run.
10. Confirm that your picture appears in the desired location.
To use VBA to resize the current picture in run mode:
1.
In the WorkSpace configure mode, add a push button to your picture.
2.
Right-click the push button, and select Edit Script. The Microsoft Visual Basic Editor appears.
3.
Cut and paste the following code:
Private Sub Command1_Click()
Dim objFIXPic As Object
Dim dTopPct As Double
Dim dLeftPct As Double
Dim dHeightPct As Double
Dim dWidthPct As Double
Set objFIXPic = CreateObject("Workspace.Application")
dTopPct = 20
dLeftPct = 20
dHeightPct = 50
dWidthPct = 50
objFIXPic.ActiveDocument.Page.SetWindowLocation TopPct, dLeftPct, dHeightPct,
dWidthPct, True
Set objFIXPic = Nothing
End Sub
NOTE: You can modify the dTopPct, dLeftPct, dHeightPct, and dWidthPct resize percentage values to
the values specific to the picture you want to resize.
108
Using Key Macros
4.
Close the Microsoft Visual Basic Editor.
5.
Save your picture.
6.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, select Run.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Run.
7.
Click the button to resize your picture.
Maximizing the WorkSpace on Open
If you want to be sure that the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace always opens maximized, you can add this setting to the
WorkSpace.ini file's [Misc] section:
AlwaysShowMaximized=1
If you later change the value from a 1 to a 0, or remove the line altogether, the iFIX WorkSpace starts in the
mode it was last open in. For instance, if the window was minimized and you shut it down, when you restart the
WorkSpace it will re-appear minimized. It does not matter if the WorkSpace was last in configure mode or run
mode.
To configure the iFIX WorkSpace to always open maximized:
1.
Shut down the WorkSpace.
2.
In Notepad or another text editor, open the WorkSpace.ini file in the iFIX LOCAL folder. If you
installed iFIX to the default location, you can find this file in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy
iFIX\LOCAL location.
3.
In the [Misc] section, add this line:
AlwaysShowMaximized=1
4.
Save the file.
5.
Restart the WorkSpace.
Changing Picture Settings in the FixUserPreferences.ini File
iFIX provides you with the FixUserPreferences.ini file that allows you to make changes to user preferences that
are not available on the User Preferences dialog box, from the iFIX WorkSpace. You can also make changes to
preferences that are available on the dialog box. The FixUserPreferences.ini file is installed with iFIX and is
located in the LOCAL folder of the iFIX install directory. When you install iFIX to the default location the path
is: C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy\iFIX\LOCAL.
109
Creataing Pictures
You can also add user preferences to this file to control certain behavior.
Use caution when making changes to the FixUserPreferences.ini file, and ensure that you are changing the
correct settings. You must shut down iFIX before making your changes to this file, and then restart it for the
new settings to take effect.
Configuring Whether a Prompt Appears on Close for Changes in Run Mode
If you make a change to a picture in run mode, when you attempt to close the picture, a prompt appears warning
you that your changes will not be saved. You can disable this warning prompt with the
RuntimePictureChangeSaveWarning=0 setting in the [AppRunPreferences] section of the
FIXUserPreferences.ini file.
Run mode changes can be made on-the-fly (via scripting) such as with the BuildObject. By default, a warning
message about any changes appears when you close the picture in run mode. You may want to close this picture
without user interaction, and not display this message.
To allow suppress this warning message, change the RuntimePictureChangeSaveWarning=1 setting (the
default) to RuntimePictureChangeSaveWarning=0 in the FixUserPreferences.ini file. By default, this message is
enabled (set to 1).
To disable the Save prompt that displays when you close a picture with changes in run mode:
1.
Shut down iFIX if you haven't already done so.
2.
Open the FixUserPreferences.ini file in a text editor, such as Notepad.
3.
Find the RuntimePictureChangeSaveWarning=1 setting under the [AppRunPreferences] section.
4.
Change the setting to 0.
5.
Save the FixUserPreferences.ini file and restart iFIX.
Changing the Nudge Settings
The nudge settings determine the number of pixels or degrees your object will move, scale, or rotate. Each
action has both slow and fast settings. The setting is determined by whether you are using the SHIFT or CTRL
keys, a combination of both, or neither, depending on the action. The following table indicates which keys or
key combinations to use for these actions:
110
To perform the action...
Use the following keys...
SlowNudgeMoveOffset
The arrow keys.
FastNudgeMoveOffset
SHIFT
+ arrow keys
Using Key Macros
To perform the action...
Use the following keys...
SlowNudgeScaleOffset
CTRL
+ arrow keys
FastNudgeScaleOffset
CTRL
+ SHIFT + arrow keys
SlowNudgeRotateOffset
+ = Counter Clockwise
- = Clockwise
FastNudgeRotateOffset
SHIFT
+ rotate (+ or - )
NOTE: To perform either of the rotate actions, right-click the object and choose Rotate, then press either the
SHIFT or CTRL key and use the rotate handles that appear.
To change the nudge settings:
1.
Shut down iFIX if you haven't already done so.
2.
Open the FixUserPreferences.ini file in a text editor, such as Notepad.
3.
Find the [ShapePreferences2] section.
4.
Change the nudge settings, as required.
5.
Save the FixUserPreferences.ini file and restart iFIX.
Allowing a Group Click Event
iFIX provides you with the ability to group objects in a picture and treat that group as if it is a single object.
You can animate the group just like you can animate individual objects. By default, however, iFIX prevents
certain objects in a group from performing events that are defined in the Visual Basic Editor, such as a message
script. To allow all objects in a group to perform the desired events, change the PassControlClickEvent setting
to 1 in the [AppRunPreferences] section of the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
To allow a group click event:
1.
Shut down iFIX if you haven't already done so.
2.
Open the FixUserPreferences.ini file in a text editor, such as Notepad.
3.
Find the PassControlClickEvent=0 setting under the [AppRunPreferences] section.
4.
Change the setting to 1.
5.
Save the FixUserPreferences.ini file and restart iFIX.
111
Creataing Pictures
Disabling the Right-Click Menu
iFIX provides you with the ability to disable the right-click menu in the WorkSpace run mode. To disable the
right-click menu in run mode, change the DisableRuntimeRightClickMenu setting to 1 in the
[AppRunPreferences] section of the FixUserPreferences.ini file. By default, the right-click menu is enabled.
To disable the right-click menu in the WorkSpace:
112
1.
Shut down iFIX if you haven't already done so.
2.
Open the FixUserPreferences.ini file in a text editor, such as Notepad.
3.
Find the DisableRuntimeRightClickMenu=0 setting under the [AppRunPreferences] section.
4.
Change the setting to 1.
5.
Save the FixUserPreferences.ini file and restart iFIX.
Using Key Macros
Developing Objects in Pictures
iFIX gives you all the tools you need to create simple or complex pictures for your process environment. This
chapter gives you an overview of all the functionality available to you, and gives specific instructions on how to
perform various operations that help you expedite picture development.

Adding Objects to Pictures

Performing Basic Functions with Objects

Performing Advanced Functions with Objects

Creating Complex Objects
Adding Objects to Pictures
Using the Shapes toolbar, you can add an array of different objects to your picture. The following table shows
you which objects are available and how to add them using the toolbar buttons:
Shapes Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in
Ribbon view...
To add...
Double-click for
multiple
creation mode?
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Rectangle.
Rectangles.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Straight Line.
Straight lines.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Oval.
Ovals.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Arc.
Arcs (curved line
segments).
Yes
113
Creataing Pictures
Shapes Toolbar
Click this
button...
114
Which can also be accessed in
Ribbon view...
To add...
Double-click for
multiple
creation mode?
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Rounded Rectangle.
Rounded rectangles.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Polygon.
Polygons.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Polylines.
Polylines (two or more
connected line
segments).
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Chord.
Chords (a curved line
connecting a line
segment).
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Pie.
Pie shapes (wedges of a
circle).
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Shapes
group, click Shapes, and then click
Pipe.
Pipes.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click Text.
Text.
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the Charts
group, click desired chart type.
Charts (compound
objects made of lines,
text, and rectangles).
Yes
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click
Bitmap.
Bitmaps.
Yes
Using Key Macros
Shapes Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in
Ribbon view...
To add...
Double-click for
multiple
creation mode?
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, in the
Objects/Links list, click Datalink.
Data links.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click Alarm
Summary.
Alarm Summaries.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click Push
Button.
Push Buttons.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click
Variable
Variable objects.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click OLE
object.
OLE objects.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click Timer.
Timer Objects.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click Event.
Event Objects.
No
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click
Current Time.
Current Time (a text
object).
Yes
115
Creataing Pictures
Shapes Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in
Ribbon view...
To add...
Double-click for
multiple
creation mode?
From the Insert tab, in the
Objects/Links group, click
Objects/Links, and then click
Current Date.
Current Date (a text
object).
Yes
By default, all of the buttons in the above table appear in the Toolbox when you create or open a picture. If you
have the Toolbox enabled, you can add objects to your pictures by clicking the appropriate button on the
Toolbox.
TIP: To add multiple objects of the same type, double-click the appropriate button on the Toolbox. When you
are done adding the objects, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in the Toolbox.
For information on which buttons allow multiple creation, refer to the previous table.
A powerful feature of iFIX is the capability to add ActiveX controls (OCXs) to your pictures. ActiveX controls
provide functionality to your pictures without your having to write complex code. Because of its open
architecture, iFIX allows you to drag and drop any third-party object (OCX) into your displays.
NOTE: Because third-party objects are self-contained applications in themselves, you should be aware that
problems that occur from these components are beyond the control of GE Intelligent Platforms. However, iFIX
does provide Secure Containment, which seals off a crashed ActiveX control and allows iFIX to run normally.
Drawing Shapes
Once you select a shape (that is, a rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, line, polyline, polygon, arc, chord, pie, or
pipe), it is easy to add it to a picture.
Some shapes are drawn by defining a series of points using the mouse.
To draw an arc:
1.
In Classic view, click the Arc button on the Shapes toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Shapes group, in the Shapes gallery, click Arc.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
116
Position the cursor where you want the first point of the arc to appear and click.
Using Key Macros
3.
Move the cursor to define the width of the arc and click the mouse. An arc appears on the screen.
4.
Move the cursor until the height of the arc is the correct size and click.
See the following illustration.
Similarly, you draw a chord as illustrated in the following figure:
And you draw a pie as illustrated in the following figure:
Adding a Chart
You can choose to add either a Standard Chart or an Enhanced Chart to your picture. To add a chart to your
picture, click the desired chart button on the Shapes toolbar (Classic view) or on the Insert tab, in the Charts
group, select the desired Chart (Ribbon view). If you have the Toolbox enabled, click the button on the
Toolbox. The cursor becomes a plus sign. Click and drag the mouse in an area of the picture where you want to
place the chart. A chart appears on the screen, and also in the system tree.
By double-clicking the chart, you can define properties for the chart using the Chart Properties dialog box. The
properties available depend on the data source selected. Chart Properties are detailed fully in the Trending
Historical Data manual.
117
Creataing Pictures
Trending Real-time Data in Your Picture
If you choose a real-time data source, certain properties are enabled or disabled, as shown in the following
table. Real-time data sources can also include T_DATA from Trend blocks.
Real-Time Data Source Chart Properties
Property
Property State
Fixed Date
Disabled
Fixed Time
Disabled
Days Before Now
Disabled
Duration Before Now
Disabled
Duration
Enabled
Interval
Disabled
To plot real-time data, you must define a real-time data source. To do this, for Standard Charts, click the Chart
tab, for Enhanced Charts, click the Data Sources tab, on the Chart Customization dialog box and, at the top of
the tabbed page, enter a real-time data source in the Data Source field. Use Data Server.node.tag.field format.
You can also use a local node alias by selecting THISNODE from the list. Alternately, you can click the
Browse button to display the Expression Builder, which allows you to search global data sources through a data
source browser. To learn how to use the Expression Builder and define data sources, refer to the Animating
Object Properties chapter.
Once you have defined a real-time data source, you can define how the data is presented. For Standard Charts,
using the data area of the Chart tabbed page, you can configure pen properties, pen styles, X and Y axis
properties, time ranges, grid styles. You can also define general chart properties such as a name and description,
scroll direction, attributes, and appearance. For Enhanced Charts, you can use the multiple tabs available to
configure every attribute of the chart's appearance and data representation.
For Standard Charts only, default settings for charts are set in the Standard Chart Preferences tabbed page of the
User Preferences dialog box. For more information on using charts and applying chart properties, refer to the
Trending Historical Data manual.
How F_CV Real-time Values Are Trended
The duration and number of samples determine how F_CV real-time values are trended in a chart. For example,
if you set the number of samples to 600 and the duration to one minute, then the chart displays a value for every
second. In this example, the trend array holds a maximum of 600 seconds of data, or 10 minutes. You can
118
Using Key Macros
change the duration to any value under or equal to 10 minutes, and the trend line continues to be plotted.
However, if you change the duration to a value greater than 10 minutes the trend is cleared, and the data is
plotted based upon the new duration and number of samples. The following table illustrates this example, and
provides a few more.
NOTE: Be aware that if you want to change the duration from a small value, such as 10 minutes, to larger
value, such as an hour, and back, then it is highly recommended that you use either ETR (Extended Trend
Blocks) or Historical data.
Duration
Number of
Samples
Then the Trend Array Contains...
1 minute
600 samples
10 minutes of data, 1 value for every second
5 minutes
600 samples
10 minutes of data, 1 value for every second
10 minutes
600 samples
10 minutes of data,1 value for every second
1 hour
600 samples
1 hours of data, 1 value for every 6 seconds
6 hours
600 samples
1 hours of data, 1 value for every 36 seconds
12 hours
600 samples
1 hours of data, 1 value for every 72 seconds
24 hours
600 samples
1 hours of data, 1 value for every 144 seconds
Adding Text
A text object is a collection of characters within an invisible rectangle. To add text to your picture, click the
Text button on the Shapes toolbar (Classic view) or on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, on the
Objects/Links list click Text (Ribbon view). If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The default font properties for text are defined on the Shape Preferences tabbed page of the User Preferences
dialog box. To change a font option for new objects, make the appropriate selections in the Font area. For
example, to change the size of the font, enter a point size in the Font Size field.
If you use text with an italic font style in your pictures, the text may not always appear as expected. If the text
appears clipped in your picture, use the handles to resize the text block. Selecting a different font may also
correct this problem.
119
Creataing Pictures
Text within a text object can be edited by:

Double-clicking the text object and placing the cursor where you want to make your edits.

Right-clicking the text object and selecting Edit Text from the pop-up menu that appears.

Editing the Caption property. For instance, you can do this by right-clicking the text object and
selecting Property Window. In the Caption field, enter your changes and press Enter.
For more information on Shape Preferences, such as how to change the text color, style, and size, refer to the
Coloring and Styling Objects section.
Adding a Bitmap Image
With iFIX, it's easy to work with bitmaps that were created using other applications. By simply clicking the
Bitmap button, you can place a bitmap of your choice wherever you want in your picture, and then work with
the image like you would any other object. For more information on working with bitmaps, refer to the Working
with Bitmaps section.
Adding Data Links
Data links give operators a flexible tool for displaying text and values from process databases. To add a data
link to your picture, click the Datalink Stamper button on the Shapes toolbar. In Ribbon view, from the Insert
tab, in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list, click Datalink. If the Toolbox is enabled, click the
button on the Toolbox. In the Datalink dialog box, specify your choices for the following settings:

Access to any data source.

Data entry.

Flexible display formatting.

Definable output error messages.
After completing the Datalink dialog box, click the mouse in the location where you want to place the data link.
Once you add a data link, you can access the Datalink dialog box by selecting DataLink Custom Page from the
data link's pop-up menu.
The initial size of the data link is determined both by the formatting settings you choose in the Datalink dialog
box and by the font settings in the User Preferences dialog box. To change the size of the font, access the User
Preferences dialog box through the WorkSpace menu (Classic view) or from the Home tab, in the WorkSpace
group, in the Settings list, click User Preferences (Ribbon view), and set the font properties on the Shape
Preferences tab. Once you have created a data link, you can resize it by clicking on it and dragging the handles,
and reformat it using the Datalink dialog box.
NOTE: If you add a data link by selecting Datalink from the Insert menu (Classic view) or from the Insert tab,
in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list and clicking Datalink (Ribbon view), you first sketch the
location and size of the data link, then complete the Datalink dialog box. In this case the size of the data link is
determined by your initial sketch.
120
Using Key Macros
Entering a Data Source
You can display data from any valid data source using your data link. In the Source field, enter the data source
you want. You can also select from the Expression Builder by clicking the Browse button.
Enabling Data Entry
To allow operators to enter data into the data link, select In-Place from the Type field's drop-down menu. This
lets you enter data in-place, meaning you can display data as you enter it in the Type field. In the run-time
environment, data entered is written to the appropriate database tag during the next scan cycle. When you
enable data entry, you can require that operators confirm that they want this data to be written to the database
before it is sent. To require confirmation, select the Confirm check box.
To help you configure data, use the Data Entry Expert. This Expert lets you determine which data source the
data link receives its data from, and how that data appears.
If you use the Data Entry Expert on a data link, you must set the Data Entry Type value in the Datalink dialog
box to None. If you set this value to In-Place, unexpected results may occur.
Use the Data Entry Expert to create the following types of data entry:

Numeric/Alphanumeric

Slider

Pushbutton

Ramp
NOTE: Do not name your picture after one of Data Entry Expert types. Picture names can conflict with the
script variable names used with the Data Entry Expert. For instance, if you name your picture Pushbutton.grf
and also use the Pushbutton data entry method, when you enter run mode, an error message appears. If you
rename the picture, Pushbutton1.grf, the error message does not appear, since the picture name is now different
than the data entry method.
You can access the Data Entry Expert from the Task Wizard. For more information on the fields of the Expert,
click the Help button. For more information on using the Task Wizard, refer to the Using Experts and the Task
Wizard section in the Understanding iFIX manual.
You can also create custom types of entry in VBA. For more information on VBA, refer to the Writing Scripts
manual.
Formatting Data
iFIX lets you format the data you want to display in the data link. First, you must choose one of the following
types of data to display:
 Raw
 Numeric
 Alphanumeric
121
Creataing Pictures
To display data in its raw (or native, C code) format, select the Raw Format check box. You can then edit the
format by entering a C format string in the Format field. You can also enter a string of any kind preceding the
raw format string (to introduce what the data string represents, for example).
To format numeric data, first select Numeric from the Type field's drop-down menu. Next, enter an integer from
0 to 7 to represent the:

Whole digits – the number of digits displayed before the decimal point.

Decimal digits – the number of digits displayed after the decimal point. This value is rounded off to fit
into the number of digits specified for the Data link.
The following table shows some examples of how formatted numbers affect the way the data link displays in
the run-time environment.
Whole Digits
Decimal Digits
Display at Run-time
2
4
12.1234
1
6
1.123456
6
1
123456.1
0
7
.1234567
7
0
1234567
NOTE: To format a data link to display scientific notation, first select a F_CV, E_CV or A_CV field, enable the
Raw Format check box, and specify %e in format field. F_CV and E_CV datalinks using %e raw format, by
default, display 6 places after the decimal point. To display more places after the decimal point, for example 15,
change %e to %1.15e. A_CV datalinks using %e raw format will always display 15 places after decimal point.
To display a leading zero in the link, use the F_CV field and the raw format similar to %02.2f.
To format alphanumeric (or text) data, first select Alpha-Numeric from the Type field's drop-down menu. Next,
enter in the appropriate fields the number of lines and the number of characters per line you want to display in
the Data link. You can also justify the data to the left, right, or center, by making the appropriate selection from
the Justify field.
Be aware that float point precision can differ between a datalink and what is shown in the Database Manager. In
order to synchronize the two, use the following .INI file setting in the FixUserPreferences.ini file in the iFIX
Local folder:
[AppRunPerferences]
AllowPrecisionAdjustment=0
122
Using Key Macros
A value of 0 indicates that there is no special precision adjustment for a datalink, and it will be the same
precision as the Database Manager displays. The default behavior is to allow datalink precision adjustment.
Using Tag Groups in Data Links
When using tag groups in data links and using raw format strings, you must be sure to match data types between
the values and the format string.
For example, if the tag used is going to be replaced by the value of Fix32.Thisnode.AI1.F_CV, the format string
must be %f, or some derivative (i.e. %7.2f). The default when entering a tag group is %s, or string. If you do
not adjust this and the types do not match, no formatting will occur and you will only get the value.
Configuring the Output Error Mode
The Error Configuration area of the Datalink dialog box lets you determine how error conditions are displayed
by the data link should they appear. You can configure the output to derive its value from:

An error table, or

The current value.
For more information on output values and definitions, refer to the Classifying Animations Errors section.
You can also display system information using the data link. To do this, add a data link to your picture as
described in this section. When selecting a data source, use the format FIX32.node:system:system field. This
data link can display a number of different system parameters of a particular node. Refer to the iFIX Database
Reference help for a list of system parameters.
Using the DataChange Event in a Data Link
If you are attempting to use the DataChange Event in a data link, you cannot create the VBA object (such as
Private Sub Format1_DataChange) by selecting Edit Script from the right-click menu.
To use the DataChange event with a data link, you must use the DataChange event with the Format child object.
To use the DataChange event with a data link:
1.
Create a data link.
2.
Open the VBA Editor.
3.
Type the following code and press ENTER:
Private Sub Format1_DataChange(ByVal DataValue As Variant, ByVal TimeStamp as
Date, ByVal Transition As Long, ByVal Reserved As Variant)
The VBA object gets created.
4.
Enter any desired code.
5.
Enter End Sub at the end of the subroutine.
NOTE: These steps assume that the Format object name is Format1.
123
Creataing Pictures
Adding Historical Datalinks to Pictures
Historical datalinks give operators a flexible tool for displaying historical values from process databases. In
addition to displaying the text and values from a process database, the Historical Datalink displays a time
stamp. The time stamp, in most cases, indicates the end time of the interval for the data collected. The only time
this is not true is when the historical datalink is configured to collect the high, low or current value for the
interval. In those cases, the time the value occurred is displayed, rather than the end time of the interval. The
value in the Historical Datalink is updated at the update rate specified during configuration.
To add a historical data link to your picture, in Ribbon view, from the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, in
the Objects/Links list, click Historical Datalink. In Classic view, click the Datalink Stamper button on the
Shapes toolbar. If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox. In the Historical Datalink dialog box,
specify your choices for the following settings:

Access to any data source (that contains Numeric data)

Start date and time

Historical mode

Duration

Update rate
After completing the Historical Datalink dialog box, click the mouse in the location where you want to place the
historical data link. After you add a historical data link, you can access the Historical Datalink dialog box by
selecting DataLink Custom Page from the historical data link's pop-up menu.
After you have created a data link, you can resize it by clicking on it and dragging the handles.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that Historical Datalinks or Historical Animations that use Sample or Interpolated
data from Proficy Historian may display a Lookup or Format error status of “Unknown”, when the local
computer's time is ahead of the Proficy Historian Server's time. (The “Unknown” Lookup or Format data
symbols are defined in the User Preferences, on the Animations Data Error Defaults tab.)
Entering a Data Source
You can display data from any valid data source using your historical data link. In the Source field, enter the
data source you want. You can also select from the Expression Builder by clicking the Browse button.
IMPORTANT:
124

Be aware that while Proficy Historian can store both String and Numeric data, the iFIX data system
can only retrieve Numeric data for historical datalinks.

Text block values, which the Proficy Historian data system does NOT support retrieving, are also not
supported as a the data source for historical datalinks in iFIX.
Using Key Macros
Configuring the Data to Display
Depending on the historical mode that you choose from the Historical Mode list, you can configure the start
date and time as well as the duration. If you choose the Current Value historical mode, you can only configure
the update rate for the historical data link. For all other historical modes, to determine the start date for the
historical data link, you can choose either a fixed, specific date, or a certain number of days before the current
date. Similarly, for the start time, you can choose either a fixed, specific time, or a certain number of hours
before the current time.
If you want to specify the time zone you can do so in the Time Zone area. To set the duration, or the time range
for the display, select the number of days, hours, minutes and seconds in the Duration area. To set the rate at
which the data is updated, set the update rate in the Update Rate area.
Configuring the Appearance of the Data
By default, the historical datalink displays with a timestamp. The timestamp is in the regional date and time
format configured for your system. If you do not want to display the timestamp with the data in any of your
historical datalinks, in the User Preferences dialog box, on the Shape Preferences tab, in the Historical Datalink
area, clear the Show Timestamp With Data check box. Changes made on the User Preferences dialog box only
apply to new Historical Datalinks and do not effect existing historical datalinks. If you only want to hide the
timestamp for the particular historical datalink you are configuring, clear the Show Timestamp With Data check
box on the Historical Datalink dialog box for that historical datalink. Or, from the Property Window, for the
Show Timestamp property, select False. This change applies only to the selected historical datalink and is not
subject to changes on the User Preferences dialog box.
The historical datalink can be animated. To animate the historical datalink, from the right-mouse menu, select
Animations. Complete your animation configuration selections on the Basic Animations dialog box.
Adding an Alarm Summary Object
Using Alarm Summary objects in your pictures gives you an effective way to monitor, acknowledge, sort, and
filter alarms using an OCX. You can color-code alarms by alarm status and priority in order to provide
operators with visual cues. You can also view how many alarm occurrences have taken place between alarm
acknowledgements (using the A_ALMOCCUR block field).
To add an Alarm Summary object to your picture, click the Alarm Summary button on the Shapes toolbar
(Classic view) or on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list, click Alarm Summary
(Ribbon View). If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The Alarm Summary object appears as a spreadsheet that you can modify in both the configuration and runtime environments. For example, you can resize the object using the object's handles, resize the columns in the
spreadsheet, or select rows in the spreadsheet in both environments. Additionally, you can perform many
functions using the object's pop-up menu.
Before you add an Alarm Summary object to a picture, verify that specific alarming services and networking
options are enabled. Refer to the Understanding the Alarm Summary Object section in the Implementing
Alarms and Messages manual for more information on using the Alarm Summary object.
NOTE: Inserting an alarm summary into a VBA form may cause unpredictable results when opening the
picture or switching environments from run-time to configuration or vice versa.
125
Creataing Pictures
Adding Push Buttons
Push buttons are a visually effective way to invoke an action in your picture. They can help you:

Toggle tags between Automatic and Manual mode.

Open and close pictures.

Toggle digital tags between OPEN and CLOSE.

Manipulate files.

Run other applications.
To add a Push Button to your picture:
In Classic view, click the Push Button button on the Shapes toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click Push
Button.
-OrIf you have the Toolbox enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
Adding Variable Objects
By clicking the Variable object button, you can assign a variable object to your picture or globally to the entire
system. The variable can represent different values at different times. The variables you assign include the
following:
 Boolean

Byte

Short

Long

Float

Double

String
In Classic view, to create a Variable object, click the Variable object button on the Shapes toolbar. In Ribbon
view, from the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list, click Variable. If the Toolbox is
enabled, click the button on the Toolbox. Next, complete the fields on the Create a Variable Object dialog box.
To name a variable object, enter the name in the Variable Name field. The name must be consistent with VBA
conventions. For more information on the various fields, click the Help button.
126
Using Key Macros
Adding OLE Objects
iFIX lets you insert a variety of OLE objects into your pictures. In Classic view, to insert an OLE object, click
the OLE Object button on the Shapes toolbar. In Ribbon view, you may also add an OLE object from the Insert
tab, in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list, by clicking OLE Object. If you have the Toolbox
enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
You have three choices on the Insert dialog box for inserting an OLE object: Create New, Create from File, and
Create Control.
Creating New OLE Objects
The Create New option button allows you to select from a list of objects registered on the local node. To add a
specific object, double-click it from the Object Type list box. For more information on adding controls, refer to
the Create a Control for an OLE Object section that follows.
Creating an OLE Object from a File
The Create from File option button lets you insert the contents of a file into a new object in your picture. You
can either select a file from the File field or click the Browse button to select a file from any available directory.
Creating a Control for an OLE Object
The Create Control option button allows you to add an ActiveX Control (OCX) to a new object in your picture.
Click Add Control to display a browse dialog where you can select an OCX installed on the local node. When
you select the file, a new object is inserted into your picture with the specified control. When you switch to the
run-time environment, you activate the object with the control you selected.
If the "Application Data Control" appears in the list of OLE objects you can insert into a picture, be aware that
you cannot use this control in a picture. This control is actually a control panel applet and is not insertable. Do
not use this control.
Adding a Third-Party Control
When adding third-party controls to a iFIX picture, some controls may display a message similar to the
following:
<OCX name>: License file for custom control not found...
The reason you get this message is because you are adding a control that you do not have the license for. We
recommend that you delete the control from your picture or install the license for this control and re-insert the
control.
127
Creataing Pictures
Animating the String Property of an OLE Control
To animate the String property of an OLE Control, you must ensure that the data source is of a string type by
doing one of the following:

Connecting directly to an A_field.

Using a Format object to convert a F_field to a string format.
List Box Example
To add a Microsoft list box to an iFIX picture in configure mode, use the OLE Object named Microsoft Forms
2.0 ListBox. The steps below describe how to do this.
To add a list box object to your iFIX picture:
1.
In Classic view, from the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click OLE Object.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
In the Object Type list, select the Microsoft Forms 2.0 ListBox.
3.
Click OK.
Combo Box Example
To add a Microsoft combo box to an iFIX picture in configure mode, use the OLE Object named Microsoft
Forms 2.0 ComboBox. The steps below describe how to do this.
To add a combo box object to your iFIX picture:
1.
In Classic view, from the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click OLE Object.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
In the Object Type list, select the Microsoft Forms 2.0 ComboBox.
3.
Click OK.
Adding a Proficy Portal Control
You can access Proficy Real-Time Information Portal displays from your iFIX picture using the Proficy Portal
ActiveX control. To insert this control in configure mode, on the Insert menu, select Proficy Portal Control.
You can configure the user name and password used to log in to the Proficy Portal server, so that the iFIX user
is not prompted for another password when switching from configure to run mode. You can also specify the
picture that you open in the Proficy Portal control, so that the iFIX run mode user does not have to remember
the location of the file or search for it.
128
Using Key Macros
IMPORTANT:

In run mode, iFIX only supports one open picture with a single Proficy Portal control in it. If you have
multiple instances of the same picture open and each instance includes a Portal Control, only the
active picture updates the Portal Control.

In run mode, you must be logged in as a Windows Administrator if you want to save an image, by
right-clicking the picture and selecting Save as Image.

For best performance in Windows Vista, it is recommended that when you insert a Proficy Portal
control into your iFIX picture, that you do not insert any other ActiveX controls into the same picture.
When using the Proficy Portal control in iFIX, you should configure your Proficy Portal users with limited
rights, because the control uses the PASSWORD parameter to build the URL to the Proficy Real-Time
Information Portal display. When using the PASSWORD parameter in Proficy Portal, the URL can be viewed
in the Internet Explorer history with a clear text password. For information on the PASSWORD parameter,
search for "PASSWORD Parameter" in the Proficy Real-Time Information Portal online help. For information
on creating users and limiting rights, search for the "Defining Roles and Users" and "Securing Proficy Portal"
topics in the Proficy Portal online help.
To add a Proficy Portal control to your iFIX picture:
1.
In Classic view, from the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click OLE Object.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
In the Object Type list, select ProficyPortalControl Control.
3.
Click OK. The Proficy Real-Time Information Portal control appears in the picture.
4.
Double-click the control to configure the properties.
5.
In the Server Name field, enter the name or IP address of the Proficy Portal server to which you want
to connect.
6.
In the Virtual Directory field, enter the virtual directory of the Proficy Portal server. By default, this
field is ProficyPortal.
NOTE: Be aware that the virtual directory is not validated until the display loads all the required
classes in run mode. That means, if you incorrectly enter the virtual directory information in configure
mode, a message does not appear and the information appearing in the display list does not get
updated accurately.
7.
In the User Name, enter the Proficy Portal user name. Include the domain name with the user name, if
one is required on the Proficy Portal Server.
If a domain name is required, in the User Name field, enter:
domain\user
where domain is the name of the domain and user is the name of the user.
129
Creataing Pictures
8.
In the Password field, enter the password.
NOTES:
9.

If you enter the User Name and Password, you will not be prompted to enter the user and
password again when you switch to configure mode.

The Show Displays button is not available until after you enter a Server Name, Virtual
Directory, and User Name.
Click Show Displays.
10. Select a display in the list box and click OK.
Be aware that the first time you go into run mode with this picture, you may be prompted to install the
Java Runtime installer. Click Install to continue. Follow the instructions on your screen. Restart your
computer after installing the Java Runtime update.
Adding a Proficy Plant Applications Dynamo
You can add a Proficy Plant Applications Dynamo to your pictures. The Dynamos simplify the process of
establishing a connection between the Proficy Plant Application Server and the Client as well creating a display
of the desired information, which is determined by the Dynamo selected.
To insert a Plant Applications Dynamo into a picture, first, locate the Dynamo Sets folder, which is in the iFIX
WorkSpace, under the System Tree. Expand the Dynamo Sets folder to display the Dynamo sets. The Plant
Applications Dynamos are in the Dynamos folder. Double-click on the PlantApplications Dynamo set. The
PlantApplications.fds file displays. From the file, drag and drop the desired Dynamo into your picture. Then,
complete the Dynamo configuration as prompted.
For More Information
Refer to the following table to determine where you can find more information about the Plant Applications
Dynamos.
130
Plant Applications Dynamo
For more information, in the Plant Applications ebook, refer to
the chapter:
DynamoPAALC
Autolog Display
DynamoPAALM
Alarm View Display
DynamoPADTN
Downtime Displays
DynamoPADTP
Downtime Displays
Using Key Macros
Plant Applications Dynamo
For more information, in the Plant Applications ebook, refer to
the chapter:
DynamoPAGVW
Genealogy View Display
DynamoPANPT
NonProductive Time View
DynamoPAOVW
Production Overview Display
DynamoPASOE
Sequence of Events Display
DynamoPASVW
Schedule View Display
DynamoPAWASTE
Waste Displays
DynamoPAWP
Waste Displays
Adding Timer Objects
By adding timer objects to your picture, you can perform an action based on a time interval that you specify.
Adding Event Objects
Event objects allow you to perform an operation based on an action that you specify. After you add an event
object, you must enter Visual Basic code to actually trigger the event.
Performing Basic Functions with Objects
The iFIX configuration environment provides many basic functions that you should be familiar with as you
develop objects. Once you learn how to perform a basic function on one object, you can perform that function
for all objects. These functions include:

Using shortcut keys

Selecting objects

Moving objects

Editing objects

Renaming objects

Changing Object Names in Scripts
131
Creataing Pictures
Using Shortcut Keys
By pressing a sequence of keys (referred to as shortcut keys), you can perform specific drawing operations that
help you quickly accomplish a task. The following table shows you what shortcut keys are available and their
function.
Shortcut Keys for Pictures
Press these keys
together...
To do the following...
<Alt> and <arrow key>
Move from one object handle to another around an object.
<Ctrl> and <arrow key>
Reshape an object by moving a point at an object handle.
+ or - from numeric pad
Rotate an object.
<Ctrl> and mouse click
Copy an object.
<Shift> and any of the
above
Accelerate the operation. For example: <Shift> plus <Ctrl> and an arrow key
quickly reshapes an object.
Specific uses of shortcut keys are included throughout this chapter.
Selecting Objects
You can select an object by clicking it with the mouse. Objects can be selected in the picture itself or in the
system tree. The selected object remains selected until you click another object. When you select an object, the
object's handles appear, permitting you to change the object's size. For more information on object handles,
refer to the Using Basic Drawing Tools section.
Selecting Multiple Objects
You can select multiple objects by enclosing two or more objects in a rectangle selector, or by selecting the first
object and then control-clicking additional objects. The following figure shows both methods.
132
Using Key Macros
Moving Objects
You can move any object in a picture by clicking and dragging it to its new location. To move an object
quickly, hold down the Shift key and click and drag the object.
Nudging
Sometimes you need to move an object more precisely to better control its placement in the picture. iFIX lets
you move an object in small increments using the arrow keys. This concept is called nudging.
To nudge an object, select it and press an arrow key. The object moves one pixel in the direction indicated by
the arrow key. By repeatedly pressing the arrow keys, you can slowly move the object to any desired location.
To accelerate the movements, press Shift and an arrow key simultaneously.
133
Creataing Pictures
Editing Objects
Naturally, you will occasionally make errors when you draw your pictures. Or, conversely, you may create
something that you want to apply everywhere in your picture In either case, iFIX's editing functionality lets you
quickly update how objects look in your picture.
A simple way to edit objects is to use the Edit Toolbar:
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in Ribbon
view...
To...
From the Home tab, in the Clipboard group,
click Cut.
Cut an object.
From the Home tab, in the Clipboard group,
click Copy.
Copy an object.
From the Home tab, in the Clipboard group,
click Paste.
Paste an object.
From the Home tab, in the Editing group,
click Undo.
Undo an actions performed on an
object.
By default, the buttons in the above table appear in the Toolbox when you create or open a picture. If you have
the Toolbox enabled, simply click the button on the Toolbox that corresponds to the editing function you want.
These functions, as well as the other available editing functions, are detailed in the following sections.
Cutting Objects
When you cut an object, you remove the object from the picture and place it into the Clipboard. Once an object
is in the Clipboard, it can be retrieved by pasting it back into the picture.
To cut an object, in Classic view, click the Cut button on the Edit toolbar. In Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in
the Clipboard group, click Cut. If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
Deleting Objects
Unlike cutting an object, deleting an object permanently removes it from the picture, unless you undo the
operation. To delete an object, select the object and press Delete. Or, select Delete from the object's pop-up
menu.
134
Using Key Macros
Copying and Pasting Objects
iFIX lets you copy objects in two ways: by placing a duplicate copy of the object into the clipboard for pasting
into your picture, or by duplicating the object. To copy an object, use one of the following methods:

Select Copy from the object's pop-up menu.

Select the object and click the Copy button on the Edit toolbar (Classic view).

Select Copy from the Clipboard group on the Home tab (Ribbon view).
To paste the object use one of the following methods:

Select Paste from the picture pop-up menu.

Click the button on the Toolbox, if the Toolbox is enabled.

Click Paste on the Edit toolbar (Classic view).

Click Paste from the Clipboard group on the Home tab (Ribbon view).
Duplicating an object is the easier method of copying and pasting, as it combines the copy-and-paste action into
one step by avoiding copying the object to the clipboard. To duplicate an object, select the object you want to
copy and select:

Duplicate from the object's pop-up menu, or

Duplicate from the Editing group on the Home tab (Ribbon view).
A second object with identical properties of the original appears slightly offset from the original. In the
following figure, the oval to the lower right is a duplicate of the original.
Duplicating an Object
You can copy any iFIX object using the copy or duplicate methods, including bitmaps and OCXs.
Undoing Actions
iFIX has a number of actions that cannot be undone. If a particular task cannot be undone, the Undo command
in the Edit menu is unavailable after you complete the action. For example, if you try to undo moving a chart,
the command is unavailable. Typically, actions involving Standard Charts and Historical Data Links cannot be
undone.
135
Creataing Pictures
Renaming Objects
When you add an object to your picture, iFIX automatically names the object in the system tree and numbers it
in the order it was created. For example, the second rectangle added to your picture would be titled Rect2 in the
Pictures directory. To more easily recognize your objects, or to assign a specific name that represents a common
property in your process, you can give it an alternate name.
To rename an object, right-click the object name in the system tree and select Property Window from the popup menu. Place the cursor in the second column of the Name row and enter a name. You can also select
Animations from the pop-up menu and rename the object from the Animations dialog box.
IMPORTANT: When you rename an object, avoid the use of underscores in the name. Underscores my cause
problems with scripts associated with the object. For more information, refer to the VBA Naming Conventions
section of the Writing Scripts manual.
Changing Object Names in Scripts
If you change the name of an object in a script, and then change the name back to its original, you may also
change the edit event that is called from that script. iFIX attempts not to use an older name that is already used
in a code or global module, but may not always be able to determine which names are valid.
Renaming Objects with Associated Script
By default, if you change the name of an object that has script associated with it, iFIX automatically renames
the event name and the references to the object within the script for that object. Therefore, you do not have to
explicitly do anything in your scripts to make these objects work.
However, if you are indirectly referencing any object names in a script from another object (for example, setting
Rect1.HorizontalPositional from the click event on Oval1), this reference is not renamed.
To rename these references:
1.
In the WorkSpace, perform a Find and Replace to rename all objects. We do not recommend that you
use the Include Scripts option in the Find and Replace feature from the Workspace to perform this
function. Doing so will replace objects that we are automatically renaming.
2.
In the Visual Basic Editor, perform a Find and Replace to change any specific object references.
NOTE: Renaming objects in the Property Window can greatly affect how your scripts run using VBA. For more
information, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
Performing Advanced Functions with Objects
Creating and manipulating objects in iFIX may often require more than cutting and pasting or moving static
objects around the screen. Although these are necessary functions, there are many advanced functions that you
can perform when developing or modifying your pictures or working with specific objects. These functions
include:
136
Using Key Macros

Manipulating objects using toolbars

Resizing objects

Rotating objects

Manipulating objects with points

Reshaping objects

Coloring and styling objects

Aligning objects

Flipping objects

Splitting Polylines and Pipes

Extending Lines to Intersect

Trimming Line at the Intersection

Converting Lines to Polyline

Making Lines Horizontal or Vertical

Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe

Modifying Pipe Characteristics

Adding and Deleting Connection Points

Using the Connector Tools
Manipulating Objects Using Toolbars
Using the Tools Toolbar
Many of the advanced functions described in this section can be performed using the Tools toolbar. The
following table shows you which functions are available and how they are used.
NOTE: Although hidden by default, you can access and use toolbars in Ribbon view. To access the Tools
toolbar in Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click Toolbars. You
can also open a toolbar from the WorkSpace tree, by opening the Project Toolbar Files folder and doubleclicking the toolbar you want to open.
Manipulating Objects in Pictures Using the Tools Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in the Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Left.
Align objects to the left
edge.
137
Creataing Pictures
Manipulating Objects in Pictures Using the Tools Toolbar
Click this
button...
138
Which can also be accessed in the Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Horizontal Center.
Align objects to each other's
horizontal center.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Right.
Align objects to the right
edge.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Top.
Align objects to the top
edge.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Vertical Center.
Align objects to each other's
vertical center.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click
Align, and then click Align Bottom.
Align objects to the bottom
edge.
From the Format tab in the Arrange group, click Group
Objects.
Group objects.
From the Format tab in the Arrange group, click
Ungroup Objects.
Ungroup objects.
From the Format tab in the Arrange group, click Bring
to Front.
Bring an object in front of
another.
From the Format tab in the Arrange group, click Send
to Back.
Send an object to the back
of another.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Space
Evenly, and then click Space Evenly Vertical.
Vertically space objects
evenly.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Space
Evenly, and then click Space Evenly Horizontal.
Horizontally space objects
evenly.
From the Format tab, in the Styles group, click Color.
Apply color to an object or
objects.
Using Key Macros
Manipulating Objects in Pictures Using the Tools Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in the Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Font group, click Font.
Apply a font to a text object
or objects.
From the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Grid,
and then click Toggle Grid.
Turn picture grid on and off.
From the Format tab, in the Picture group, click
Layers, and then click Set Layer.
Select layers for objects.
From the Format tab, in the Picture group, click
Layers, and then click Display Layer.
Display layers for selected
objects.
By default, all of the buttons in the above table appear in the Toolbox. If you have the Toolbox enabled, click
the button on the Toolbox.
Using the CAD Toolbar
The iFIX configuration environment provides a CAD (computer assisted drawing) toolbar with functions for
manipulating line and polyline objects. The following table shows you which functions are available and how
they are used.
Manipulating Objects in Pictures Using the CAD Toolbar
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Extend Lines.
Extend a selected line to intersect with
another selected line. Refer to
Extending Lines for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Trim Lines.
Trim the selected lines to the
intersection point. Refer to Trimming
Lines for more information.
139
Creataing Pictures
Click this
button...
140
Which can also be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Convert Lines to Polyline.
Convert the selected lines to a polyline
object. Refer to Converting Lines to
Polyline for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Make Lines Horizontal.
Change the selected line(s) to
horizontal. Refer to Making Lines
Horizontal or Vertical for more
information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Make Lines Vertical.
Change the selected line(s) to vertical.
Refer to Making Lines Horizontal or
Vertical for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Convert Line/Polyline to Pipe.
Convert the selected line(s) or
polyline(s) to a pipe object. Refer to
Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe
for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Styles
group, click Pipe Styles, and then click
Modify Pipe Characteristics.
Open the Modify Pipe Characteristics
dialog box for the selected pipes. Refer
to Modifying Pipe Characteristics for
more information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Add Connection Point.
Add a connection point to anchor the
selected connector to a shape. Refer to
Adding and Deleting Connection Points
for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Picture
group, click Drawing Tools, and then
click Delete Connection Point.
Delete a connection point anchor from
the selected connector. Refer to Adding
and Deleting Connection Points for
more information.
From the Format tab, in the Insert
group, click Connectors, and then click
Line Connector.
Draw a connecting line between two
shapes. Refer to Using the Connector
Tools for more information.
Using Key Macros
Click this
button...
Which can also be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
From the Format tab, in the Insert
group, click Connectors, and then click
Right Angle Line Connector.
Draw a right angle connecting line
between two shapes. Refer to Using the
Connector Tools for more information.
From the Format tab, in the Insert
group, click Connectors, and then click
Pipe Connector.
Draw a connecting pipe between two
shapes. Refer to Using the Connector
Tools for more information.
Using the Translation Toolbar
The iFIX configuration environment provides a translation toolbar with functions for exporting and importing
language files. The following table shows you which functions are available and how they are used.
Exporting and Importing Language Files using the Translation Toolbar
Click this button...
To...
Export the language file for the active picture.
Export separate language files for one or more pictures.
Import the translated language file for the active picture.
NOTE: Translation functions are not available from the Ribbon in Ribbon view. To access these functions, you
must display the Translation Toolbar. To access this toolbar in Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the
WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click Toolbars. You can also open a toolbar from the WorkSpace
tree, by opening the Project Toolbar Files folder and double-clicking the toolbar you want to open.
Resizing Objects
Objects other than lines, arcs, chords, and pies are automatically added with resize handles, and the default
operation available through their pop-up menu is Resize. Any object can be resized, including those with points.
However, for lines, arcs, chords, and pies, you must select Resize from the pop-up menu; it is not selected
automatically. When you resize an object, the object changes shape uniformly, without changing its shape.
NOTE: Ovals, rounded rectangles, charts, and bitmaps do not have the Resize option in the pop-up menu, but
do have resize handles, allowing you to resize these objects.
To resize an object, simply select the object and click and drag one of its handles.
141
Creataing Pictures
Rotating Objects
Objects naturally rotate around a center of rotation, designated by a dot enclosed with a circle. When you select
Rotate from an object's pop-up menu, the object displays its center of rotation, and rotation handles showing the
direction you can rotate the object. See the following figure.
Rotation Handles
To rotate an object around its center of rotation, click and drag one of the object's rotation handles. You can also
rotate an object using the Rotate Expert, which allows you to specify minimum and maximum angles of
rotation. To use the Expert, click the Rotate Expert from the Expert toolbar (Classic view) or on the Tools tab,
in the Animations group, click Rotate (Ribbon view) or the Toolbox, if enabled. For help on the fields of the
Expert, click the Help button.
iFIX also lets you rotate objects based on a selected center of rotation. To change the center of rotation, click
and drag the default center of rotation to the desired location in the picture. When you place the cursor over the
center of rotation, the cursor becomes a crosshair. Now when you click and drag one of the object's handles, the
object rotates around the new center of rotation. This is illustrated in the following figure.
Rotating an Object Around a New Center of Rotation
142
Using Key Macros
To relocate the object's default center of rotation, click the current center of rotation. The cursor becomes a
crosshair, and another crosshair appears at the object's center. Move the center of rotation over the crosshair
inside the object.
You can rotate any object except ovals, rounded rectangles, and charts.
NOTE: You can resize or rotate an object by animating it. For more information on animating an object, refer
to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
Manipulating Objects with Points
Some objects work a little differently than shapes such as rectangles and ovals, because they consist of a series
of connected points. Objects with points include polygons, polylines, lines, arcs, chords, and pie shapes. The
following figure illustrates the various types of objects with points.
Objects with Points
Reshaping Objects
When you create an object that consists of points, the object is added to your picture with reshape handles, and
the default operation available through the pop-up menu is Reshape. The following figure illustrates an object
with reshape handles. For polygons and polylines, objects are added with resize handles, because you do not
need reshape handles in order to reshape these objects. You can move the points in the object to reshape the
object at 15-degree increments.
143
Creataing Pictures
Reshape Cursors
For lines, arcs, chords, and pies, you can reshape the object by clicking and dragging a reshape cursor on the
object.
Adding and Deleting Points in Polygons and Polylines
To reshape polygons and polylines, you add points to or delete points from the shape. When you add a point,
the cursor changes to a circle with a plus sign inside. If the cursor is black, you can add a point to the polygon or
polyline. If the cursor is white, you cannot, because the cursor is not close enough to the object's edge. Move
the cursor closer until it turns black or becomes partially black, as the following figure shows.
Adding and deleting points can be performed using a circular cursor. A plus sign inside the circle indicates that
you are adding a point; a minus sign in the circle indicates that you are deleting a point.
Adding a Point
After you add a point, all the points in the object are displayed as small plus signs. You can click any of these
plus signs and drag the mouse to adjust the size or position of the point it represents. This, in turn, changes the
overall shape of the object.
Deleting a point is similar to adding a point, except the cursor changes to a circle with a minus sign inside. A
black cursor means you can delete a point; a white cursor means you cannot. When the cursor is white, move it
over the point you want to delete until it turns black. You can then delete that point. See the following figure.
144
Using Key Macros
Deleting a Point
Coloring and Styling Objects
Depending on the object you are working with, you can apply one or more of the following color and style
properties to that object:

Fade color

Foreground color

Background color

Background style

Edge color

Edge style

Edge width

Fill style
The relationship of these properties is depicted in the following figure.
145
Creataing Pictures
Object Color and Style Properties
The following table shows the color and style properties that can be changed for each object that you can add to
a picture.
Color and Style Properties
Object
Foreground
Color
Background
Color
Background
Style
Edge
Color
Edge
Style
Edge
Width
Fill
Style
Fade
Type
Current
Time
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Current
Date
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Rectangle
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Rounded
Rectangle
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
146
Using Key Macros
Color and Style Properties
Object
Foreground
Color
Background
Color
Background
Style
Edge
Color
Edge
Style
Edge
Width
Fill
Style
Fade
Type
Oval
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Chord
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Polygon
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Pie
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Pipe
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Arc
*
*
*
Line
*
*
*
Polyline
*
*
*
Text
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
OLE
Object
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Data
Link
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Push
Button
*
Alarm
Summary
Variable
Object
147
Creataing Pictures
Color and Style Properties
Object
Foreground
Color
Background
Color
*
*
Background
Style
Edge
Color
Edge
Style
*
*
*
*
Edge
Width
Fill
Style
Fade
Type
Timer
Object
Event
Object
Charts
Bitmaps
NOTE: If you apply an edge style other than solid, and then change the edge width to a value greater than 1,
the edge style will not appear as defined in the Properties Window. This is because Microsoft Windows does not
permit edge styles to be applied to edge widths greater than 1. Therefore, make sure your edge widths are no
greater than 1 for lines that are not solid.
Selecting Object Color and Style Properties
To select or change object properties for a shape, select the shape and do one of the following:

Select a property from the object's pop-up menu.

Select the object and then select the property from the Object menu.

Select a property from the Shape Preferences dialog box.

Change a property value in the Properties Window.

Animate the object.
To set a property using the object pop-up menu, right-click the object in the picture (or by clicking the name in
the system tree) and select the property from the pop-up menu. For more information on the pop-up menu and
the options you have for each property, refer to the Using the Object Pop-up Menu section.
Depending on the object you are working with, specific property options are also available under the Object
menu. To access these properties, select the object, and then select the appropriate property from the Object
menu. When you do not have an object selected, the Object menu is disabled.
The following table lists the properties that are available from the Shape Preferences tabbed page on the User
Preferences dialog box. This dialog box displays the default property value for new objects, unless that value is
changed by any of the means outlined in this section.
148
*
Using Key Macros
Shape Preferences
Preference
Function
Color
Applies color properties to objects.
Options

Fade Color

Foreground

Background

Edge
For more information on selecting
colors, refer to the Working with
Color section.
Font
Applies a font to text.

Name

Size

Style
For more information on selecting
colors, refer to the Adding Text
section.
Edge Style
Edge Width
Applies an edge style to lines in objects.
Applies an edge width to lines in objects.

Solid

Dash

DashDot

DashDotDot

Dot

Null

Inside Frame
Any width, entered in pixels.
NOTE: Edge widths do not
autoscale.
149
Creataing Pictures
Shape Preferences
150
Preference
Function
Fill Style
Applies a fill style to shapes.
Hit Test Size
With Click and Stick enabled, determines
the minimum distance the cursor can be
from a shape before the shape can be
selected (known as a hit test).
Background Style
Applies a background style to objects.
Blend Percent
Applies a percentage of blending between
the foreground color and the fade color.
Fade Type
Applies a fade type to shapes.
Thickness
Applies a thickness to pipe objects.
Elbow Style
Applies an elbow style to pipe objects.
Options

CrossHatch

Diagonal CrossHatch

Downward Diagonal

Gradient

Hollow

Horizontal

Solid

Upward Diagonal

Vertical
Any logical units.

Opaque

Transparent
Any number from 0 through 100.

Concentric

Linear

Reflected

Radial
Any thickness from 10 through 300
pixels.

Round

Square
Using Key Macros
Shape Preferences
Preference
Function
Start Cap
Applies a cap style to the beginning of pipe
objects.
End Cap
Remove Leading
and Trailing
Spaces
Applies a cap style to the end of pipe
objects.
Removes extra spaces when Data links are
displayed in the run-time environment.
Options

Round

Square

Horizontal Diagonal

Vertical Diagonal

Round

Square

Horizontal Diagonal

Vertical Diagonal

Selected (default)

Cleared
For more information on selecting properties using the Properties Window, refer to the Controlling Object
Properties chapter. You can also dynamically change the color, fill, and edge styles of an object by animating it.
For more information on animations, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
Aligning Objects
To help create and maintain attractive pictures, you can align objects to a grid or in relation to each other. The
following sections show you how to align objects in your pictures.
Aligning Objects to the Grid
Each picture maintains an invisible grid that you can use to align objects precisely as you create them. By
enabling the Snap to Grid function, you can align objects with minimal effort, as objects stick (or snap) to the
nearest grid point. When this function is disabled, you can align objects visually by displaying the grid and
moving objects with the mouse, or by selecting the object you want to snap to a grid point and in Classic View,
selecting Snap Objects to Grid from the Format menu. In Ribbon view, select the object, and on the Format tab
in the Arrange group, in the Grid List, click Snap Objects to Grid.
When you display the grid, an evenly-spaced array of dots appear in the background of the picture. These dots
represent the intersection of the grid lines, measured in pixels.
The Grid Settings dialog box lets you quickly set your options for using a grid. You can elect to show the grid,
enable the Snap to Grid function, and define the grid's spacing using this dialog box. In Classic view, you can
also select Snap to Grid from the Format menu, without using the Grid Settings dialog box. In Ribbon view, you
151
Creataing Pictures
can enable the Snap to Grid function from the Format tab, in the Arrange group, on the Grid list, by clicking
Snap to Grid. If enabled, the Snap to Grid function works whether or not you display the grid. To disable Snap
to Grid, deselect the Snap to Grid check box on the Grid Settings dialog box.
If enabled, the Snap to Grid function works whether or not you display the grid. To disable Snap to Grid,
deselect the Snap to Grid check box on the Grid Settings dialog box.
Default settings for Grid Enable and Snap to Grid can be entered in the Picture Preferences tabbed page of the
User Preferences dialog box.
NOTE: Snap to Grid does not work by nudging objects. You must use the mouse.
The following illustration shows an object moved with the grid displayed and Snap to Grid enabled. The box to
the lower left shows the outline of the object as it is being moved to that position. Notice that the object sticks to
the grid points.
Aligning Objects to the Grid
Aligning Objects to Each Other
IMPORTANT: You can also align two or more objects in relation to each other using the Align buttons on the
Tools toolbar or the Toolbox, if enabled. When using these buttons, you can vertically align the top, bottom, or
center of the objects and horizontally align the left, right, or center of the objects, as the following figure shows.
In Ribbon view, you can also align objects using options from the Align list, in the Arrange group in the Format
tab.
152
Using Key Macros
Original Picture
Horizontal
Alignment
Vertical
Alignment
Aligning Objects in Relation to Each Other
Spacing Objects in a Vertical or Horizontal Line
Another way you can align objects is to space them. In Classic view, you can space two or more objects
vertically or horizontally with the Space Evenly Vertical and Space Evenly Horizontal buttons on the Tools
toolbar. In Ribbon view, you may access these options on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, in the Space
list. Both methods create an equal amount of spacing between each object; the difference is that vertical spacing
creates rows, and horizontal spacing creates columns. Both types of alignment are illustrated in the following
figure.
153
Creataing Pictures
Vertical Spacing
Horizontal Spacing
Positioning and Scaling Objects
Another way to align objects in your picture is to position them. Positioning places the object where you want
it, based on either relative or absolute alignment and the horizontal or vertical axis. In Classic view, you can
position your objects using the Position Expert located on the Experts toolbar, or in Ribbon view from the
Tools tab, in the Animations group, click Animations. If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the
Toolbox. For help on the Expert fields, click the Help button on the Expert.
Alternately, you can scale an object. Scaling actually changes the dimensions of the object's height or width, as
you specify. To scale an object, use the Scale Expert located on the Experts toolbar or the Toolbox, if enabled,
or in Ribbon view from the Tools tab, in the Animations group, click Animations. For help on the Expert fields,
click the Help button on the Expert.
Flipping Objects
One simple way to change the way your objects appear in relation to each other is to flip them. When you flip
an object, the object reflects along its vertical or horizontal axis and reappears as a mirror image of the original.
154
Using Key Macros
There are two ways to flip an object. You can flip an object simply by dragging a handle of an object from one
side to its opposite side. The drawback to this approach is that it also stretches the object. The following figure
shows a manually-flipped object that was accidentally reshaped.
Flipping Objects Manually
A more effective way to flip an object is to use the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical method. This method flips
the object while maintaining its original size and shape. The following figure illustrates this effect.
Flipping Objects Effectively
Splitting Polylines and Pipes
After you have created a polyline or pipe, you may decide that it is not exactly the shape you want. Or, you may
want to insert another shape so that the polyline (or pipe) flows into and out of the new shape; for example, a pipe
flowing in one end of a tank and out the other end.
You can split a polyline or pipe into two or more objects. The following sections show you how it's done.
155
Creataing Pictures
Split Polyline
Figure 1 shows the selected polyline with reshape handles. In Figure 2, the arrow points to the
cursor, which turns black when it is close to the polyline.
splitting
Figure 3 shows that the polylines still appear joined, however the reshape handles now surround only the
polyline on the left. Figure 4 shows the polylines separated. You can now move the individual polylines around
the picture or choose to delete one of them.
156
Using Key Macros
Split Pipe
Figure 1 shows the selected pipe with reshape handles. In Figure 2 the arrow points to the
which changes to a contrasting color when the cursor is inside the pipe.
splitting cursor,
In Figure 3, the arrow points to the split you created in the original pipe object. Note that the reshape handles
now surround only the pipe on the left. Figure 4 shows the pipes separated. You can now move the individual
pipes around the picture or choose to delete one of them.
NOTE: When you split a polyline or pipe, you create a new object. Therefore, if you undo a polyline or pipe
split, the new object is deleted first and you must perform a second undo action to revert to the original object.
157
Creataing Pictures
Extending Lines to Intersect
Joining two or more lines can be tedious and time-consuming if it is done manually and if there
are many lines in your picture that need to be joined. Using the Extend Lines button on the CAD
Toolbar (Classic view) or Extend Lines, in the Drawing Tools list, in the Picture group, on the
Format tab (Ribbon view), you can easily extend single or multiple lines to an intersection point.
NOTE: You can intersect lines in configuration mode only.
There are two types of intersection points:
on-line
off-line
Intersecting Lines to a Single Intersection Point
Each intersection of lines can involve only two lines whether the intersection point is on-line or off-line. If you
select more than two lines, then more than one intersection point is involved and a separate operation for each
intersection is required. For more information about intersecting multiple lines to multiple intersection points,
see Intersecting Lines to Multiple Intersection Points.
Example 1: On-line intersection point
The following diagrams show an example of extending and intersecting a single line (line 1) with the
intersection point located on another line (line 2). This is an example of an on-line intersection point.
158
Using Key Macros
Example 2: Off-line intersection points
The following diagrams show examples of extending and intersecting two lines (lines 1 and 2) with an
intersection point that is not located on either source line (off-line). When the intersection point of two lines is
found at a point off the two source lines, both lines are extended to the intersection point.
IMPORTANT: Lines may appear to be perfectly vertical or horizontal, but if they are even slightly off, they will
extend well beyond the boundaries of your computer screen. In the following diagram, the "horizontal" lines
were extended to the intersection points on the vertical line, but also extend to the right, past the edge of the
viewing area on the computer screen.
159
Creataing Pictures
For this reason, it is best to use the Make lines horizontal and/or Make lines vertical buttons on the CAD
Toolbar (Classic View) or from the Format tab, in the Picture group, in the Drawing Tools list (Ribbon view)
before extending lines to the intersection points. For more information, see Making Lines Horizontal or
Vertical.
Intersecting Lines to Multiple Intersection Points
In cases where there is more than one potential intersection point, the closest intersection point is always used.
However, an on-line intersection point always takes precedence over an off-line intersection point, regardless of
its proximity to the intersecting lines, and the number of lines and intersection points. The following diagrams
show examples of these rules.
Example 1: No on-line intersection point
In the first example, the blue circle indicates the closest of the two intersection points, and because there is no
on-line intersection point, only lines 2 and 3 are extended to the closest intersection point. Line 1 does not
intersect with line 3.
Example 2: On-line and off-line intersection points
In this example, the blue circle indicates the on-line intersection point, and because on-line intersection points
take precedence over off-line intersection points, line 3 is extended to the on-line point on line 1. Line 2 does
not intersect with line 3.
160
Using Key Macros
Example 3: On-line and off-line intersection points
The following diagrams provide examples of extending multiple lines.
In the following example, lines 1 and 5 connect with the off-line intersection point (in the upper left corner),
because there is no on-line point to take precedence. Line 4 goes through the off-line intersection points to
connect with the on-line point on line 1 and lines 2 and 3 go through the off-line points to connect with the online intersection points on line 5.
In the next example, lines 1 and 6 connect with the off-line intersection point (in the upper left corner), because
there is no on-line point to take precedence. Lines 2, 4, and 5 go through the off-line points to the on-line points
on lines 6 and 1. Line 3 connects only with the first on-line intersection point on line 5.
The final example below, shows line 5 going through the off-line intersection points (red circles) to the on-line
intersection point in the top left corner on line 1. Lines 3 and 4 intersect at the off-line point on the right because
there is no on-line intersection point to take precedence. If you click the Extend Lines button again, lines 2 and
3 are extended to line 5 where on-line intersection points exist.
161
Creataing Pictures
Trimming Lines at the Intersection
After you have intersected lines in your picture, you can trim the intersected lines to remove
unnecessary portions. Trimming lines can be tedious and time-consuming if it is done manually
and if there are many lines in your picture that need to be trimmed. Using the Trim Lines button
on the CAD Toolbar (Classic view) or Trim Lines in the Drawing Tools list, in the Picture list, in
the Picture group, on the Format tab (Ribbon view), you can easily trim single or multiple lines.
The following diagrams show examples of trimmed intersected lines.
162
Using Key Macros
NOTE: Regardless of the trim option set in the User Preferences dialog box, the shortest portion of the line
from the intersection point will always be trimmed first.
Converting Lines to Polyline
Joining multiple lines to create a polyline can be tedious and time-consuming if it is done
manually. Using the Convert Lines to Polyline button on the CAD Toolbar, (Classic view) or
Convert Lines to Polyline, in the Drawing Tools list, in the Picture list, in the Picture group, on
the Format tab (Ribbon view), you can easily draw the individual lines required and convert them
to a polyline. You can create single or multiple polylines.
Converting Lines to a Single Polyline
The following diagrams show an example of creating a single polyline from individual lines.
The lines are drawn, as in Figure 1, and then all are selected. When you click the Convert Lines to Polyline
button, it extends the lines (as shown in Figure 2), and then it trims the lines (as shown in Figure 3). For more
information, refer to Extending Lines to Intersect and Trimming Lines at the Intersection.
Figure 4 shows the points of the polyline. The points of a polyline are determined when two lines are connected
and have the same intersection point at the start or end point.
163
Creataing Pictures
Converting Lines to Multiple Polylines
The following diagrams show an example of creating multiple polylines from individual lines.
As with converting lines to a single polyline, the selected lines are first extended to the intersection points and
then trimmed. In this example, two polylines have been created.
Figure 4 shows the points of each polyline; that is, points 1-1 through 1-6 are the points of Polyline 1 and points
2-1 through 2-3 are the points of Polyline 2. The points of a polyline are determined when two lines are
connected and have the same intersection point at the start or end point.
Making Lines Horizontal or Vertical
Drawing straight horizontal or vertical lines can be tedious and time-consuming if done
manually. Using the Make Lines Horizontal or Make Lines Vertical buttons on the CAD
Toolbar, (Classic view) or Make Lines Horizontal or Make Lines Vertical, in the Drawing
Tools list, in the Picture group, on the Format tab (Ribbon view), you can easily change the
position of your lines. The following diagrams show examples of making lines horizontal and
vertical.
164
Using Key Macros
Make Line Horizontal
Make Line Vertical
Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe
Creating pipe objects from lines and polylines is simplified using the Convert Lines and Polylines
to Pipe button on the CAD toolbar (Classic View) or Convert Lines and Polylines to Pipe, in the
Drawing Tools list, in the Picture group, on the Format tab (Ribbon view). Create the required
lines and polylines, or select existing lines and polylines, then convert them to pipes.
The new pipe object inherits the property values, animation settings, and VBA scripts from the original
line/polyline object. The pipe-specific properties have the default values configured in the User Preferences
dialog box. You can change the pipe-specific properties using the Modify Pipe Characteristics dialog box.
165
Creataing Pictures
The following diagrams show examples of converting lines and polylines to pipes.
Single Line
Polyline
Line Converted to Pipe
Polyline Converted to Pipe
Modifying Pipe Characteristics
You can modify the characteristics of pipe objects by using either the Modify Pipe Characteristics
dialog box, or the Select Color dialog box when you choose Fade from the Color pop-up menu.
The same pipe properties are available on both dialog boxes.
To access the Modify Pipe Characteristics dialog box, use one of the following methods:
166

Right-click a pipe object and choose Modify Pipe Characteristics.

Select one or more pipe objects and click the Modify Pipe button on the CAD Toolbar, if it is enabled
(Classic view).
Using Key Macros

Select one or more pipe objects and on the Format tab, in the Styles group, from the Pipe Styles list,
click Modify Pipe Characteristics (Ribbon view).
To access the Select Color dialog box, right-click a pipe object, point to Color and choose Fade. Whichever
dialog box you choose to access, you can define the same characteristics for your pipe objects.
NOTE: If you select multiple pipe objects, you cannot access these dialog boxes with the right-click pop-up
menu. You can, however, use the Modify Pipe button on the CAD Toolbar (Classic view) or Modify Pipe
Characteristics in the Pipe Styles list, in the Styles group on the Format tab (Ribbon view) to change
characteristics of multiple pipe objects, as shown in the following illustration.
In these dialog boxes you can change the appearance of the selected pipes, including the foreground and fade
colors, blend percentage, edge and fill styles, thickness and edge width, the appearance of the start and end
caps, and elbow style. If you select more than one pipe, the changes are applied to all pipes. Note that if you
select Gradient as the fill style, the only fade type available for pipe objects is reflected.
The following diagrams show different combinations of cap and elbow styles.
NOTE: Elbow styles must be either all round or all square; you cannot mix elbow styles on a single pipe object.
167
Creataing Pictures
Round start caps, end caps, and elbows
Square start caps, end caps, and elbows
Horizontal diagonal start cap, Vertical diagonal end cap, and round elbows
Adding and Deleting Connection Points
Connection points are used to anchor connectors to shapes in your pictures.
168
Using Key Macros
If the Always Show Connection Nodes check box on the User Preferences dialog box is selected, the default
connection points and points that you add to shapes are always visible. If this check box is cleared, the
connection points are not visible, but can be displayed using one of the following methods:

Select a connector and move it towards the shape to anchor it to a certain connection point on the
shape.
- Or -

Select the shape and click either the Add Connection Point button or Delete Connection Point button
on the CAD Toolbar.
Adding Connection Points
You can add new connection points to a shape or use the default connection points to anchor a connector. For
more information about anchoring, refer to Using the Connector Tools.
The following diagrams show you how to add connection points.
In Figure 1, the red arrow points to the Add Connection Point cursor that appears when you are adding a
connection point. The black arrow in Figure 2 points to the new connection point.
NOTE: The shape you are adding a connection point to must be selected. Reshape handles appear around the
shape when it is selected.
169
Creataing Pictures
Default Connection Points
Most shapes are provided with default connection points and allow you to add custom connection points. The
following table lists the different shapes, the number of default connection points and the number of custom
connection points that can be added.
Object
Default
Connection
Points
Custom
Connection
Points
0
Pipes, Lines, Polylines
0
3
Arcs
0
3
Pies, Chords
13
8
Text, Datalink
8
8
Rectangles, Round Rectangles, Ovals, Polygons
8
2
Line Connector, Right Angle Line Connector, Pipe
Connector
0
NOTE: Pipes, lines, and polylines display connection nodes only at their end points and only when a connector
object attempts to connect or is connected to the object. At no other time are connection nodes visible for these
objects, regardless of whether the Always Show Connection Nodes check box is selected.
170
Using Key Macros
Deleting Connection Points
You can delete connection points that you add to a shape but you cannot delete default connection points. The
following diagrams show you how to delete a connection point.
In Figure 1, the black arrow points to the custom connection point you added. The red arrow in Figure 2 points
to the Delete Connection Point cursor that appears when you move the cursor over a custom connection
point. The gold arrow in Figure 3 points to the cursor that appears when you move the cursor over a default
connection point, to indicate that the connection point cannot be deleted.
NOTE: The shape you are deleting a connection point from must be selected. Reshape handles appear around
the shape when it is selected.
Using the Connector Tools
Connectors are used to connect two shape objects together. This is helpful when you want
to move your shapes around the picture but keep them connected. If only one of the
connector's ends is anchored to a shape object, whenever that shape is moved, the
connector object follows it. If both ends of the connector are anchored to two shapes, it
will stretch or shrink itself when one of the shapes is moved or resized.
Line Connector
The Line Connector tool allows you to draw a straight line to connect two shapes, as illustrated in the following
figure.
171
Creataing Pictures
Right Angle Line Connector
The Right Angle Line Connector tool allows you to draw a right angle line to connect two shapes, as illustrated
in the following figure.
The Pipe Connector tool allows you to draw a pipe connector between two shapes, as illustrated in the
following figure.
172
Using Key Macros
Pipe Connector
Moving Connectors
You can move your connector to any position simply by selecting it and dragging it to a spot anywhere in the
picture. However, there will be times when you want to be more precise about positioning the connector. There
are a number of ways you can do this:

Click and drag a connector handle

Hold down the CTRL key and click and drag a connector handle

Use the arrow keys

Hold down the SHIFT key and use the arrow keys

Hold down the CTRL key and use the arrow keys

Hold down the SHIFT + CTRL key and use the arrow keys

Use the + or - keys to rotate

Use the SHIFT and + or - key to rotate
Using the SHIFT or CTRL keys, or a combination of both, while moving, scaling, or rotating your connectors
provides you with an extra level of precision when performing these actions. You can change that level of
precision by changing the settings for these actions by increasing or decreasing the number of pixels or degrees
your connector moves, scales, or rotates. For more information about changing these settings, see the Changing
the Nudge Settings section in Changing Picture Settings in the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
Click and Drag a Connector Handle
When you click and drag a connector handle, only the selected end of the connector moves as you drag it, and
the connector itself is stretched or shrunk, depending on how you move the connector. When you release the
mouse button, the connector handle is placed at that position. However, if you place the connector handle near a
connection point on an object, the connector handle snaps to that connection point. This is very useful when
173
Creataing Pictures
anchoring a connector. For more information about anchoring, see Anchoring Connectors.
CTRL + Click and Drag a Connector Handle
When you press the CTRL key and click and drag a connector handle the connector is moved, stretched, or
shrunk similar to clicking and dragging; however, when you hold down the CTRL key and drag the connector in
an arc formation, the connector only moves in 15 degree increments. That is, as you drag the connector handle
through a 90 degree arc, there are only six positions it can be dropped on. As you drag it through 180 degrees,
there are 12 positions it can be dropped on, and so forth.
If you drop the connector handle near a connection point on an object when you are holding down the CTRL key,
it will not snap to the connection point; it will simply drop at the indicated position. If you want the connector
handle to snap to a connection point, you must click and drag it without using the CTRL key.
The Arrow Keys
Use the arrow keys to move the connector horizontally and vertically in the picture. The number of pixels the
connector moves each time you press an arrow key depends on the SlowNudgeMoveOffset setting in the
FixUserPreferences.ini file.
SHIFT + the Arrow Keys
When you press the SHIFT key and one of the arrow keys, the connector moves horizontally or vertically,
depending on the arrow key used. The number of pixels the connector moves is defined in the
FastNudgeMoveOffset setting in the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
CTRL + the Arrow Keys
When you press the CTRL key and the up or down arrow keys, the connector moves or scales vertically,
depending on the position of the connector and the arrow key used. If you press the left or right arrow key
while pressing the CTRL key, the connector moves or scales horizontally. For example, if you draw a horizontal
connector, it will move vertically when you use the up or down arrow key with the CTRL key, and will scale
horizontally when you use the left or right arrow key with the CTRL key. If you draw a vertical connector, it will
scale vertically when you use the up or down arrow key with the CTRL key, and will move horizontally when
you use the left or right arrow key with the CTRL key.
When scaling the connector, only the end moves. For example, if you draw a pipe connector from left to right,
the right side of the connector (the end) stretches or shrinks when you use the CTRL key and left or right arrow
key. If you rotate the connector 180 degrees, the left side becomes the end and the connector will be scaled from
that side. The number of pixels the connector moves or is scaled when you use the CTRL key with the arrow
keys depends on the SlowNudgeMoveOffset and SlowNudgeScaleOffset settings in the FixUserPreferences.ini
file.
SHIFT + CTRL + the Arrow Keys
When you press SHIFT + CTRL and one of the arrow keys, the connector moves or scales horizontally or
vertically, depending on the position of the connector and the arrow key used. For example, if you draw a
174
Using Key Macros
horizontal connector, it will move vertically when you use the up or down arrow key with the SHIFT + CTRL
keys, and will scale horizontally when you use the left or right arrow key with the SHIFT + CTRL keys. If you
draw a vertical connector, it will scale vertically when you use the up or down arrow key with the SHIFT + CTRL
keys, and will move horizontally when you use the left or right arrow key with the SHIFT + CTRL keys. The
number of pixels the connector moves or scales when you use the SHIFT + CTRL keys with the arrow keys
depends on the FastNudgeMoveOffset and FastNudgeScaleOffset settings in the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
The + or - keys
Use the + or - keys to rotate your connector. When you right-click the object and choose Rotate, four rotate
handles appear around the object. Use the + key on the number keypad to rotate the connector in a counter
clockwise direction; use the - key on the number keypad to rotate the connector in a clockwise direction. The
number of degrees the connector rotates each time you press the + or - key depends on the
SlowNudgeRotateOffset setting in the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
SHIFT and + or - key
When you press the SHIFT key and either the + or - key, the connector rotates either counter clockwise or
clockwise, depending on the key used. The number of degrees the connector moves is defined in the
FastNudgeRotateOffset setting in the FixUserPreferences.ini file.
Anchoring Connectors
You must add connection points to shapes or use the default connection points to anchor the connector.
Anchoring a connector allows you to move the shapes around the picture until you are satisfied with their
locations, while keeping them connected. The connector stretches and reshapes itself as you move or resize the
shapes.
The following diagrams show you how to anchor a connector.
In Figure 1, the green arrow points to the line connector and the black arrows point to connection points you
added. For information about adding connection points, refer to Adding and Deleting Connection Points.
Figure 2 shows the anchored connector. When you select the connector and move the cursor over the handles,
175
Creataing Pictures
the cursor becomes a crosshair. Click and drag each connector handle to a connection point. The handles change
to red and black when the connector is anchored.
NOTE: You can anchor a connector to default connection points.
Connected Shapes that Overlap
All shapes have a bounding box that defines the outside boundary of the shape. The bounding box is visible
when a shape is selected and dragged. The following picture shows the bounding box of a pipe connector that is
being moved. Only the bounding box moves while you're dragging the connector. When you let go of the
mouse button, the shape then moves and the bounding box disappears.
As you add shapes to your picture, the shape that was drawn last is always placed "on top." This means that the
bounding box of the newest shape may overlap an existing shape. When you are adding pipe and line connector
shapes to your picture, this overlap can prevent you from selecting the previously drawn shape.
For example, you have anchored both a pipe connector and a line (or right angle line) connector to two shapes,
and the bounding box of the pipe connector is on top because you drew it last. As the following picture shows,
the line connector is positioned within the pipe connector's bounding box; therefore, you cannot select it.
176
Using Key Macros
You must either move the pipe connector so that its bounding box no longer overlaps the line connector or
right-click the pipe connector and choose Send to Back. This allows you to select and move the line connector
and anchor it to the desired connection points.
NOTE: To allow shapes to be selectable at all times, regardless of the location of a shape's bounding box, clear
the Always Show Connection Nodes check box on the Drawing Options tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Creating Complex Objects
One of the most powerful features in iFIX is the ability to easily create complex objects from simple ones.
Because iFIX uses object-oriented graphics in an open picture environment, you have the flexibility to develop
more intuitive pictures with a few clicks of the mouse. The ways you can manipulate objects to design advanced
pictures include:

Stacking

Bringing to Front and Sending to Back

Layering and Visibility

Grouping and ungrouping
Stacking
Stacking allows you to place one object on top of another so that it forms a more complex, multi-dimensional
figure.
It is an effective method for taking simple, existing objects and forming more intuitive ones. For example, by
stacking two ovals and two rectangles, you can create a picture that resembles a pump, as depicted in the
following figure.
To form more precise connections, such as the two rectangles meeting flush with the edge of the outside circle
in the figure above, try nudging the object exactly where you want it. For more information on moving objects
and nudging, refer to the Moving Objects section.
You can stack as many objects as you want. The object on top does not have to cover the other object
completely and does not alter its properties.
177
Creataing Pictures
Bringing to Front and Sending to Back
When you initially draw multiple objects, the object that appears on top is always the last one drawn. However,
you can change the order of objects in a stack with the Send to Back and Bring to Front buttons. The following
figure illustrates this concept.
You can move multiple objects in a stack so that they keep their relative position to each other, as the following
figure shows.
Making Multiple Objects the Same Size
When you create multiple objects in a picture, you can easily resize one or more of the objects to match the size
of another resized object. For example, lets say you add an oval to your picture. Next, you add a rectangle, and
then you manually resize the rectangle. You can make the oval the same size as the rectangle by selecting both
objects and using the Make Same Size function. By default, Make Same Size resizes the objects in the picture
according to the most recently modified object's dimensions. If you want to resize objects using the dimensions
of any other object, you must select that object and resize it first.
Layering and Visibility
Layering objects is a powerful way to control specific objects in a complex picture or process. One of the most
common uses for layering is when you are developing large displays, and you want your operators to be able to
easily distinguish specific parts of the picture. By assigning a layer or multiple layers to objects in the picture,
you determine which objects within the picture are visible to the operator. Further, layers are an effective
security feature in that you can turn off a specific layer so that certain objects cannot be viewed by one or a set
of operators.
You can establish layering using the Set Layer and Display Layers buttons on the Tools toolbar (Classic view)
or from the Format tab in the Picture group, in the Layers list (Ribbon view). Setting a layer assigns a layer to a
178
Using Key Macros
selected object. Displaying layers, on the other hand, applies to the entire picture, and determines what layers
are displayed in your picture.
The following illustration shows two objects, Oval1 and Rect1, added to a picture.
Next, layers are assigned to the objects as follows:
1.
The object Oval1 is set with a layer of 1.
2.
The object Rect1 is set with a layer of 2.
Then, display layers are set to 1. The following figure shows what is displayed based on the layering that was
assigned.
Next, the same objects are grouped, and layers are assigned to the objects as follows:
1.
The object Oval1 is set with a layer of 1.
2.
The object Rect1 is set with a layer of 2.
3.
The grouped object Group1 is set with a layer of 1.
Then, display layers are set to 1. The grouped object is displayed, including one of its member objects (the
oval).
Layers are controlled by the LayerName property, which can be animated using the Misc tab in the Advanced
Animations dialog box, or by writing VBA scripts. In addition to the examples cited above, you can also
effectuate the layering function in the run-time environment. After assigning layers to a set of objects, the
objects appear at run-time according to the layering you have set.
What appears on your screen, whether you are in the configuration or run-time environments, is determined by
the Visible property. However, this is only true if the layer assigned to that object is displayed. For example, if
179
Creataing Pictures
you assign the Visible property for an object to True, but that object does not appear in your picture, it is
probably because the object is assigned to a layer that is not displayed (the LayerName property takes
precedence over the Visible property).
Using the Visibility Expert
You can also set conditions for the Visible property using the Visibility Expert. This Expert lets you assign a
data source to the property, or create an expression using conditional values and relational operators. To use the
Visibility Expert, click the Visibility Expert button on the Experts toolbar (Classic view), or access the
Visibility Expert from the Tools tab, in the Animations group (Ribbon View). If the Toolbox is enabled, click
the button on the Toolbox. For help on the Expert fields, click the Help button on the Expert.
Setting the Layer Property Through VBA
When you set the Layer property through VBA, the layers are related to the property number by a bit mask. In
the following equation, n is the layer number that you want to display:
picture.displaylayer = 2n-1
For example, if you want to display layer 3, picture.displaylayer would be equal to 23-1, which is simplified to
22, which is equal to 4. So, you would use the following VBA code:
picture.displaylayer = 4
If you want to display layer 4, picture.displaylayer would be equal to 2 4-1, which is simplified to 23, which is
equal to 8. So, you would use the following VBA code:
picture.displaylayer = 8
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects
You can group objects together to create a new single object. This is called a group, or grouped object. A
grouped object is like having a rubber band around your picture that contains all the objects you grouped
together.
The power of grouped objects is that they let you create custom objects which you can reuse without building
new ones from scratch. Like other objects, grouped objects have properties you can modify and control. You
can manipulate a group as an object while maintaining individual object properties and animations. However,
grouped objects do not need to be permanent. You can always destroy a grouped object by ungrouping it. When
you ungroup it, the rubber band containing the objects in the group is deleted, but the member objects are not.
Nesting Grouped Objects
You can nest a group inside another group. For example, you can create a pump from a group of rectangles and
ovals and group them. When you group these objects, the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace adds a group name (Group
1) to the system tree for the group object and lists the individual objects that comprise the group one level down
from the group name. The following figure illustrates this concept.
180
Using Key Macros
System Tree
Grouped Objects
If you draw a valve (Polygon1), a connector (PolyLine1), and group it with the pump (Group1), another object
named Group 2 is created which contains the first group (the pump) and the objects used to create the valve (the
Polygon1 and PolyLine1), as the following figure shows.
System Tree
Grouped Objects
Editing Grouped Objects
Once you create a grouped object, you can manipulate it like any other individual object, including moving,
cutting, copying, and resizing it. Keep in mind, however, that when you ungroup an object, any changes you
make to it affect the member objects. For example, if you resize a group before you ungroup it, you resize each
individual object in the group.
Changing a group's animations, however, does not affect the member objects when you ungroup. To change the
properties of individual objects, you must drill down into the group to select the object you want, without
ungrouping the object.
Drilling Down into a Group
Drilling down allows you to meticulously control complex grouped objects. To drill down, select Enter
DrillDown from the object pop-up menu and select the object in the group that you want to change. You can
also hold down the shift key and click the object in the group that you want to change. Drilling down also lets
you change the order in which the objects are stacked within the group.
For example, suppose you want to change the color and size of the polygon (the valve) in the following figure.
181
Creataing Pictures
One way to do this would be to ungroup, make changes to the polygon, and regroup the objects. However, this
can be tedious and time-consuming, particularly if you have many objects in the group that you need to change.
In addition, if the group contains animations or scripts, the animation settings and the scripts are destroyed
when you ungroup the object.
A more effective way to modify the polygon is to drill down into the group and make changes without
ungrouping. This approach saves time because you don't have to ungroup and then regroup, and consequently
you preserve any animations or scripts you have assigned to the group.
When you drill down into a group to change an object, a box of dashed lines appear around the group. Any
additional groups will also display a dashed line box. To change only a specific object in a group, first select the
group that contains that object. Then right-click the group and select Enter DrillDown from the pop-up menu.
Now you can select the object you want. You can also hold down the shift key and click the object in the group
that you want to select, as the following figure illustrates.
Nested Group Objects
182
Using Key Macros
Pictures Dialog Boxes
The WorkSpace application includes the following dialog boxes for working with pictures (listed in alphabetical
order):

Add Alarm Extension Field1 Dialog Box

Add Alarm Extension Field2 Dialog Box

Add Area Dialog Box

Add ColorSet Dialog Box

Add Date In Dialog Box

Add Date Last Dialog Box

Add Description Dialog Box

Add Node Dialog Box

Add Priority Dialog Box

Add Tag Dialog Box

Add Time In Dialog Box

Add Time Last Dialog Box

Advanced Animations Dialog Box

Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box

Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box

Basic Animation Dialog Box

Button Caption Converter Dialog Box

Chart Configuration Dialog Box

Color Selection Dialog Box

Create Picture Wizard Dialog Box

Custom Lookup Table Dialog Box

Datalink Dialog Box

Edit Picture Dialog Box

Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

Grid Settings Dialog Box

Historical Datalink Dialog Box

Modify Area Dialog Box

Modify Configuration Dialog Box
183
Creataing Pictures

Modify Pipe Characteristics Dialog Box

New Level Dialog Box

Select BackgroundColor

Select Color Dialog Box

Select EdgeColor

Select FadeColor Dialog Box

Select ForegroundColor

Upgrading Pictures to Screen Independent Enhanced Coordinates Dialog Box
Add Ack Dialog Box
The Add Ack dialog box displays the following items:
Acknowledged
Lists the alarms that have been acknowledged.
Unacknowledged
Lists the alarms that have not been acknowledged.
Add Alarm Extension Field1 Dialog Box
The Add Alarm Extension Field1 dialog box displays the following items:
Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those alarms that contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
Not Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that do not contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
Containing Only
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that contain an exact match of the text
string entered in the Description field.
184
Using Key Macros
Alarm Extension Field1
Allows you to enter the text description for which to filter alarms. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard
character to match substrings; for example, my* would filter the description "mynode". You can also use the
question mark (?) wildcard character to match individual characters; for example, myno?e would also filter the
description "mynode".
Add Alarm Extension Field2 Dialog Box
The Add Alarm Extension Field2 dialog box displays the following items:
Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those alarms that contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
Not Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that do not contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
Containing Only
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that contain an exact match of the text
string entered in the Description field.
Alarm Extension Field2
Allows you to enter the text description for which to filter alarms. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard
character to match substrings; for example, my* would filter the description "mynode". You can also use the
question mark (?) wildcard character to match individual characters; for example, myno?e would also filter the
description "mynode".
185
Creataing Pictures
Add Area Dialog Box
The Add Area dialog box displays the following items:
Available
Lists the alarm areas that are currently available. To filter alarms by alarm area, select the area(s) from this list
and select the In or Not In option button.
In
Allows you to filter alarms by the alarm areas that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option
is selected, the Alarm Summary object displays only those alarms from the selected alarm areas.
Not In
Allows you to filter alarms by the alarm areas that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option
is selected, the Alarm Summary object ignores all alarms from the selected alarm areas.
Add Area Not Currently in List Edit Box
Allows you to add an alarm area name to the Available list, if it does not appear by default. Enter the alarm
area name in this field and click Add to add it to the list.
Add Button
Allows you to add an alarm area name to the Available list, if it does not appear by default. Enter the alarm
area name in the Add Area Not Currently In List field and click this button to add it to the Available list.
Add ColorSet Dialog Box
The Add ColorSet dialog box displays the following item:
Name
Allows you to enter a name for your color set.
186
Using Key Macros
Add Date In Dialog Box
The Add Date In dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are equal to the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred at 10:00:00.
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are not equal to the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the not equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and
the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object
will display all alarms that did not first occur at 10:00:00.
>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the greater than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field,
and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary
object will display only those alarms that first occurred after 10:00:00.
>=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than or equal to the value of the field to the right.
For example, if the greater than or equal to operator is used in conjunction
with the Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then
the Alarm Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or
after 10:00:00.
<
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the less than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred before 10:00:00.
187
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
<=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than or equal to the value of the field to the right. For
example, if the less than or equal to operator is used in conjunction with the
Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm
Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or before
10:00:00.
Date In
The date when the block first generated the alarm – used as a condition to filter alarms.
Add Date Last Dialog Box
The Add Date Last dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
188
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are equal to the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred at 10:00:00.
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are not equal to the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the not equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and
the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object
will display all alarms that did not first occur at 10:00:00.
>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the greater than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field,
and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary
object will display only those alarms that first occurred after 10:00:00.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
>=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than or equal to the value of the field to the right.
For example, if the greater than or equal to operator is used in conjunction
with the Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then
the Alarm Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or
after 10:00:00.
<
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the less than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred before 10:00:00.
<=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than or equal to the value of the field to the right. For
example, if the less than or equal to operator is used in conjunction with the
Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm
Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or before
10:00:00.
Date Last
The date when the block last generated the alarm – used as a condition to filter alarms.
Add Description Dialog Box
The Add Description dialog box displays the following items:
Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those alarms that contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
Not Containing
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that do not contain the text string
entered in the Description field.
189
Creataing Pictures
Containing Only
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms that contain an exact match of the text
string entered in the Description field.
Description
Allows you to enter the text description for which to filter alarms. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard
character to match substrings; for example, my* would filter the description "mynode". You can also use the
question mark (?) wildcard character to match individual characters; for example, myno?e would also filter the
description "mynode".
Add Node Dialog Box
The Add Node dialog box displays the following items:
Available
Lists the nodes that are currently available. To filter alarms by node, select the node from this list and select the
In or Not In option button.
In
Allows you to filter alarms by the nodes that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option is
selected, the Alarm Summary object displays only the available nodes.
Not In
Allows you to filter alarms by the nodes that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option is
selected, the Alarm Summary object ignores all alarms from the selected alarm areas.
Add Priority Dialog Box
The Add Priority dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
190
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are equal to the priority listed on the right.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are not equal to the priority listed on the right.
>=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than or equal to the priority listed on the right.
<=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than or equal to the priority listed on the right.
Priority Drop-Down List
Allows you to select an INFO, LOLO, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, HIHI, or CRITICAL priority condition to
filter the alarms.
Add Tag Dialog Box
The Add Tag dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are generated from the tagname entered in the Tagname field.
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display all alarms
that are not generated from the tagname entered in the Tagname field.
Tagname
Allows you to enter a tagname for which you want to filter alarms.
191
Creataing Pictures
Add Time In Dialog Box
The Add Time In dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
192
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are equal to the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred at 10:00:00.
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are not equal to the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the not equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and
the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object
will display all alarms that did not first occur at 10:00:00.
>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the greater than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field,
and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary
object will display only those alarms that first occurred after 10:00:00.
>=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than or equal to the value of the field to the right.
For example, if the greater than or equal to operator is used in conjunction
with the Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then
the Alarm Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or
after 10:00:00.
<
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the less than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred before 10:00:00.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
<=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than or equal to the value of the field to the right. For
example, if the less than or equal to operator is used in conjunction with the
Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm
Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or before
10:00:00.
Time In
The time that the block first generated the alarm – used as a condition to filter alarms.
Add Time Last Dialog Box
The Add Time Last dialog box displays the following items:
Operator
Item
Description
=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are equal to the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred at 10:00:00.
<>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are not equal to the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the not equal operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and
the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object
will display all alarms that did not first occur at 10:00:00.
>
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than the value of the field to the right. For example,
if the greater than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field,
and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary
object will display only those alarms that first occurred after 10:00:00.
193
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
>=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are greater than or equal to the value of the field to the right.
For example, if the greater than or equal to operator is used in conjunction
with the Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then
the Alarm Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or
after 10:00:00.
<
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than the value of the field to the right. For example, if
the less than operator is used in conjunction with the Time In field, and the
value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm Summary object will
display only those alarms that first occurred before 10:00:00.
<=
Allows you to configure the Alarm Summary object to display only those
alarms that are less than or equal to the value of the field to the right. For
example, if the less than or equal to operator is used in conjunction with the
Time In field, and the value in the Time In field is 10:00:00, then the Alarm
Summary object will display all alarms that first occurred at or before
10:00:00.
Time Last
The time when the alarm condition or status last changed – used as a condition to filter alarms.
Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Advanced Animation dialog box can display the following tabs:
194

General Tab

Visibility Tab

Size Tab

Miscellaneous Tab

Position Tab

Color Tab

Style Tab

Rotate Tab

Fill Tab
Using Key Macros

Gradient Tab

Text Tab

Behavior Tab

Appearance Tab

Picture Tab
General Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The General tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Name
Allows you to enter a name for the selected object. The name that you specify appears in the WorkSpace system
tree and in the Name row of the VBA Property window.
Description
Allows you to enter a description for the selected object. The description that you specify appears in the
ToolTip for the object (provided that the Enable ToolTips option is enabled) and in the Description row of the
VBA Property window.
Help Context ID
Allows you to enter a help context ID for the selected object if you are creating your own context-sensitive,
picture-specific help files. See the Mastering iFIX manual for more information.
Enable Tooltips
Select this check box to display an on-screen description of the object when the pointer pauses on it.
Tooltip Option
This drop-down list is only available when the Enable Tooltip option is selected. Select the item from the list
that specifies where the tooltip text comes from:

The object's Description property (TooltipDescription).

The Dynamo's Description property (TooltipDynamoDescription).

From a run mode tag value description supplied when you load tag status symbols for your picture
(TooltipTagStatus).
195
Creataing Pictures
Enable Highlight
Select this check box to display a highlight around the object when the pointer is over it.
Enable Select
Select this check box to allow operators to select the object at run-time.
Visibility Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Visibility tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
the Visible Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
196
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Exact Match
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
197
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
198
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
199
Creataing Pictures
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Hours
200
Description
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Size Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Size tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
201
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Range to Table,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
202
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Minimum Input
Allows you to specify the low limit value for incoming data.
Minimum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the minimum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Maximum Input
Allows you to specify the high limit value for incoming data.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Maximum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the maximum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Fetch Input Range on Open
Select this check box to automatically fetch the minimum and maximum
input values for the data source at run-time.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
203
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
204
Using Key Macros
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Hours
Description
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
205
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Miscellaneous Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Miscellaneous tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
206
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Exact Match
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
207
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
208
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
209
Creataing Pictures
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Hours
210
Description
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Position Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Position tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
The Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
211
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Range to Table,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
212
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Minimum Input
Allows you to specify the low limit value for incoming data.
Minimum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the minimum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Maximum Input
Allows you to specify the high limit value for incoming data.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Maximum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the maximum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Use Offset
Select this check box to perform an animation on an object in its current
position, not in the absolute position specified by the logical unit or
postscript point value in the Minimum Output field.
Fetch Input Range on Open
Select this check box to automatically fetch the minimum and maximum
input values for the data source at run-time.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
213
Creataing Pictures
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode
214

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
Using Key Macros

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
215
Creataing Pictures
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Color Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Color tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
216
Using Key Macros
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animations Properties Tab
The Animations Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
217
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Exact Match
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
218
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
219
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
220
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Style Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Style tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
221
Creataing Pictures
Animations Properties Tab
The Animations Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Exact Match
222
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
223
Creataing Pictures
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode
224

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
Using Key Macros

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
225
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Rotate Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Rotate tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
226
Using Key Macros
Animations Properties Tab
The Animations Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Range to Table,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Minimum Input
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Allows you to specify the low limit value for incoming data.
227
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Minimum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the minimum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Maximum Input
Allows you to specify the high limit value for incoming data.
Maximum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the maximum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Fetch Input Range on Open
Select this check box to automatically fetch the minimum and maximum
input values for the data source at run-time.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
228
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
229
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
230
Using Key Macros
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Fill Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Fill tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
231
Creataing Pictures
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Range to Table,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Minimum Input
232
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Allows you to specify the low limit value for incoming data.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Minimum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the minimum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Maximum Input
Allows you to specify the high limit value for incoming data.
Maximum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the maximum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Fetch Input Range on Open
Select this check box to automatically fetch the minimum and maximum
input values for the data source at run-time.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
233
Creataing Pictures
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode
234

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
Using Key Macros

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
235
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Gradient Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Gradient tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
236
Using Key Macros
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Exact Match
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
237
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
238
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
239
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
240
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Text Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Text tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
241
Creataing Pictures
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Format to Range,
Table, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Type
242
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Allows you to configure whether or not operators can enter data into the
animation at run-time. To allow operators to enter data into animation
and write a new value to the database tag during the next scan cycle,
select In-Place from the list. To prohibit data entry at run-time, select
None.
Using Key Macros
Item
Confirm
Description
When selected, requires operators to confirm that they want to write
data to the database after they have entered a new value into the
animation at run-time.
This option is only available if In-Place is selected in the Data Entry
Type list.
Raw Format
Allows you to enter data in its raw (or native C code) format. If this
check box is enabled, you can edit the format by entering a C format
string in the Format field.
Format
Allows you to enter a C format string to display data in its raw, native C
code format. You can also enter a string of any kind preceding the raw
format string (for example, to introduce what the data string represents).
This option is only available if Raw Format is selected.
Justify
Allows you to justify the alignment (left, center, or right) of data in the
animation.
This option is only available if the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Type
Allows you to configure whether the data represented by the animation
should be formatted as numeric or alphanumeric data. To format
numeric data, select Numeric from this list and enter an integer from 0
to 7 in the Whole Digits field and 0 to 5 in the Decimal field. To format
alpha-numeric data, select Alpha-Numeric from this list and enter the
number of lines and the desired number of characters per line.
This option is only available if the Raw Format check box is cleared.
243
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Lines
Allows you to enter the number of lines that you want to display in an
alpha-numerically formatted animation.
This option is only available if the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Chars/Line
Allows you to enter the number of characters per line that you want to
display in an alpha-numerically formatted animation.
This option is only available if the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
244
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
245
Creataing Pictures
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Hours
246
Description
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Behavior Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Behavior tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
247
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
248
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Exact Match
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
249
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
250
Using Key Macros
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Hours
Description
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
251
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Appearance Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Appearance tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
252
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Range to Table,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Minimum Input
Allows you to specify the low limit value for incoming data.
Minimum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the minimum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Maximum Input
Allows you to specify the high limit value for incoming data.
253
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Maximum Output
Allows you to apply linear signal conditioning to the data by mapping the
range of input values specified in the Minimum and Maximum Input fields
to a range of output values. Enter the maximum value, in logical units or
postscript points, for the output range in this field.
Fetch Input Range on Open
Select this check box to automatically fetch the minimum and maximum
input values for the data source at run-time.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
254
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming new data points between the starting and ending
values. All data points are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
255
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
256
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Picture Tab - Advanced Animations Dialog Box
The Picture tab of the Advanced Animations dialog box displays the following items:
Properties
Provides options that allow you to select the properties that you want to animate. For a brief description of each
property, read the property description on the right side of the dialog box.
Animate
Select this check box to open dynamic settings for the visible property. When selected, the Dynamic Setting for
Property area appears directly below the Properties area.
Dynamic Settings for Property
Data Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this object.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX tagnames and historical files, or other
OPC-compliant data servers. A data source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants and data sources that are connected
with one or more operators. Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box. Use the
Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without launching the Database Manager.
257
Creataing Pictures
Animation Properties Tab
The Animation Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Data Conversion
Allows you to select the type of data conversion to apply to the data from
the source listed in the Data Source field. A data conversion defines how
the incoming data should be processed or formatted so that your objects
behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. You can
apply any of the following data conversion:

Range – uses a range of values on which to animate an object.

Table – attempts to match the incoming value from the data source
to an entry in a lookup table. If a match occurs, the selected
property is changed to match the output value.

Format – provides several options for formatting text data.

Object – processes the data received from the data source at its
exact value. This option is not supported for data from Proficy
Historian.
NOTE: If you change the Data Conversion option from Table to Range,
Format, or Object, the bottom half the dialog box changes accordingly.
Output Error Mode
Exact Match
258
Allows you to configure how an animation behaves if an error occurs.
Depending on the type of data conversion, the output error mode can be
any of the following:

Use Current Output – Displays the data exactly as it appeared in
when the error occurred.

Use Error Table – Displays an error message that matches the
current error, based on the error definitions in the Animations Data
Error Defaults tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Use Minimum Value – Displays the lowest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.

Use Maximum Value – Displays the highest possible value that is
valid for the data source when an error occurs.
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the
configured input value in the lookup table in order to format the data as the
corresponding output value.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input
values in the lookup table in order to format the data as the corresponding
output value.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing
row in the data conversion table.
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to
configure several more lookup options.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
259
Creataing Pictures
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode
260

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
Using Key Macros

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
261
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box
The Advanced Lookup Options dialog box displays the following items:
Toggle Source
Allows you to enter a data source or expression to provide an additional animation to an object.
Toggle Value
Allows you to specify a second output color to which you want to convert the input value or range of values in
the lookup table, based on the value of the data source in the Toggle Source field.
Table
Allows you to override the default lookup table completely and use a user-defined lookup table that is defined
in the User Global page.
Toggle Rate
Allows you to modify the blink rate of the animations that are tied to the selected object, if you have specified a
second data source through the Toggle Source field.
Unmatched Level
Allows you to specify the color value for the data if the conversion does not match a level that is defined in the
lookup table.
262
Using Key Macros
Tolerance for Exact Match Table
Allows you to specify the allowable deviation from the exact match table. For example, if the exact match table
has a configured level of 20, and you enter a tolerance of .1, then the conversion will proceed even with a value
of 19.9.
Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
Click the following links for more information about the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box:

General Tab

Operator Tab

Filter Tab

Sort Tab

Color Tab

Column Tab

Display Tab
General Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The General tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box contains the following item:
Description
Allows you to enter a description for the Alarm Summary object.
Alarm Summary Column Headers
Displays the font selected for the column headings in the Alarm Summary object. Only the font name appears in
this field. Click the browse (...) button to change the font name, style, size, or script.
After you select a new font and click Apply or OK, the font gets applied to the Alarm Summary object – in both
configure and run mode. If the font is larger than the area allowed, the height of the area is adjusted.
Browse (...) Button 1
Click to select a font name, style, size, and script for the column headings in the Alarm Summary object.
Status Bar
Displays the font selected for the status bar in the Alarm Summary object. Only the font name appears in this
field. Click the browse (...) button to change the font name, style, size, or script.
263
Creataing Pictures
After you select a new font and click Apply or OK, the font gets applied to the Alarm Summary object – in both
configure and run mode. If the font is larger than the area allowed, the height of the area is adjusted.
Browse (...) Button 2
Click to select a font name, style, size, and script for the text in the status bar of the Alarm Summary object.
Operator Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Operator tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Operator Run Time Settings
Item
Description
Allow Alarm
Acknowledgement
When selected, allows operators to acknowledge alarms through the Alarm
Summary object at run-time. The operator can right-click the object and
acknowledge the currently selected alarm, all of the alarms that match the current
filter, or all of the alarms that are currently displayed on the screen.
Allow Alarm
Deletion
When selected, allows operators to delete alarms through the Alarm Summary
object at run-time. The operator can right-click the object and delete the currently
selected alarm or all of the alarms that match the current filter.
Allow Run Time
Configuration
When selected, allows operators to change the filter and sort configuration of the
Alarm Summary object at run-time.
Enable Column
Quick Sort
When selected, allows operators to click the heading of any of the Alarm
Summary object's columns to sort alarms by the attribute listed in that column.
Display Right Mouse
Menu
When selected, allows operators to right-click the Alarm Summary object and
select from a list of related commands.
Allow Acknowledge
All Alarms
When selected, this feature allows operators to acknowledge all alarms for the
Alarm Summary object. By default this option is enabled.
IMPORTANT: The iFIX Electronic Signature option does not support
Acknowledge All Alarms capability. If you are operating in a regulated
environment, GE Intelligent Platforms encourages you to clear the Allow
Acknowledge All Alarms check box.
264
Using Key Macros
Filter Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Filter tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Column List Box
Allows you to choose the column of the Alarm Summary object that you want to add a filter condition to. To
add the filter condition, select the column name from this list and click the Add Filter Condition button or Insert
Filter Condition button. Note that the Insert Filter Condition button is available only if you have a previously
defined filter condition.
Add Filter Condition
Allows you to add a filter condition to the Alarm Summary object's column that is selected in the Columns
field. Select a field and click Add Filter Condition to open the associated dialog box:

Add Ack Dialog Box

Add Area Dialog Box

Add Date In Dialog Box

Add Date Last Dialog Box

Add Description Dialog Box

Add Node Dialog Box

Add Priority Dialog Box

Add Tag Dialog Box

Add Time In Dialog Box

Add Time Last Dialog Box

Add Alarm Extension Field1 Dialog Box

Add Alarm Extension Field2 Dialog Box
When you add the filter condition, it appears at the end of the Display Alarms Where list. The Alarm Summary
object supports up to nine filter conditions.
Insert Filter Condition
Allows you to add a filter condition to the Alarm Summary object's column that is selected in the Columns
field. Select a field and click Insert Filter Condition to open the associated dialog box:

Add Area Dialog Box

Add Date In Dialog Box

Add Date Last Dialog Box
265
Creataing Pictures

Add Description Dialog Box

Add Node Dialog Box

Add Priority Dialog Box

Add Tag Dialog Box

Add Time In Dialog Box

Add Time Last Dialog Box

Add Alarm Extension Field1 Dialog Box

Add Alarm Extension Field2 Dialog Box
When it is inserted, the filter condition appears before the currently-selected filter condition in the Display
Alarms Where list. The Alarm Summary object supports up to nine filter conditions.
Display Alarms Where... List Box
Lists all configured filter conditions. You can modify, delete, or add relational and comparison operations to
these filter conditions by clicking the buttons on the right.
Additional Buttons
The following buttons are included next to the Display Alarms list box:
266
Item
Description
Modify
Opens the Modify Area Dialog Box. This dialog box allows you to edit the filter
condition that is currently selected in the Display Alarms Where list.
Remove
Allows you to delete the filter condition that is currently selected in the Display
Alarms Where list.
And
Use this button to logically connect two expressions that must both be true.
Or
Use this button to logically connect two expressions where only one of the
conditions in the expression can be true.
(
Use this button to logically group two or more expressions. This button must be used
in conjunction with the ) operator.
)
Use this button to logically group two or more expressions. This button must be used
in conjunction with the ( operator.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Not
Use this button to logically negate expressions.
Sort Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Sort tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Sort By
Allows you to select the attribute (column) of the Alarm Summary object you want to sort by.
Ascending
Sorts the rows of the Alarm Summary object's spreadsheet in the ascending order of the attribute that is
currently displayed in the Sort By field.
Descending
Sorts the rows of the Alarm Summary object's spreadsheet in the descending order of the attribute that is
currently displayed in the Sort By field.
Color Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Color tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Foreground Alarm Color
Item
Description
Unacknowledged
Alarm Color
Select this check box to display all unacknowledged alarms in the Alarm Summary
object with the selected color. This check box overrides all entries listed in the
Foreground Alarm Color grid.
Foreground Alarm
Color grid
Allows you to modify the foreground color and attributes for the alarms displayed
in the Alarm Summary object.
267
Creataing Pictures
Background Alarm Color
Item
Description
Color By Priority
Select this option to color the background of alarms using the alarm priority.
Color By Status
Select this option to color the background of alarms using the alarm status.
Blink to Color
Select this check box to define a blink color for the background. You set the color
for the blink in the Background Color grid, in the second column.
Background Color
grid
Allows you to modify the background color for the alarm. The first column is the
background color, while the second column (if Blink to Color is enabled) is the
blink color for the background.
Run Status Color – Blink
Specifies whether the Alarm Summary object's run indicator blinks while the spreadsheet is not paused.
Pause Status Color – Blink
Specifies whether the Alarm Summary object's pause indicator blinks while the spreadsheet is paused.
Paused Alarm Status Color – Blink
Specifies whether the Alarm Summary object's pause indicator blinks when new alarms are received while the
spreadsheet is paused.
Column Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Column tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Columns Area
268
Item
Description
Available Columns
Lists the columns that are available to be added to the Alarm Summary object. To
add a column, select the column name and click Add. The name of the column
appears in the Selected Columns list, and appears in the Alarm Summary object at
run-time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Add
Allows you to add the currently selected column in the Available Columns list to the
Alarm Summary object.
Remove
Allows you to remove the currently selected column in the Selected Columns list
from the Alarm Summary object.
Selected Columns
Lists the columns that appear in the Alarm Summary object at run-time. To remove a
column from the list, select the column name and click Remove. To change the order
of the columns, select the column name and use the up and down arrows to move the
column to the desired position.
Up
Moves the selected column name up in the Selected Columns list. This has the effect
of moving the column to the left in the Alarm Summary object at run-time.
Down
Moves the selected column name down in the Selected Columns list. This has the
effect of moving the column to the right in the Alarm Summary object at run-time.
User Definable Columns
Item
Description
User Defined Field
1
Allows you to assign a different ASCII (A_) block field to the User Defined Field 1
column. The default field is A_CUALM. This field is available only if the User
Defined Field1 column has been added to the Selected Columns list.
<> (first instance)
Changes the ASCII (A_) block field that is represented by the User Defined Field 1
entry in the Selected Columns list to the field currently entered in the User Defined
Field.
User Defined Field
2
Allows you to assign a different ASCII (A_) block field to the User Defined Field 2
column. The default field is A_AUTO. This field is available only if the User
Defined Field2 column has been added to the Selected Columns list.
<> (second
instance)
Changes the ASCII (A_) block field that is represented by the User Defined Field 2
entry in the Selected Columns list to the field currently entered in the User Defined
Field 2 field.
269
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
User Defined Field
Name 1
Specifies the text displayed in the header of the Alarm Summary object's User
Defined Field1 column. The text you specify cannot match the text of any existing
column header, including the text used in the User Defined Field2 column header.
The maximum length of this name is 50 characters.
User Defined Field
Name 2
Specifies the text displayed in the header of the Alarm Summary object's User
Defined Field2 column. The text you specify cannot match the text of any existing
column header, including the text used in the User Defined Field1 column header.
The maximum length of this name is 50 characters.
Display Tab - Alarm Summary Configuration Dialog Box
The Display tab of the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Display Settings
Item
Description
Shows/Hides the column names of the Alarm Summary object.
Show Headers
Show Scroll Bars
Enables/Disables horizontal and vertical scroll bars for the Alarm Summary object.
Show Row
Numbers
Shows/Hides the row numbers for each row in the Alarm Summary object.
Reverse Color on
Acknowledge
Select this check box to allow for the reversal in color (between foreground and
background) of the acknowledged alarms visible in the Alarm Summary object. The
foreground and background colors are defined on the Color tab.
When this check box is selected, the blink rate is set to 0. When cleared, the blink
rate is set back to the default of 1.
Show Status Bar
270
Shows/Hides the status bar of the Alarm Summary object.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Show Grid Lines
Shows/Hides the spreadsheet grid of the Alarm Summary object.
Blink Unack
Alarms
When selected, the Alarm Summary object flashes new unacknowledged alarms at
run-time. The rate at which the unacknowledged alarms flash is defined by the value
in the Blink Rate field.
Show Current
Alarm Status
Select this option to show the current alarm status in the Alarm Summary window.
Show Latched
Alarm Status
Select this option to show the latched alarm status in the Alarm Summary window.
Refresh Settings
Item
Description
Alarm Refresh
Interval
Allows you to configure how often the Alarm Summary object examines the queue
for new alarms at run-time.
Data Refresh
Interval
Allows you to configure how often the Alarm Summary object updates the alarm
values currently displayed at run-time.
Blink Rate
If the Blink Unack Alarms check box is selected, allows you to configure how often
an unacknowledged alarm flashes at run-time.
When Blink Unack Alarms is selected, the alarm background alternates between
Foreground color and Background color at the speed set in the Blink Rate field.
By default, this value is 1. When using a blink rate of 0, an unacknowledged alarm's
background will be steadily colored in the foreground color.
Selection Timeout
Allows you to configure how long a row in the spreadsheet remains selected at runtime.
271
Creataing Pictures
Basic Animation Dialog Box
The Basic Animation dialog box displays the following items:
General
Item
Description
Object Name
Allows you to enter a name for the selected object. The name that you
specify appears in the WorkSpace system tree and in the Name row of
the VBA Property window.
Description
Allows you to enter a description for the selected object. The description
that you specify appears in the ToolTip for the object (provided that the
Enable ToolTips option is enabled) and in the Description row of the
VBA Property window.
Enable Tooltip
Select this option to display an on-screen description of the object when
the pointer pauses on it. You can only use this in conjunction with the
Enable Highlight option.
Tooltip Option
This drop-down list is only available when the Enable Tooltip option is
selected. Select the item from the list that specifies where the tooltip text
comes from:

The object's Description property (TooltipDescription).

The Dynamo's Description property (TooltipDynamoDescription).

From a run mode tag value description supplied when you load tag
status symbols for your picture (TooltipTagStatus).
Enable Highlight
Select this option to display a highlight around the object when the
pointer is on it. To use the ToolTip option, you must also select this
option.
Enable Select
Select this check box to allow operators to select the object at run-time.
272
Using Key Macros
Color
Item
Description
Foreground Check Box
Select this option to animate the foreground color property of the selected
object. If this check box is selected, a Foreground Color property
animation already exists for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Foreground Color Expert
button. To remove the Foreground Color animation, clear the check box.
NOTE: Lines, polylines, and bitmaps do not have foreground color
properties.
Foreground Button
Click this button to animate the foreground color property of the selected
object. If the Foreground check box is selected, click this button to modify
the existing foreground color animation.
NOTE: Lines, polylines, and bitmaps do not have foreground color
properties.
Edge Check Box
Select this option to animate the edge color property of the selected object.
If this check box is selected, an Edge Color property animation already
exists for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Edge Color Expert button. To
remove the Edge Color animation, clear the check box.
Edge Button
Click this button to animate the edge color property of the selected object.
If the Edge check box is selected, click this button to modify the existing
edge color animation.
Background Check Box
Select this option to animate the background color property of the selected
object. If this check box is selected, a Background Color property
animation already exists for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Background Color Expert
button. To remove the Background Color animation, clear the check box.
Background Button
Click this button to animate the background color property of the selected
object. If the Background check box is selected, click this button to modify
the existing background color animation.
273
Creataing Pictures
Movement
Item
Description
Position Check Box
Select this option to animate the Horizontal or Vertical Position property of
the selected object.
If this check box is selected, a Position property animation already exists
for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Position Expert button. To
remove the Horizontal or Vertical Position animation, clear the check box.
Position Button
Click this button to animate the Horizontal or Vertical Position property of
the selected object.
If the Position check box is selected, click this button to modify the existing
Position animation.
Scale Check Box
Select this option to animate the Uniform Height and Width Scale property
of the selected object. These animations allow you to scale the object
proportionally, by height, or by width.
If the Scale check box is selected, a Scale property animation already exists
for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Scale Expert button. To remove
the Scale animation, clear the check box.
Scale Button
Click this button to animate the Uniform Height and Width Scale property
of the selected object. These animations allow you to scale the object
proportionally, by height, or by width.
If the Scale check box is selected, click this button to modify the existing
Scale animation.
Rotate Check Box
Select this option to animate the RotationAngle property of the selected
object. This animation allows you to define the angle of rotation. If the
Rotation check box is selected, a RotationAngle property animation already
exists for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Rotation Expert button. To
remove the RotationAngle animation, clear the check box.
NOTE: Ovals, rounded rectangles, and charts do not have rotation
properties.
274
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Rotate Button
Click this button to animate the RotationAngle property of the selected
object. This animation allows you to define the amount to rotate an object.
If the RotationAngle check box is selected, click this button to modify the
existing RotationAngle animation.
NOTE: Ovals, rounded rectangles, and charts do not have rotation
properties.
Fill
Item
Description
Fill Percentage Check Box
Select this option to animate the Fill property of the selected object. You
can animate both the Horizontal and Vertical Fill properties and specify
whether the Fill animates based on a percentage.
If the Fill check box is selected, a Fill property animation already exists for
this object. To modify the existing animation, click the Fill Expert button.
To remove the Fill animation, clear the check box.
Fill Percentage Button
Click this button to animate the Fill property of the selected object. You
can animate both the Horizontal and Vertical Fill properties and specify
whether the Fill animates based on a percentage. If the Fill check box is
selected, click this button to modify the existing Fill animation.
Visibility
Item
Description
Visible Check Box
Select this option to animate the Visible property of the selected object.
This animation allows you to make an object visible or invisible. If the
Visibility check box is selected, a Visible property animation already exists
for this object.
To modify the existing animation, click the Visibility Expert button. To
remove the Visibility animation, clear the check box.
275
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Visible Button
Click this button to animate the Visible property of the selected object. This
animation allows you to make an object visible or invisible. If the Visibility
check box is selected, click this button to modify the existing Visibility
animation.
Additional Animations
Item
Description
Advanced Animations
Check Box
Select this option to open the Advanced Animations dialog box. This
dialog box allows you to access all of the property animations available to
the selected object and also provides a more detailed interface for adding or
modifying property animations.
If this check box is selected, one or more advanced animations already
exist for this object.
To modify the existing animations, click the Configure button. To delete
the existing Advanced Animations, clear this check box.
Configure
Click this button to open the Advanced Animations dialog box. This
dialog box allows you to access all of the property animations available to
the selected object and also provides a more detailed interface for adding or
modifying property animations.
If the Advanced Animations check box is selected, one or more advanced
animations already exist for this object.
To modify the existing animations, click the Configure button. To delete
the existing Advanced Animations, clear this check box.
Command
Item
Description
Click Check Box
Select this option to specify one or more click commands for your object. If
this check box is selected, a command script already exists for this object.
To modify the existing command script, click the Click button to launch the
Multiple Command Script Wizard. To delete the existing script, clear this
check box.
276
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Click Button
Click this button to specify one or more click commands for your object. If
the Click check box is selected, click this button to modify the script in the
Multiple Command Script Wizard.
Button Caption Converter Dialog Box
The Button Caption Converter Dialog Box allows you to select one or more button captions (text) on your
active picture and converts the button caption text to scale to a new screen resolution.
Convert Button Caption
Converts the selected button(s) in the 'Push button found on picture' dialog box.
Find Next
Allows you to confirm the conversion of each button individually.
Convert all
Converts all the selected button text.
Close
Closes the Button Caption Converter dialog box.
Push buttons found on picture
Lists all the buttons in the active picture that are available for conversion.
NOTE: When the button includes only a bitmap, it is not listed for conversion as there is no caption to convert.
Chart Customization Dialog Box
The Chart Customization dialog box is composed of the following tabs:

General Tab

Chart Tab
277
Creataing Pictures
General Tab - Chart Customization Dialog Box
The General tab of the Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Name
Allows you to enter a specific name for your chart.
Description
Allows you to add a description for your chart.
Help Context ID
Allows you to attribute a help context ID for your own help files.
Highlightable
Allows you to highlight the chart at run time.
Selectable
Allows you to select the chart at run time.
Modifiable
Allows you to modify the chart at run time.
Scroll Direction
278
Item
Description
Scroll Right to Left
Specifies that when you scroll the chart, it will do so from right to left.
Scroll Left to Right
Specifies that when you scroll the chart, it will do so from left to right.
Reset
Allows you to assign a reset value for a left-to-right scroll. The data and its
time shifts according to this percentage when the data plot reaches the right
edge of the chart.
Using Key Macros
Appearance
Item
Description
Refresh Rate
Allows you to specify how quickly a chart updates the data plot at run
time.
Historical Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the historical chart is updated. The
default rate of zero disables the chart from being automatically updated.
The rate format is hh:mm:ss. The rate limit is one hour.
Transparent
Makes the chart transparent.
Foreground Color
To change the foreground color, click this button to open the Select Color
dialog box.
Background Color
To change the background color, click this button to open the Select Color
Dialog box.
Show Multiple Values
Allows you to display all of the chart pen's axes at run time.
Show Multiple Times
Allows you to display all of the chart pen's time scales at run time.
Show Time Cursor
Allows you to display all of the chart pen's time cursors at run time.
Show Time Cursor Tool
Tips
Allows you to display the pens' time cursor ToolTips at run time.
Zooming
Item
Description
Horizontal
Allows you to zoom into a chart on its horizontal axis at run time.
Vertical
Allows you to zoom into a chart on its vertical axis at run time.
Both
Allows you to zoom into a chart on both its horizontal and vertical axes at
run time.
279
Creataing Pictures
Chart Tab - Chart Customization Dialog Box
The Chart tab of the Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Data Sources
Allows you to add a pen to your chart by double-clicking a blank field in the list. This in turn allows you to
select a data source for the pen.
Apply to All Pens
Allows you to apply any properties that you select from this dialog box to all pens in a chart.
Pen Tab
280
Item
Description
High Limit
Allows you to enter the high limit value defined for the selected data source.
Low Limit
Allows you to enter the low limit value defined for the selected data source.
Number of
Decimal Places to
Display
Allows you to specify the number of decimal places the pen displays for EGU limits.
Enter a number from 0-7.
Fetch Limits
Specifies whether or not to automatically retrieve the low and high limits assigned to
the selected data source at run time.
Show Line
Specifies whether or not to display the trend line for the selected data source.
Constant Line
Specifies whether or not to display a constant horizontal line at the current value of
the pen.
Show Gaps
Specifies whether or not to display a blank space to represent an area in a plot where
there is no data.
Use Regional
Settings
Specifies whether or not to use the Windows Regional Settings. Disabling this
feature allows you to enter user-defined decimal place settings. By default, this
feature is enabled.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Maximum Display
Points
Allows you to specify how many data points will be displayed in the chart over a
given span duration.
Line Style
Allows you to apply a style to the pen's plot line. The options are:

Solid – Applies a solid pen line style.

Dash – Applies a dashed pen line style.

Dot – Applies a dotted pen line style.

DashDot – Applies a dash-dot combination line style.

DashDotDot – Applies a dash-dot-dot combination line style.
Line Color
Allows you to specify the color of the pen's plot line.
Line Width
Allows you to specify the width of a pen's plot line.
Marker Style
Allows you to specify a style for the pen's marker type.
Historical Mode
Allows you to determine how iFIX selects data from a historical data source and
displays it in the chart, and determines what each displayed value represents. The
options are:
Type

Sample – The last valid value found is trended, up to and including the start
of the interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the interval is trended,
starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00. In this case, 4.5 is trended
from 12:00:00 to 12:10:00.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the interval is
trended, starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00. In this case, 9.0 is
trended from 12:00:00 to 12:10:00.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the interval is trended,
starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00. In this case, 0.0 is trended
from 12:00:00 to 12:10:00.]

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two
values is a straight line. All points along that line are estimated except the
starting point and the ending point. Available for Historian only.
This field is informational. You cannot edit this field.
281
Creataing Pictures
Time Tab
Item
282
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether or not to enter a specific date on which to start the display, in the
format MM/DD/YY (month/day/year).
Days Before Now
Specifies whether or not to enter a number of days prior to today to start the display.
Allows you to enter the number of days prior to today to start the display. For
example, if you want to define a time group to display data collected two days
before the current date, enter 2.
Fixed Time
Specifies whether or not to designate a specific time to start the display, based on a
24 hour clock.
Lock Time
Locks the current Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and
Time Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when
you designate a specific time to start the display using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether or not to enter the duration prior to the current time to start the
display. The minimum duration for a display is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select a
specific time zone, or you can select the client time (time zone for your computer),
the server time (time zone used by the Historian server), or the collector time (time
zone of the collector machine). The default time zone is that of the client machine.
This field is available only when Historian is being used.
Adjust for Daylight
Saving Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when Historian is being used.
Days
Allows you to enter the duration for the display, which determines how much data to
display on the x axis. The minimum duration for a display is 1 second; the
maximum is 99 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Time
Displays the time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Display
Milliseconds
Description
Displays milliseconds on the time axis and time cursor in the chart and milliseconds
in the (Interval) Time field when Historian is being used. This field is available only
when Historian is being used.
X-Axis Tab
Item
Description
Show X Axis
Specifies whether or not to display the x axis in the chart.
Number of Labels
Allows you to specify how many labels the x axis will contain. You can enter a
maximum of 21 labels.
Number of Ticks
Allows you to specify how many ticks the x axis will contain. You can enter a
maximum of 21 ticks.
Axis Color
Allows you to choose a color for the axis.
Show Date
Allows you to display the current date in the x axis of the chart.
Allow Reset of
Axis Limits
Lets you control changes to the limits on the x (time) axis in a chart. Initially, the
limits are set to match the time specified on the Time tab of the Chart Customization
dialog box. However, when you select this check box, you enable the time axis limits
of your chart to be reset after you right-click the object to zoom out. The chart resets
the time axis limits to the values of the Start Time and End properties.
Show Title
Specifies whether or not to display the title of the x axis in the chart.
Title
Allows you to specify a title for the x axis in the chart. You can enter a title of up to
255 characters.
Y-Axis Tab
Item
Description
Show Y Axis
Specifies whether or not to display the y axis in the chart.
283
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Number of Labels
Allows you to specify how many labels the y axis will contain. You can enter a
maximum of 21 labels.
Number of Ticks
Allows you to specify how many ticks the x axis will contain. You can enter a
maximum of 21 ticks.
Axis Color
Allows you to choose a color for the axis.
Allow Reset of
Axis Limits
Lets you control changes to the limit on the y (value) axis in a chart. Initially, the
limits are set to match the High and Low limits specified on the Pen tab of the Chart
Customization dialog box. However, when you select this check box, you enable the
value axis limits of your chart to be reset after you right-click the object to zoom out.
The chart resets the value axis limits to the values of the HiLimit and LoLimit
properties.
Show Title
Specifies whether or not to display the title of the x axis in the chart.
Title
Allows you to specify a title for the x axis in the chart. You can enter a title of up to
255 characters.
Grid Tab
284
Item
Description
Show Horizontal
Grid
Specifies whether or not to display the horizontal grid in a chart.
Number of Lines
(Horizontal)
Allows you to specify the number of lines in the horizontal grid. The maximum
number of lines you can have in your grid is 21.
Grid Color
(Horizontal)
Allows you to specify a color for the grid.
Grid Style
(Horizontal)
Allows you to apply a style to the chart's horizontal grid line. The options are the
same as for the chart's line styles.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Scroll Grid
(Horizontal)
Specifies whether or not to scroll the grid.
Show Vertical Grid
Specifies whether or not to display the vertical grid in a chart.
Number of Lines
(Vertical)
Allows you to specify the number of lines in the vertical grid. The maximum
number of lines you can have in your grid is 21.
Grid Color
(Vertical)
Allows you to specify a color for the grid.
Grid Style
(Vertical)
Allows you to apply a style to the chart's vertical grid line. The options are the same
as for the chart's line styles.
Legend Tab
Item
Description
Source
Specifies whether or not to display a data source in the legend.
Description
Specifies whether or not to display a description in the legend.
Value
Allows you to enter the number of characters that represents the length of the value.
Units
Specifies whether or not to display data units in the legend.
Mode
Specifies whether or not to display a data mode in the legend.
High Limit
Specifies whether or not to display a data high limit value in the legend.
Low Limit
Specifies whether or not to display a data low limit value in the legend.
Interval
Specifies whether or not to display a data interval in the legend.
285
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
High Over Range
Specifies whether or not to display the high data value of a pen in a specified time
range.
Low Over Range
Specifies whether or not to display the low data value of a pen in a specified time
range.
Average Over
Range
Specifies whether or not to display the average data value of a pen in a specified
time range.
Order
Allows you to display the items you select in any order in the legend (left to right).
To rearrange the order in the list, select the item and click the Up or Down arrow.
Color Selection Dialog Box
The Color Selection dialog box displays the following items:
Property
Displays the color property (foreground, background, or edge) for which you are currently defining a color.
Color Set
Lists all color sets that are currently configured on your system. You can add your own color set by clicking the
New Color Set button, naming the color set, and customizing the individual colors within the set.
Color Tab
Allows you to attribute a color for the selected object. To change an object's color, click the Color tab, select a
color from the color box, and click OK. Optionally, you can attribute a named color by clicking the Name tab,
selecting the name of a color from the list, and clicking OK.
Name Tab
Displays the named colors of the color set listed in the Color Set list. To change the name of a color, doubleclick it from the list and enter a new name in the highlighted field.
286
Using Key Macros
Customize Color
Allows you to create a unique color from one of the available color sets listed in the ColorSet list.
NOTE: This button is disabled if the System Default color set is selected.
New Color Set
Allows you to add a custom color set to the ColorSet list. This button displays the Add ColorSet dialog box.
Create Picture Wizard Dialog Box
Common Wizard Elements
The Create Picture Wizard guides you when creating pictures in Configure mode that will appear the way you
intend in Run mode. Each page in the Wizard includes the following elements:

Preview Pane – Shows a picture configuration based on the currently selected options.

Help Button – Launches the Help topics for the Create Picture Wizard.

Cancel Button – Exits the Create Picture Wizard without creating any new pictures, and without
changing WorkSpace appearance.

Previous Button – Returns you to the previous page in the Wizard.

Next Button – Sends you to the following page in the Wizard.

Finish Button – Creates the new pictures that you have specified, and sets the WorkSpace appearance
that you have specified. This button is only enabled when the Wizard has collected enough information
to successfully create new pictures.
Create Picture Paths
The Create Picture Wizard dialog box displays three paths to create new pictures. For more information on the
screens that appear when you select a path, refer the following sections:

Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration

Create a Custom Picture

Create a Default Untitled Picture
Show WorkSpace Appearance Page
Indicates whether you want to view the WorkSpace Appearance page in the wizard. This page only needs to be
accessed once per WorkSpace session.
287
Creataing Pictures
Do not show this Wizard from the new picture menu and Exit now
Prevents the wizard from running the next time you select New Picture from the File menu. The Finish Button
changes to an OK button, and allows you to close the wizard.
Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration
When you select the Create Picture(s) from a Predefined Configuration option in the first screen of the Create
Picture Wizard, the wizard then displays the following screens:
WorkSpace Appearance Screen
This screen provides you with Proficy iFIX WorkSpace settings.
Item
Description
WorkSpace Full Screen in
Run Mode
When you select this option, the WorkSpace hides its title bar, menu bar,
and status bar in the run environment. If you clear this option, you can
select any of the other options on the page.
Show WorkSpace Title Bar
Displays the title bar across the top of the screen in run mode.
Show WorkSpace Menu Bar
This is available only if Show WorkSpace Title Bar is enabled. Select this
option to display the menu bar across the screen under the title bar in run
mode.
Show Status Bar
Displays the status bar across the bottom of the screen in run mode.
Choose Configuration Screen
This screen provides you with predefined picture configurations. You can select a configuration as is, or modify
it through the Modify Configuration button. When you highlight a configuration name in the list box, the
preview pane displays the configuration.
There are five generic names for predefined pictures: Main, Header, Footer, Left Navigation, and Faceplate. If
you create a custom picture, the generic name is Custom. The background color of the generic name
corresponds to the color of the picture in the preview pane.
288
Item
Description
Modify Configuration
Opens the Modify Configuration Dialog Box that allows you to specify
attributes and sizes for your picture.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Delete Configuration
Deletes the selected configuration from the Choose Configuration list.
Select Filename(s) Screen
The Select Filename(s) page allows you to assign a filename to each picture in the configuration. Valid
filenames must:

be alphanumeric

begin with an alphabetic character

contain no more than 31 characters

contain none of the following characters: spaces, @, &, $, #, !, or %

have a .grf extension
Summary Screen
This page summarizes the settings that will be used to create the picture.
Do not show this Wizard from the new picture menu Check Box
Prevents the wizard from running the next time you select New Picture from the File menu (Classic view) or
from the WorkSpace button (Ribbon View). The Finish Button changes to an OK button, and allows you to
close the wizard.
Create a Custom Picture
When you select the Create a Custom Picture option in the first screen of the Create Picture Wizard, the wizard
then displays the following screens:
WorkSpace Appearance Screen
This screen provides you with Proficy iFIX WorkSpace settings.
Item
Description
WorkSpace Full Screen in
Run Mode
When you select this option, the WorkSpace hides its title bar, menu bar,
and status bar in the run environment. If you clear this option, you can
select any of the other options on the page.
289
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Show WorkSpace Title Bar
Displays the title bar across the top of the screen in run mode.
Show WorkSpace Menu Bar
This is available only if Show WorkSpace Title Bar is enabled. Select this
option to display the menu bar across the screen under the title bar in run
mode.
Show Status Bar
Displays the status bar across the bottom of the screen in run mode.
Define Custom Picture Screen
Allows you to define a picture by either specifying dimensions or using the dimensions of an existing picture.
The dimensions that you enter are checked for range. The preview pane updates to show the picture that you are
defining. Valid ranges for dimensions:

For Width and Height, dimensions must be greater than zero.

For Top and Left, dimensions can be zero or any positive or negative number.
Settings that you can configure in this area include:
290
Item
Description
Use Specified Dimensions
Selecting this check box allows you to specify the dimensions used to
create the picture.
Left
Distance from the left of the screen to the left edge of the picture.
Top
Distance from the top of the screen to the top edge of the picture.
Width
Distance from the left edge of the picture to the right edge of the picture.
Height
Distance from the top edge of the picture to the bottom edge of the picture.
Percentage Units
Indicates the size and location of the picture is based on percentage of the
screen.
Pixel Units
Indicates the size and location of the picture is based on the number of
pixels.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Use Dimensions of Existing
Picture
Allows you to use an existing picture as the template for a new picture.
Edit Box
Enter the picture name that you want to use the dimension of, or click the
browse (...) button to select it.
Define Custom Picture Attributes Screen
Item
Description
Show Title Bar
Adds a title bar to your picture.
Show System Menu
Adds system menus to your picture.
Resizable
Adds sizing borders to the picture.
Always on Top
Configures the window so that it is always on top when you open it.
Allow this Picture to be
Cached
Configures the window so that when it is opened and closed it is held in
memory and, when reopened, is read from memory.
Background Color
Click the Background Color button to set the actual background color of
the picture. This color will not appear in the preview pane, since the colors
in the preview pane are used only in the Create Picture Wizard.
Select Filename(s) Screen
Allows you to specify the filename for the custom picture.
Summary Screen
This page summarizes the settings that will be used to create the picture.
Do not show this Wizard from the new picture menu Check Box
Prevents the wizard from running the next time you select New Picture from the File menu (Classic view), or
from the Application Button (Ribbon View). The Finish Button changes to an OK button, and allows you to
close the wizard.
291
Creataing Pictures
Create a Default Untitled Picture
When you select the Create a Default Untitled Picture option in the first screen of the Create Picture Wizard, no
additional screens appear. Click Finish to create your picture.
Custom Lookup Table Dialog Box
The Custom Lookup Table dialog box displays the following items:
Source Property Type
Allows you to specify the input data type for which you want to configure a custom lookup table. You can
create a custom lookup table for the following data types: Boolean, integer, float, and string values.
Object Property Type
Allows you to specify the output data type that corresponds to the input data type specified in the Source
Property Type field. You can specify the following data types as output values: Boolean, integer, float, string,
and color.
Exact Match
Allows you to specify that incoming data must exactly match the configured input value in the lookup table in
order to format the data as the corresponding output value.
Range Comparison
Allows you to specify that incoming data must fall within a range of input values in the lookup table in order to
format the data as the corresponding output value.
Grid
Allows you to configure the lookup table for this property. Double-click any cell in the table to configure the
input data, output data, and toggle (blink to) data.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the data conversion table.
Modify Row
Displays the New Level Dialog Box so that you can modify an existing row in the data conversion table.
292
Using Key Macros
Delete Row
Deletes an existing row of the data conversion table.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Lookup Options Dialog Box that allows you to configure several more lookup options.
Datalink Dialog Box
The Datalink dialog box displays the following items:
Source
Item
Description
Edit Box
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this Data link.
Data source refers to a reference to a source of information, such as iFIX
tagnames and historical files, or other OPC-compliant data servers. A data
source may also consist of iFIX objects (such as shapes, charts, and
variables) or 3rd party OLE controls. Single lettered tags named A through
P are not allowed.
Expression refers to constants, data sources, or a combination of constants
and data sources that are connected with one or more operators.
Browse Button
Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box.
Quick Modify Button
Use the Quick Modify button to modify a database block directly without
launching the Database Manager.
Data Entry
Item
Description
Type
Allows you to configure whether or not operators can enter data into the
Data link at run-time. To allow operators to enter data into the link and
write a new value to the database tag during the next scan cycle, select InPlace from the list. To prohibit data entry at run-time, select None.
293
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Confirm
When enabled, requires operators to confirm that they want to write data to
the database after they have entered a new value in a Data link at run-time.
Note that this option is only available if In-Place is selected in the Data
Entry Type list.
Output Error Mode
Allows you to specify how errors are processed for this Data link. To accept an input value and return a
corresponding output value, select Use Current Output. To use values from a lookup table, select Use Error
Table. If an incoming input value matches an entry in the table, that output value is returned.
For more information on different error configurations, see the Creating Pictures electronic book.
Formatting
Item
Description
Raw Format
Allows you to enter data in its raw (or native C code) format. If this check
box is enabled, you can edit the format by entering a C format string in the
Format field.
Format
Allows you to enter a C format string to display data in its raw, native C
code format. You can also enter a string of any kind preceding the raw
format string (for example, to introduce what the data string represents).
Displays when the Raw Format check box is selected.
Type
Allows you to configure whether the data represented by the Data link
should be formatted as numeric or alphanumeric data. To format numeric
data, select Numeric from this list and enter an integer from 0 to 7 in the
Whole Digits and Decimal fields. To format alpha-numeric data, select
Alpha-Numeric from this list and enter the number of lines and the number
of characters per line that you want to display in the Data link.
Displays when the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Justify
Allows you to justify the alignment of the Data link's text. Text can be
aligned to the left, center, or right of the Data link.
Displays when the Raw Format check box is cleared.
294
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Lines
Allows you to enter the number of lines that you want to display in an
alpha-numerically formatted Data link.
Displays when the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Char/Lines
Allows you to enter the number of characters per line that you want to
display in an alpha-numerically formatted Data link.
Displays when the Raw Format check box is cleared.
Edit Picture Dialog Box
The Edit Picture dialog box displays the following items:
Window Width
Specifies the width of the iFIX picture that is currently open. Window Width is measured as a percentage.
Window Height
Specifies the height of the iFIX picture that is currently open. Window Height is measured in a percentage.
Window Styles
Item
Description
Title Bar
Select this check box to display the title bar of the currently opened picture.
System Menu
Select this check box to display the system menu controls in the title bar of
the currently opened picture. These controls allow you to perform such
window-related actions as Restore, Move, Size, Minimize, Maximize,
Close, and Next.
Resizable
Select this check box to indicate that the picture can be resized.
Always on Top
Select this check box to indicate that the current picture is displayed on top
of all other windows.
295
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Runtime Visible
Select this check box to indicate that the current picture can be viewed in
the run-time environment.
Gradient
296
Item
Description
Gradient Enabled
Select this check box to apply a gradient to the background color of the
current picture.
Linear
Select this option to apply a linear gradient fade type to the background of
the current picture. This option is available only when the Gradient enabled
check box is selected.
Reflected
Select this option to apply a reflected gradient fade type to the background
of the current picture. This option is available only when the Gradient
enabled check box is selected.
Radial
Select this option to apply a radial gradient fade type to the background of
the current picture. This option is available only when the Gradient enabled
check box is selected.
Concentric
Select this option to apply a concentric gradient fade type to the
background of the current picture. This option is available only when the
Gradient enabled check box is selected.
Background Color
Use this button to open the Select BackgroundColor dialog box to
configure the background color of the picture that is currently open.
Blend Slider
Use this slider to set the percentage of fade color to blend with the current
picture's background color. The higher the percentage, the more fade color
is visible. This slider is available only when the Gradient enabled check
box is selected.
Fade Color
Use this button to open the Select FadeColor dialog box to configure the
fade color of the picture that is currently open.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Gradient Angle Slider
Use this slider to set the angle of the gradient for the current picture's
background color. This slider is available only when the Gradient enabled
check box is selected.
Message Reflection
Some messages are normally sent to the parent control. Under normal conditions, these messages are actually
reflected back to the sending control, so that the control can handle its own message. This message reflection
can be handled by the container, which will reflect the messages back as events. However, some controls cannot
handle message reflection.
If your picture contains OLE controls, and those controls are behaving poorly, try disabling the Message
Reflection check box.
Disable Caching for this Picture
Select this check box to indicate that when you close the current picture, it will NOT be loaded into the cache.
With this check box selected, the picture file will always be opened directly from the disk drive.
If you clear this check box, picture caching is enabled for the current picture, if you also enabled it in the User
Preferences dialog box on the Picture tab. With picture caching enabled, iFIX reads and opens the previously
opened picture from memory.
Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box is composed of the following tabs:

General Tab

Data Sources Tab

Chart Style Tab

Subsets Tab

Axis Tab

Font Tab

Color Tab

Plotting Style Tab

Exporting Enhanced Chart Dialog Box
297
Creataing Pictures
General Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

The General tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Main Title
Allows you to enter a main title for your chart.
Subtitle
Allows you to enter a subtitle for your chart.
Object Name
Allows you to enter an object name for your chart. This name appears in the system tree. It must be unique and
is limited to the standard object naming conventions.
Description
Allows you to add a description for your chart, which is the standard object description shared by all object
types.
Highlightable
Allows you to highlight the chart at run time so it can be modified.
Selectable
Allows you to select the chart at run time. By default, this option is selected.
Modifiable
Allows you to modify the chart at run time.
Expandable
Allows you to display an Expand or Contract button in the upper right corner of the chart at run time when the
cursor hovers over that area. The Expand button displays the chart in full screen; the Contract button resets the
chart to its original size and position. The hot keys 'E' and 'C' (upper and lower case) can also be used to Expand
or Contract the chart if it has focus.
An Enhanced Chart in thumbnail mode can be expanded and contracted. Thumbnail mode can be enabled on
the Chart Style tab. When expanded, the displayed chart will not be in thumbnail optimized mode, but with user
configured legend settings. When contracted, it will revert back to the thumbnail settings.
298
Using Key Macros
Zooming
Item
Description
Horizontal
Allows you to zoom into a chart along its horizontal axis at run time.
Vertical
Allows you to zoom into a chart along its vertical axis at run time.
Both
Allows you to zoom into a chart along both its horizontal and vertical axes
at run time.
Appearance
Item
Description
Chart Update Rate
Allows you to specify how quickly a chart updates the data plot at run time.
When used for real-time data, the fastest update rate is 0.1 seconds and the
slowest is 1800 seconds. When used for historical data, the fastest update
rate is 5 seconds and the slowest is 1800 seconds.
This value is not used for Histogram and SPC charts. They update at the
rate of their data sources.
For XY charts, this rate specified applies to both real-time and historical
data sources.
NOTE: If you choose to use a real-time data source for your XY or
line/multiline chart, be aware that when you view it in run mode, the first
data points will not be plotted until the time specified in the Chart Update
Rate field has elapsed. Therefore, there will be a lag time between when
you open the chart in run mode and when the data is plotted; the first data
point does not immediately display. This applies to tag group substitution,
as well.
Historical Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the historical chart is updated. The
default rate of zero disables the chart from being automatically updated.
The format is hh:mm:ss. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the
slowest, 1800 seconds, or thirty minutes.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
299
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Number of Points
Allows you to specify the number of points in the chart. Limits the chart's
data display for each data source to no more than the number specified.
NOTES:
Show Time Cursor

You cannot specify the number of points for SPC or Histogram
charts.

Do not select 2 for the number of points setting if your chart is
a Line/Multiline chart and your chart includes both the graph
and the table. Doing so will cause the graph to disappear.

If you set the Number of Points too high, the Hourglass will
continuously flicker. In most cases, the default value of 500 is
high enough to accommodate the data points required and low
enough to avoid this situation.

For XY charts, using historical data sources, the value in the
Number of Points field adjusts automatically to the value
closest to the value you entered that will produce evenly spaced
data, based on the duration configured and the automatically
calculated interval.
Allows you to configure whether the time cursor will display at run time as
tool tips or as a table.
Charts in upgraded pictures which display the time cursor will be
configured as a table. The default for new charts in new pictures is as tool
tips.
In run mode, if the time cursor is configured as tool tips, clicking in the
plot area freezes the time cursor where clicked; clicking again frees the
cursor.
IMPORTANT: You must also have the Selectable check box enabled for
the Show Time Cursor option to work.
Show Hover Tool Tip
Displays a tool tip for the data point that the mouse is placed over.
IMPORTANT: You must also have the Selectable check box enabled for
the Show Hover Tool Tip option to work.
300
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Display Milliseconds
Displays milliseconds on the time axis and time cursor in the chart and
milliseconds in the (Interval) Time field.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
Enable Advanced Graphics
Allows you to improve the visual quality of the chart by permitting the use
of bitmap/gradient styles, drop-shadow, 3D effects, a variety of plotting
style lines and improved font appearance. Disabling this option removes
smoothing from fonts and graphics (Anti-Aliasing), as well as disabling
transparencies (Alpha Blending) and removing Bitmap and Gradient
functionality.
IMPORTANT: Enabling Advanced Graphics may affect chart plotting
performance.
Enable Quick Configure
Allows you to change chart properties while in run mode without having to
display the configuration dialog or the right-click menu. The Quick
Configure chart properties that can be modified in run mode are:

Y Axes Style – Hovering over the upper left hand corner of the
chart displays Multiple, Stack, or Single buttons that can be used to
display the Y Axes of the chart in the specified format.

Y Axes Always Visible – Clicking the far right column in the Data
Source Legend area allows you to toggle between Yes and No to set
the Y Axis Always Visible property for each data source.

Plot Visible – Clicking the next-to-last column in the Data Source
Legend area allows you to toggle between Yes and No to set the
Plot Visible property for each data source.
NOTE: This property applies only to the Line and XY Charts.
Duration
NOTE: These fields do not apply to XY charts plotting real-time data.
301
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days for the duration of the display. This
field can be used in conjunction with the following field.
Days
The duration for the display determines how much data to display on the x
axis. The minimum duration for a display is 1 second; the maximum is 365
days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds. The durations apply to all chart
data sources.
Allows you to enter the number of hours, minutes and seconds for the
duration for the display. This field can be used in conjunction with the
preceding field.
Time
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Data Sources - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

302
The Data Sources tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Using Key Macros
Data Sources List
Item
Description
Data Source
Selection List
Allows you to add a data source to your chart by double-clicking a blank field in the
list. You can apply different legend, data limits, time constraints, and general axis
information for each data source that you add.
Acceptable data sources:

X Bar, R Bar, and S Bar – SD block (Statistical Data)

Histogram – HS block (Histogram)

Line/Multiline – Any block

XY – Any block, except SD, HS, ETR, SQT, SQD, or PA
Any changes made to the Data Sources List are applied immediately; clicking Cancel
does not undo any changes.
Allowable number of data sources, by chart type:

X Bar, R Bar, S Bar, and Histogram – one

XY – two (one for the X axis and one for the Y axis)

Line/Multiline – multiple
NOTES:

In the configuration mode for XY charts, it is possible to enter a real-time
data source with partial tag group substitutions (for example,
fix32.@server1@.@tag@.f_cv) and a historical data source. However,
in run mode, the quality column in the legend displays a Type Mismatch
error code because the data types do not match.

If you change the data source type for an existing data source, any usermodified entries in the Data, Time, Legend, and Y Axis tabs will not redefault. To reset default values for a data source, the existing data source
should be deleted, and a new data source should be added.

Proficy Historian Data Sources using expressions (for example,
Hist1.INFO10.Simulation00001 + 30) are not supported for Enhanced
Charts.
Add
Allows you to add a data source to the chart.
Delete
Allows you to remove a data source from the chart.
303
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Move Up
Allows you to move the selected data source up in position in the list.
Move Down
Allows you to move the selected data source down in position in the list.
X Axis
Allows you to select the data source to use for the X axis.
NOTES:

By default, the data source at the top of the Data Sources List is used for the X axis.

This field is only available for XY charts.

Any changes made to the X axis selection are applied immediately; clicking Cancel does not undo any
changes.
Apply to All Data Sources
For XY Charts and XY Chart Dynamos, the Apply to all Data Sources check box is disabled when you select
the Time tab. The Time tab is enabled when the data source selected is the one being used for the X-Axis. The
time for Historical data sources is kept in sync so any change to time is propagated to the other historical data
sources.
For the Line Chart Dynamo, the Apply to all Data Sources check box is disabled when you select the Time tab.
The Time tab is enabled if the data source is historical or Tag Group. Any change made on a Time tab is
synchronized to all other Historical and Tag Group data sources.
For the Line Chart, the Apply to all Data Sources check box is enabled and available to be checked when the
Time tab is selected. Unless this check box is checked and the Apply or OK button is pressed, the changes made
to the Time tab apply only to the data source currently selected.
Data Tab
304
Item
Description
High Limit
Specify the high limit value for the selected data source.
Low Limit
Specify the low limit value for the selected data source.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Fetch Limits
Select this check box to specify that at run-time, the low and high limits of the
selected data source are retrieved. Clear the check box to activate the High and Low
Limit fields.
Show Gaps
Determines whether a blank space or a line is displayed to represent an area in a plot
where there is no data.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
Interpolate Data
Causes the lines between plotted data to display as slopes, rather than flat lines. In the
following illustration, the line on the left uses interpolated data. The line on the right
does not.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
Maximum
Display Points
Specify the number of data points to display for a data source over a given duration;
the duration is indicated on the General Tab. This number cannot exceed the number
specified on the General Tab in the Number of Points field.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
305
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Historical Mode
Allows you to determine how iFIX selects data from a historical data source and
displays it in the chart, and determines what each displayed value represents. The
options are:

Sample – The last valid value found is trended, up to and including the start of
the interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the interval is trended,
starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the interval is trended,
starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the interval is trended,
starting at the beginning of the interval, 12:00:00.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two
values is a straight line. All points along that line are estimated except the
starting point and the ending point.

Trend – The raw data for the minimum and maximum values for each interval
is returned.
NOTE: This field is not available for XY charts.
Time Tab
NOTES:
306

The following fields are only available if the data source is historical.

For XY charts, configuration choices made for the X axis data source are also applied to the Y axis
data source.

For Line, X-Bar, R-Bar, S-Bar, and Histogram Charts, if the Apply To All Data Sources check box is
checked, the selections you make on the Time tab are applied to all data sources.
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific date on which to start the display.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to start the display.
Allows you to enter the number of days prior to today to start the display. For
example, if you want to define a time group to display data collected two days before
the current date, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start the display, based on a 24 hour
clock.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start the display using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start the display.
The minimum duration for a display is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds.
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when Historian is being used.
Duration
The Duration fields on this tab are display-only. The information displaying in these
fields come from the Duration specified on the General Tab. The fields specify the
amount of data your chart displays along the time (X) axes. On the General Tab, you
can enter any value from 0 to 365 days in the Days field. In the Time field, enter the
time in hours, minutes, and seconds. You can enter any time up to 23 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds.
Interval
The Interval fields are display-only. If you are using a historical data source, the
Interval value is automatically calculated to a time that results in evenly spaced data,
based on the Duration and Number of Points specified on the General tab.
Legend Tab
NOTE: If the Apply To All Data Sources check box is checked, the selections you make on the Legend tab are
applied to all data sources.
307
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Source
Specifies if the chart's data source appears in the legend.
Description
Specifies that a description of the data source appears in the legend.
Quality
Specifies that a description of the quality of the data source appears in the legend.
This option is not available for histogram charts.
Value
Specifies that the value of the chart's data source appear in the legend. This option is
not available for histogram charts.
Low Limit
Specifies that the low limit specified on the Data Source Data tab appears in the
legend.
High Limit
Specifies that the high limit specified on the Data Source Data tab appears in the
legend.
Eng Units
Specifies the engineering units for the data source connected to the legend item for
the specified pen. This check box is selected for new charts and not selected for old
charts.
Y Axis Tab
NOTES:

This tab is available only for Multi-Line and XY charts.

Although the Y Axis tab has fields enabled for an X Axis Data Source, and the various check boxes,
bullets, and fields can be changed and saved, these selections are ignored if the data source is defined
as the X Axis. However, if the X Axis data source is changed to a Y Axis Data Source, these selections
are then applied.
This tab allows you to configure multiple Y axes in the XY Chart and Line Multiline Charts. You can now enter
up to 16 data sources and individually configure the Y Axis. Multiple axes can be shown in the same graph, or
in graphs stacked one on top of the other. Different plotting methods are supported for each data source.
Select a data source in the Data Sources List and then configure the following properties for the Y-Axis:
308
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Title
The Title displayed along the Y Axis for the associated data source.
Y Axis Always
Visible
Indicates whether the Y Axis for this data source is always visible.
NOTE: This applies only to the Multiple Y Axes Style.
Use Default Y
Axis Settings
Indicates whether default Y Axis settings are displayed in the chart for the
associated data source. The default Y Axis settings are those configured in the Axis
tab. The Title is the only exception. If it is not empty then it will be used rather than
the Y Axis Title configured in Axis tab.
NOTE: Selecting this option disables all other controls in this group.
Use Data Source
Limits
If selected, the Y Axis for each data source is set according to the limits of the
individual data source.
NOTES:
Linear/Log

This option is available only if Use Default Y Axis Settings is not selected.

Selecting this option disables all other Data Source Limits controls in this
group.
Indicates whether the Y Axis legend for the associated data source is displayed in a
linear or logarithmic style.
NOTE: This option is available only if Use Default Y Axis Settings is not selected.
Specifies the minimum value of the Y Axis legend for the selected data source.
Min
NOTE: This option is not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data
Source Limits is selected.
Specifies the maximum value of the Y Axis legend for the selected data source.
Max
NOTE: This option is not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data
Source Limits is selected.
309
Creataing Pictures
Item
Padding
Description
Specifies the spacing between values and the top and bottom of plot area. This can
be used to prevent points from being plotted at the very top or bottom of the plot.
Valid values are 0-100 and represent a percent of the range (Max – Min). Max
and/or Min may be calculated at run time based on selection of the Auto, Max or
Min radio buttons.
NOTE: This option is not available if Min/Max is selected.
Auto, Min,
Max, Min/Max
Auto allows iFIX to automatically calculate the Max and Min in run mode so that all
data points are within the visible area of the chart for the selected data source.
Min allows you to specify the minimum value and automatically calculate the Max
for the selected data source.
Max allows you to specify the maximum value and automatically calculate the Min
for the selected data source.
Min/Max allows you to specify both the minimum and maximum values for the
selected data source.
NOTE: This option is not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data
Source Limits is selected.
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Chart Style Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

The Chart Style tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Border Style
310
Item
Description
Shadow
Specifies whether the chart has a drop-shadow.
No Border
Specifies whether the chart has a border.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Line
Specifies whether the chart has a line border.
3D Inset
Specifies whether the chart is inset.
Numeric Precision
NOTE: Even though you set the numeric precision, the number of decimal points specified does not appear on
the chart unless it is necessary. For example, if you specified the use of two decimal places, but all of the data
values in your chart are whole numbers, decimal points would not be used because they are not necessary. This
setting does not apply to the axes graduations and ticks.
Item
Description
0
Specifies the use of no decimals.
Specifies the use of one decimal.
1
2
Specifies the use of two decimals.
3
Specifies the use of three decimals.
4
Specifies the use of four decimals.
5
Specifies the use of five decimals.
6
Specifies the use of six decimals.
7
Specifies the use of seven decimals.
311
Creataing Pictures
Miscellaneous
Item
Description
Mark Data Points
Specifies whether each individual data point is plotted on the chart.
Show Plotting
Style Legend
Show Data Source
Legend
Specifies whether the legend appears on the chart. The plotting style legend
shows the line type or point type, color, and data source.
Specifies whether the data source legend appears on the chart. The data source
legend appears at the bottom of the chart and includes the tag name and other
items specified on the Legend tab of the Data Sources tab.
Thumbnail
Specifies that only the Title, Sub Title, and Value field of the Data Source Legend
and the graph portion of the chart is displayed, so that it can be displayed as a
thumbnail and still be legible. The Title and Sub Title will only be displayed if
the Title or Sub Title is defined, and the Value field of the Data Source Legend
will only be displayed if Show Data Source Legend is true.
An Enhanced Chart in thumbnail mode can be expanded and contracted using the
Expandable option on the General tab. When expanded, the displayed chart will
not be in thumbnail optimized mode, but with user configured legend settings.
When contracted, it will revert back to the thumbnail settings.
Truncate Titles
Specifies that longer titles on the chart can be truncated for better legibility.
Include Data
Labels
Specifies whether data labels are placed next to data points. The labels have the
number of decimal places specified in the Numeric Precision field.
NOTES:
312

This option is available only for XY charts.

Data Labels should be used only for a small number of points. Using
Data Labels for a large number of points can cause charts to run slowly
in run mode, and potentially cause the Workspace to freeze.
Using Key Macros
Grid Lines
Item
Description
Grid in Front of
Data
Specifies that the grid appears in front of the data.
Extend Y Axis
Ticks
Specifies whether Y Axis minor ticks are extended across the chart.
NOTE: You can choose only one line display option from the following four choices.
None
Specifies that no grid lines display on the chart.
X
Specifies that only grid lines for the X-axis display on the chart.
Y
Specifies that only grid lines for the Y-axis display on the chart.
Both
Specifies that grid lines for both the X and Y-axes display on the chart.
NOTE: You can only choose one line style from the following five options.
Thin
Specifies that grid lines are thin.
Thick
Specifies that grid lines are thick.
Dotted
Specifies that grid lines are dotted.
313
Creataing Pictures
Item
Dashed
Description
Specifies that grid lines are dashed.
One Pixel
Specifies that grid lines are one pixel thick. This setting is primarily for printing,
because it only affects the look of a printed chart.
Legend Column Widths
NOTE: The following settings apply to all data sources legends and not to any individual data source.
Item
Description
Source
Specifies the column width of the data source name in the legend.
Description
Specifies the column width of the data description in the legend.
Quality
Specifies the column width of the data quality in the legend.
Value
Specifies the column width of the data value in the legend.
Low Limit
Specifies the column width of the low limit in the legend.
High Limit
Specifies the column width of the high limit in the legend.
Eng Units
Specifies the column width of the Engineering Units in the legend.
314
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Order
Allows you to display the items you select in any order in the legend (left to
right). To rearrange the order in the list, select the item and click the Up or Down
arrow.
X-Axis Label Orientation
Item
Auto
Description
Specifies that the orientation of the X-axis label is determined by iFIX.
NOTE: This option is not available for XY charts.
Vertical
Specifies that the X-axis label is vertical.
Horizontal
Specifies that the X-axis label is horizontal.
Slanted
Specifies that the X-axis label is slanted.
NOTE: This option is not available for XY charts.
Y Axes Style
NOTE: The Y Axes Style fields are available only for Multi-Line and XY charts.
Item
Multiple Axes
Description
Specifies that the graph portion of the chart can be displayed with multiple Y
axes.
315
Creataing Pictures
Stack Axes
Specifies that the graph portion of the chart is displayed with stacked Y axes..
Single Axis
Specifies that the graph portion of the chart is displayed with a single Y axis that
accommodates the data range of all the data sources.
Display
NOTE: The Display fields are not available for the XY chart.
Item
Description
Graph
Specifies that the graph portion of the chart is displayed.
Table
Specifies that the table portion of the chart is displayed in a table.
Both
Specifies that both the graph and table portions of the chart are displayed.
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Subsets Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box
NOTE: The Subsets tab in the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box is disabled by default. To enable
Subsets for an Enhanced Chart, you must have your Y-Axis Style set to Single Axis. The Y-Axis Style setting is
located under the Chart Style tab of the Enhanced Chart.
The Subsets tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box, which appears only when configuring a Line
Chart, displays the following items:
316
Using Key Macros
Baseline Subsets to Graph
Item
Description
Subset Selection
List
Allows you to select which subsets will always show in the graph. Those data sources
not selected become part of the scrolling subsets.
Select All
Allows you select all data sources to use as subsets.
Clear All
Allows you clear all selected data sources from the subsets to graph.
Scrolling Subsets
Specifies the number of subsets to view in one group. If zero is selected, no scroll bar appears.
IMPORTANT: Pre-defined Scrolling Subset Groups should not be used in conjunction with the Quick
Configure buttons. Using the Quick Configure buttons in run mode to change the Y Axis Style or to change a
Data Source's Plot Visible option will overwrite any pre-defined Scrolling Subset Groups.
Example
Assuming there are four data sources, then the following results occur:
Data Sets
Selected...
4
Results...
Subsets
Specified...
1
Each data source appears separately in four vertically arranged groups in
a scrolling chart window.
2
0
Only the two selected data sources appear on a chart.
2
1
Three data sources appear on two charts, which are arranged vertically
in a scrolling chart window.
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
317
Creataing Pictures
Axis Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box

The Axis tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Titles and Labels
Item
Description
X-Axis Title
Allows you to specify the X Axis Title.
Y-Axis Title
Allows you to specify the Y Axis Title.
Show X-Axis
Allows you to specify how the X-axis grid, labels, and title are displayed on the
chart.
Show Y-Axis
Allows you to specify how the Y-axis grid, labels, and title are displayed on the
chart.
Max X-Axis
Labels
Allows you to specify the maximum number (up to 20) of X-Axis labels.
The chart logic calculates the number of labels to display on the X Axis based on
settings such as chart size, duration, and number of points. When a maximum
number is specified, the user can have partial control over this logic to display not
more than the specified number of labels regardless of the chart configuration.
A value of “Unspecified” means the label spacing is automatically controlled by
the chart.
For pictures created before iFIX 5.5 that are upgraded, the default value is 0. For all
other pictures, the default value is 10.
NOTE: The Max X-Axis Labels field is only available for the Line Chart.
318
Using Key Macros
Y Axis
Item
Description
Linear
Specifies whether the Y-axis uses linear values.
Log
Specifies whether the Y-axis uses log values.
Auto
Allows iFIX to automatically scale the Y-axis so that all data points are within the visible
area of the chart.
Min
Select to activate the Min field.
Max
Select to activate the Max field.
Min/Max
Select to activate both the Min and Max fields.
Use Data
Source
Limits
Select to allow iFIX to automatically determine the minimum and maximum axis limits
using the limits of all selected data sources.
Min
Allows you to specify the minimum value for the Y-axis.
NOTE: When you select this option the maximum axis value will be automatically scaled
based on the data points in the chart and padding field.
Max
Allows you to specify the maximum value for the Y-axis.
NOTE: when you select this option the minimum axis value will be automatically scaled
based on the data points in the chart and padding field.
319
Creataing Pictures
Item
Padding
Description
Allows you to set the percentage of the total range of the Y-axis allocated to providing
space above and below the highest and lowest data points when the axis values are
automatically scaled. Padding prevents the data points from intersecting with the top or
the bottom of the chart. Acceptable values: 0-100.
Your selection for Auto, Min, Max, or Min/Max determines if and where padding is
applied. The selections have the following results:

Auto – padding is applied to both the bottom and the top of the range.

Min – padding is applied to the top of the range.

Max – padding is applied to the bottom of the range.

Min/Max – padding is not applied.
X Axis
NOTE: The X Axis fields are only available for the XY chart.
Item
Description
Linear
Specifies whether the X-axis uses linear values.
Log
Specifies whether the X-axis uses log values.
Use Data
Source
Limits
Select to allow iFIX to automatically determine the minimum and maximum axis limits
using the limits of all selected data sources.
Padding
Allows you to set the percentage of the total range of the X-axis allocated to providing
space above and below the highest and lowest data points. Padding prevents the data
points from intersecting with the top or the bottom of the chart. Acceptable values: 0-100.
Clear the checkbox to allow iFIX to automatically scale the X-axis so that all data points
are within the visible area of the chart. In effect, this enables auto-scaling.
NOTE: For XY charts, for the X axis, Use Data Source Limits must not be selected for
padding to apply.
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
320
Using Key Macros
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Font Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box
The Font tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Chart Font Size
Item
Description
Large
Specifies that the size of all chart fonts is large.
Medium
Specifies that the size of all chart fonts is medium-sized.
Small
Specifies that the size of all chart fonts is small.
Font Styles
Item
Description
Main Title
Specifies the font style for the chart's main title. You can also specify if the title is
bold, italic, underlined, or any combination.
Sub-Title
Specifies the font style for the chart's sub-title. You can also specify if the title is
bold, italic, underlined, or any combination.
Subset / Point /
Axis Labels
Specifies the font style for the chart's subset, point, and axis labels. You can also
specify if the title is bold, italic, underlined, or any combination.
321
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Table Data
Specifies the font style for the chart's table data.
Sample
Displays a sample of the selected font and typeface options.
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Color Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box
The Color tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Viewing Style
Item
Description
Color
Specifies that the chart displays in color.
Monochrome
Specifies that the chart displays in black, gray and white.
NOTE: The axes, legends and time cursor appear in color, even if this option is
selected.
Monochrome and
Symbols
Specifies that the chart displays in black, gray and white and includes symbols in the
legend.
NOTE: The axes, legends and time cursor appear in color, even if this option is
selected.
322
Using Key Macros
Graph Attributes
Item
Description
Desk Foreground
Select to allow specification of the color of the title, sub-titles, and legends.
Desk Background
Select to allow specification of the color of the area behind the graph, table, title,
sub-titles, and legends.
Shadow Color
Select to allow specification of the color of the drop shadow, if present.
Graph Foreground
Select to allow specification of the color of the graph grid.
Graph Background
Select to allow specification of the graph's background color.
Table Foreground
Select to allow specification of the color of the table's data.
Table Background
Select to allow specification of the color of the table's interior.
Color buttons
Click to choose the desired color for selected graph attributes. Double-click a color
button to define a custom color.
Pre-set Styles
Item
Description
Bitmap / Gradient
Styles
Select to choose a bitmap or gradient style for the chart.
Light Inset
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
323
Creataing Pictures
Item
Medium Inset
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Dark Inset
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Light Shadow
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Medium Shadow
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
324
Description
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Dark Shadow
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Light Line
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Medium Line
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Dark Line
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
325
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Light No Border
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Medium No
Border
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Dark No Border
(Bitmap / Gradient
selected)
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
326
Using Key Macros
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Plotting Style Tab - Enhanced Chart Customization Dialog Box
The Plotting Style tab of the Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box displays the following items:
Line Style
Item
Description
Subset Selection
List
Allows you to select the data source that your Color, Point Type, Plotting Style, and
Line Type selections will apply to.
Colors
Click to choose the desired color for the selected data source. Double-click a color
button to define a custom color.
Point Type
Specifies the point type for the selected data source.
NOTE: Point types appear in the chart only if the Chart Plotting Style includes
points, such as Point + Line, for example.
Line Type
Specifies the line type for the selected data source.
Chart Plotting Style
NOTE: The following styles are available only for Line/Multiline and XY Charts.
Item
Description
Area
Specifies that the area under the plot line is filled with the color selected in the Line
Style area.
327
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Bar
Specifies that data is presented using bars.
Histogram
Specifies that data is presented in a histogram.
NOTE: This style is not available for XY charts. The Histogram style is only valid
for one data source.
Line
Specifies that data is presented using lines.
NOTE: When two gapped sections surround a single valid data point that isolated
data point is plotted with a point even though the plotting style is currently a line.
Points
328
Specifies that data is presented using points.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Point + Best Fit
Curve
Specifies that data is presented showing all data points and plots a best fit curve for
all points in the chart.
Point + Best Fit
Curve II
Specifies that data is presented showing all data points and plots a best fit curve for
only the currently visible points in the chart.
NOTE: This style is not available for XY charts.
Point + Best Fit
Line
Specifies that data is presented showing all data points and plots a best fit line for all
points in the chart.
Point + Best Fit
Line II
Specifies that data is presented showing all data points and plots a best fit line for
only the currently visible points in the chart.
NOTE: This style is not available for XY charts.
329
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Point + Line
Specifies that data is presented using points and lines.
Point + Spline
Specifies that data is presented using points and splines.
Spline
Specifies that data is presented using splines.
Data Shadows
Item
Description
Off
Specifies that there are no shadows for the chart data.
Shadow
Specifies that there are shadows for the chart data.
NOTE: Shadows can be applied only to Line/Multiline charts that use Area or Bar
for their Plotting Style and to Histograms.
3D
Specifies that the chart's data is 3D.
NOTE: 3D can be applied only to Histogram charts. It does not work with SPC Bar
charts or Line/Multiline charts.
330
Using Key Macros
Export
Click to access the Exporting dialog box.
Snapshot
Click to get a maximized static snapshot of the chart, presented at full-screen size.
Exporting Enhanced Chart Dialog Box
The Exporting Enhanced Chart dialog box displays the following items:
Export
Item
Description
EMF
Specifies EMF file format for chart export.
WMF
Specifies WMF file format for chart export.
BMP
Specifies BMP file format for chart export.
JPG
Specifies JPG file format for chart export.
PNG
Specifies PNG file format for chart export.
Text/Data
Specifies text/data file format for chart export.
Export Destination
Item
Description
Clipboard
Specifies that data is exported to the clipboard.
File
Specifies that data is exported to a file.
Browse
Click to choose a destination file and folder for export.
Printer
Specifies that data is sent to a printer.
331
Creataing Pictures
Export Size
Item
Description
Full Page
(available only if
Printer is selected
in Export
Destination)
Prints the exported chart on a full page.
No Specific Size
(only available if
WMF is selected in
Export)
Specifies that no specific size is used for the exported chart.
Pixel
(available only if
BMP, JPG, or
PNG is selected in
Export)
Specifies the unit of measure for the exported chart. This option is auto-selected for
BMP, JPG and PNG file format and cannot be deselected.
Millimeters
Specifies that the size for the exported chart is measured in millimeters.
Inches
Specifies that the size for the exported chart is measured in inches.
Points
Specifies that the size for the exported chart is measured in points.
Width
Specifies the dimensions for the printed exported chart.
NOTE: The width/height aspect ratio must be between .1 and 10.0 to
avoid generating the error "This will produce an image that is hard to
read. Please adjust output dimensions." For example, a width/height of
30/300 does not produce an error, but 30/301 does. Likewise, a
width/height of 300/30 does not produce an error, but 301/30 does.
The following fields are available only if Clipboard or File is selected in Export Destination.
332
DPI
Specifies the dots per inch. The higher the number the better the quality.
Large Font
Specifies a large size font is used in exported chart.
Using Key Macros
Export
Click to export data to selected destination.
Export Enhanced Chart Dialog Box
The Export Enhanced Chart dialog box displays the following items:
Export What
Item
Description
Data
Exports the chart's data.
Data and Labels
Exports the chart's data along with the data labels.
Export Style
Item
Description
List
Specifies that data is exported in list format.
Tab
(only available if
List is selected)
Specifies that data is delimited using a tab.
Comma
(only available if
List is selected)
Specifies that data is delimited using a comma.
Table
Specifies that data is exported in table format.
Subsets/Points
(only available if
Table is selected)
Specifies that data is exported with one row for the point data and one additional
row for each subset.
Points/Subsets
(only available if
Table is selected)
Specifies that data is exported with one row for each point and an additional column
for each subset.
333
Creataing Pictures
Numeric Precision
Item
Description
Current Precision
Exports the data using the level of numeric precision specified on the Chart Style
tab.
Maximum
Precision
Exports the data using the highest level of numeric precision available on the Chart
Style tab, which is seven decimal places.
Export
Click to export the data.
Global Time Control Configuration Dialog Box
The Global Time Control Configuration dialog box displays the following items:
Time Definition
Item
Description
Click to set the time to now. The value displayed in this field is applied after clicking
OK.
Start Time – Date
Enter the date of the start time. The format for the day comes from your local
regional settings.
Start Time – Time
Enter the time of the start time. The format for the time comes from your local
regional settings.
NOTE: The Start Time Date and Time settings apply to all objects that contain
historical animations.
End Time – Date
334
Enter the date of the end time. The format for the day comes from your local
regional settings. This field is only available if you did not select Define Duration.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
End Time – Time
Enter the time of the end time. The format for the time comes from your local
regional settings. This field is only available if you did not select Define Duration.
NOTE: The End Time Date and Time settings apply to all objects that contain
historical animations.
Define Duration
Select to define the duration of the data, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds. Clear
this check box to define the duration using the Start Time and End Time fields.
Days
Enter the number of days for the duration. This field is only available if you selected
Define Duration.
Hours
Enter the number of hours for the duration. This field is only available if you
selected Define Duration.
Mins
Enter the number of minutes for the duration. This field is only available if you
selected Define Duration.
Secs
Enter the number of seconds for the duration. This field is only available if you
selected Define Duration.
Historical Update Rate
Item
Description
Hours
Select the number of hours for the historical update rate.
Mins
Select the number of minutes for the historical update rate.
Secs
Select the number of seconds for the historical update rate.
335
Creataing Pictures
Scroll Rates
Item
Description
Scroll as % of
Duration
Select to set the scroll rate as a percentage of duration. Clear this check box to enter
an exact value for the scroll rate. For example, 1.25 hours, or 75 minutes.
Slow
Enter the slow scroll value in this field, or use the arrows to increase or decrease the
value. The Slow Scroll Value applies to both the Forward and Backward Slow Scroll
buttons. By default, this value is set to 25 percent.
If the Scroll as % of Duration check box is selected, this value is a percentage. For
example, if you enter 10, it means 10 percent of the total duration is used for the
scroll.
If the Scroll as % of Duration check box is cleared, the number you enter is an exact
value. For example, if you enter 1.2 and then select the Minutes option, the scroll
will be a value of 1.2 minutes.
NOTE: This value cannot be greater than the value you enter in the Fast field.
Slow – Days
Select to set the unit of measure as days. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Slow – Hours
Select to set the unit of measure as hours. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Slow – Mins
Select to set the unit of measure as minutes. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Slow – Secs
Select to set the unit of measure as seconds. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Fast
Enter the fast scroll value in this field, or use the arrows to increase or decrease the
value. The Fast Scroll Value applies to both the Forward and Backward Fast Scroll
buttons. By default, this value is set to 50 percent.
If the Scroll as % of Duration check box is selected, this value is a percentage. For
example, if you enter 10, it means 10 percent of the total duration is used for the
scroll.
If the Scroll as % of Duration check box is cleared, the number you enter is an exact
value. For example, if you enter 1.2 and then select the Minutes option, the scroll
will be a value of 1.2 minutes.
NOTE: This value cannot be greater than the value you enter in the Slow field.
336
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Fast – Days
Select to set the unit of measure as days. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Fast – Hours
Select to set the unit of measure as hours. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Fast – Mins
Select to set the unit of measure as minutes. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Fast – Secs
Select to set the unit of measure as seconds. This field is only available if you did not
select Scroll as % of Duration.
Grid Settings Dialog Box
The Grid Settings dialog box displays the following items:
Show the Grid
Select this check box to shows a grid of evenly spaced dots to help you guide the placement of objects for
precise vertical or horizontal alignment.
Snap to Grid
Select this check box to force the top left corner of every object you create or move to stick to the closest grid
point.
Grid Interval
Specifies the amount of space, in pixels, between each evenly spaced dot in the grid.
Historical Datalink Dialog Box
The Historical Datalink dialog box displays the following items:
337
Creataing Pictures
Source
Item
Description
Edit Box
Allows you to enter a data source or expression for this historical data link.
A data source is a reference to a source of information, such as historical
files.
An expression includes constants, data sources, or a combination of
constants and data sources that are connected with one or more operators.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that while Proficy Historian can store both String
and Numeric data, the iFIX data system can only retrieve Numeric data for
Historical Datalinks.
Browse Button
Use the Browse (...) button to open the Expression Builder dialog box.
Quick Modify Button
Not available.
Show Time Stamp with Data
Select this check box to specify that the Historical Datalink include the time stamp with the data. The time
stamp appears only at run-time. By default, this check box is selected.
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
338
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone associated with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how Proficy iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
339
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest is 1:59:59.
340
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Modify Area Dialog Box
The Modify Area dialog box displays the following items:
Available
Lists the alarm areas that are currently available. To filter alarms by alarm area, select the area(s) from this list
and select the In or Not In option button.
In
Allows you to filter alarms by the alarm areas that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option
is selected, the Alarm Summary object displays only those alarms from the selected alarm areas.
Not In
Allows you to filter alarms by the alarm areas that are currently selected in the Available list. When this option
is selected, the Alarm Summary object ignores all alarms from the selected alarm areas.
Add Area Not Currently in List Edit Box
Allows you to add an alarm area name to the Available list, if it does not appear by default. Enter the alarm
area name in this field and click Add to add it to the list.
Add Button
Allows you to add an alarm area name to the Available list, if it does not appear by default. Enter the alarm
area name in the Add Area Not Currently In List field and click this button to add it to the Available list.
341
Creataing Pictures
Modify Configuration Dialog Box
You access the Modify Configuration dialog box from the Create Picture Wizard. The Modify Configuration
dialog box displays the following items:
Attributes Tab
Item
Description
Show Title Bar
Adds a title bar to your picture.
Show System Menu
Adds system menus to your picture.
Resizable
Adds sizing borders to the picture.
Always on Top
Configures the window so that it is always on top when you open it.
Allow this Picture to be
Cached
Configures the window so that when it is opened and closed it is held in
memory and, when reopened, is read from memory.
Background Color
Click the Background Color button to set the actual background color of
the picture. This color will not appear in the preview pane, since the colors
in the preview pane are used only in the Create Picture Wizard.
Sizes Tab
342
Item
Description
Left
Distance from the left of the screen to the left edge of the picture.
Top
Distance from the top of the screen to the top edge of the picture.
Width
Distance from the left edge of the picture to the right edge of the picture.
Height
Distance from the top edge of the picture to the bottom edge of the picture.
Percentage Units
Indicates the size and location of the picture is based on percentage of the
screen.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Pixel Units
Indicates the size and location of the picture is based on the number of
pixels.
Help
Displays the Help for the current topic.
Save
Saves the changes for this picture only.
Save As
Saves the current options as a new configuration. When you select this option, the Enter New Configuration
Name dialog box appears. Enter the name for the new configuration (up to 80 characters) in the Name field,
then click OK to return to the Modify Configuration dialog box.
Return to Wizard
Closes the Modify Configuration dialog box and returns to the Create Picture Wizard.
Modify Pipe Characteristics Dialog Box
The Modify Pipe Characteristics dialog box display the following items:
Preview
Displays a preview of the object with the properties you select.
Start Cap
Specifies the start cap you want to apply to the selected pipe. Start caps can be round, square, horizontaldiagonal, or vertical-diagonal. Start caps are determined by the point where you start the pipe drawing.
End Cap
Specifies the end cap you want to apply to the selected pipe. End caps can be round, square, horizontaldiagonal, or vertical-diagonal. End caps are determined by the point where you end the pipe drawing.
343
Creataing Pictures
Elbow
Specifies the elbow style you want to apply to the selected pipe. Elbow styles can be either round or square.
Foreground
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the foreground color for the
selected object.
Blend Slider
Move this slider to apply the desired amount of fade color to the selected foreground type.
Fade
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the fade color for the selected
object.
Edge Style
Specifies the edge style you want to apply to the selected pipe. Edge styles for pipes can be either solid or none.
Fill Style
Specifies the fill style you want to apply to the selected pipe. Fill styles for pipes can be either solid or gradient.
If you select Gradient, the fade type of the pipe defaults to reflected, and cannot be changed.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness you want to apply to the selected pipe. Pipe thickness can range from 10 to 300 pixels.
Edge Width
Specifies the edge width, in pixels, you want to apply to the selected pipe. Edge widths can range from 1 to 200
pixels.
New Level Dialog Box
The New Level dialog box displays the following items:
344
Using Key Macros
Low
If configuring an exact match data conversion table, this field allows you to specify the exact value that
incoming data must match in order to format the data as the corresponding output value. If configuring a range
comparison data conversion table, this field allows you to specify the low value of the range that incoming data
must match in order to format the data as the corresponding output value.
High
Allows you to specify the high value of the range that incoming data must match in order to format the data as
the corresponding output value.
Primary
Allows you to specify the output value to which you want to convert the input value or range of values in the
lookup table.
Toggle
Allows you to specify a second output value to which you want to convert the input value or range of values in
the lookup table, essentially providing a second animation for the object.
Select BackgroundColor Dialog Box
The Select BackgroundColor dialog box displays the following items:
Property
Displays the color property (foreground, background, or edge) for which you are currently defining a color.
Color Set
Lists all color sets that are currently configured on your system. You can add your own customized color set by
clicking the Color button on the Toolbar to bring up the Color Selection dialog box, then clicking the New
Color Set button.
Color Tab
Allows you to attribute a color for the selected object. To change an object's color, click the Color tab, select a
color from the color box, and click OK. Optionally, you can attribute a named color by clicking the Name tab,
selecting the name of a color from the list, and clicking OK.
345
Creataing Pictures
Name Tab
Displays the named colors of the color set listed in the Color Set list. To change the name of a color, doubleclick it from the list and enter a new name in the highlighted field.
Select Color Dialog Box
The Select a Color dialog box displays the following items:
Property
Displays the color property (foreground, background, or edge) for which you are currently defining a color.
Color Set
Lists all color sets that are currently configured on your system. You can add your own color set by clicking the
New Color Set button, naming the color set, and customizing the individual colors within the set.
Color Tab
Allows you to attribute a color for the selected object. To change an object's color, click the Color tab, select a
color from the color box, and click OK. Optionally, you can attribute a named color by clicking the Name tab,
selecting the name of a color from the list, and clicking OK.
Name Tab
Displays the named colors of the color set listed in the Color Set list. To change the name of a color, doubleclick it from the list and enter a new name in the highlighted field.
Select EdgeColor Dialog Box
The Select EdgeColor dialog box displays the following items:
Property
Displays the color property (foreground, background, or edge) for which you are currently defining a color.
Color Set
Lists all color sets that are currently configured on your system. You can add your own customized color set by
clicking the Color button on the Toolbar (Classic view) or on the Format tab, in the Styles group, by clicking
Color Selections (Ribbon view) to bring up the Color Selection dialog box, then clicking the New Color Set
button.
346
Using Key Macros
Color Tab
Allows you to attribute a color for the selected object. To change an object's color, click the Color tab, select a
color from the color box, and click OK. Optionally, you can attribute a named color by clicking the Name tab,
selecting the name of a color from the list, and clicking OK.
Name Tab
Displays the named colors of the color set listed in the Color Set list. To change the name of a color, doubleclick it from the list and enter a new name in the highlighted field.
Select FadeColor Dialog Box
The Select FadeColor dialog box displays the following items:
Preview
Displays a preview of the object with the properties you select.
Linear
Select this option to apply a linear fade effect to the selected fade color.
Reflected
Select this option to apply a reflected fade effect to the selected fade color.
Radial
Select this option to apply a radial fade effect to the selected fade color.
Concentric
Select this option to apply a concentric fade effect to the selected fade color.
Foreground
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the foreground color for the
selected object.
Blend Slider
Move this slider to apply the desired amount of fade color to the selected fade type.
347
Creataing Pictures
Fade
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the fade color for the selected
object.
Gradient Angle Slider
Move this slider to apply the desired angle of fade color to the selected fade type.
Select ForegroundColor Dialog Box
The Select ForegroundColor dialog box displays different items, depending on whether the object that has been
selected has a gradient color fill or not. Consult the following tables for descriptions in each case:
Gradient Color Fill
348
Item
Description
Preview
Displays a preview of the object with the properties you select.
Linear
Select this option to apply a linear fade effect to the selected fade color.
Reflected
Select this option to apply a reflected fade effect to the selected fade color.
Radial
Select this option to apply a radial fade effect to the selected fade color.
Concentric
Select this option to apply a concentric fade effect to the selected fade color.
Foreground
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the
foreground color for the selected object.
Blend Slider
Move this slider to apply the desired amount of fade color to the selected fade type.
Fade
Click this button to open the Select Color dialog box where you can choose the fade
color for the selected object.
Gradient Angle
Slider
Move this slider to apply the desired angle of fade color to the selected fade type.
Using Key Macros
Non-Gradient Color Fill
Item
Description
Property
Displays the color property (foreground, background, or edge) for which you are currently
defining a color.
Color
Set
Lists all color sets that are currently configured on your system. You can add your own
customized color set by clicking the Color button on the Toolbar to bring up the Color
Selection dialog box, then clicking the New Color Set button.
Color
Tab
Allows you to attribute a color for the selected object. To change an object's color, click the
Color tab, select a color from the color box, and click OK. Optionally, you can attribute a
named color by clicking the Name tab, selecting the name of a color from the list, and clicking
OK.
Name
Tab
Displays the named colors of the color set listed in the Color Set list. To change the name of a
color, double-click it from the list and enter a new name in the highlighted field.
Upgrade Pictures to Screen Independent Enhanced Coordinate Dialog Box
The Upgrading Pictures to Screen Independent Enhanced Coordinates Dialog Box allows you to upgrade one
(or more) picture or Dynamo Set from the legacy Logical Coordinate System to the Enhanced Coordinate
System. This dialog box displays the following items:
File Type
Allows you to select the file type to display in the Select Files window. You can select Pictures or Dynamo Sets
or both.
Picture and Dynamo Set Folder Path
Lists the path to the folder that contains the pictures and/or Dynamo Sets you want to upgrade to Enhanced
Coordinates, or to restore to Logical Coordinate System.
Browse (....)
Allows you to select a different folder that contains the files you want to upgrade or restore.
Refresh File List
Updates the files in the Select Files window to reflect eligible files in the folder you selected.
349
Creataing Pictures
Upgrade Files
Upgrades the selected files to the screen independent Enhanced Coordinates System. By default, this button is
enabled when the dialog box opens.
Restore Files from Backup
Restores selected files from the Backup folder. When you select this option, files that are eligible for
restoration are listed in the Select Files window.
Select Files
Lists files that are eligible for upgrading or restoration. Files eligible for upgrading include files that are not
using the Enhanced Coordinates System and that are not open in the iFIX WorkSpace. By default, the picture
files in your default directory display. Files that are eligible for restoration are those files that have been
upgraded and for which a backup file exists in the Backup folder.
Buttons
Button
Description
Select All
Selects all the files listed in the Select Files window.
Deselect All
Clears all the files selected in the Select Files window.
Upgrade Files
Upgrades pictures and/or Dynamo Sets using the Logical Coordinate System to the
Enhanced Coordinate System.
Restore Files
Restores the upgraded picture and/or Dynamo Set to the previously saved file in the
Backup folder when the file exists. All changes made to the file since the upgrade
will be lost. After the restoration operation is completed, the restored files are
removed from the list in the Select Files window and are returned to the list of files
eligible for upgrading.
How Do I...
The following sections explain how to work with pictures in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace:
350

Working with Objects

Working with Charts

Working with Enhanced Charts
Using Key Macros

Working with the Alarm Summary Object

Working with Groups

Using Color
Click a section above for steps on how to use or configure this part of a picture.
Working with Objects
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with objects:

Adding, Drawing, and Creating Objects

Manipulating Objects
Adding Charts to Pictures
To add a chart to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the desired chart button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Charts group, click the desired chart type.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Chart button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
Click and drag the mouse to define an area of the picture where you want to place the chart, and release
the mouse.
TIP: To add multiple charts, double-click the desired chart button on the Toolbox. When you are done
adding charts, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in the Toolbox.
Adding, Drawing, and Creating Objects
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps to add, draw, or create objects:

Adding Charts to Pictures

Adding Text to Pictures

Adding Bitmaps to Pictures

Adding Data Links to Pictures

Adding Data Links Using the Data Entry Expert

Adding Historical Data Links to Pictures

Adding the Current Time to Pictures
351
Creataing Pictures

Adding the Current Date to Pictures

Drawing Rectangles, Rounded Rectangles, Ovals, Pipes, and Lines

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Arcs, Chords, and Pies

Creating Variable Objects

Creating New Objects from Files

Creating New OLE Objects

Creating a Control for a New OLE Object

Creating Timer Objects

Creating Event Objects

Create a Custom Lookup Table

Selecting Commands Using the Multiple Command Script Wizard
Adding Text to Pictures
To add text to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Text button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Object/Links group, click Object/Links, and then click Text.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Text button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to an I-beam.
2.
Position the cursor where you want the text to appear.
3.
Enter the text you want. Use <Backspace> to delete the text and <Enter> to start a new line.
TIPS:

To add multiple text objects, double-click the Text button on the Toolbox. Place the cursor
where you want to add the first text object and enter your text. Click outside the text object or
press ESC, and then place the cursor where you want to add the second object. Repeat these
steps for each text object you want to add.
When you are done adding text objects click the Text button again, the pointer selection tool, or
another button in the Toolbox.

352
To edit the text within a text object, you can double-click the text object, or right-click the text
object and select Edit Text from the pop-up menu that appears.
Using Key Macros
Adding Bitmaps to Pictures
To add a bitmap image to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Bitmap button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Object/Links group, click Object/Links, and then click
Bitmap.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Bitmap button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
Select a file from the Open dialog box and click Open.
TIP: To add multiple bitmaps, double-click the Bitmap button on the Toolbox. When you are done
adding bitmaps, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in the toolbox.
Adding Data Links to Pictures
To add a data link to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Datalink Stamper button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Insert tab in Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Datalink.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Datalink button on the Toolbox.
2.
In the Source field, enter a data source for the data link. To use the Expression Builder, click the
Browse button.
3.
To enable data entry on the data link, select In-Place from the Type field's drop-down menu. If you
want confirmation from the operator when the value is changed, select the Confirm check box.
4.
In the Formatting area, select the type of data you want to display from the Type field's drop-down
menu.
For numeric data, enter an integer between 0 and 7 to represent the number of whole digits (those
before the decimal point) and decimal digits (those after the decimal point) in the Whole Digits and
Decimal fields, respectively. If needed, justify the data by making the appropriate selection from the
Justify drop-down menu.
Although you can enter an integer between 0 and 40 in the Whole Digits field, when you view the data
link in Run mode the number of digits is truncated to at most 7.
353
Creataing Pictures
For alphanumeric data, enter the number of lines and the number of characters per lines in the Lines
and Chars/Lines fields, respectively. If desired, justify the data by making the appropriate selection
from the Justify drop-down menu.
For raw data, select the Raw Format check box and enter the format in the Format field.
NOTE: To format a data link to display scientific notation, first select a F_CV, E_CV or A_CV field,
enable the Raw Format check box, and specify %e in format field. F_CV and E_CV datalinks using %e
raw format, by default, display 6 places after the decimal point. To display more places after the
decimal point, for example 15, change %e to %1.15e. A_CV datalinks using %e raw format will
always display 15 places after decimal point. To display a leading zero in the link, use the F_CV field
and the raw format similar to %02.2f.
5.
In the Error Configuration area, select how you want output errors to be defined in the Output Error
Mode field. To define errors through an error table, select Use Error Table. To define errors using the
current output value, select Use Current Output.
6.
Click OK. The cursor changes to a stamper.
7.
Position the cursor where you want to place the data link, and click the mouse. The data link appears in
the picture. The size of the data link is determined both by the settings you chose in the Datalink dialog
box and by the font size you set in the User Preferences dialog box.
TIP: In Classic view, access the User Preferences dialog box from the WorkSpace menu. In Ribbon
view, access User Preferences from the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, in the Settings list. Set the
font size on the Shape Preferences tab.
NOTE: If you create a data link by selecting Datalink from the Insert menu (Classic View), or by
selecting it from the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, in the Objects/Links list (Ribbon view), you
will first sketch the size of the data link, then configure the content of the data link as described in
steps 2 through 5.
Adding Data Links Using the Data Entry Expert
To add a data link using the Data Entry Expert:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click a Data link.
2.
In the Data Entry Type field of the Datalink dialog box, select None and click OK.
NOTE: If you set the Data Entry Type field to In-Place, unexpected results may occur.
3.
In Classic view, on the Standard toolbar, click the Task Wizard button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts group, click the Tasks/Experts dialog box
launcher.
354
4.
From the Task Categories list, select Data Entry Expert and click Perform Task.
5.
In the Data Source field, enter a data source for the data link. To use the Expression Builder, click the
Browse button.
Using Key Macros
6.
In the Choose Data Entry Method area, select the appropriate data entry option.
7.
Set the values of the fields corresponding to the data entry method you chose.
8.
Click OK.
Adding Historical Datalinks to Pictures
To add a historical datalink to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Historical Datalink
Stamper button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Insert tab in Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Historical Datalink.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Historical Datalink button on the Toolbox.
2.
In the Source field, enter a data source for the historical data link. To use the Expression Builder, click
the Browse button.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that while Proficy Historian can store both String and Numeric data, the
iFIX data system can only retrieve Numeric data for Historical Datalinks.
TIP: To display a one-hour average in your historical data link, in Historian, create a calculation tag
to calculate the one-hour average. Then, select the tag that you created when choosing the data source
for your historical data link.
3.
To display a time stamp with the historical datalink, select the Show Time stamp With Data check box.
To hide the time stamp, clear the Show Time stamp With Data check box.
4.
From the Historical Mode list, select the data type to display. If you selected Current Value, go to step
9. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5.
In the Start Date area, choose select either Fixed Date or Days Before Now to set when the date for the
display to begin and enter the desired time or value.
6.
In the Start Time area, choose either Fixed Time or Duration Before Now to set the start time for the
data display and enter the desired time or value.
7.
Optionally, to configure the historical datalink to open at the Fixed Time and to ignore changes to the
time zone in the Date and Time Properties dialog box in the Control Panel, select Lock Time.
8.
Optionally, to adjust for daylight saving time, if it is not already selected, click Adjust for Daylight
Savings Time and select a time zone from the Time Zone list.
9.
In Duration area, select or enter the time range for the data.
10. In the Update Rate area, select or enter the update rate for the data.
11. Click OK. The cursor changes to a stamper.
355
Creataing Pictures
12. Position the cursor where you want to place the historical data link, and click the mouse. The historical
data link appears in the picture.
Adding the Current Time to Picture
To add the current time to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Time button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Current Time.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Time button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a stamper.
2.
Position the cursor where you want the time to appear and click again.
TIP: To add multiple instances of the current time, double-click the Time button on the Toolbox. When
you are done adding instances, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in
the Toolbox.
Adding the Current Date to Pictures
To add the current date to your picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Date button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Current Date.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Date button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a stamper.
2.
Position the cursor where you want the date to appear and click again.
TIP: To add multiple instances of the current date, double-click the Date button on the Toolbox. When
you are done adding instances, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in
the Toolbox.
Drawing Rectangles, Rounded Rectangles, Ovals, Pipes, and Lines
To draw a rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, pipe, or line:
1.
356
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the appropriate button.
Using Key Macros
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Shapes group, click Shapes, and then click the desired shape.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
Place the cursor where you want to draw the shape.
3.
Click and drag in the picture until the shape is the desired size.
TIP: To add multiple rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, pipes, or lines, double-click the
appropriate button on the Toolbox. When you are done adding the objects, press ESC, click another
button, or click the pointer selection tool in the Toolbox.
Drawing Polylines and Polygons
To draw a polyline or polygon:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Polyline or Polygon button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Shapes group, click Shapes, and then click Polyline or
Polygon.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
Place the cursor where you want to start your polyline or polygon.
3.
Click once for each point you want in the polyline or polygon. Double-click to end the shape.
TIP: To add multiple polylines or polygons, double-click the appropriate button on the Toolbox. When
you are done adding the objects, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in
the Toolbox.
Drawing Arcs, Chords, and Pies
To draw an arc, chord, or pie:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Arc, Chord, or Pie button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Shapes group, click Shapes, and then click the Arc, Chord, or
Pie.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
357
Creataing Pictures
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
2.
Position the cursor where you want the first point of the shape to appear and click the mouse.
3.
Drag the cursor where you want the second point of the shape to appear and click the mouse.
4.
Move the cursor to define the height and width of the shape and click again.
TIP: To add multiple arcs, chords, or pies, double-click the appropriate button on the Toolbox. When
you are done adding the objects, press ESC, click another button, or click the pointer selection tool in
the Toolbox.
Creating Variable Objects
To create a variable object:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Variable Object button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Variable.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Variable Object button on the Toolbox.
2.
Complete the fields on the Create a Variable Object dialog box. For more information on these fields,
click Help.
Creating New Objects from Files
To create a new object from a file:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click the OLE Object.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
Select the Create from File option.
3.
In the File field, enter a directory path and file name, or click Browse to search available drives for a
file.
Creating New OLE Objects
To create a new OLE object:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click the OLE Object.
-Or-
358
Using Key Macros
In Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
Select the Create New option.
3.
In the Object Type list box, double-click the object you want to create.
Creating a Control for a New OLE Object
To create a control for a new OLE object:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Insert menu, click the OLE Object.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click OLE
Object.
2.
Select the Create Control option.
3.
Click OK to create the control.
Creating Timer Objects
To create a timer object:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Timer Object button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Timer.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Timer button on the Toolbox.
2.
Complete the fields on the Create a Timer Object dialog box.
Creating Event Objects
To create an event object:
1.
In Classic view, on the Shapes toolbar, click the Event Object button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Event.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Event Object button on the Toolbox.
2.
Complete the fields on the Event Object dialog box.
359
Creataing Pictures
Create a Custom Lookup Table
To create a custom lookup table:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace system tree, double-click the Globals folder.
2.
Right-click the User icon and select Create Threshold Table from the pop-up menu. The Custom
Lookup Table dialog box appears.
3.
In the Source Property Type list, select the input data type.
4.
In the Objects Property Type list, select the output data type.
5.
Select either the Range Comparison option (to define a range of values for each row in the lookup
table) or the Exact Match option (to define a single digital value for each row in the lookup table).
6.
Make sure you have the correct number of rows in the table. If you do not, click the Insert Row button
to add a row. If you have too many rows, click the Delete Row button to remove a row from the table.
To modify a row, click the Modify button to open the New Level dialog box to make your changes.
7.
Do one of the following:
8.
9.

Enter the high and low values for each row in the lookup table.

Enter a single lookup value in the Value column for each row in the lookup table.
Enter or select the comparison value for each row in the lookup table by doing one of the following:

If you want to define a color, double-click the color you want to modify and select a new one
from the Color dialog box when it appears.

If you want to enter a string or a numeric value, enter it into the cell.
If you want the object to blink, enter a blink value for each row in the lookup table.
10. If you want to enter global toggle values, shared lookup objects, or other options such as the toggle
rate, click the Advanced button. The Advanced Lookup Options dialog box appears.
11. In the Advanced Lookup Options dialog box, enter the required settings and click OK.
12. Click OK.
Selecting Commands Using the Multiple Command Script Wizard
To select one or more commands using the Multiple Command Script Wizard:
360
1.
In the Basic Animation dialog box, click the Click button or select the Command check box. The
Multiple Command Script Wizard appears.
2.
Choose a command from the Select Action to Append list. The Expert associated with the command
you chose appears.
3.
Complete the Expert with your desired settings and information.
4.
Click OK. The Expert closes and appears in the Configured Actions list box of the Multiple Command
Script Wizard.
Using Key Macros
5.
Optionally, repeat steps 2-4 if you want to add additional commands to your scripted command
sequence.
6.
When you have finished choosing your command sequence, click OK to return to the Basic Animation
dialog box.
Manipulating Objects
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps to manipulate objects:

Copying and Pasting Objects as Bitmaps

Moving Objects

Copying and Pasting Objects

Renaming Objects

Rotating Objects

Changing an Object's Center of Rotation

Reshaping Objects

Setting the Fade Type of an Object

Setting the Gradient Angle of an Object's Fade Type

Extending Lines to Intersect

Trimming Intersected Lines

Making Lines Horizontal or Vertical

Converting Lines to a Polyline

Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe

Modifying Pipes Overview

Modifying Pipe Characteristics

Adding and Deleting Connection Points

Adding and Anchoring Connectors to Shapes

Adding Points to Polygons and Polylines

Deleting Points from Polygons and Polylines

Splitting Polylines and Pipes

Selecting an Object's Color or Style Property

Selecting Multiple Objects

Aligning Two or More Objects to Each Other

Spacing Three or More Objects
361
Creataing Pictures

Flipping Objects

Sending Objects in Back of Other Objects

Bringing Objects to the Front of Other Objects

Making Multiple Objects the Same Size

Viewing Tag Status Pictures

Viewing Quick Trend Pictures

Viewing Tag Control Panel Pictures

Adding and Deleting Tags in a Tag Control Panel Picture

Saving Tag Lists in a Tag Control Panel Picture

Loading Tag Lists in a Tag Control Panel Picture

Configuring the Global Time Control

Hiding the Historical Datalink Timestamp
Copying and Pasting Objects as Bitmaps
To copy and paste an object as a bitmap image:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object you want to copy.
2.
In Classic view, on the Edit menu, choose Copy as Bitmap.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy as Bitmap.
3.
In Classic view, on the Edit menu, choose Paste.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Paste, and then click Paste.
Moving Objects
To move an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object you want to move.
2.
Click and drag the object to the desired location.
Copying and Pasting Objects
To copy and paste an object:
1.
362
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object you want to copy, and click Copy.
Using Key Macros
2.
Click anywhere in the picture to de-select the object.
3.
Right-click the picture and select Paste.
4.
Move the object to where you want it in the picture.
TIPS:

If you want to copy and paste a Windows Metafile (WMF) from another application and
retain its group properties in the iFIX WorkSpace, do not use the right-click Cut and Paste
options. If you do, the pasted object will not be a grouped object, and instead will be a flat
Bitmap.

To insert a WMF as grouped object, you can use Microsoft Excel . In Excel, use the Insert
menu to insert the WMF picture into a new spreadsheet. Right-click the picture and select
Edit Picture. A message box appears requesting that you convert the picture to a Microsoft
drawing object. Click Yes, and then copy the converted object from Excel. In the iFIX
WorkSpace, and select Paste > Paste Special. From the Paste Special dialog box, select
Enhanced Metafile and click OK. The grouped object should now appear in your picture.
Renaming Objects
To rename objects:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace system tree, right-click the object and choose Property Window. The
Properties dialog box appears.
2.
Place the cursor in the second column of the Name row and enter a name.
Rotating Objects
To rotate an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object you want to rotate and choose Rotate from the pop-up
menu that appears.
2.
Click and drag one of the rotation handles in the direction that you want to rotate the object.
Changing an Object's Center of Rotation
To change an object's center of rotation:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object you want to rotate and choose Rotate from the pop-up
menu that appears.
2.
Click and drag the object's center of rotation and move it to the desired location in your picture. The
cursor becomes a crosshair.
3.
To relocate the object's original center of rotation, click the current center of rotation and move it to the
crosshair that appears inside the object.
363
Creataing Pictures
Reshaping Object
To reshape an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object. Reshape handles appear around the object.
2.
Click and drag a reshape cursor. As you drag, the object changes shape.
Setting the Fade Type of an Object
To set the fade type of an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Fade.
2.
In the Fade Type area, select the fade type you want to apply to the object.
- Or If the object already has a gradient style applied to it, right-click the object, point to Fade Type and
choose the fade type you want to apply.
NOTE: Selecting a fade type in the Select FadeColor dialog box automatically sets the object's fill
style to Gradient, regardless of the setting in the User Preferences dialog box.
Setting the Gradient Angle of an Object's Fade Type
To set the gradient angle of an object's fade type:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Fade. The Select FadeColor
dialog box appears.
2.
Move the Gradient Angle slider to change the angle of the gradient. The gradient angle moves around
the shape in a counter-clockwise direction, starting from the right side of the shape, as you increase the
angle.
NOTE: Changing the gradient angle has no effect on a radial or concentric fade type. Gradient angle
applies only to the linear and reflected fade types.
3.
Click OK.
Extending Lines to Intersect
To extend a line to intersect with another line:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the lines you want to intersect with each other.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Extend Lines button.
-Or-
364
Using Key Macros
In Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Extend
Lines.
Trimming Intersected Lines
To trim lines at the intersection point:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the intersected lines you want to trim.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Trim Lines button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Trim
Lines.
Making Lines Horizontal or Vertical
To make lines horizontal:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the lines you want to make horizontal.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Make Lines Horizontal button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Make
Lines Horizontal.
To make lines vertical:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the lines you want to make vertical.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Make Lines Vertical button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Make
Lines Vertical.
Converting Lines to Polylines
To convert lines to a polyline:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the lines you want to convert to a polyline.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Convert Lines to Polyline button.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Convert
Lines to Polyline.
365
Creataing Pictures
Converting Lines and Polylines to Pipe
To convert multiple lines and polylines to pipes:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the lines or polylines you want to convert to pipes.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Convert Lines and Polylines to Pipe button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Convert
Lines and Polylines to Pipe.
To convert a single line or polyline to a pipe:

In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the line or polyline you want to convert to a pipe and choose Convert
to Pipe.
Modifying Pipes Overview
When using pipe objects, you may want to:

Add a fade or foreground color to a pipe.

Set the blend percentage of a pipe's fade color.

Modify pipe characteristics
Modifying Pipe Characteristics
To modify pipe characteristics:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the pipe object(s) you want to modify.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Modify Pipe button.
- Or In Ribbon view, from the Format tab, in the Styles group, in the Pipe list, click Modify Pipe
Characteristics.
- Or Right-click a single pipe, and choose Modify Pipe Characteristics.
- Or Right-click the single pipe, point to Color, and choose Fade.
- Or Control-click multiple pipes and in Classic View, click the Modify Pipe button on the CAD toolbar. In
366
Using Key Macros
Ribbon view, from the Format tab, in the Styles group, in the Pipe list, click Modify Pipe
Characteristics.
NOTE: The changes you make are applied to all of the selected pipe objects.
3.
Change the pipe characteristics, as required.
Adding and Deleting Connection Points
To add a connection point:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the shape object you want to add connection points to.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Add Connection Point button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Add
Connection Point.
3.
Add the required connection points to the shape object.
NOTE: If the Always Show Connection Nodes check box on the User Preferences dialog box is
selected, the default connection points and points that you add to shapes are always visible. If this
check box is cleared, the connection points are not visible, but can be displayed either when you select
a connector and move it towards the shape to anchor it to a certain connection point on the shape, or,
in Classic view, by selecting the shape and clicking either the Add Connection Point button or Delete
Connection Point button on the CAD Toolbar. In Ribbon view, select the shape and on the Format tab,
in the Picture group, in the Drawing Tools list, click either Add Connection Point or Delete
Connection Point.
To delete a connection point:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the shape object you want to delete connection points from.
2.
In Classic view, on the CAD Toolbar, click the Delete Connection Point button.
-OrIn Ribbon View, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Drawing Tools, and then click Delete
Connection Point.
3.
Delete the connection points, as required.
Adding and Anchoring Connectors to Shapes
To add and anchor a connector to shapes:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the CAD Toolbar, click the line connector button you want
to use to connect your shapes.
-Or-
367
Creataing Pictures
In Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Connectors group, click Connectors, and then click the desired
line connector.
You can choose from the Line Connector Tool, the Right Angle Line Connector, or the Pipe
Connector.
2.
Draw a connector between two shapes.
3.
Select the connector. The ends of the connector change to green squares.
4.
Drag the end of the connector to the connection point. The connector end changes to a red square when
it is anchored to the connection point. If it is not anchored to the connection point, it stays green.
NOTE: When you are anchoring a connector object, it is automatically sent to the back of the object
you are anchoring it to. The connector handles, however, are still visible and can be selected and
moved. When the anchoring process is completed, you can right-click the connector object and choose
Bring to Front.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to anchor the connector to the second shape. The shapes can be moved around the
picture but remain connected. The connector stretches and reshapes as the shapes are moved.
Adding Points to Polygons and Polylines
To add a point to a polygon or polyline:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the polygon or polyline and choose Add Point.
2.
Position the cursor between two of the object's points. Make sure the cursor is black or partially black.
3.
Click the mouse to add the new point.
Deleting Points from Polygons and Polylines
To delete a point from a polygon or polyline:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the polygon or polyline and choose Delete Point.
2.
Position the cursor over the point you want to delete. Make sure the cursor is black.
3.
Click the mouse to delete the point.
Splitting Polylines and Pipes
To split a polyline:
1.
368
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the polyline you want to split and choose Split Polyline. The cursor
becomes a splitting cursor. When you are close to the polyline, the splitting cursor changes to black.
Using Key Macros
2.
Click the spot on the polyline where you want to split it. New reshape handles appear on one piece of
the split polyline. You can use these handles to reshape the polyline or move it to a new location in the
picture.
NOTE: When you split a polyline or pipe, you create a new object. Therefore, if you undo a polyline or
pipe split, the new object is deleted first and you must perform a second undo action to revert to the
original object.
To split a pipe:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the pipe you want to split and choose Split Pipe. The cursor
becomes a splitting cursor. When you are inside the edges of the pipe, the splitting cursor changes
color.
2.
Click the spot on the pipe where you want to split it. New reshape handles appear on one piece of the
split pipe. You can use these handles to reshape the pipe or move it to a new location in the picture.
NOTE: When you split a polyline or pipe, you create a new object. Therefore, if you undo a polyline or
pipe split, the new object is deleted first and you must perform a second undo action to revert to the
original object.
Selecting an Object's Color or Style Property
To select an object's color or style property:

In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object and do one of the following:

Select the desired property from the pop-up menu.

Select Property Window from the pop-up menu and enter a property value in the second
column of the Properties Window.
Selecting Multiple Objects
To select multiple objects:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select an object.
2.
Control-click the remaining objects. Each selected object displays with handles.
Aligning Two or More Objects to Each Other
To align two or more objects to each other:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the objects you want to align.
2.
In Classic view, on the Tools toolbar, click the appropriate Align button.
-Or-
369
Creataing Pictures
In Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Align, and then click the desired
alignment type.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The objects align according to your selection.
Spacing Three or More Objects
To space three or more objects:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the objects.
2.
In Classic view, on the Tools toolbar, click the Space Evenly Vertical or Space Evenly Horizontal
button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Space Evenly, and then click Space
Evenly Vertical or Space Evenly Horizontal.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The objects are spaced according to your selection.
Flipping Objects
To flip an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object you want to flip.
2.
In Classic view, on the Format menu, click Flip Horizontal to flip the object horizontally, or Flip
Vertical to flip the object vertically.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Flip, and then choose either Flip
Horizontal to flip the object horizontally, or Flip Vertical to flip the object vertically.
Sending Objects in Back of Other Objects
To send an object in back of another object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object.
2.
In Classic view, on the Tools toolbar, click the Send to Back button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Send to Back.
370
Using Key Macros
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The selected object is positioned behind other objects.
Bringing Objects to the Front of Other Objects
To bring an object in front of another object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object.
2.
In Classic view, on the Tools toolbar, click the Bring to Front button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Bring to Front.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Bring to Front button on the Toolbox.
The selected object is positioned in front of other objects.
Making Multiple Objects the Same Size
To make multiple objects the same size:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select any objects you want to resize.
2.
Select the object you want to use to specify the size. All previously selected objects will be resized to
match this object's size.
3.
In Classic view, on the Format menu, select Make Same Size and then Select Height, Width, or Both,
depending on which dimensions you want to change in the objects.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Make Same Size, and then click desired
option.
Viewing Tag Status Pictures
To view a single Tag Status picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object you want to view the Tag Status
picture for.
2.
Right-click the object and choose Tag Status. The Tag Status picture appears.
To view a Tag Status picture from the Tag Control Panel picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object(s) you want to view Tag Status
pictures for.
371
Creataing Pictures
2.
Right-click the objects and choose Tag Status. Another menu appears listing the first tag found and the
Tag Control Panel item.
NOTE: When you select multiple objects, the first associated tag of the first object selected is
displayed in the right-click menu.
3.
Choose Tag Control Panel. The Tag Control Panel picture appears.
4.
Click the Tag Status button for the Tag Status picture you want to view.
To view a Quick Trend chart from a Tag Status picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object you want to view Tag Status picture
for.
2.
Right-click the object and choose Tag Status. The Tag Status picture appears.
3.
Click the Quick Trend chart to select it, then right-click and choose Quick Trend. The Quick Trend
picture for the tag appears.
NOTE: Only tags that have an F_CV field associated with it will display a Quick Trend chart in the
Tag Status picture.
Viewing Quick Trend Pictures
To view a Quick Trend picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object you want to view the Quick Trend
picture for.
2.
Right-click the object and choose Quick Trend. The Quick Trend picture appears, displaying up to
eight pens for the associated database tags.
NOTE: You can also select multiple objects and view a single Quick Trend picture for up to eight tags.
To view a Quick Trend picture from the Tag Control Panel picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object(s) you want to view Quick Trend
pictures for.
2.
Right-click the objects and choose Tag Status. Another menu appears listing the first tag found and the
Tag Control Panel item.
NOTE: When you select multiple objects, the first associated tag of the first object selected is displayed
in the right-click menu.
3.
Choose Tag Control Panel. The Tag Control Panel picture appears.
4.
Click the Quick Trend button for the Quick Trend picture you want to view.
Viewing Tag Control Panel Pictures
To view a Tag Control Panel picture:
372
Using Key Macros
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment, select the object(s) you want to view a Tag Control
Panel picture for.
2.
Right-click the objects and choose Tag Status. Another menu appears listing the first tag found and the
Tag Control Panel item.
NOTE: When you select multiple objects, the first associated tag of the first object selected is
displayed in the right-click menu.
3.
Choose Tag Control Panel. The Tag Control Panel picture appears.
4.
You can view Tag Status and Quick Trend pictures for the tags associated with the object(s) you
selected, as well as other tag information.
Adding and Deleting Tags in a Tag Control Panel Picture
To add a tag to a Tag Control Panel picture:
1.
In the Tag Control Panel picture, click the Add Row button. The Expression Builder appears with only
the FIX Database tab available.
2.
Use the Expression Builder to create a tag whose information you want to view.
3.
Click OK on the Expression Builder. The tag is added to the list on the Tag Control Panel picture.
To delete a tag from a Tag Control Panel picture:
In the Tag Control Panel picture, select the tag you want to delete and click the Delete Selected Row(s)
button.
NOTE: A tag that is associated with an object is removed only from the Tag Control Panel picture; it is
not removed from the object.
Saving Tag Lists in a Tag Control Panel Picture
To save a tag list in the Tag Control Panel picture:
1.
In the Tag Control Panel picture in WorkSpace's runtime environment, select the tags you want to save
to a tag list, by holding down the Control key and clicking each row you want to include in the list.
2.
Click the Save Tag List button. The Save As dialog box appears.
3.
Save the tag list to the location you want.
Loading Tag Lists in a Tag Control Panel Picture
To load a tag list in the Tag Control Panel picture:
1.
In the Tag Control Panel picture in WorkSpace's runtime environment, click the Load Tag List button.
The Open dialog box appears.
373
Creataing Pictures
2.
Locate the tag list you want to load and click Open. The tag list you selected is displayed in the Tag
Control Panel picture, overwriting the current list.
Configuring the Global Time Control
To configure the Global Time Control:
1.
In Ribbon view, in run mode, click the Historical tab, and then click Configuration. The Global Time
Control dialog box appears.
2.
In the Time Definition area, enter the Start Time.
3.
Either choose an End Time or define the Duration of the display:

To set the End Time, in the End Time area, enter a date.

To set the Duration:
a.
Select the Define Duration check box.
b.
In the Days list, select the number of days.
c.
Select the number of hours, minutes and seconds in their respective lists.
4.
In the Historical Update Rate area, select the number of hours, minutes, and seconds from their
respective list, for the update rate.
5.
In the Scroll Rates area, either set the scroll rate as a percentage of the duration or as a fixed amount.

.
To set the scroll rate as a percentage of the duration:
Select Scroll as % of Duration check box.
a. In the Slow list, enter a value for the slow scroll speed.
b. In the Fast list, enter a value for the fast scroll speed.

.
To set the scroll rate as a fixed amount:
If necessary, clear the Scroll as % of Duration check box.
a. In the Slow area, select the unit of measurement: days, hours, minutes, or seconds.
b. Enter the value for the unit selected.
c. In the Fast area, select the unit of measurement: days, hours, minutes, or seconds.
d. Enter the value for the unit selected.
6.
Click OK to apply changes to all open pictures.
Hiding the Historical Datalink Timestamp
To hide the historical datalink time stamp for all historical datalinks:
NOTE: The following procedure applies only to historical datalinks created after you perform this
procedure. Existing historical datalinks will not be affected.
374
Using Key Macros
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the WorkSpace menu, select User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
2.
Click the Shape Preferences tab.
3.
In the Historical Datalink area, clear the Show Timestamp With Data check box.
To hide the historical datalink time stamp for a single historical datalink:

Method 1
1. Double-click the historical datalink. The Historical Datalink dialog box appears.
2. Clear the Show Timestamp With Data check box.
3. Click OK.

Method 2
1. From the right-mouse menu of the historical datalink, select Property Window. The Property
Window appears.
2. For the ShowTimeStamp property, select False.
Work with Standard Charts
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with charts:

Applying Properties to all Pens in a Chart

Adding a Pen to a Chart

Selecting a Historical Mode for a Pen

Naming a Chart

Entering a Chart Description

Attributing a Help Context ID

Changing the Refresh Rate

Changing the Order of the Information in the Legend
Applying Properties to all Pens in a Chart
To apply properties to all pens in a chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the Chart tab, then click the tab containing the properties you want to select.
3.
Select the appropriate properties on the tabbed page.
375
Creataing Pictures
4.
Select the Apply to All Pens check box and then click OK.
Adding a Pen to a Chart
To add a pen to your chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click on the Chart tab.
3.
In the Pen List area, click the Add Pen button, or click a blank area in the Pen List, and do one of the
following:

Enter a data source using the Data Server.NODE.TAG.FIELD format.

Select a data source from the drop-down list.

Click the Browse button and select a data source from the Expression Builder.
Selecting a Historical Mode for a Pen
To select a historical mode for a pen:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the Chart tab, and then click the Pen tab.
3.
In the Pen List, select a historical data source.
4.
In the Style area, select a historical mode from the Historical Mode field.
Naming a Chart
To name a chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Name field, enter a name for the chart.
3.
Click OK.
Entering a Chart Description
To enter a chart description:
376
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Description field, enter a chart description.
3.
Click OK.
Using Key Macros
Attributing a Help Context ID
To attribute a help context ID:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Help Context Id field, enter a context-sensitive help ID.
3.
Click OK.
Changing the Refresh Rate
To change the refresh rate:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Refresh Rate field, choose a refresh rate in seconds.
3.
Click OK.
Changing the Order of the Information in the Legend
To change the order of the information in the legend of a chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the chart.
2.
Click the Chart tab, then click the Legend tab.
3.
In the Order area, select the information you want and click the up or down button to change its order
in the legend (left to right). For example, if you want to display the data source value first, select Value
and click the up arrow button until Value is listed first.
4.
Click OK.
Work with Enhanced Charts
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can customize your enhanced charts using the following procedures:

Adding a Chart Description to Enhanced Charts

Adding a Data Source Legend to an Enhanced Chart

Adding a Plotting Style Legend to an Enhanced Chart

Adding a Title to an Enhanced Chart

Changing the Plotting Color and Style of an Enhanced Chart

Changing the Chart Refresh Rate for an Enhanced Chart

Choosing a Border Style for an Enhanced Chart

Choosing Subsets for Enhanced Line Charts
377
Creataing Pictures

Configuring Data Sources for Enhanced Charts

Configuring the X and Y Axis of an Enhanced Chart

Customizing Enhanced Chart Grid Lines

Customizing the Color and Look of Enhanced Charts

Customizing the Data Source Legend for an Enhanced Chart

Defining Run-time Attributes for Enhanced Charts

Displaying Milliseconds on an Enhanced Chart

Exporting Enhanced Chart Data

Extending the Y Axis Ticks on an Enhanced Chart

Naming an Enhanced Chart

Removing the Plotting Style Legend from an Enhanced Chart

Removing the Data Source Legend from an Enhanced Chart

Selecting the Font Size and Type for an Enhanced Chart

Setting Numeric Precision for Enhanced Charts

Setting the Data Display Format for Enhanced Charts

Showing Data Points on an Enhanced Chart

Showing the Time Cursor in Enhanced Charts
Adding a Chart Description to Enhanced Charts
To add a chart description to an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and in the Description field, enter a chart description.
3.
Click OK.
Adding a Data Source Legend to an Enhanced Chart
To add a data source legend to an enhanced chart:
378
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, select Show Data Source Legend.
3.
Click OK.
Using Key Macros
Adding a Plotting Style Legend to an Enhanced Chart
To add a plotting style legend to an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, select Show Plotting Style Legend.
3.
Click OK.
Adding a Title to an Enhanced Chart
To add a title to an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab, and in the Main Title field, enter a title for the chart.
3.
Optionally, in the Subtitle field, enter a subtitle for the chart.
4.
Click OK.
Changing the Plotting Color and Style of an Enhanced Chart
To change the plotting color and style of an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Plotting Style tab and in the Line Style area, click the desired color. To create a custom color,
double-click a color.
NOTE: The selected color is applied to the X and Y axis markers, Data Sources table items, and graph
lines and points.
3.
Line Charts Only: In the Chart Plotting Style area, select the desired style.
4.
Line Charts Only: Select a Point Type.
NOTE: Point types appear only if the Chart Plotting Style includes points, such as Point + Line, for
example.
5.
Select a Line Type.
6.
In the Data Shadows area, click Off, Shadow, or 3D.
NOTE: 3D can be applied only to Histograms; Shadow can be applied to only Histograms and
Line/Multiline charts that use Area or Bar for their Plotting Style.
7.
Click OK.
379
Creataing Pictures
Changing the Chart Update Rate for an Enhanced Chart
To change the chart update rate of an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Chart Update Rate field, enter a refresh rate in seconds.
3.
Click OK.
Changing the Y Axis Style in Run Mode
NOTES:

Two or more data sources must be configured in order to display multiple charts or a stacked chart.

The Enable Quick Configure check box must be selected in the General tab of the Chart Customization
dialog box.
To change the Y axis style:
1.
In run mode, hover over the upper left corner of the chart. Buttons labeled Multiple, Stack, and Single
appear.
2.
Click the button corresponding to the Y axis style you want to display.
Changing the Y Axis Visibility in Run Mode
NOTE: The Enable Quick Configure check box and the Selectable check box must both be selected in the
General tab of the Chart Customization dialog box.
To change the Y axis visibility:
1.
In run mode, hover over the column at the far right of the Data Source Legend area under the chart.
The Y Axis Always Visible label box appears just above the cursor.
2.
Click the value (Yes or No) displayed for the row to toggle it to the opposite value.
Changing the Plot Visibility in Run Mode
NOTE: The Enable Quick Configure check box and the Selectable check box must both be selected in the
General tab of the Chart Customization dialog box.
To change the plot visibility:
380
1.
In run mode, hover over the second column from the far right of the Data Source Legend area under
the chart. The Plot Visible label box appears just above the cursor.
2.
Click the value (Yes or No) displayed for the row to toggle it to the opposite value.
Using Key Macros
Choosing a Border Style for an Enhanced Chart
To choose a border style for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Border Style area, click the desired border style.
3.
Click OK.
Choosing Subsets for Enhanced Line Charts
To choose the subsets for an enhanced line chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Subsets tab and in the Scrolling Subsets area, choose the number of subsets to view in one
group.
3.
To add a subset to a graph select it from the Baseline Subsets to Graph list.
4.
Click OK.
Configuring Data Sources for Enhanced Charts
To configure data sources for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Data Sources tab and in the Data Sources List do one of the following:

Enter a data source using the Data Server.NODE.TAG.FIELD format.

Select a data source from the drop-down list.

Click the Browse button and select a data source from the Expression Builder.
NOTE: Proficy Historian Data Sources using expressions (for example, Hist1.INFO10.Simulation00001
+ 30) are not supported for Enhanced Charts.
3.
To use the data range of the data source, on the Data tab, if it is not already selected, click Fetch
Limits.
4.
To set the data range yourself, clear the Fetch limits check box and enter the upper limit of the range in
the High Limit field and enter the lower limit of the range in the Low Limit field.
5.
For Line/Multiline charts only: Enter the maximum number of display points in the Maximum Display
Points field.
6.
To cause gaps to appear on the chart if they are present in the data, select Show Gaps.
7.
To use interpolated data, select Interpolated Data.
381
Creataing Pictures
8.
Historical Data Charts only: Choose a mode from the Historical Mode list.
9.
Configure the time parameters for historical data sources on the Time tab.
NOTE: The Time tab is available only for historical data sources.
a.
In the Start Date section, select either Fixed Date or Days Before Now and enter the desired
date or value.
b.
In the Start Time section, select either Fixed Time or Duration Before Now and enter the
desired time or value.
c.
Optionally, to configure the chart to open at the Fixed Time and to ignore changes to the time
zone in the Date and Time Properties dialog box in the Control Panel, select Lock Time.
d.
Optionally, to adjust for daylight saving time, if it is not already selected, click Adjust for
Daylight Savings Time and select a time zone from the Time Zone list.
e.
To apply all of the preceding settings to all historical data sources, select Apply To All Data
Sources, and then click Apply.
10. Click OK.
Configuring the X and Y Axis of an Enhanced Chart
To configure the X and Y axis of an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Axis tab and in the X Axis Title field, enter a title for the X axis.
3.
In the Y Axis Title field, enter a title for the Y axis.
4.
In the Show X-Axis field, select the Grid, Labels, and Title to be displayed for the X axis.
5.
In the Show Y-Axis field, select the Grid, Labels, and Title to be displayed for the Y axis.
6.
In the Max X-Axis Labels field, select the maximum number of labels (up to 20) to be displayed for
the X axis.
7.
Line/Multiline Charts only: Select Linear or Log format for the Y axis units.
8.
To use automatically generated limits for the Y axis, select Use Data Source Limits.
9.
To specify which values you want to set for the Y axis, clear the Use Data Source Limits check box
and select Min, Max, or Min/Max.
10. Enter the desired value in the Min and/or Max fields.
11. Select Auto if you want the chart to dynamically resize to the values plotted.
NOTE: Auto is available only if Use Data Source Limits is selected.
12. In the Padding field, enter a value.
13. On the Chart Style tab, in the X Axis Label Orientation area, click the orientation of the X axis.
382
Using Key Macros
14. Click OK.
Configuring Multiple Y Axes for Enhanced Charts
To configure multiple Y axes for Enhanced Charts:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab. In the Y Axes Style area, select either Multiple Axes or Stack Axes.
3.
Click the Data Sources tab and click the Y Axis sub-tab.
4.
From the Data Sources List area, select the data source to configure a Y axis for.
5.
In the Title field in the Y Axis tab, enter a title for the Y axis of the selected data source.
6.
If you want the Y axis for this data source to always be visible, select the Y Axis Always Visible check
box.
7.
If you want to use the default Y axis settings configured in the Axis tab, select the Use Default Y Axis
Settings check box.
NOTE: Selecting this option disables all other controls in this group.
8.
If you want the Y axis for this data source to be set according to the limits of the individual data
source, select the Use Data Source Limits check box.
NOTES:
9.

This option is available only if Use Default Y Axis Settings is not selected.

Selecting this option disables all other Data Source Limits controls in this group.
Select Linear or Log format to specify whether the Y Axis legend for the associated data source is
displayed in a linear or logarithmic style
NOTE: This option is available only if Use Default Y Axis Settings is not selected.
10. To specify minimum and/or maximum values for the Y axis in run mode either manually or
automatically, select either Auto, Min, Max, or Min/Max in the radio button group.

Auto allows iFIX to automatically calculate the minimum and maximum values so that all
data points are within the visible area of the chart for the selected data source.

Min allows you to specify the minimum value and automatically calculate the maximum
value for the selected data source.

Max allows you to specify the maximum value and automatically calculate the minimum
value for the selected data source.

Min/Max allows you to specify both the minimum and maximum values for the selected data
source.
NOTE: These options are not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data Source Limits is
selected.
383
Creataing Pictures
11. To manually specify the minimum and/or maximum values for the Y axis, enter the values in the Min
and/or Max fields.
NOTES:

The Min and Max fields are not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data Source
Limits is selected.

The Min field is available only if the Min or Min/Max radio button is selected.

The Max field is available only if the Max or Min/Max radio button is selected.
12. To specify the spacing between values and the top and bottom of plot area, enter the desired value in
the Padding field.
NOTES:

This option is not available if the Min/Max radio button is selected.

This option is not available if Use Default Y Axis Settings or Use Data Source Limits is
selected.
13. To configure the Y axis for another data source in the Data Sources List area, repeat the preceding
steps.
Customizing Enhanced Chart Grid Lines
To customize enhanced chart grid lines:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Grid Lines area, click Grid in Front of Data to make the grid lines
appear in front of the data.
3.
Click which, if any, grid lines you want to display on the chart.
4.
Click the desired style for the grid lines.
5.
Click OK.
Customizing the Color and Look of Enhanced Charts
To customize the color and look of an enhanced chart:
384
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Color tab and in the Viewing Style area, select Color, Monochrome, or Monochrome +
Symbols.
3.
To design your own custom color graph:
Using Key Macros
4.
5.
a.
In the Graph Attributes area, click the attribute you want to change the color for.
b.
Click the desired color for the selected attribute. To create a custom color, double-click a
color.
c.
Repeat steps a and b until you have modified all desired attributes.
To use a pre-set style:
a.
Select Bitmap/Gradient Styles.
b.
Click the desired Bitmap/Gradient style.
Click OK.
Customizing the Data Source Legend for an Enhanced Chart
To customize the data source legend for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Data Sources tab and then the Legend tab.
3.
In the Items area, select the items that you want to appear in the data sources Legend.
4.
To apply your selections to all data sources, select Apply To All Data Sources.
5.
To change the order in which the selected items appear, on the Chart Style tab, in the Legend Column
Width area, in the Order list, select the item you want to move. Use the Up arrow to move the item's
location to the right or the Down arrow to move the item's location to the left.
6.
To change the width of a data source legend column, in the Legend Column Width area, enter the
desired column width in the corresponding column field. For example, to change the width of the
Source column of the data source legend, enter the desired width in the Source field.
7.
In the Miscellaneous area, select Show Data Source Legend.
8.
Click OK.
Defining Run-time Attributes for Enhanced Charts
To define run time attributes for enhanced charts:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab.
3.
Select the attributes (Highlightable, Selectable, Modifiable, Expandable), if any, you want to permit at
run time.
4.
In the Zooming area, select the desired zoom function.
385
Creataing Pictures
5.
In the Appearance area, select Enable Quick Configure to quickly and easily change various Enhanced
Chart properties while in run mode without having to display the configuration dialog or the right-click
menu.
6.
Click OK.
Displaying Milliseconds on an Enhanced Chart
To display milliseconds on an enhanced charts:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and in the Appearance area, select Display Milliseconds.
3.
Click OK.
Enabling Advanced Graphics
To enable advanced graphics for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and in the Appearance area, select Enable Advanced Graphics.
3.
Click OK.
Enabling Quick Configure
Enable Quick Configure provides a way to quickly and easily change chart properties while in run mode
without needing to open the configuration dialog box or use the right-click menu. The Quick Configure options
that are enabled are:

Y Axes Style buttons (Multiple, Stack, Single) that appear when you hover over the upper left-hand
corner of the chart

Y Axis Always Visible toggle when you hover over the column at the far right of the Data Source
Legend area under the chart

Plot Visible toggle when you hover over the second column from the far right of the Data Source
Legend area under the chart
NOTE: The Selectable check box on the General tab must also be selected to toggle the Y Axis Always Visible
and Plot Visible properties between Yes and No.
To enable quick configure for an Enhanced Chart:
1.
386
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
Using Key Macros
2.
Click the General tab and in the Appearance area, select Enable Quick Configure.
3.
Click OK.
Enabling the Thumbnail View
The Thumbnail check box allows the chart to be reduced to thumbnail size while still being legible enough to
provide useful information. When coupled with the Expandable property, the chart can be enlarged to full size
in run mode, or can be reduced to thumbnail size.
To enable thumbnail view:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, select Thumbnail.
3.
Click OK.
Exporting Enhanced Chart Data
To export enhanced chart data:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click Export.
3.
In the Export area, select the desired file format type.
4.
In the Export Destination area, select the desired export location. If you chose File, click Browse to set
the destination.
5.
For Export options EMF, WMF, BMP, JPG, and PNG only, configure the export size. To do so:
a.
If applicable, select the unit of measure.
b.
Enter the export size in the Width fields.
NOTE: The width/height aspect ratio must be between .1 and 10.0 to avoid generating the
error "This will produce an image that is hard to read. Please adjust output dimensions." For
example, a width/height of 30/300 does not produce an error, but 30/301 does. Likewise, a
width/height of 300/30 does not produce an error, but 301/30 does.
c.
Select the DPI.
d.
If desired, click Large Font.
6.
Click Export. If you selected the EMF, WMF, BMP, JPG, or PNG formats for export, your data is
exported. Otherwise, the Exporting Enhanced Chart dialog box appears.
7.
On the Exporting Enhanced Chart dialog box, in the Export What area, select whether you want to
export only the data or the data with its labels.
387
Creataing Pictures
8.
In the Export Style area, choose to export the data in either list or table format. If you chose List, in the
Delimited area, select either Tab or Comma. If you chose Table, in the Row vs Column area, select
either Subsets/Points or Points/Subsets.
9.
In the Numeric Precision area, choose your level of precision.
10. Click Export.
Extending the Y Axis Ticks on an Enhanced Chart
To show the Y Axis ticks on an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Grid Lines area, select Extend Y Axis Ticks.
3.
Click OK.
Naming an Enhanced Chart
To name an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and, in the Object Name field, enter a name for the chart.
3.
Click OK.
Removing the Plotting Style Legend from an Enhanced Chart
To remove the plotting style legend from an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, clear the Show Plotting Style Legend check
box.
3.
Click OK.
Removing the Data Source Legend from an Enhanced Chart
To remove the data source legend from an enhanced chart:
388
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, clear the Show Data Source Legend check
box.
Using Key Macros
3.
Click OK.
Selecting the Font Size and Type for an Enhanced Chart
To select the font size and type for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Font tab and in the Chart Font Size area, select a size for the chart's fonts.
3.
In the Font Styles area, select a font type for the Main Title, Sub-Title, Subset / Point / Axis Labels,
and Table Data.
4.
Optionally, select a font face for the Main Title, Sub-Title, Subset / Point / Axis Labels, and Table
Data.
NOTE: To help you visualize how your choices look, an example is displayed in the Sample field.
5.
Click OK.
Setting Numeric Precision for Enhanced Charts
To set the numeric precision for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Numeric Precision area, select the desired level of precision.
3.
Click OK.
Setting the Data Display Format for Enhanced Charts
To set the data display format for an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Display field, select the desired data display format.
3.
Click OK.
Showing Data Points on an Enhanced Chart
To show data points on an enhanced chart (method 1):
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
389
Creataing Pictures
2.
Click the Plotting Style tab and in the Chart Plotting Style area, select a plotting style that includes
"Points" in the name.
3.
Select a Point Type for each data source.
4.
Choose a color for each data source.
5.
Click OK.
To show data points on an enhanced chart (method 2):
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, select Mark Data Points.
3.
Click OK.
Showing the Data Points Labels in an XY Chart
To show data points labels on an XY chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Chart Style tab and in the Miscellaneous area, select Include Data Labels.
3.
Click OK.
Showing the Expand/Contract Button in Enhanced Charts
To show the expand/contract button in an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and select Expandable.
3.
Click OK.
NOTES:

In run mode, moving the cursor to the upper right corner of the chart displays the Expand or
Contract button. This button toggles the size of the chart between a smaller view and a larger
view.

The expand/contract feature can be used in conjunction with the Thumbnail feature if you want
the smaller view to be thumbnail size with legible information available.
Showing the Time Cursor in Enhanced Charts
To show the time cursor in an enhanced chart:
390
Using Key Macros
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and in the Appearance area, select Show Time Cursor, and select As Table or As
Tool Tips for displaying the time cursor at run time.
3.
Select the Selectable check box.
4.
Click OK.
NOTE: In run mode, clicking in the plot area freezes the time cursor where clicked; clicking again frees the
cursor.
Showing the Hover Tool Tips in Enhanced Charts
To show the hover tool tip in an enhanced chart:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace picture, double-click the chart. The Enhanced Chart Customization dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the General tab and in the Appearance area, select Show Hover Tool Tip.
3.
Select the Selectable check box.
4.
Click OK.
Work with the Alarm Summary Object
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with Alarm Summary objects:

Setting a SCADA Server's Alarm Priority

Adding Alarm Summary Objects to a Picture

Displaying the Object's Properties Window

Changing the General Appearance

Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles

Filtering or Sorting Alarms

Acknowledging Alarms

Changing Default Settings

Working with Run-Time Settings and Properties
Setting a SCADA Server's Alarm Priority
To set a SCADA server's alarm priority:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace configuration environment, open or create a picture.
391
Creataing Pictures
2.
In Classic view, from the Shapes toolbar, click the Data link button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Datalink.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Datalink button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
3.
Click and drag the mouse to define the size of the Data link. The Datalink dialog box appears.
4.
In the Source field, enter the data source Fix32.node.System.A_SACPR.
5.
From the Type drop down menu in the Data Entry area, select In-Place.
6.
Complete the remainder of the Datalink dialog box.
7.
Switch to the run-time environment and enter the SCADA server's alarm priority.
Adding Alarm Summary Objects to a Picture
To add an Alarm Summary object to a picture:

In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the Shapes toolbar, select the Alarm Summary button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click Alarm
Summary.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Alarm Summary button on the Toolbox.
Displaying the Object's Properties Window
To display the object's Properties window:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object.
2.
Select Property Window. The Properties window appears.
Displaying The Number of Occurrences of an Alarm Since Last Acknowledgement
To display the number of occurrences of an alarm since last acknowledgement in an Alarm Summary object:
392
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Column tab.
Using Key Macros
3.
From the Available Columns list, double-click the user-defined field you want to add to the
spreadsheet.
4.
In the user-defined field, assign the A_ALMOCCUR block field. In the user-defined field name, type a
name for the column header.
Changing the General Appearance
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps to change the general appearance of your
working area:

Blinking Unacknowledged Alarms

Changing the Alarm Summary Object's Columns

Changing the Column Order

Configuring User-Defined Fields

Showing or Hiding Alarm Summary Object Controls
Blinking Unacknowledged Alarms
To blink unacknowledged alarms:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Select Blink Unack Alarms.
Changing the Alarm Summary Object's Columns
To change the columns displayed by the Alarm Summary object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Column tab.
3.
Double-click the columns in the Available Columns box to add them to the object.
4.
Double-click the columns in the Selected Columns box to remove them from the object.
Changing the Column Order
To change the column order:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
393
Creataing Pictures
2.
Select the Column tab.
3.
Select the column you want to move from the Selected Columns box.
4.
Click the up arrow button to move the column left in the spreadsheet.
5.
Click the down arrow button to move the column right in the spreadsheet.
Configuring User-Defined Fields
To configure a user-defined field:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Column tab.
3.
From the Available Columns list, double-click the user-defined field you want to add to the
spreadsheet.
4.
Enter a block field name you want to assign to the user-defined field in the User Definable Columns
area and click the <> button. The maximum length of the field name is 50 characters.
Showing or Hiding Alarm Summary Object Controls
To show or hide column headings, scroll bars, row numbers, grid lines, or the status bar:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Select the check boxes of the items you want to display.
4.
Clear the check boxes of the items you want to hide.
Configuring Fonts, Colors, and Styles
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with fonts, colors, and styles:

Configuring Fonts for the Column Headings and Status Bar

Configuring Unacknowledged Alarm Colors

Selecting an Alarm's Font and Style

Selecting the Alarm Foreground Color

Selecting the Alarm Background Color
Configuring Fonts for the Column Headings and Status Bar
To configure fonts for the Alarm Summary column headings and status bar:
394
Using Key Macros
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
On the General tab, in the Fonts area, click the browse (...) button next to either the Alarm Column
Headings or Status bar field. The font dialog box appears.
3.
Select the font name, style, size, and/or script that you want to use.
4.
Optionally, repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other configurable field.
5.
Click OK to accept your changes and close the Font dialog box.
6.
In the Alarm Summary Configuration dialog box, click Apply.
Configuring Unacknowledged Alarm Colors
To configure the color for unacknowledged alarms:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Color tab.
3.
Select the Unacknowledged Alarm Color check box to enable it.
4.
Click the option's color button. The Select Color dialog box appears.
5.
Select a color for unacknowledged alarms, then click OK.
Selecting an Alarm's Font and Style
To select an alarm's font and style:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Color tab.
3.
Select the font button for the alarm you want to configure.
4.
Select the font and style from the dialog box that appears.
Setting the Alarm Foreground Color
To select the alarm foreground color:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Color tab.
3.
In the Foreground Alarm Color area, double-click the color of an alarm. The Select Color dialog box
appears.
4.
Select a new color for the alarm and then click OK.
395
Creataing Pictures
Selecting the Alarm Background Color
To select the alarm background color:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Color tab.
3.
In the Background Alarm Color area, next to the alarm priority or status, double-click the color. The
Select Color dialog box appears.
4.
Select a new color for the alarm and then click OK.
5.
Repeat steps 3-4 for each row in the Background Alarm Color area.
6.
If the Blink to Color option is enabled, in the second column for each alarm priority or status, select a
blinking color. Double-click the color in the second row to define the blink color.
7.
Repeat step 6 for each row that you want to define a color for the blink feature.
8.
Click Apply.
Filtering or Sorting Alarms
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with alarms:

Appending Filter Conditions

Changing Boolean Operators

Configuring Alarm Summary to Sort Alarms

Creating Filter Conditions

Deleting Filter Conditions

Inserting Filter Conditions

Modifying Filter Conditions
Appending Filter Conditions
To append a filter condition:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
Select the column you want to add to your filter condition.
4.
Click Add Filter Condition and complete the dialog box that appears.
NOTE: The Alarm Summary object supports up to ten filter conditions.
396
Using Key Macros
Changing Boolean Operators
To change the Boolean operator:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
Select the portion of the filter condition you want to modify.
4.
Click OR, AND, or NOT to change the Boolean operator.
Configuring Alarm Summary to Sort Alarms
To configure the Alarm Summary object to sort alarms:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Sort tab.
3.
Select the attribute you want to sort by.
4.
Select whether you want to sort alarms in ascending or descending order.
Creating Filter Conditions
To create a filter condition:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
Double-click each column you want to filter on and complete the dialog box that appears.
NOTE: The Alarm Summary object supports up to ten filter conditions.
Deleting Filter Conditions
To delete a filter condition:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
From the Display Alarms Where box, select the portion of the filter condition you want to delete and
click Remove.
397
Creataing Pictures
Inserting Filter Conditions
To insert a filter condition:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
From the Display Alarms Where box, highlight the portion of the filter condition where you want to
insert a new condition.
4.
From the Fields box, select the column you want to add to the filter condition.
5.
Click Insert Filter Condition and complete the dialog box that appears.
NOTE: The Alarm Summary object supports up to ten filter conditions.
Modifying Filter Conditions
To modify a filter condition:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Filter tab.
3.
From the Display Alarms Where box, select the portion of the filter condition you want to modify.
4.
Click Modify. The Modify Area dialog box appears.
5.
In the Modify Area dialog box, enter the required changes and click OK.
Acknowledging Alarms
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with alarm acknowledgments:

Acknowledging Alarms with the Alarm Summary Object

Creating a Data Link That Displays Alarms
Acknowledging Alarms with the Alarm Summary Object
To acknowledge alarms with the Alarm Summary object:
398

For a single alarm, right-click the object in the iFIX WorkSpace and select Acknowledge from the
pop-up menu.

For all alarms, right-click the object in the iFIX WorkSpace and select Acknowledge All from the popup menu.

For all alarms currently displayed on the screen, right-click the object in the iFIX WorkSpace and
select Acknowledge Page from the pop-up menu.
Using Key Macros
Creating a Data Link That Displays Alarms
To create a Data link that displays alarms:
1.
Open or create a picture in the iFIX WorkSpace.
2.
In Classic view, from the Shapes toolbar, click the Data link button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Insert tab, in the Objects/Links group, click Objects/Links, and then click
Datalink.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Datalink button on the Toolbox.
The cursor changes to a plus sign.
3.
Click and drag the mouse to define the size of the Data link.
4.
In the Source field, enter the data source you want to use. Use the A_CUALM field name when
entering a data source to show the current alarm.
5.
Complete the remainder of the Datalink dialog box.
Changing Default Settings
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with the default settings:

Restoring the Alarm Summary Object's Default Settings

Saving the Alarm Summary Object's Current Settings
Restoring the Alarm Summary Object's Default Settings
To restore the Alarm Summary object's default settings:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Click Reset. The default settings get applied to the selected Alarm Summary object.
TIP: Only the settings in the selected Alarm Summary object get restored. If you want other Alarm
Summary objects that you create after this one to also use the same default settings, click Save. This
saves your Alarm Summary settings to the AlarmSummary.ini file in the LOCAL folder (by default:
C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\LOCAL), so that subsequent Alarm Summary objects will apply
these default settings when you first drop the object into your picture.
Saving the Alarm Summary Object's Current Settings
To save the Alarm Summary object's current settings:
399
Creataing Pictures
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Click Save. This saves the currently selected Alarm Summary object's settings into the
AlarmSummary.ini file in the LOCAL folder (by default: C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy
iFIX\LOCAL), so that subsequent Alarm Summary objects that you add to your pictures will use these
settings by default.
Working with Run-Time Settings and Properties
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with the run-time settings and properties:

Configuring the Selection Timeout

Enabling and Disabling Alarm Summary Operator Properties

Setting the Alarm Refresh Rate

Setting the Blink Rate

Setting the Data Refresh Rate

Showing the Latched or Current Alarm Status

Reversing the Color of Alarms on Acknowledgement
Configuring the Selection Timeout
To configure the selection timeout:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Enter the number of seconds the Alarm Summary object should wait before deselecting an alarm.
Enabling and Disabling Alarm Summary Operator Properties
To enable and disable the Alarm Summary operator properties:
400
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Operator tab.
3.
Select the check box of each property you want to enable.
4.
Clear the check box of any property you want to disable.
Using Key Macros
Setting the Alarm Refresh Rate
To set the alarm refresh rate:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Enter the number of seconds the Alarm Summary object should wait before reading its queue for new
alarms.
Setting the Blink Rate
To set the blink rate:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Enter the rate, in seconds, that the Alarm Summary object should flash unacknowledged alarms.
Setting the Data Refresh Rate
To set the data refresh rate:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Enter the number of seconds the Alarm Summary object should wait before updating the alarm values
displayed on the screen.
Showing the Latched or Current Alarm Status
To show the latched or current alarm status in the Alarm Summary window:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Select the Show Current Alarm Status or Show Latched Alarm Status option.
4.
Click Apply.
Reversing the Color of Alarms on Acknowledgement
To reverse the color of alarms on acknowledgement:
401
Creataing Pictures
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the Alarm Summary object. The Alarm Summary Configuration
dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Display tab.
3.
Select the Reverse Colors on Acknowledge tab check box.
NOTE: This check box is available only when the Blink Unack Alarms is selected. When you select this
check box, the Blink Rate changes to 0. The foreground and background colors are defined on the
Color tab.
4.
Click Apply.
Working with Groups
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with grouping objects and layers:

Grouping Two or More Objects

Ungrouping Objects

Animating Grouped Objects

Drilling Down into a Group

Setting Object Layers

Displaying Layers in Pictures
Grouping Two or More Objects
To group two or more objects:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, control-click the objects.
2.
In Classic view, from the Tools toolbar, click the Group button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Group.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.
The objects are grouped together and a group object appears in the WorkSpace system tree.
Ungrouping Objects
To ungroup an object:
402
Using Key Macros
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the grouped object.
2.
In Classic view, from the Tools toolbar, click the Ungroup button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Arrange group, click Ungroup.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Ungroup button on the Toolbox.
The group object is removed from the system tree but the member objects remain.
Animating Grouped Objects
To animate a grouped object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the group you want to animate, and select Animations. The Basic
Animation dialog box appears.
2.
Click the appropriate Expert button.
3.
Enter the configuration information for the Animation Expert.
Drilling Down into a Group
To drill down into a group:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the group containing the object you want to modify.
2.
Right-click the group and choose Enter DrillDown. A box appears around the group.
3.
Select the object in the group you want to change.
4.
Make the changes you require. When finished, deselect the object and the group. The box disappears.
Setting Object Layers
To set a layer for an object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object you want to set a layer for.
2.
In Classic view, on the Tools toolbar, click the Set Layer button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Layers, and then click Set Layer.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Set Layer button on the Toolbox.
3.
Click the button that represents the number of the layer you want to assign. To assign multiple layers,
select the Allow for Multiple Layers check box and then click the numbered buttons, or click Select
All. If you make a mistake, click Deselect All and repeat this step.
403
Creataing Pictures
4.
Click OK.
Displaying Layers in Pictures
To display layers in a picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace Tools toolbar, click the Display Layers button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Picture group, click Layers, and then click Display Layer.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Display Layers button on the Toolbox.
2.
Click the button that represents the layer you want to display. To select all possible layers to be
displayed, click Select All Layers. If you make a mistake, click Deselect All Layers and repeat this
step.
3.
Click OK.
Using Color
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with colors:

Color Selection Overview – Modal

Color Selection Overview – Modeless

Adding Fade, Foreground, Background, or Edge Colors to Objects

Setting the Background Color of a Picture

Setting the Fade Color of a Picture

Setting the Blend Percentage of a Picture's Fade Color

Setting the Blend Percentage of an Object's Fade Color

Selecting Color Sets

Assigning Colors to Properties

Creating Custom Color Sets

Assigning a Custom Name to a Color

Coloring Objects by Analog Values

Coloring Objects by Digital Values
Color Selection Overview – Modal
The following sections provide information about color selection for modal windows.
404
Using Key Macros

Add fade, foreground, background, or edge color to objects

Set the background color of a picture

Set the fade color of a picture

Set the blend percentage of a picture's fade color

Set the blend percentage of an object's fade color

Select a color set
Adding Fade, Foreground, Background, or Edge Colors to Objects
To add a fade color to a specific object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Fade. The Select FadeColor
dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Fade button. The Select Color dialog box appears.
3.
Select a color and click OK. To select a name, click the Name tab and select a color name from the list.
To add a foreground color to a specific object with no gradient fill:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Foreground. The Select
ForegroundColor dialog box appears.
2.
Select a color and click OK. To select a name, click the Name tab and select a color name from the list.
To add a foreground color to a specific object with a gradient fill:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Foreground. The Select
ForegroundColor dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Foreground button. The Select Color dialog box appears.
3.
Select a color and click OK. To select a name, click the Name tab and select a color name from the list.
To add a background color to a specific object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Background. The Select
BackgroundColor dialog box appears.
2.
Select a color and click OK. To select a name, click the Name tab and select a color name from the list.
To add an edge color to a specific object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Edge. The Select EdgeColor
dialog box appears.
2.
Select a color and click OK. To select a name, click the Name tab and select a color name from the list.
405
Creataing Pictures
Setting the Background Color of a Picture
To set the background color of a picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click any area in the picture outside of an object and choose Picture. The
Edit Picture dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Background Color button. The Select BackgroundColor dialog box appears.
3.
Select the color you want and click OK.
Setting the Fade Color of a Picture
To set the fade color of a picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click any area in the picture outside of an object and choose Picture.
2.
Click the Fade Color button.
3.
Select the color you want and click OK.
Setting the Blend Percentage of a Picture's Fade Color
To set the blend percentage of a picture's fade color:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click any area in the picture outside of an object and choose Picture. The
Edit Picture dialog box appears.
2.
Select the Gradient enabled check box and then select the fade type you want to apply to the gradient.
3.
Move the Blend slider to increase or decrease the amount of fade color you want applied to the fade
type. The higher the percentage, the more fade color is visible.
Setting the Blend Percentage of an Object's Fade Color
To set the blend percentage of an object's fade color:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object, point to Color, and choose Fade. The Select FadeColor
dialog box appears.
2.
Move the Blend slider to increase or decrease the amount of fade color you want applied to the fade
type. The higher the percentage, the more fade color is visible.
Selecting Color Sets
To select a color set:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click an object, point to Color, and choose Fade, Foreground,
Background, or Edge. The applicable Select Color dialog box appears.
- Or -
406
Using Key Macros
Select an object and click the Color button in the Toolbox. The Select Color dialog box appears.
2.
In the Color Set field, select a color set from the list box.
Color Selection Overview – Modeless Windows
The following sections provide information about color selection for modeless windows.

Assign colors to properties

Select a color set

Create a custom color set

Assign a custom name to a color

Color objects by analog values

Color objects by digital values
Assigning Colors to Properties
To assign a color to a property:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Tools toolbar, click the Color button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Styles group, click Color Selection.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Color button on the Toolbox.
2.
In the Property field, select the property you want. Use the drop-down menu if necessary.
3.
Select a color from the Color Selection dialog box.
Selecting Color Sets
To select a color set:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click an object, point to Color, and choose Fade, Foreground,
Background, or Edge. The applicable Select Color dialog box appears.
- Or Select an object and click the Color button in the Toolbox. The Select Color dialog box appears.
2.
In the Color Set field, select a color set from the list box.
407
Creataing Pictures
Creating Custom Color Sets
To create a custom color set:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Tools toolbar, click the Color button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Format tab, in the Styles group, click Color Selection.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Color button on the Toolbox.
2.
Click either the Color tab to display the color palette, or the Name tab to display a list of colors.
3.
Click New Color Set.
4.
Enter a palette name in the Name field and click OK. The palette name is added to the Color Set list
box.
Assigning a Custom Name to a Color
To assign a custom name to a color:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the Tools toolbar, click the Color button.
-OrRibbon view, on the Format tab, in the Styles group, click Color Selection.
-OrIf the Toolbox is enabled, click the Color button on the Toolbox.
2.
From the Color Set field, select a color set.
3.
Click the Customize Color button.
NOTE: The Customize Color button is not available if you selected System Default as the color set.
4.
Click a location in the palette that most closely represents the color you want.
5.
Specify the shade of the color spectrum by clicking the mixer bar to the right of the palette and click
OK. For a more precise selection, adjust the slider by clicking and dragging it.
6.
Enter a specific name to identify your color.
Coloring Objects by Analog Values
To color an object by analog value:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select an object.
2.
Click the appropriate Color Expert on the Experts toolbar.
-Or-
408
Using Key Macros
In Classic view, click the Task Wizard button on the WorkSpace toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Tools tab, in the Animations group, click Animations. Select the appropriate
Color Expert from the Task Wizard dialog box and click the Perform Task button.
3.
In the Data Source field, enter a data source.
4.
Select the Range option above the lookup table.
5.
Select a Minimum and Maximum cell in the lookup table row that corresponds to the color you want to
assign to those values.
6.
Enter the appropriate low and high limit values for the color selection in the row.
Coloring Objects by Digital Values
To color an object by digital value:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select an object.
2.
Click the appropriate Color Expert on the Experts toolbar.
-OrIn Classic view, click the Task Wizard button on the WorkSpace toolbar.
-OrIn Ribbon view, from the Tools tab, in the Animations group, click Animations. Select the appropriate
Color Expert from the Task Wizard dialog box and click the Perform Task button.
3.
In the Data Source field, enter a data source.
4.
Select the Exact Match option above the lookup table.
5.
If desired, enter a tolerance value in the Exact Match Tolerance field.
6.
Double-click a Value cell in a lookup table row that corresponds to the color you want to assign to that
value.
7.
Enter the appropriate digital value for the color selection in the row.
409
Creataing Pictures
Using Process Assistants to Expedite Pictures
By studying the trends in today's users, and focusing specifically on iFIX users, GE Intelligent Platforms has
developed a set of performance support tools that let you tap the power of iFIX with minimal effort. These tools
include:

Wizards

Experts

Dynamos

Global Subroutines

Toolbars
Each of these tools are described in this chapter.
Using Wizards and Experts
GE Intelligent Platforms developed Wizards and Experts with one goal in mind – allow users to unleash the
power of iFIX quickly and easily. Wizards and Experts are essentially simplified user interfaces that help you
accomplish a task.
The fundamental difference between Wizards and Experts is:

Wizards consist of a series of dialog boxes that guide you through a process and engage you in dialog
that helps you understand that process.

Experts consist of one dialog box that requires minimum input to quickly perform a task. They provide
an easier way to animate objects or execute scripts, tasks that you can also accomplish using the Basic
Animations dialog box.
iFIX Wizards and Experts were created to help both advanced and novice users. Advanced users can carry the
process to additional steps, perhaps by using a powerful feature of VBA, re-entering an Expert after performing
another function, or learning a new feature by implementing it.
Novice users can run a Wizard or Expert in an effort to complete a more complicated task without adapting to
new concepts or technology. Although the underlying foundation of Wizards and Experts is Visual Basic, you
never need to be exposed to or versed in VBA to use these tools.
Ultimately, employing Wizards and Experts in your picture development means you can complete desired tasks
and enjoy the results.
410
Using Key Macros
Running Wizards
iFIX provides the following Wizards:

Task – Access from a button on the Standard toolbar.

Generate – Access through the Generate option on the Blocks menu of the Database Manager.

Backup and Restore – Access through the iFIX menu on the Programs menu of the Start menu.

Create Picture – Access through the Task wizard, using one of the following methods:

by right-clicking on the Pictures folder in the system tree,

by selecting New from the File menu in the WorkSpace (Classic view),

by clicking Picture in the New group, on the Home tab (Ribbon view),

by clicking the WorkSpace button, selecting new and clicking Picture (Ribbon view), or

from one of the following toolbars: Experts, Standard, or Toolbox.
NOTE: To access the Create Picture wizard from the Menu Bar, the Ribbon, the System Tree, or the
Standard toolbar, you must have the Show Picture Wizard from New Picture Menu check box enabled
on the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.

Multiple Command Script – Access from the Command category of the Task Wizard, the Click
Event button in the Basic Animation dialog box, or the Run Wizard button in the Key Macro Editor or
Scheduler.
The following table shows how these Wizards can be used in iFIX.
Wizards in iFIX
While doing the
following...
You can use
the...
To...
Resolving a picture
Task Wizard
Run the Resolve utility. For more information, refer to the
Resolving Pictures section. To learn how to use the Task
Wizard, refer to the Using Experts and the Task Wizard
section of the Understanding iFIX manual.
Building a database
Generate Wizard
Add blocks to your database. For more information, refer to
the Working with the Process Database chapter in the
Building a SCADA System manual.
Managing your files
Backup and
Restore Wizard
Archive all of your iFIX configuration files. For more
information, refer to the Backing up and Restoring Files
section of the Understanding iFIX manual.
411
Creataing Pictures
Wizards in iFIX
While doing the
following...
You can use
the...
To...
Creating a picture or
set of pictures
Create Picture
Wizard
Set the sizes, locations, and properties of an individual
picture or a group of pictures. For more information, refer
to the Using the Create Picture Wizard section in this
manual.
Assigning
multiple
commands to an
event
Multiple
Command
Script Wizard
Create a sequence of commands that are executed in
response to a trigger event such as a mouse click,
Scheduler entry, or key macro. For more information,
refer to the Multiple Command Script Wizard section.
Running Experts
You can easily access iFIX Experts in the WorkSpace while you are drawing your pictures. In our online help,
Experts are included in procedures to help you expedite your task. For more information on how to complete
the dialog fields in the Expert, use the Help provided with the Expert (in some instances, you must click the
Help button and access a procedures window). The following table shows some examples of Experts used in
iFIX.
Using Experts in iFIX
While doing the
following...
You can use
the...
To...
Coloring objects
Foreground
Color Expert
Assign a foreground color to objects. For more information
on defining a color strategy, refer to the Working with Color
section.
Creating schedules
Script Authoring
Expert
Write a script to schedule events (example: Toggle Digital
Point). For more information, refer to the Writing Scripts
manual.
Developing pictures
Rotate Expert
Rotate a selected object. For more information on rotating
objects, refer to the Rotating Objects section.
To run an Expert, click the appropriate button on the Experts toolbar, complete the dialog fields and click OK.
412
Using Key Macros
Using the Task Wizard to Run Experts
iFIX gives you a convenient organizer to access, customize, and run Experts – the Task Wizard. The Task
Wizard allows you to choose a category relating to what action you want to perform, and then select a task
specific to that category. All Experts can be accessed from the Task Wizard, but some are not available from the
Experts toolbar. These Experts can be accessed on the Buttons tabbed page of the Customize Toolbars dialog
box and added to a toolbar. In Ribbon view, all Experts can be accessed via the Tasks/Experts launch button on
the Tools tab in the Tasks/Experts group.
For more information on adding buttons to a toolbar, refer to the Customizing Toolbars section of the
Understanding iFIX manual.
The following table shows you which Experts are available on the Task Wizard and the Experts toolbar, and
what functions they perform:
iFIX Experts
Click this Expert
from the Experts
toolbar...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
Fill
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click Fill.
Dynamically fill an object.
Rotate
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click Rotate.
Rotate an object.
Position
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click Position.
Move an object horizontally or vertically
across the screen.
Scale
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click Scale.
Scale an object.
Visibility
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click
Visibility.
Make an object visible or invisible.
Edge Color
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click Edge
Color.
Change the edge color of an object.
413
Creataing Pictures
iFIX Experts
414
Click this Expert
from the Experts
toolbar...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
Foreground Color
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click
Foreground Color.
Change the foreground color of an object.
Background Color
From the Tools tab, in the
Animations group, click
Background Color.
Change the background color of an object.
Data Entry
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click Data
Entry Expert.
Modify a tag.
Create Picture
Wizard
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Picture and then click Create
Picture Wizard.
Create, size, and locate a group of pictures.
Open Picture
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Open
Picture.
Open a new picture on an object's click
event.
Close Picture
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Close
Picture.
Close a picture on an object's click event.
Replace Picture
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click
Replace Picture.
Close an open picture and replace with a
new picture on an object's click event.
Open Digital Tag
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Open
Digital Tag.
Open a digital point on an object's click
event.
Using Key Macros
iFIX Experts
Click this Expert
from the Experts
toolbar...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon view...
To...
Close Digital Tag
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Close
Digital Tag.
Close a digital point on an object's click
event.
Toggle Digital Tag
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Toggle
Digital Tag.
Toggle a digital point on an object's click
event.
Acknowledge Alarm
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click
Acknowledge Alarm.
Acknowledge an alarm on an object's click
event.
Alarm Horn
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Alarm
Horn.
Enable, disable, or silence the alarm horn.
Also prompt for alarm horn status in run
mode and toggle the horn status between
enable and disable.
NOTE: In this expert, use the F_CV field
as the data link. Using the A_CV field may
cause unpredictable results.
The following table shows you the additional Experts available from the Task Wizard (but not from the Experts
toolbar) and what functions they perform:
Additional Experts in the Task Wizard
From this
Task
Category...
Command
Click this
Expert...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon View...
To...
Ramp Tag
Value
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Ramp Tag
Value.
Ramp a specified database tag
by a percentage or actual value
that you define.
415
Creataing Pictures
Additional Experts in the Task Wizard
From this
Task
Category...
416
Click this
Expert...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon View...
To...
Write Value to
Tag
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Write Value
to Tag.
Write a value you select to the
specified database tag.
Turn Tag On
Scan
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Turn Tag On
Scan.
Turn a specified database tag
on scan.
Turn Tag Off
Scan
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Turn Tag
Off Scan.
Turn a specified database tag
off scan.
Toggle Scan
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Toggle Scan.
Toggle a specified database tag
on and off scan.
Set Tag Auto
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Set Tag
Auto.
Set a specified database tag to
automatic.
Set Tag
Manual
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Set Tag
Manual.
Set a specified database tag to
manual.
Toggle Tag
Auto/Manual
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Toggle Tag
Auto/Manual.
Toggle a specified database tag
between auto and manual.
Using Key Macros
Additional Experts in the Task Wizard
From this
Task
Category...
Click this
Expert...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon View...
To...
Acknowledge
All Alarms
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then
Acknowledge All Alarms.
Acknowledge all new alarms in
the specified picture.
Disable Alarm
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Disable
Alarms.
Disable all new alarms in the
specified picture.
Enable Alarm
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Enable
Alarms.
Enable all new alarms in the
specified picture.
Locate Object
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Locate
Object.
Find a specified object.
Print Crystal
Report
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then Print Crystal
Report.
Prints a specified Crystal
Report.
Add Database
Block
From the Applications tab, in the
Process Database group, click
Blocks and then click Add
Database Block.
Add a new database block
without opening Database
Manager.
Modify
Database
Block
From the Applications tab, in the
Process Database group, click
Blocks and then click Modify
Database Block.
Modify a database block
without opening Database
Manager.
Database
417
Creataing Pictures
Additional Experts in the Task Wizard
From this
Task
Category...
Data Entry
Click this
Expert...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon View...
To...
Database Save
From the Applications tab, in the
Process Database group, click
Save Database.
Save the database.
Database
Reload
From the Applications tab, in the
Process Database group, click
Reload Database.
Reload the database.
Data Entry
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Tasks/Experts. Select Data Entry
from the Task Categories menu
and Data Entry from the Task list.
Click Perform Task.
Enter the data source that the
data entry gets written to.
Resolve Files
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Tasks/Experts. Select Picture
from the Task Categories menu
and Resolve Files from the Task
list. Click Perform Task.
Resolve files before you enter
into the run-time environment.
Generate New
Picture
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click Picture
and then click Generate Picture
Expert.
Generate a new picture.
Refresh Rate
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click Picture
and then click Refresh Rate
Expert.
Change the refresh rate for a
selected object or an entire
picture.
Export Key
Macros
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click Picture
and then click Export Key
Macros.
Export all of the key macros in
the selected object, picture, or
user global page to a .CSV file.
Picture
418
Using Key Macros
Additional Experts in the Task Wizard
From this
Task
Category...
Report
Click this
Expert...
Which can be accessed in the
Ribbon View...
To...
Save Files
with
Thumbnail
Preference
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Tasks/Experts. Select Picture
from the Task Categories menu
and Save Files with Thumbnail
Preference from the Task list.
Click Perform Task.
Save thumbnails of existing
pictures and Dynamo Sets.
Convert a
Selected
Button's
Caption
From the Application tab, in the
Utilities group, on the drop down
menu, click Convert a Selected
Button's Caption.
Converts one button caption
text to scale to a new screen
resolution in pictures using the
Enhanced Coordinate System.
Multiple
Button
Caption
Converter
Expert
From the Application tab, in the
Utilities group, on the drop down
menu, click Multiple Button
Caption Converter Expert.
Converts more than one or all
the button caption text to scale
a new screen resolution in
pictures using the Enhanced
Coordinate System.
Upgrade to
Enhanced
Coordinates
From the Applications tab, in the
Utilities group, click Upgrade to
Enhanced Coordinates.
Upgrade one or more
pictures/Dynamo Sets to the
Enhanced Coordinate System Or- Restore one or more
pictures/dynamo Sets to the
Logical Coordinate System.
Print Crystal
Report
From the Tools tab, in the
Tasks/Experts group, click
Commands and then click Print
Crystal Report.
Prints a specified Crystal
Report.
You can also create your own Experts to help you automate processes that you do often. This can be done
through VBA scripts. For more information on creating your own Experts, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
To learn how to use the Task Wizard, refer to the Using Experts and the Task Wizard section of the
Understanding iFIX manual.
IMPORTANT: If you are working in a secure environment and using the Electronic Signature option, you must
be aware of the impact of unsigned writes to the process database. Unsigned writes can originate from scripts
419
Creataing Pictures
Refer to the Implications of Database Writes With Electronic Signature section of the Using Electronic
Signatures manual for detailed information. When you use certain Experts, such as Toggle Digital, you are
prompted to sign if the associated tag is configured for electronic signature. For complete information on a
secure environment and electronic signatures, refer to the Using Electronic Signatures manual.
Re-entering Experts
All of the Experts in the Animation category of the Task Wizard have re-entrance functionality, allowing you to
exit the Expert, make any changes you want within your picture, and then go back into the Expert to resume
inputting data to complete the task. These Experts include the following:

Fill

Foreground Color

Edge Color

Background Color

Rotate

Scale

Visibility

Position
You can also re-enter the Data Entry Expert, located in the Data Entry category of the Task Wizard.
NOTE: The Data Entry Expert writes a script to a selected object; therefore, it will not retain its re-entrance
functionality if you change the code. Instead, it will act as though there are no data entry parameters, and will
therefore write over the existing script.
Notes About VBA Code Generated by Experts
Some of the iFIX Experts generate VBA code. Occasionally, a conflict can occur between the VBA code
generated by the Expert and the VBA code for a picture, variable, or globals page because of naming conflicts.
When a conflict like this occurs, the solution is to change the name of your picture, variable, of globals
subroutine.
For example, do not name a picture after one of Data Entry Expert types. Picture names can conflict with the
script variable names used with the Data Entry Expert. For instance, if you name your picture Pushbutton.grf
and also use the Pushbutton data entry method, when you enter run mode, an error message appears. If you
rename the picture, Pushbutton1.grf, the error message does not appear, since the picture name is now different
than the data entry method.
420
Using Key Macros
Multiple Command Script Wizard
The Multiple Command Script Wizard enables you to create a sequence of commands, using one or more
Command Experts, that is triggered by one of these types of events: a mouse click on an object in a picture, a
time-based or event-based Scheduler entry, or a key macro.
When you open the wizard and select a command, the Expert associated with the command will appear. The
selections you make in the Expert automatically create a VBA script that is run when the trigger event occurs.
Each time you add a command in the wizard, its corresponding Expert will appear, enabling you to append the
Expert's VBA script to the scripts created by the previous commands in the sequence.
You can use the wizard to delete or re-order commands in the sequence. When you do this, the VBA script
associated with the affected commands will be automatically deleted or re-ordered to reflect the new sequence
displayed in the wizard.
To use the Multiple Command Script Wizard:
1.
In the Key Macro Editor, Scheduler, or the Basic Animation dialog box, access the Multiple Command
Script Wizard.
2.
Add one or more commands by either selecting one from the Select Action to Append list, or clicking
the Append Action button to add the currently selected command.
3.
Optionally, move a command to a different position in the sequence by selecting it and clicking the Up
or Down arrow button.
4.
Optionally, delete a command from the sequence by selecting it and then clicking the Delete Action
button, or delete all commands by clicking the Delete All Actions button.
5.
Optionally, modify a command by clicking the Modify a Selected Action button. When the Expert for
the associated command appears, make your changes to the Expert's settings and click OK.
NOTES:

Although the Multiple Command Script Wizard's purpose is to fully automate the VBA command
scripting process, you can manually edit scripts generated by the wizard with the VB Editor.
You may add or edit VBA scripts anywhere before the Scripts Authoring Tool header line
(***** Scripts Authoring Tool *****), or directly between a "WizardEnd" and a “Wizard[x]=”
statement. Do not edit any of the commented areas in the wizard-generated script. If the
Multiple Command Script Wizard detects an improperly customized VBA script, you may
encounter an error.

The Multiple Command Script Wizard does not check the command sequence to make sure
commands occur in a logical order.
Experts Summary
The following experts are available for use in iFIX.
421
Creataing Pictures
Animation Experts

Color Experts

Fill Expert

Position Expert

Rotate Expert

Scale Expert

Visibility Expert

Display Layers Expert

Set Layer Expert
Command Experts
422

Selecting a Command

Acknowledge Alarm

Acknowledge All Alarms

Alarm Horn

Close Digital Tag

Close Picture

Disable Alarm

Enable Alarm

Locate Object

Open Digital Tag

Open Picture

Print Crystal Report

Ramp Tag Value

Replace Picture

Set Tag Auto

Set Tag Manual

Toggle Digital Tag

Toggle Tag Auto/Manual

Toggle Scan

Turn Tag Off Scan

Turn Tag On Scan
Using Key Macros

Write Value to Tag
Data Entry Expert

Data Entry Expert
Database Experts

Add Database Block

Database Reload

Database Save

Modify Database Block Expert

Read a Value Expert
Picture Experts

Button Caption Converter

Export Key Macros

Generate Picture Expert

Refresh Rate Expert

Resolve Files Expert

Save Files with Thumbnail Preferences

Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates
Report Experts

Cross Reference Tool

Print Crystal Report

Print Crystal Report (PrintReport Subroutine)
Create Objects

Variable Object

Timer Object

Event Object
Animation Experts
The following list summarizes the Animation Experts available in Proficy iFIX:
423
Creataing Pictures

Color Experts

Fill Expert

Position Expert

Rotate Expert

Scale Expert

Visibility Expert

Display Layers Expert

Set Layer Expert
IMPORTANT: Be aware that Historical Animations that use Sample or Interpolated data from Proficy
Historian may display a Lookup or Format error status of “Unknown”, when the local computer's time is ahead
of the Proficy Historian Server's time. (The “Unknown” Lookup or Format data symbols are defined in the
User Preferences, on the Animations Data Error Defaults tab.)
Color Expert
Lets you set the way the selected object(s) color is animated in the runtime environment. There are three color
experts:

Background Color Expert

Foreground Color Expert

Edge Color Expert
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object(s) color property. Click the browse button
(...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Color Properties Tab
The Color Properties tab contains the following items:
424
Using Key Macros
Color By
Item
Description
Current
Value
Allows you to enter a value or range of values and assign each a unique color in the Color
Threshold table to the right. When the current value of the data source falls within or on that
color definition, the selected object(s) change to that color.
Current
Alarm
Allows you to set up color thresholds to visually alert operators that a data source is in a
particular alarm state. This differs from the Latched Alarm option in how it handles multiple
alarm states. Selecting current alarm always displays the color assigned to the current alarm.
Latched
Alarm
Allows you to set up color thresholds to visually alert operators that a data source is in a
particular alarm state. This differs from the Current Alarm option in how it handles multiple
alarm states. When a data source is in more than one alarm state that has defined thresholds,
the latched alarm strategy displays the color assigned to the unacknowledged alarm of the
highest priority. If there are no unacknowledged alarms, it displays the color of the current
alarm.
New Alarm
Item
Description
Blink on
New Alarm
Sets the selected object(s) to blink every time the data source registers a new alarm. The
object stops blinking when the alarm is acknowledged. This setting overrides the blinking
settings defined for individual thresholds. The object blinks between the color of the
threshold table and the blink on a new alarm color.
Blink on
New Alarm
Color
Sets the color for the blink on new alarm if the Blink on New Alarm check box is selected.
Color Threshold
Item
Description
Range
If the value of the data source falls within a specified threshold range in the table below,
the selected object(s) change to the associated color.
425
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Exact Match
If the value of the data source exactly matches a threshold value in the table below, the
selected object(s) change to the associated color.
Exact Match
Tolerance
Lets you enter an allowable deviation from the current value of a data source. For
example: If the current value is 10, and the tolerance is 5, the range that the color will
display is from 5 to 15.
Color List Box
Allows you to animate an object's color based on a specified value. To assign values,
click a cell within the Maximum, Minimum, and Value columns and enter a value. To
assign colors, double-click a cell within the Color and Blink To columns and select a
color from the color box.
No Blink
Removes a blink color assigned to the selected row in the color table threshold.
Insert Row
Inserts a new row into the color threshold table.
Delete Row
Deletes the selected row of the color threshold table.
Reset to
Defaults
Resets the Color Threshold table to the default values.
Use Shared
Threshold
Table
Allows you to use a color table that is defined in globals or any color table that is defined
in a picture, which will be open in conjunction with the current picture.
Shared Table
Allows you to enter the data source for the shared color table. The shared table data
source must be a color threshold table found in the global user page or in another picture.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
426
Using Key Macros
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
427
Creataing Pictures
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
428
Using Key Macros
Item
Secs
Description
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Get Data From New Selection
Allows you to select a different object in the Workspace while the Color Expert is still displayed. Click this
button and that object's color animation parameters appear in the Color Expert. You can then apply the
parameters to a new selection.
Fill Expert
Lets you set the way the horizontal or vertical fill for the selected object(s) is animated in the runtime
environment.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object's fill property. Click the browse button (...)
to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
429
Creataing Pictures
Fill Properties
Direction
Fills the selected object(s) vertically. You can select the Vertical and Horizontal check boxes to fill the selected
object(s) both horizontally and vertically.
Item
Description
Vertical
Fills the selected object(s) vertically. You can select the Vertical and Horizontal check boxes
to fill the selected object(s) both horizontally and vertically.
Horizontal
Fills the selected object(s) horizontally.
Direction Settings
Item
Description
Vertical Fill Direction
Sets the vertical fill direction: Bottom to Top, Top to Bottom, Top and Bottom
from Center.
Horizontal Fill
Direction
Sets the horizontal fill direction: Left to Right, Right to Left, Left and Right from
Center.
Input Ranges
430
Item
Description
Lowest Input
Value
Sets the minimum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on
the valid range of the data source. The default value is 0.
Highest Input
Value
Sets the maximum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on
the valid range of the data source. The default value is 100.
Fetch Limits at
Runtime
Fetches the low and high EGU limits from the data source automatically at runtime.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data
source is not supported and may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is
because there could be different tag names in the expression and it may not be clear
which tag to fetch the limits for.
Using Key Macros
Fill Percentages
Item
Description
Minimum
Percentage
Allows you to calculate the amount you want the object filled when the data source
equals the lowest input value.
Maximum
Percentage
Allows you to calculate the amount you want the object filled when the data source
equals the highest input value.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
431
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

432
Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Using Key Macros

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
433
Creataing Pictures
Get Data From New Selection
Allows you to select a different object in the Workspace while the Fill Expert is still displayed. Click this button
and that object's fill animation parameters appear in the Fill Expert. You can then apply the parameters to a new
selection.
Position Expert
Lets you set the way the selected object(s) vertical or horizontal position is animated in the runtime
environment.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object's position property. Click the browse
button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data
sources you used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a
database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box
appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Position Properties Tab
Position
Item
Description
Vertical
Moves the selected object(s) vertically. You can select the Vertical and Horizontal check
boxes to move the selected object(s) both horizontally and vertically.
Horizontal
Moves the selected object(s) horizontally. You can select the Vertical and Horizontal check
boxes to move the selected object(s) both horizontally and vertically.
Position Type
434
Item
Description
Relative
Allows you to set the selected object(s) start and end positions relative to its current
position in the runtime environment.
Absolute
Allows you to make the selected object(s) movement always start and end in the same
position.
Using Key Macros
Input Values
Item
Description
Lowest
Input Value
Sets the minimum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 0.
Highest
Input Value
Sets the maximum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 100.
Fetch Limits
at Runtime
Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from the data source automatically at runtime.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source
is not supported and may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there
could be different tag names in the expression and it may not be clear which tag to fetch
the limits for.
Horizontal Position Output Values
Item
Description
Minimum Offset
Allows you to modify the distance that you want the object to move from its origin
when the data source value equals the lowest input value. Available when you
select the Relative Position.
This item is only available when the Relative option is selected.
Maximum Offset
Allows you to specify the distance you want the object to move from its origin
when the data source value equals the highest input value.
This item is only available when the Relative option is selected.
Start
Allows you to specify the position in the iFIX Workspace that you want the object
to move to when the data source value equals the lowest input value. Available
when you select Absolute as the position type.
This item is only available when the Absolute option is selected.
End
Allows you to specify the position in the iFIX Workspace that you want the object
to move to when the data source value equals the highest input value. Available
when you select Absolute as the position type.
This item is only available when the Absolute option is selected.
435
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Get Value Button
(Minimum Offset)
Allows you to select the object(s) in the iFIX Workspace and move the object(s) to
the start or minimum offset position that you want. The position is entered in the
field to the left.
Get Value Button
(Maximum Offset)
Allows you to select the object(s) in the iFIX Workspace and move the object(s) to
the end or maximum offset position that you want. The position is entered in the
field to the left.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
436
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.
437
Creataing Pictures

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
438
Using Key Macros
Get Data from New Selection
Allows you to select a different object in the Workspace while the Position Expert is still displayed. Click this
button and that object's position animation parameters appear in the Position Expert. You can then apply the
parameters to a new selection.
Rotate Expert
Lets you set the way the selected object(s) rotate in the runtime environment.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object's rotate property. Click the browse button
(...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Rotate Properties Tab
Input
Item
Description
Lowest Input
Value
Sets the minimum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 0.
Highest Input
Value
Sets the maximum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 100.
Fetch Limits
at Runtime
Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from the data source at runtime.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source
is not supported and may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there
could be different tag names in the expression and it may not be clear which tag to fetch
the limits for.
439
Creataing Pictures
Output
Item
Description
Minimum Angle of
Rotation in
Degrees
Allows you to enter the value, in degrees, of the angle that you want the object to
rotate to when the data source equals the lowest input value. The default value is 0.
Maximum Angle
of Rotation in
Degrees
Allows you to enter the value, in degrees, of the angle that you want the object to
rotate to when the data source equals the highest input value. The default value is
360.
NOTE: When the Minimum Angle is set to 0 and the Maximum Angle is set to 360,
the selected object(s) rotate counter clockwise. When the Minimum Angle is set to
360 and the Maximum Angle is set to 0, the selected object(s) rotate clockwise.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
440
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
441
Creataing Pictures
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
442
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Get Data from New Selection
Allows you to select a different object in the Workspace while the Rotate Expert is still displayed. Click this
button and that object's rotate animation parameters appear in the Rotate Expert. You can then apply the
parameters to a new selection.
Scale Expert
Lets you set the way the selected object(s) scale is animated in the runtime environment.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object's scale property. Click the browse button
(...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Scale Properties Tab
Scale Parameters
Item
Description
Dimension to
Scale
Lets you select the dimension of the object to scale.
Scale Direction
Lets you select the direction to scale the object. The options are dependent on which
dimension you choose to scale.
Valid Entries: Uniform Height and Width, Height, Width
Input
Item
Description
Lowest Input
Value
Sets the minimum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 0.
443
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Highest Input
Value
Sets the maximum input value from the data source. The valid range is dependent on the
valid range of the data source. The default value is 100.
Fetch Limits
at Runtime
Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from the data source at runtime.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data
source is not supported and may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because
there could be different tag names in the expression and it may not be clear which tag to
fetch the limits for.
Output
Item
Description
Minimum
Percentage
Allows you to enter the value, in degrees, of the amount that you want the object to
scale to when the data source equals the lowest input value.
Maximum
Percentage
Allows you to enter the value, in degrees, of the amount that you want the object to
scale to when the data source equals the highest input value.
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
444
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Using Key Macros
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.
445
Creataing Pictures

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
446
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Get Data from New Selection
Allows you to select a different object in the Workspace while the Scale Expert is still displayed. Click this
button and that object's scale animation parameters appear in the Scale Expert. You can then apply the
parameters to a new selection.
Visibility Expert
Lets you set the visibility conditions for the selected object(s) in the runtime environment.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that animates the selected object's visibility property. Click the browse
button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data
sources you used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a
database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box
appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Visibility Properties Tab
Condition for Visibility
Condition
Lets you select the desired logical comparison. The selected object is visible when:
<
Data source value is less than the entry in the Value field.
>
Data source value is greater than the entry in the Value field.
447
Creataing Pictures
=
Data source value equals the entry in the Value field. This comparison lets you enter a Tolerance
amount.
<=
Data source value is less than or equal to the entry in the Value field.
>=
Data source value is greater than or equal to the entry in the Value field.
<>
Data source value is not equal to the entry in the Value field.
Condition Value
Enter the number you want to compare with the data source value.
NOTE: Scientific notation cannot be used to specify the Condition Value.
Tolerance
Allows you to enter the allowable deviation from the entry in the Value field.
Condition Expression
View Visibility Condition
Click this button to view the condition you set in the Visibility Condition field.
Visibility Condition
When you click the View Visibility Condition button, this field displays the visibility condition you have set.
The Historical Properties tab contains the following items:
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
448
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:
449
Creataing Pictures

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.

Standard Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
450
Using Key Macros
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Display Layers Expert
Lets you view only the layers that you want.
Layer Numbers
Allows you to select the layer numbers to display. The button for the selected layer appears depressed.
Select All Layers
Allows all of the layers to be displayed.
Deselect All Layers
Allows none of the layers to be displayed.
Set Layer Expert
Lets you set which layers the selected object(s) display in. For example, if you have a series of objects that
make up the foreground of a picture and another series of objects that make up the background, you can set the
layer for the foreground objects to Level 1 and set the layer for the background objects to Level 2. Then you can
display just the foreground objects, just the background objects, or both at the same time. See the Display Layer
Expert for information on displaying layers.
451
Creataing Pictures
Layer Numbers
Allows you to select the layer number for the selected object. The object is displayed when that display layer is
set. The button for the selected layer appears depressed.
Allow Multiple Layers
Lets you select additional layers for the object to appear.
Select All
Allows you to specify that the object will display in every layer. This button is enabled only if you selected the
Allow for Multiple Layers check box.
Deselect All
Allows the user to specify that the object will not display in any layer. This button is enabled only if you select
the Allow for Multiple Layers check box.
Command Experts
The following list summarizes the Command Experts available in iFIX. You can select a single command
Expert from the Experts toolbar, or you can use the Multiple Command Script Wizard to build an object's
command script with more than one Command Expert.
452

Acknowledge Alarm

Acknowledge All Alarms

Alarm Horn

Close Digital Tag

Close Picture

Disable Alarm

Enable Alarm

Locate Object

Open Digital Tag

Open Picture

Print Crystal Report

Ramp Tag Value

Replace Picture

Set Tag Auto

Set Tag Manual

Toggle Digital Tag
Using Key Macros

Toggle Tag Auto/Manual

Toggle Scan

Turn Tag Off Scan

Turn Tag On Scan

Write Value to Tag
Acknowledge Alarm Expert
Acknowledges a new alarm for the specified database tag. This expert uses the AcknowledgeAlarm subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose alarm you want to acknowledge. Click the browse button (...) to view
all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click
the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering
a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to acknowledge the alarms only on the selected object's database tags. To make an object selectable,
open the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Acknowledge All Alarms Expert
Acknowledges all new alarms in the specified picture. This expert uses the AcknowledgeAllAlarms subroutine.
Picture Name
Allows you to specify the name of the picture whose alarms you want to acknowledge. Click the browse button
(...) to view all of the pictures available in your iFIX picture path.
Browse Button (...)
Allows you to view all of the saved pictures in your iFIX picture path.
Acknowledge All Alarms in Picture
Allows you to acknowledge all of the alarms in the current picture. When this check box is enabled, the Picture
Name field is disabled.
453
Creataing Pictures
Alarm Horn Expert
Lets you configure an object to enable, disable, or silence the alarm horn. You can also toggle the alarm horn
between enable and disable, and prompt for horn status in run mode. This expert uses the following subroutines:

AlarmHornEnabled

AlarmHornEnabledToggle

AlarmHornSilence
Silence Horn
Silences the alarm horn for the current set of alarms.
Enable Horn
Enables the alarm horn.
Disable Horn
Disables the alarm horn.
Toggle Horn Enable
Toggles the alarm horn between enabled and disabled.
Prompt for Horn Status in Run Mode
Displays a dialog box in run mode that shows the current status of the Alarm Horn. You can also silence the
alarm horn from this dialog box.
Close Digital Tag Expert
Closes the specified digital tag. This expert uses the CloseDigitalPoint subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the digital tag you want to close (for example, set to 1). Click the browse button (...) to
view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used.
Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by
entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to close only the selected object's digital blocks. To make an object selectable, open the object's
property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
454
Using Key Macros
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Close Picture Expert
Closes the specified picture. If there are multiple instances of a picture open, all instances of that picture are
closed. This expert uses the ClosePicture subroutine.
Picture Name
Allows you to specify the name of the picture you want to close. Click the browse button (...) to view all of the
pictures available in your iFIX picture path.
Browse (...)
Allows you to view all of the saved pictures in your iFIX picture path.
Use Alias
Allows you to use the picture's alias name instead of its filename.
Picture Alias
Allows you to enter an optional alias for your picture instead of the name from the Picture Name field.
Close This Picture
Allows you to close the current picture in the runtime environment. When this check box is enabled, the Picture
Name field is disabled.
Disable Alarm Expert
Disables the alarm for the specified database tag. This expert uses the DisableAlarm subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose alarm you want to disable. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to disable the alarms only on the selected object's database tags. To make an object selectable, open
the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
455
Creataing Pictures
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Enable Alarm Expert
Enables the alarm for the specified database tag. This expert uses the EnableAlarm subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose alarm you want to enable. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to enable the alarms only on the selected object's database tags. To make an object selectable, open
the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Locate Object Expert
Finds the object you specify. You can set it to find the object in one picture or in all open pictures. This expert
uses the LocateObject subroutine.
Object Name
Allows you to specify the name of the object that you want to locate.
Search Active Document
Allows you to search for the object in the currently active document.
Search All Documents
Allows you to search for the object in all open documents.
Open Digital Tag Expert
Opens the selected digital tag. This expert uses the OpenDigitalPoint subroutine.
456
Using Key Macros
Data Source
Allows you to enter the digital tag you want to open (for example, set to 0). Click the browse button (...) to view
all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click
the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering
a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to open only the selected object's digital blocks. To make an object selectable, open the object's
property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Open Picture Expert
Opens the specified picture. This expert uses the OpenPicture subroutine.
Picture Name
Allows you to specify the name of the picture you want to open. Click the browse button (...) to view all of the
pictures available in your iFIX picture path.
Picture Browse (...)
Allows you to view all of the saved pictures in your iFIX picture path.
Picture Alias
Allows you to enter an optional alias for your picture instead of the name from the Picture Name field.
Select Picture to Open in Run Mode
Allows you to be able to choose the picture to open in the runtime environment. When this check box is
enabled, the Picture Name field is disabled.
NOTE: This option is not available in the Scheduler.
Allow Multiple Instances of this Picture
Allows you to open a new instance of a picture, if the picture is already open in the WorkSpace when you run
the OpenPicture subroutine.
Top
Allows you to specify the topmost position that you want to open the picture. The default is 0.
457
Creataing Pictures
Left
Allows you to specify the leftmost position that you want to open the picture. The default is 0.
Enable Tag Group Substitution
Allows you to be able to use tag group substitution invoked on the picture being opened.
Tag Group File
Allows you to specify the file to be used for the tag group substitution.
Select Tag Group file in Run Mode
Using this option will prompt the user for the tag group file to be used for the substitution after the picture is
opened. If both this and the select picture in run mode check box are selected, two prompts will appear. First the
picture and second the Tag Group File.
NOTE: This option is not available in the Scheduler.
Tag Group file Browse (…)
Allows you to specify the name of the Tag Group file you want to use for Tag Group Substitution. Click the
browse button (...) to view all of the Tag Group Files available in your iFIX picture path.
Tag Group Editor Button
This is the button directly to the right of the Tag Group Browse button (…). Allows you to launch the Tag
Group Editor. If a Tag Group File is specified, this file will be opened when the Tag Group Editor is launched.
Ramp a Value Expert
Ramps the specified database tag by a percentage or actual value that you define. This expert uses the
RampValue subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose value you want to ramp. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Ramp by Percentage
Allows you to ramp the value by a percentage.
458
Using Key Macros
Ramp by Value
Allows you to ramp the value by a set value.
Ramp Value
The value to ramp the database tag value by.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to ramp only the selected object's database tag value. To make an object selectable, open the
object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Replace Picture Expert
Replaces the specified picture with another picture that you select. If the picture you select is already open in
the WorkSpace, another instance of that picture opens. This expert uses the ReplacePicture subroutine.
Picture to Replace
Allows you to specify the name of a currently open picture you want to replace. Click the browse button (...) to
view all of the pictures available in your iFIX picture path.
Picture Browse (...)
Allows you to view all of the saved pictures in your iFIX picture path.
Picture Alias
Allows you to use the picture's alias name instead of its filename.
Replace Current Picture in Run Mode
Allows you to replace the current picture in the runtime environment. When this check box is enabled, the
Picture to Replace field is disabled.
NOTE: This option is not available in the Scheduler.
New Picture File Name
The name of the new picture file to open. Click the browse button (...) to view all of the pictures available in
your iFIX picture path.
New Picture Browse (...)
Allows you to view all of the saved pictures in your iFIX picture path.
459
Creataing Pictures
Enable Tag Group Substitution
Allows you to be able to use tag group substitution invoked on the picture being opened.
Tag Group File
Allows you to specify the file to be used for the tag group substitution.
Select Tag Group file in Run Mode
Using this option will prompt the user for the tag group file to be used for the substitution after the picture is
opened. If both this and the select picture in run mode check box are selected, two prompts will appear. First the
picture and second the Tag Group File.
NOTE: This option is not available in the Scheduler.
Tag Group file Browse (…)
Allows you to specify the name of the Tag Group file you want to use for Tag Group Substitution. Click the
browse button (...) to view all of the Tag Group Files available in your iFIX picture path.
Tag Group Editor Button
This is the button directly to the right of the Tag Group Browse button (…). Allows you to launch the Tag
Group Editor. If a Tag Group File is specified, this file will be opened when the Tag Group Editor is launched.
Set Tag to Auto Expert
Sets the specified database tag to automatic. This expert uses the SetAuto subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose current mode you want to set to auto. Click the browse button (...) to
view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used.
Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by
entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to change the current mode to auto only on the selected object's database tags. To make an object
selectable, open the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
460
Using Key Macros
Set Tag to Manual Expert

Sets the specified database tag to manual. This expert uses the SetManual subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose current mode you want to set to manual. Click the browse button (...)
to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to change the current mode to manual only on the selected object's database tags. To make an object
selectable, open the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Toggle Digital Tag Expert
Toggles the specified digital tag between open and closed. This expert uses the ToggleDigitalPoint subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the digital tag you want to toggle (for example, from 0 to 1 and vice versa). Click the
browse button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last
data sources you used. Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add
a database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog
box appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to toggle only the selected object's digital blocks. To make an object selectable, open the object's
property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Toggle Scan Expert
Toggles the specified database tag on and off scan. This expert uses the ToggleScan subroutine.
461
Creataing Pictures
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose scan you want toggle on and off and vice versa. Click the browse
button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data
sources you used. Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a
database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box
appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to toggle the scan from on to off and vice versa only on the selected object's database tags. To make
an object selectable, open the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Toggle Tag Between Auto and Manual Expert
Toggles the specified database tag between auto and manual. This expert uses the ToggleManual subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose current mode you want to toggle from auto to manual and vice versa.
Click the browse button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view
the last data sources you used. Click the Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You
can add a database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add
dialog box appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to toggle the current mode from auto to manual and vice versa only on the selected object's database
tags. To make an object selectable, open the object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Turn Tag Off Scan Expert
Turns the specified database tag off scan. This expert uses the OffScan subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose scan you want to turn off. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
462
Using Key Macros
Use Database Tags
Allows you to turn the scan off only the selected object's database tags. To make an object selectable, open the
object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Turn Tag On Scan Expert
Turns the specified database tag on scan. This expert uses the OnScan subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source whose scan you want to turn on. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to turn the scan on only the selected object's database tags. To make an object selectable, open the
object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Write a Value Expert
Writes a value you select to the specified database tag. This expert uses the WriteValue subroutine.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source you want to write to. Click the browse button (...) to view all of the data
sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Value
Allows you to specify the value to write to the current value of the database block. The default is 0.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to write only to the selected object's database tag's value. To make an object selectable, open the
object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
463
Creataing Pictures
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Alpha-Numeric
Enabled when your database tag allows alphanumeric data entry.
Numeric
Enabled when your database tag only allows numeric data entry.
Data Entry Expert
Lets you select a data source and associate a data entry method for your object.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source that the new value will be written to. Click the browse button (...) to view
all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click
the modify database block button to modify the configuration of the selected data source. You can add a
database block by entering a new tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the new block.
NOTE: If the tag requires electronic signatures, the data source will not update until the action is successfully
signed for.
464
Using Key Macros
Choose Data Entry Method
Item
Description
Numeric/Alphanumeric
Entry
Allows the operator to set a tag's value by entering it directly at run time. You
can configure the following options for the Numeric/Alphanumeric Entry
Method:

Numeric Entry Option – Allows the operator to change a tag's value
by entering it in a field in the picture. This allows the operator to enter
numeric values only.

Alphanumeric Entry Option – Allows the operator to change a tag's
value by entering it in a field in the picture. This allows the operator to
enter both numeric and alphanumeric values.

Low Limit – Allows you to enter a value (up to seven decimal places
long) that represents the lowest value the operator can enter. The valid
range is dependent on the valid range of the data source. The default
value is 0.

High Limit – Allows you to enter a value (up to seven decimal places
long) that represents the highest value the operator can enter. The valid
range is dependent on the valid range of the data source. The default
value is 1 for digital blocks, and 100 for analog blocks.

Fetch Limits Check Box – Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from
the data source automatically at runtime. This disables the high and low
limit text boxes.
465
Creataing Pictures
Item
Description
Slider Entry
Allows the operator to change a tag's value by moving a slider control or
entering an integer value at run time. You can configure the following options
for the Slider Entry Method:

Low Limit – Allows you to enter a value that represents the lowest
value the operator can enter. The valid range is dependent on the valid
range of the data source. The default value is 0.

High Limit – Allows you to enter a value that represents the highest
value the operator can enter. The valid range is dependent on the valid
range of the data source. The default value is 1 for digital blocks, and
100 for analog blocks.
NOTE: The slider allows the operator to enter an integer value or to
move the slider to an integer value. If you would like the operator to be
able to enter a decimal value, use the Numeric/Alphanumeric entry
method.

Fetch Limits Check Box – Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from
the data source automatically at runtime. This disables the high and low
limit textboxes.

Write Continuously – Allows the operator to change the value of the
tag continuously in real time. As the operator moves the slider control,
the value of the tag updates both in the slider control dialog box and at
the data source.
NOTE: If the tag requires electronic signatures, the data source will
not update until the action is successfully signed for, even if you select
Write Continuously.
Pushbutton Entry
Allows the operator to set a tag's value to 0 or 1. This is mainly used for Digital
Output blocks. At run time, the operator is given two pushbuttons. One button,
when clicked, sets the value to 0, the other sets the value to 1.
You can configure the following options for the Pushbutton Entry Method:
466

Open Button Title – Allows you to enter a title (up to 12 characters
long) for the pushbutton that sets the value to 0.

Close Button Title – Allows you to enter a title (up to 12 characters
long) for the pushbutton that sets the value to 1.
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Ramp Entry
Allows the operator to ramp a tag's value up or down by two different
percentages at run time. You can configure the following options for the Ramp
Entry Method:

Low Limit – Allows you to enter a value (up to seven decimal places
long) that represents the lowest value the operator can enter. The valid
range is dependent on the valid range of the data source. The default
value is 0.

High Limit – Allows you to enter a value (up to seven decimal places
long) that represents the highest value the operator can enter. The valid
range is dependent on the valid range of the data source. The default
value is 1 for digital blocks and 100 for analog blocks.

Fetch Limits Check Box – Fetches the Low and High EGU limits from
the data source automatically at runtime. This disables the high and low
limit textboxes.

Ramp Percentage 1 – Allows you to enter a percentage that defines
how much to ramp a value. The operator can ramp the tag's value up or
down.

Ramp Percentage 2 – Allows you to enter a percentage that defines
how much to ramp a value. The operator can ramp the tag's value up or
down.
Database Experts
The following list summarizes the Database Experts available in iFIX:

Add Database Block

Database Reload

Database Save

Modify Database Block Expert

Read a Value Expert
Add Database Block Expert
Lets you add a new database block to your database without having to open Database Manager.
467
Creataing Pictures
Data Source
Allows you to enter the tagname of the block you want to add to your database. Click the browse button (...) to
view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used.
Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by
entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Add
Applies and saves any changes you have made and then closes this expert.
Database Reload
Lets you reload the current database without having to open Database Manager.
NOTE: The database in memory is replaced. No check is made to see if the database has been modified.
Database Save
Lets you save your database without having to open Database Manager.
Modify Database Block Expert
Lets you modify a new database block in your database without having to open Database Manager.
Data Source
Allows you to enter the tagname of the block that you want to modify in your database. Click the browse button
(...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you
used. Click the modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block
by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and
allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Modify
Applies and saves any changes you have made and then closes this expert.
Read a Value Expert
Retrieves the value from the specified database tag. This expert uses the ReadValue subroutine.
468
Using Key Macros
Data Source
Allows you to enter the data source you want to read the value from. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
Modify Database Block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Use Database Tags
Allows you to read only the selected object's database tag's value. To make an object selectable, open the
object's property page and set the property 'IsSelectable' to True.
NOTE: Before the action can be performed in the runtime environment, you must first click on the object to
select it.
Picture Experts
The following list summarizes the Picture Experts available in iFIX:

Button Caption Converter Expert

Export Key Macros Expert

Generate Picture Expert

Refresh Rate Expert

Resolve Files Expert

Save Files with Thumbnail Preferences Expert

Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates Expert
Button Caption Converter Expert
The Button Caption Converter allows you to select a button caption (text) in your active picture and convert that
button caption text to scale to a new screen resolution. You can select one or more buttons to convert.
Convert Button Caption
Converts the selected button(s) in the 'Push buttons found on picture' dialog box..
Find Next
Allows you to confirm the conversion of each button individually.
Convert all
Converts all the selected button text.
469
Creataing Pictures
Close
Closes the Button Caption Converter dialog box.
Push buttons found on picture
Lists all the buttons in the active picture that are available for conversion. It allows you to select a button from
the list, which you can confirm. You can also confirm the button selection by looking at the button in the
picture.
Export Key Macros Expert
Lets you export all of the key macros in the selected object, picture, or user global page to a .CSV file.
Object
The object, picture, or user global page from which you want to export key macros. You cannot edit this field
from the expert.
Recursive (Include Children)
Lets you include key macros for all child objects. By default the Recursive (Include Children) check box is
selected.
File Name
The name of the file to which you want to save your key macros. Click the browse button (...) to view all of the
existing .CSV files. If you do not include a path, the .CSV file is saved to your Proficy iFIX directory.
Browse (...)
Allows you to view all of the .CSV files in your iFIX picture path.
Append to File
If you enter or browse to an existing file name, select the Append to File check box to add key macros to the
end of an existing .CSV file.
Export
Click the Export button to export all of the key macros.
Generate Picture Expert
Generates a picture. This expert uses the GeneratePicture subroutine.
Window Location
470
Using Key Macros
Item
Description
Top
The preferred top window edge location of the picture being generated. The location
Unit, pixel or percent, is determined by the Pixels check box.
Left
The preferred left window edge location of the picture being generated. The location
Unit, pixel or percent, is determined by the Pixels check box.
Height
The preferred window height of the picture being generated. The dimension Unit, pixel
or percent, is determined by the Pixels check box.
Width
The preferred window width of the picture being generated. The dimension Unit, pixel
or percent, is determined by the Pixels check box.
Pixels
Determines whether the window location units are pixel or percent.
Window Styles
Item
Description
Titlebar
Defines whether or not the picture window has a title bar.
System Menu
Defines whether or not the picture window has a system menu.
Resizable
Defines whether or not the picture window is resizable using the mouse.
Always On Top
Defines whether or not the picture window is always on top of other picture windows.
Runtime Visible
Defines whether or not the picture is visible at runtime.
Background Color
Color button for defining the background color of the picture.
Picture Name
The name of the picture.
471
Creataing Pictures
Refresh Rate Expert
Lets you change the refresh rate for a selected object or an entire picture. By default, the refresh rate is set to
0.5.
You can modify the refresh rate to fast or slow values. For example, you might want to give faster refresh rates
to objects where you enter data sources.
Selected Objects
Select this option button to apply changes to the refresh rate for the selected object.
Entire Picture
Select this option button to apply changes to the refresh rate for the entire picture.
Tolerance
Specifies the current connection's rounding factor. Typically, iFIX uses this value when comparing a process
value to a target value. If the process value is within the specified tolerance, iFIX assumes the two values are
equal. For example, if the target value is 1.0, the tolerance is 0.1, and the current value of a data source is 0.8,
iFIX does not assume the two values are equal because the data source is not within the specified tolerance. The
value must within the range 0.9 to 1.1 to equal the target value.
Deadband
Specifies the maximum fluctuation you want for the current connection before iFIX updates it. By entering a
dead band value, you create a +/- dead zone around the connection's current value. As long as the value is
within this range, iFIX does not update the value. However, once the value exceeds the maximum or minimum
dead band, the value is updated.
Refresh Rate
Specifies the rate at which iFIX updates the current connection. iFIX updates the connection no faster than the
specified speed. For speeds less than 1 second, iFIX updates no faster than once every 50 milliseconds. For
speeds greater than 60 seconds, iFIX updates no faster than once every 60 seconds.
Resolve Files Expert
Lets you resolve files before you enter into the Runtime environment. If you do not resolve your files before
switching to the Runtime environment, the Workspace queries the database and resolves all the tag definitions.
This can be a time consuming process that slows down opening a picture. By using the Resolve Expert to
resolve your files, you can improve the speed of opening pictures.
472
Using Key Macros
File Types
Item
Description
Pictures
Allows you to specify that you want to resolve pictures. Displayed in the list box below will
be the names of all the pictures saved in your iFIX picture path.
Schedules
Allows you to specify that you want to resolve schedules. Displayed in the list box below will
be the names of all the schedules saved in your iFIX schedule path.
Directories
Item
Description
Picture Directory
Specifies the directory where the pictures that you want to resolve are
located.
Update Picture Files
Button
Refreshes the picture names in the file list if you change the path in the
Picture Directory field.
Schedule Directory
Specifies the directory where the schedules that you want to resolve are
located.
Update Schedule Files
Button
Refreshes the schedule names in the file list if you change the path in the
Schedule Directory field.
Resolve Files
Allows you to select the files you want to resolve. Hold down the <CTRL> button to select multiple files, or
click the Select All button to select all of the files. The file names displayed are all of the files saved in your
iFIX picture and/or schedule directories.
Select All
Selects all of the files in the list box.
473
Creataing Pictures
Deselect All
Deselects all of the files in the list box.
Save Files with Thumbnail Preferences Expert
Allows you to save thumbnail images of existing pictures. If you chose not to save existing pictures (files) with
thumbnails, you cannot view the images from the system tree.
File Types
Item
Description
Pictures
Populates the Save Files With list box with a list of all of the pictures (*.grf files)
saved in your iFIX picture path.
Dynamo Sets
Populates the Save Files With list box with a list of all of the dynamo sets (*.fds
files) saved in your iFIX picture path.
Directories
Item
Description
Pictures Directory
Specifies the directory where the pictures that you want to save with a thumbnail are
located.
Refresh Picture
List
Refreshes the picture names in the file list if you change the path in the Pictures
Directories field.
Dynamo Sets
Directory
Specifies the directory where the Dynamo sets that you want to save with a
thumbnail are located.
Refresh Dynamo
Set List
Refreshes the names of the Dynamo in the file list if you change the path in the
Dynamo Sets Directories field.
Save Thumbnails
Allows you to save thumbnails with your files.
NOTE: This setting overrides the Save thumbnail setting on the Picture Preferences tab in the User Preferences
dialog box.
474
Using Key Macros
Save Files With
Allows you to select the files you want to save with a thumbnail. Hold down the <CTRL> button to select
multiple files, or click the Select All Button to select all of the files. The file names displayed are all of the files
saved in your iFIX picture and/or Dynamo sets directories.
Select All
Selects all of the files in the list box.
Deselect All
Deselects all of the files in the list box.
Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates Expert
The Upgrade File to Enhanced Coordinates Expert upgrades a Logical Coordinate System picture or dynamo set
to the Enhanced Coordinate System.
File Type
Allows you to select the file type to display in the Select Files window. You can select Pictures or Dynamo
Sets or both.
Picture and Dynamo Set Folder Path
Lists the path to the folder that contains the pictures and/or Dynamo Sets on which you wish to upgrade to the
Enhanced Coordinate System, or restore to the Logical Coordinate System.
Browse (....)
Allows you to select a different folder that contains the files you want to upgrade or restore.
Refresh File List
Updates the files in the Select Files window to reflect eligible files in the folder you selected.
Upgrade Files
Upgrades the selected files to screen independent Enhanced Coordinates. By default, this button is enabled
when the dialogue box opens.
Restore Files from Backup
Restores files from the Backup folder. When you select this option, files that are eligible for restoration are
listed in the Select Files window.
475
Creataing Pictures
Select Files
Lists files that are eligible for upgrading or restoration. Files eligible for upgrading include files that are not
using the Enhanced Coordinate System and that are not open in the iFIX WorkSpace. By default, the picture
files in your default directory display. Files that are eligible for restoration are those files that have been
upgraded and for which a backup file exists in the Backup folder.
Buttons
Button
Description
Select All
Selects all the files listed in the Select Files window.
Deselect All
Clears all the files selected in the Select Files window.
Upgrade Files
Upgrades screen dependent Logical Coordinate System pictures and/or Dynamo
Sets to screen independent Enhanced Coordinate System pictures and/or Dynamo
Sets.
Restore Files
Restores the upgraded picture and/or Dynamo Set to the previously saved file in the
Backup folder when the file exists. All changes made to the file since the upgrade
will be lost. After the restoration operation is completed, the restored files are
removed from the list in the Select Files window and are returned to the list of files
eligible for upgrading.
Report Experts
The following list summarizes the Reports Experts available in iFIX:

Cross Reference Tool

Print Crystal Report Expert

Print Crystal Report (PrintReport Subroutine)
Cross Reference Tool
For more information, refer to "The Cross Reference Tool" chapter of the Mastering iFIX ebook.
Print Crystal Report Expert
Lets you select a Crystal Report, preview it, and print it.
476
Using Key Macros
Select Report
Allows you to open a Crystal Report for printing. You can only select reports that were created with Crystal
Reports.
Preview Report
Allows you to display a preview of the report. From the Preview window, you can print the report.
Report Name
Displays the full path of the selected report.
Print Crystal Report Expert (PrintReport Subroutine)
Prints the Crystal Report you specify. This expert uses the PrintReport subroutine.
Select Report
Allows you to search the iFIX picture path for the report you want to print.
Report Name
Displays the name of the selected report.
Print All
Allows you to print the entire selected report.
Print Selected Pages
Allows you to print only the pages of the selected report that you specify. This option is ignored in Crystal XI.
From Page
Specifies the first page in a range of pages that you want to print only when you select Print Selected Pages.
This option is ignored in Crystal XI.
To Page
Specifies the last page in a range of pages that you want to print only when you select Print Selected Pages. This
option is ignored in Crystal XI.
Prompt User
Allows you to specify if you want to be prompted when the report is finished printing. This option is ignored in
Crystal XI.
477
Creataing Pictures
Collate
Prints the report in the proper binding order. This option is ignored in Crystal XI.
Number of Copies
The number of copies that you want printed. This option is ignored in Crystal XI.
Create Objects
The following Create Objects are available from the toolbox in the iFIX WorkSpace:

Variable Object

Timer Object

Event Object
Variable Object
You can insert a variable object in an iFIX picture. The variable object can belong to the current picture or you
can set it as a global object that is available to your entire system.
Variable Name
Allows you to specify the name of the new variable object. The variable name must consist of alphanumeric
values and must begin with a letter.
Variable Type
Allows you to specify the variable object's type. Click the down button to view the list of types.
Assign Variable
Allows you to connect the variable object's current value to a database block.
Data Source
Only enabled when the Assign Variable check box is checked, this allows you to enter the data source to
connect the variable to. Click the browse button (...) to view all of data sources available in your system. Click
the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the modify database block button to modify the
selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a new database block tag name and tabbing off
this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Local Variable
Allows you to define the variable as a local variable.
478
Using Key Macros
Global Variable
Allows you to define the variable as a global variable.
Timer Object
You can insert a timer object in an iFIX picture. The timer object performs an operation based on an interval of
time. You must enter VB code into the timer object's event for anything to actually occur. If you select the Edit
Script button, VBE automatically launches and the cursor is positioned to the timer's OnTimeOut event. You
can then enter code for the new timer object. If you select OK, the timer object is created but you will have to
go in at a later date and enter the VB code for the timer.
The timer object event that is invoked is the OnTimeOut event. The timer has four different types of triggers for
the OnTimeOut event:

0 – One Shot

1 – Continuous

2 – Daily

3 – Monthly
The default trigger type is Continuous. If you want to use a different trigger type, you will have to set the timer's
TriggerType property to the correct number. For Example:
MyTimer.TriggerType = 0
Sets the timer trigger type to One-Shot.
Timer Name
Allows you to specify the name of the timer object.
Timer Description
Allows you to specify an optional description of the timer.
Start Time
Allows you to specify the start time for the Timer. The format must be in the following format:
hours: minutes: seconds
Interval
Allows you to specify the time interval in milliseconds.
479
Creataing Pictures
Edit Script
Applies and saves changes you have made, launches VBE to the timer object's OnTimeOut event, and closes the
expert.
Event Object
You can insert an event object in an iFIX picture. The event object performs an operation when its event type is
triggered. You must enter VB code into the object's event for anything to actually to occur. If you select the Edit
Script button, VBE automatically launches and the cursor appears at the event type that you select for the event
object. You can then enter code for that event. If you select OK, the event object is created but you will have to
go in at a later date and enter the VB code for the event.
Event Source
Allows you to enter the data source to connect the event object to. Click the browse button (...) to view all of
data sources available in your system. Click the down button to view the last data sources you used. Click the
modify database block button to modify the selected data source. You can add a database block by entering a
new database block tag name and tabbing off this field. The Quick Add dialog box appears and allows you to
enter the appropriate values for the added block.
Event Properties Tab
The Event Properties tab contains the following items:
Item
Description
Name
Allows you to specify the name of the event object.
Description
Allows you to specify an optional description of the event.
Event Type
Allows you to specify the type for the event object. The valid entry types are:
Interval
480

On Data Change – when the value of data source for the object changes.

On True – when the value of the data source for the object changes to True.

On False – when the value of the data source for the object changes to False.

While True – while the value of the data source for the object is True.

While False – while the value of the data source for the object is False.
Specifies the time interval in milliseconds. Only enabled when the Event Type is
While True or While False.
Using Key Macros
Historical Properties Tab
The Historical Properties tab allows you to set the parameters for a query that fetches historical data from
Proficy Historian. The tab contains the following items:
NOTE: The following fields, with the exception of the Update Rate fields, are only available if you select a
Historical Mode other than Current Value.
Start Date
Item
Description
Fixed Date
Specifies whether to enter a specific start date for the query of the data source.
Days Before Now
Specifies whether to enter the number of days prior to today to fetch data from
Proficy Historian. For example, if you want to display data collected for the data
source two days ago, enter 2.
Start Time
Item
Description
Fixed Time
Specifies whether to designate a specific time to start. If selected, allows you to enter
an explicit start time.
Lock Time
Locks the Fixed Time, even if you change the time zone in the Date and Time
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. This field is available only when you
designate a specific time to start using the Fixed Time field.
Duration Before
Now
Specifies whether to enter the duration prior to the current time to start. The
minimum duration is 0 seconds; the maximum is 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds.
481
Creataing Pictures
Time Zone
Item
Description
Time Zone
Allows you to select the time zone to associate with the start time. You can select the
client time (time zone for your computer), the server time (time zone used by the
Historian server), or the tag time (uses the time zone bias of the tag, which is set in
Historian). The default time zone is that of the client machine. This field is available
only when Historian is used.
Adjust for
Daylight Savings
Time
Adjusts the time if the zone you selected is experiencing daylight saving. This field
works only if you selected the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes check box located on the Time Zone tab of the Date/Time Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Historical Mode

Allows you to determine how iFIX selects and fetches data from a historical data source and,
determines what each displayed value represents. The options are:

Sample – The last valid value found, up to and including the start of the specified interval.

Avg – The average of all valid data found during the specified interval.

High – The highest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Low – The lowest valid data point value found during the specified interval.

Interpolated – The data is interpreted by assuming that the line between two values is a straight line.
All points along that line are estimated except the starting point and the ending point.

Current Value – The current value of the data point.
IMPORTANT: The Current Value may update at a rate different from the rate set in the Update Rate
field. The update rate is not set solely by the rate entered in the Update Rate field. It also depends on
the collection rate, the rate for querying Historian, and the time required to request an update from the
Historian server and send it back to the client. As a result, the time it takes to display the updates may
be longer than anticipated. Additionally, please be aware that the timestamp for this mode represents
the timestamp from the Historian server, not the client.
482

Std Deviation – The standard deviation of all valid data found during the specified interval.

Total – The total of all valid data found during the specified interval.
Using Key Macros
Duration
The duration determines the time range for the historical data source. The minimum duration for a fetch is one
second; the maximum is 999 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Item
Days
Description
Allows you to enter the number of days. This field can be used in
conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the duration for the data fetch
query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this
area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the duration for the data
fetch query. This field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in
this area.
Update Rate
Allows you to specify the rate at which the data is updated. The default rate is five seconds. Zero is permitted
for a one-time fetch. The fastest update rate is five seconds, the slowest, 1:59:59.
Item
Description
Hours
Allows you to enter the number of hours for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Mins
Allows you to enter the number of minutes for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
Secs
Allows you to enter the number of seconds for the rate of data update. This
field can be used in conjunction with the other fields in this area.
483
Creataing Pictures
Edit Script
Applies and saves changes you have made, launches VBE to the event type you selected for the event object,
and closes the expert.
Using Dynamos
As you develop a system of operator displays, you may want to use an object you created for one picture in
several other pictures. iFIX offers a convenient way to save custom-built objects and application scripts into a
higher-level reusable object set, called Dynamo objects. Dynamo objects allow you to customize your pictures
by creating a consistent design across your operator displays.
iFIX provides a wide selection of pre-built Dynamos that use the most common shapes and objects in the
process automation industry today. You can also build and save your own Dynamos in the WorkSpace using the
Build Dynamo Wizard, and then dragging the new Dynamo into a set for use in other pictures. Using existing
Dynamo Sets can expedite your picture development, thereby increasing the performance of your entire
operation.
For more information on Dynamo objects, refer to Working with Dynamo Objects chapter.
Using Global Subroutines
Global subroutines are tools in VBA that allow you to modify a script to perform a global task, such as opening
a picture. All of iFIX's Experts use global subroutines, which reside in the FactoryGlobals.fxg file. For more
information on global subroutines, and how to use them to modify scripting functions, refer to the Writing
Scripts manual.
Performing Functions with Toolbars
Toolbars let you quickly perform tasks in your picture by merely clicking a button. There are many types of
toolbars in iFIX to help you expedite your picture development. For more information on toolbars, refer to the
Getting Started and Developing Objects in Pictures sections.
Controlling Object Properties
Properties are perhaps the most significant feature of objects. They define how your objects perform, and
therefore dictate how well your pictures accomplish your process goals. They allow the user to define and
control such object attributes as size, shape, edge and background fill, rotation angle, and scaling. This chapter
describes how you work with these properties to maximize the effect of your pictures.
484

How Properties Work

Defining and Modifying Properties
Using Key Macros
How Properties Work
When you create pictures, you can add a variety of objects, such as charts, text, and bitmaps, or geometric
shapes, such as rectangles, polygons, and ovals. Each object contains properties – specific attributes assigned to
the object that make it unique.
Properties make objects either visible or invisible. Visible objects are those that contain properties you can see,
such as a color or style fill. These are attributes that you can control in several ways. Invisible objects, also
called animation objects, are those that are added to objects during animation, such as rotation, and scaling.
When you animate an object, invisible objects are added to your pictures automatically, without your control,
and displayed in the system tree. Both visible and invisible properties can be modified using either the
Properties window or the Animations dialog box.
NOTE: Read-only properties cannot be modified directly. For example, to change the bottom edge of a
rectangle (a read-only property), you would have to change the rectangle's height property to affect the edge
property.
Defining and Modifying Properties
You can modify properties by:

Entering property values manually

Animating the object

Writing a script to change the property's value
These methods are discussed in the following sections.
Entering Property Values Manually
Property values give you precise control over an object's properties, and lets you set a property to an exact limit.
Entering Property Values with the Properties Window
One way you can manually enter a property value for a visible or invisible object or animation is with the
Properties window, shown in the following figure. This window displays the object properties you can modify
(read-only properties do not appear). Because the window is modeless, it stays on your screen as you change
property values or select other objects to modify. This allows you to view properties as you make other changes
to your picture.
485
Creataing Pictures
To use the Properties window, enter property values in the window's right-hand column and press Enter. Some
properties let you select a value from a list instead of entering it. In these cases, when you select the cell, a dropdown list box appears. To hide the Properties Window, right-click a cell in the window and select Hide from the
pop-up menu.
Entering Property Values with the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
You can also change property values with the Advanced Animations dialog box. When you access the
Advanced Animations dialog box, the selected object's properties are displayed. Only the properties that accept
data appear in the dialog box; read-only properties do not appear. To display read-only properties, use the
Visual Basic Editor. For more information on using the Visual Basic Editor, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
The Advanced Animations dialog box groups similar properties together into categories. Each category is
represented by a tab in the dialog box. Certain tabs appear only if the selected object has the associated
properties. For example, the Text tab appears only for text objects; only text objects have font and font style
properties.
Each tab displays the following information:
486

The property name.

The property value.
Using Key Macros

Whether the property is being used in an animation.
The following table describes each Animation dialog box tab.
Animation Dialog Box Tabs
The tab...
Allows you to configure...
General
The object's name, description, and behavior at run-time, as well as a help context ID.
Visible
Whether the object is visible.
Size
The height, the width, the percentage to resize the object by, the direction to resize the
object in, and whether the object is uniformly resized.
Misc
The object's layer in a picture, as well as numerous properties specific to certain object
types..
Position
The vertical and horizontal position of the object.
Color
The foreground color, background color, and edge color of the object, as well as edge and
grid properties specific to a chart object.
Style
The fill style, the edge style, and the line width, as well as properties specific to rounded
rectangle, pipe, and chart objects. Not all objects have a fill style. Refer to the Coloring and
Styling Objects section for more information.
Rotate
The angle of rotation of an object and the unit of measure for the angles. Ovals, rounded
rectangles, and charts do not have rotation properties.
Text
The font size, the font style, the font name, and the text displayed by the object. Text
properties apply only to text objects.
Behavior
The behavior of the object's sizing, scaling, alignment, and text properties. There are also
properties specific to chart objects.
Gradient
The fade color, fade type, gradient angle and blend percentage to use for the gradient fill.
Pipe objects do not have fade type and gradient angle properties.
Fill
The direction to fill the object, and the percentage to fill the object.
487
Creataing Pictures
Animation Dialog Box Tabs
The tab...
Allows you to configure...
Appearance
The background and foreground colors , and the background style and caption of a button
object.
Picture
The position of the picture.
Variable
The variable type, and the initial and current values of a variable object.
For a complete list of properties that you can animate, and the objects the properties apply to, refer to Object
Properties.
NOTE: When entering R, G, B values in the Advanced Animations dialog box, the values must be enclosed in
parentheses.
For more detail on the Animations dialog box, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
Animating Objects to Modify Properties
Visible objects can be animated, providing an advanced level of control and customization to your pictures.
Although what you see in the iFIX WorkSpace is an object performing an action, it is the object's properties that
are animated, not the object itself. You animate object properties using the Animations dialog box. This dialog
box, available for every object in iFIX, takes client data, finds its source, and then delivers output based on that
source.
For more detailed information on animating objects, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
Writing Scripts to Modify Properties
Visual Basic scripts provide developers with maximum flexibility and control of their objects. Although it is not
required that you know VBA to work with properties, it is a powerful technology for those who want to use it.
Every function on the Animations dialog box is also available through VBA.
For more information on using scripts to customize objects, refer to the Writing Scripts manual. For information
on iFIX methods, properties, and events, refer to the iFIX Automation Interfaces Help file.
488
Using Key Macros
Animating Object Properties
Whether you have developed one or one hundred pictures using iFIX, you probably have discovered that
creating these pictures can involve much more than just drawing a static oval and linking it to a process
database. Thanks in great part to the power of animation, you can make your pictures perform in ways that you
have never seen before. iFIX gives you the ability to acquire and interpret data so that your pictures perform as
you expect them to.
This chapter describes animations, and how they give you the power to design custom pictures and dynamic
displays.

How Animations Work

Animating an Object's Properties: Overview

Defining Data Sources

Animating Properties Using Color

Animating Object Properties with Visual Basic

Animating a Grouped Object

Modifying Animations

Deleting Animations

Building Expressions
How Animations Work
Animations are objects. When you animate the property of an object, animation objects are added to the object
that contains that property. Although the result you see in the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace is an object performing a
visible, functional action, it is the object's properties that are animated, not the object itself.

Understanding Data Sources

Accessing the Animations Dialog Box and Using Common Animations

Understanding Animation Objects

Animating an Object's Properties

Using Experts to Animate Objects
Understanding Data Sources
When you animate an object, the values of one or more of its properties change. Inherent to each property is the
location where it received data. This location is called a data source. Typically, a data source identifies a
process value or another object's property. However, a data source can be any of the following:

Real-time data from an I/O address.
489
Creataing Pictures

An iFIX tag.

The value of a picture or object property.

A global variable.

A predefined expression.

A VBA event.

OPC servers.

Proficy Historian.
In order to animate an object, you must connect to one of these data sources. In some cases, you can make a
direct connection to a data source. In other instances, such as with Animation Experts, you connect an object to
an animation object, and then connect the animation object to the data source.
NOTE: Because animations change object properties, you can only use a property in an animation if the
property accepts data. Read-only properties cannot be used. You can display the available properties by
opening the Animations dialog box or the Properties window.
To specify a data source, you enter the appropriate syntax in the Data Source field of the Animations dialog
box. Then, by specifying a conversion method for the data, you tell iFIX how you want to process the data so
that you can achieve the desired effect. For more information on selecting data sources, and specifying syntax
and conversion types, refer to the Defining Data Sources section.
Accessing the Animations Dialog Box and Using Common Animations
When you are ready to animate an object, select a way to animate it from the following table:
From the...
Do this...
Expert
Select the appropriate Expert from the Experts toolbar, the Task Wizard, or the
Toolbox (Classic and Ribbon views), or from the Tools tab, in the Animations Group,
or by clicking the Animations Dialog Box Launcher (Ribbon view).
Basic
Animation
dialog box
Double-click an object or select Animations from the right-click menu.
For some objects, such as OCXs, Alarm Summaries, Data links, and charts, you must
right-click the object and select Animations from the pop-up menu.
For more information refer to the Using the Animations Dialog Box section.
490
Using Key Macros
From the...
Do this...
Advanced
Animations
dialog box
Click the Configure button on the Basic Animations dialog or, if configured, the
Advanced Animations dialog appears when you double-click the object.
For some objects, such as OCXs, Alarm Summaries, Data links, and charts, you must
right-click the object and select Animations from the pop-up menu.
Click the tab that contains the property you want to use. You can find a description of
the dialog box tabs in the Entering Property Values Manually section. The Animations
dialog box is available for every object (and every property of that object) in iFIX. For
a description of what each property does, refer to the Property Description in the
Properties area.
The following table summarizes some of the more commonly-used animations.
Commonly-Used Properties for Animations
Animating the
property...
On the
tab...
Lets you...
HorizontalPosition
Position
Move an object horizontally across the screen.
VerticalPosition
Position
Move an object vertically across the screen.
HorizontalFillPercentage
Fill
Horizontally fill an object based on a percentage. For
example, if the value of the property is 50, the object is
filled 50%.
VerticalFillPercentage
Fill
Vertically fill an object based on a percentage. For example,
if the value of the property is 50, the object is filled 50%.
HorizontalFillDirection
Fill
Horizontally fill an object from the left, right, or center.
VerticalFillDirection
Fill
Vertically fill an object from the top, bottom, or center.
RotationAngle
Rotate
Define the amount to rotate an object. Ovals, rounded
rectangles, and charts do not have rotation properties.
UniformScale
Size
Proportionally scale an object.
491
Creataing Pictures
Commonly-Used Properties for Animations
Animating the
property...
On the
tab...
Lets you...
Height
Size
Scale the height of an object. The width remains unchanged.
Width
Size
Scale the width of an object. The height remains unchanged.
HorizontalScalePercentage
Size
Horizontally scale an object based on a percentage. For
example, if the value of the property is 50, the object is
scaled 50%.
VerticalScalePercentage
Size
Vertically scale an object based on a percentage. For
example, if the value of the property is 50, the object is
scaled 50%.
ForegroundColor
Color
Change the foreground color of an object. Lines, polylines,
and bitmaps do not have foreground color properties.
Visibility
Visible
Make an object visible or invisible.
Caption (text objects only)
Text
Change the text displayed by a text object.
Fade Color
Gradient
Change the fade color of an object.
Fade Type
Gradient
Change the fade type of an object.
Animating a Size Property
You can fill an object based on an analog input value or rotate an object based on a SIM or SM2 register value.
You can also dynamically scale objects by animating the height and/or width of an object. When scaling objects
in this manner, be careful of the data source you select. For example, if you animate a rectangle's height based
on a variable's current value (data source is User.Variable1.CurrentValue), the object is resized in the
configuration environment to match the variable's value. Since the WorkSpace is in the configuration
environment, the value is set to zero and the rectangle is resized to look like a horizontal line. When you switch
to the run-time environment, the variable receives new values based on the variable's configuration and the size
of the rectangle changes. When you switch back to the configuration environment, the rectangle appears as a
line again because the variable's value is reset to zero.
The same effect results using the Scale Expert and you select the current value of a variable as the data source.
492
Using Key Macros
Understanding Animation Objects
Animation objects come in three forms:

Linear – Accepts any input data from a process database, and returns a corresponding output value
(Example: Animating the foreground color of an oval). Refer to the Understanding Signal
Conditioning section of the Building a SCADA System manual for more detail on how the Linear
object works.

Lookup – Accepts any input data from a process database and presents that value to each entry in a
lookup table to determine whether that value is in a range. If that value matches the range, the Lookup
object then returns the corresponding output value. If the value does not match the range, it moves to
the next row in the table and returns that output value (Example: Blinking the color of a rectangle
based on a toggle rate).

Format – Accepts any input data from a database and returns a string as an output value (Example:
Creating a caption for a text object).
The most common animation object is the Lookup object, which is used primarily to apply color. This
application is further described in the Animating Properties Using Color section. For more information on
animation object properties, refer to the iFIX Automation Interfaces Help file.
Most of your connections to data sources are through animation objects. However, you do not need an
animation object to animate an object. For example, if another object contains a property that provides the
desired animation, you can connect to that property. This is because every object has the ability to perform
permanent connections from one of its properties to another. Essentially, the animation object only transforms
data from the property of one object to the property of another object.
Animating an Object's Properties
The steps that follow provide an overview of how to animate an object's properties.
To animate the properties of any object in a picture:
1.
Select an object.
2.
In Classic view, click the appropriate Expert on the Experts toolbar, the Task Wizard, or the Basic
Animation dialog box.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Tools tab, in the Animations group, click Animations and choose the
appropriate Expert.
3.
In the Data Source field, enter the data source you want to use to dynamically set property values.
4.
If appropriate, select the type of data conversion you want to use and complete the related fields.
5.
If appropriate, on the Historical Properties tab, select the start date and time, the time zone, the
historical mode, duration, and update rate.
493
Creataing Pictures
For a list of commonly-used properties, refer to the Commonly-Used Properties for Animations table in the
Understanding Data Sources section.
Using Experts to Animate Objects
An easy way to animate objects is to use Experts. To access an Expert, click the button on the Experts toolbar
that corresponds to the task you want to perform (Classic view), or on the Tool tab, in the Animations group,
click Animations, and then choose the appropriate Expert (Ribbon view). Some Experts are only available using
the Task Wizard. For example, if you want to animate the edge color of an oval, select the Edge Color Expert
from the Animation category of the Task Wizard.
To learn more about the fields on the Expert, click the Help button on the Expert. For more information on iFIX
Experts and the Task Wizard, refer to the Using Process Assistants to Expedite Pictures chapter.
Additionally, you can access some Experts from the Basic Animation dialog box. To open the Basic Animation
dialog box, select Animations from the object's right-click menu.
Defining Data Sources
Both the Basic and Advanced Animations dialog boxes group similar properties together into categories. In the
Basic Animation dialog box, the Animation Experts are grouped by Color, Movement, Fill, Visibility, and
Command. There is also an Additional section that allows you to configure all animations using the Advanced
Animations dialog box.
In the Advanced Animations dialog box, each category is represented by a tab. You can select one or more
properties from these tabs as needed. For example, suppose you want to horizontally fill a tank and change the
foreground color simultaneously. To do this, you would select the HorizontalFillPercentage property on the Fill
tab and the ForegroundColor property on the Color tab.
Regardless of whether you select one property or seventeen, you must connect to a data source for each
property so that the necessary data can be retrieved and processed. The data source for one property can be
completely different than that of another property. For more information about data sources, refer to the
following topics:
494

Entering Data Source Syntax

Selecting Data Sources from a List

Filtering Data Sources

Specifying Data Conversions

Classifying Animations Errors
Using Key Macros
Entering Data Source Syntax
To select a data source, enter its name in the Data Source field of the Animations dialog box, using the required
syntax that tells iFIX what type of source contains the data. To assist you with the data source and its syntax,
iFIX provides intelligent defaults, which allows the software to automatically fetch a data source based on an
incomplete entry. For example, if your data source is an iFIX tag, and you enter AI1 in the Data Source field,
iFIX connects to a .F_CV field in the FIX32 database on the local SCADA server.
The following table lists the syntax for each data source type.
Data Source Syntax
When the data
source is...
Use the syntax...
An iFIX tag
Fix32.node.tag.field
where:
node is the name of the iFIX SCADA server you are connecting to;
tag is the database tag; and
field is the database field.
A Proficy Historian
tag
Hist.collector.tag
where:
Hist is the alias of the Proficy Historian Server;
collector is the name of the Proficy Historian collector you are connecting to; and
tag is the database tag.
An I/O address
server.io_address
where:
server is the name of the OPC server; and
io_address is the I/O address of that server.
An object property
in a picture
picture.object.property
where:
picture is the picture that contains the object;
object is the object in the picture; and
property is the object's property name.
495
Creataing Pictures
Data Source Syntax
When the data
source is...
Use the syntax...
A picture property
picture.property
where:
picture is the picture that contains the property; and
property is the picture's property name.
A VBA event
N/A. When you animate objects with a VBA script, the script handles all of the
animation by directly changing the appropriate properties.
A global variable
xxx.variable
where:
xxx is the global object; and
variable is the name of the variable within the global object.
An expression
value operator value
where:
value is the primary value;
operator is an operator relating to both values; and
value is the secondary value.
For more information on creating expressions, refer to the Building Expressions
section.
Some third-party OPC servers require characters in their syntax that are not parsable by the Expression Editor.
If the OPC server syntax uses any characters that do not appear in the list of valid characters below, the server
syntax must be enclosed within single quotes (`) as follows:
ServerName.'Device:MyAddress'
In this example, ServerName is the name used to identify the third-party OPC server, and single quotes
surround Device:MyAddress, the part of the syntax that contains the unparsable character(s). If an unparsable
character is not enclosed in single quotes, an error message displays.
Valid Characters: all alphanumeric characters, hyphen (-), underscore (_), exclamation point (!), less than (<),
greater than (>), pound (#), percent (%), dollar sign ($), ampersand (&), forward slash (/), backslash (\), pipe (|),
opening bracket ([), closing bracket (]), and single quote (`).
496
Using Key Macros
NOTE: You will have to remove the added single quotes from any VBA scripts for operation to succeed.
If a single quote (`) is a literal part of the addressing string syntax, it must be preceded by a backslash (\) in
order for the character to be passed to the server as part of the address.
Refer to the documentation supplied with third-party OPC servers for information on server-specific syntax.
Selecting Data Sources from a List
In addition to entering a data source directly, you can also select one from a list using the Expression Builder
dialog box. This dialog box lets you select the data source you want to use, or create expressions by combining
two or more data sources together.
You can select data sources from the Expression Builder dialog box by clicking the tab you want and selecting
the source from the list. For example, to select an iFIX tag AI1 in the SCADA server SCADA01:
1.
Click the FIX32 Database tab.
2.
In the Node Names list, select SCADA01.
3.
In the Tag Names list, select the desired tag.
If an existing object contains properties, you can also select those properties from a list. For example, to select
the Width property of a picture window:
1.
Click the Pictures tab.
2.
Select the picture you want to modify.
3.
In the Properties list, click the WindowWidth property.
As you make selections from the Expression Builder, the text in the lower window changes to match your
selections, enabling you to create an expression. If applicable, the tolerance, deadband, or refresh rate also
appear in this window. The section Building Expressions describes how to create expressions, and describes the
components of the Expression Builder.
Filtering Data Sources
Using the Expression Builder dialog box, you can filter data sources to search for specific data at any level. This
is a helpful tool for eliminating data that you don't need to access.
To filter data sources, enter the data source string in the Filter field and click Filter. (For the FIX32 Database
tabbed page, the Filter button appears as an F.) To select from the list box, click the down arrow to the right of
the field. You can also search for wildcard entries by using an asterisk in the field. For example, to view all of
the F_ fields for blocks, enter F_* in the Filter field.
To find all occurrences starting with a particular string, enter String* in the Filter field, where String is the text
that you want to search for. For example, enter AI* to find all tags starting with AI.
497
Creataing Pictures
To find all occurrences which contain a particular string, enter *String* in the Filter field, where String is the
text that you want to search for. For example, enter *motor* to find all tags containing the string "motor" in the
name.
You can also search for a string with a single unknown character by using the question mark wildcard (?). For
example, the search string TAN? locates the string TANK.
Specifying Data Conversions
XE "table:data conversion" \* MERGEFORMAT }After you enter a data source, you need to select the type of
data conversion to apply to the data from that source. A data conversion defines how the incoming data should
be processed or formatted so that your objects behave according to the properties you have assigned to them. It
also defines how the outgoing data calculates errors, what those errors mean, and how they are conveyed to
operators.
The following table lists the types of data conversions you can specify in the Data Conversion area of the
Animations dialog box.
Data Conversion Types
The data
conversion...
Lets you specify...
Range
A range of values on which to animate an object. You can enter the minimum and
maximum input and output values. When you enter a range of values, the input values
are mapped into the output values, allowing you to apply linear signal conditioning. For
information on signal conditioning, refer to the Understanding Signal Conditioning
section in the Building a SCADA System manual.
You can also specify if input is allowed to the range.
498
Using Key Macros
Data Conversion Types
The data
conversion...
Lets you specify...
Table
A lookup table. Using a lookup table is like using a spreadsheet, as the following figure
shows.
When completing a lookup table, you can define a single lookup value or a range of
lookup values for each row in the table. In addition, you need to enter an output value.
Depending on the selected property, this value may be a color, string, fill style, edge
style, or numeric value. When the incoming value from the data source matches an
entry in the table, it changes the selected property to match the output value.
The buttons below the lookup table help you modify the appearance of the table. You
can insert, modify, or delete rows in the table by clicking the appropriate buttons. Or, by
clicking the Advanced button, you can assign toggle values, a shared lookup table, a
toggle rate, and a tolerance value for exact match thresholds. For more information on
these advanced options, refer to the Animating Properties Using Color and Classifying
Animations Errors sections. For more information on using the toggle rate, refer to the
Using Blinking Thresholds section.
Format
How to format the data. You can specify:

How to justify the data.

How many lines to display.

How many characters appear on each line.

Whether data entry is allowed and, if so, if it can be entered in-place.
For more information on formatting options, refer to the Adding Data Links section.
Object
No signal conditioning. The data received from the data source is processed or
displayed at that exact value.
499
Creataing Pictures
Sample Table Data Conversion
The following table data conversion has been set up for the FillStyle property of an oval.
Low
High
Value
0
25
0-Solid
26
50
2-Horizontal
51
75
3-Vertical
76
100
1-Hollow
Using these definitions, the oval fill style appears as shown in the following table.
When the incoming value is...
The oval appears...
Less than 25
Between 26 to 50
Between 51 to 75
Between 76 to 100
Sample Table Data Conversions
500
Using Key Macros
Classifying Animations Errors
iFIX lets you define how any animation behaves if an error occurs. Using the Output Error Mode field of the
Advanced Animations dialog box, you determine how the output data appears to operators. From this field you
select the desired error classification based on the specified data conversion method. The output data appears to
the user as the specified error type when the default value is reached.
The following table details the error output you can define for a particular data conversion type.
Error Handling Based on Data Conversion Types
The data
conversion...
Range
Table
Format
Object
Lets you define errors
using...
Which gives you the following options...

Current Output

Minimum and Maximum Input

Error Table

Minimum and Maximum Output

Minimum Value

Use Offset

Maximum Value

Fetch Input Range on Open

Current Output

Exact Match (and tolerance)

Error Table

Range Comparison

Current Output

Error Table

Exact Value
Display messages in a Data link for any of the
following errors:

Communication Failure

Data Uncertain

Unknown Failure

Device Failure

Out of Space

Configuration Error

Custom messages for any of the above as
entered in User Preferences.
No output classification. The data received from the
data source is processed or displayed at that exact
value.
For more information on the output fields, refer to the Animating Properties Using Color section.
501
Creataing Pictures
NOTE: Error handling in iFIX is global, not per-object. You can choose the behavior of a single object based
on an error condition; however, because of performance reasons, the error classification is applied systemwide.
Specifying OPC Errors
iFIX provides predefined error defaults that you can customize for your needs. The Animations Data Error
Defaults tabbed page of the User Preferences dialog box contains the default OPC error strings and values that
display when an error occurs. The tabbed page is divided into three areas:

Linear Animation Object Defaults – Contains six numeric, OPC failure strings based on the Linear
object using a Range data conversion.

Format Animation Object Defaults – Contains six OPC strings based on the Format object using a
Format data conversion. The error string is displayed in a Data link.

Lookup Animation Object Defaults – Contains six numeric table, string table, and color table entries
based on the Lookup object using a Table data conversion.
The error defaults are global, resulting in better system performance. You can modify the defaults to make error
messages more intuitive for your specific process. For example, when a device error occurs, Data links display
by default the text "XXXX". To create a more intuitive message for device error messages in the future, enter an
alternate string in the Device field of the Format Animation Object Defaults area. For example:
Device is not working!
By changing the defaults, you can configure error messages with the text and color that you want, thereby
customizing your error handling scheme. For more information on the fields of the Animations Error Defaults
tabbed page, refer to the online help.
Animating Properties Using Color
Applying color to your objects is a visually effective method of using animations in your process environment.
One example would be changing the foreground, edge, and background color of objects to give your operators
visual cues about the process values or alarm conditions.
When animating the color of an object, you must define a color threshold. A color threshold is either a color
and value combination or a color and alarm combination. You can define the following types of color
thresholds:
502

Color by analog value

Color by digital value

Color by current alarm

Color by latched alarm
Using Key Macros
For each type of threshold, specify one or more rows in a lookup table. When coloring by analog value, each
row in the lookup table defines a color and either a single value or a range of values that you want to associate
with the color. When coloring by alarm, each row defines the color and the associated alarm.
NOTE: Any time a data source changes, iFIX refreshes the color tables. To avoid problems when modifying a
color table, be certain that all your changes are correct.
The following sections show you how to define color thresholds using the methods introduced above. Refer to
the Specifying Data Conversions section for information on how to use lookup tables.

Color by analog value

Color by digital value

Color by current alarm

Color by latched alarm

Using Blinking Thresholds

Using Shared Thresholds
Color by Analog Value
When you color objects by their analog value, you enter a key value or a range of key values and assign them to
a color. When the data source value falls within the threshold, the object changes to that color.
For example, let's say a factory controls a tank of water for cleaning and manufacturing purposes. When the
water in the tank falls below 1000 gallons, the pumps from the main water supply turn on and refill the tank.
When the water in the tank rises above 9000 gallons, the pumps shut off. The thresholds for this tank are shown
in the following figure.
When operators see the tank change color, they can also determine whether the pumps have turned on (blue) or
off (red). To color an object by analog value, select the Range Comparison option button on the Color Expert
and edit the minimum and maximum values of the lookup table as desired.
For more detailed information on animating objects, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
503
Creataing Pictures
Color by Digital Value
Color thresholds can be useful with digital values, too. Suppose you assign the following thresholds to an object
that monitors the status of a pump. The data source for this object is a digital I/O point in an OPC server.
When the value is not in the table, the object is colored black.
Using digital values lets you define thresholds based on an exact match and a tolerance. When you specify an
exact match, you declare that you only want to change an object's color when the data source exactly matches
the threshold value you have assigned to that color, plus or minus a specified tolerance (the allowable deviation
from that value). Tolerances only apply to table conversions where the configuration is set to exact match.
NOTE: How the output data is displayed depends on how you classify error handling in the Advanced
Animations dialog box. For more information, refer to the Classifying Animations Errors section.
To color an object by digital value, select the Exact match option button on the Color Expert and assign digital
values to the colors you want to use. If desired, enter a tolerance value in the Exact Match Tolerance field. The
default tolerance is 0. If you are using VBA, set the Tolerance property of the Lookup object.
Color by Current Alarm
Depending on your data source, an animated object can receive a variety of alarms. You can set up thresholds to
visually alert an operator that a data source is in a particular alarm state. By using color by current alarm, the
object always displays the color assigned to the current alarm.
When the data source is an iFIX process database, tag alarms can also provide data on more than just control
limits. For example, suppose that the speed at which the tank fills is crucial to the process. To effectively
monitor this condition, you could set up another threshold using the Rate of Change alarm state.
For more information on coloring by current alarms, refer to the Implementing Alarms and Messages manual.
504
Using Key Macros
Color by Latched Alarm
When a data source is in more than one alarm state that has defined thresholds, the latched alarm strategy
displays the color assigned to the unacknowledged alarm of the highest priority.
For more information on coloring by latched alarms, refer to the Implementing Alarms and Messages manual.
Using Blinking Thresholds
In addition to a color threshold, you can define a blinking threshold for current and digital values. The blinking
threshold replaces the object's foreground, background, or edge color when the assigned value is reached or the
assigned alarm occurs. The color of the object blinks between the threshold color and the background color.
To assign a blinking threshold using the Color Expert, double-click the Blink To cell in the row of a value and
select the color you want to assign to the threshold. You can access the Color Expert via the toolbox or by
selecting the Color Animation button in the Basic Animation dialog box. Using the Advanced Animations
dialog box, you can also define blinking threshold values using the New Level dialog box. Click the Toggle
option button in the Output area and enter the output value of the blinking threshold in the field.
Blinking on a New Alarm
You can also set a selected object to blink every time the data source registers a new alarm. The object stops
blinking when the alarm is acknowledged. This setting overrides the blinking settings defined for individual
thresholds. With the Blink on New Alarm check box selected, you can set the color for the blink by clicking the
Blink on New Alarm Color check box.
For examples of how to use blinking thresholds in your alarming scheme, refer to the Implementing Alarms and
Messages manual.
Blinking Rate
The rate at which objects blink is defined in Advanced Lookup Options dialog box. This dialog box also lets
you select the source and value of the toggle rate that causes the blinking action. The configurable blink speed
allows you to set the threshold to blink at a set rate, in seconds. To set the blink speed, enter a value in the
Toggle Rate field.
For more information on advanced options with the lookup table, refer to the Specifying Data Conversions
section.
Using Shared Thresholds
If a lookup object is shared (in either a global data source or in another picture), you can use its color table to
define a threshold.
On the Color Expert, click the Use Shared Table check box and then, in the Shared Table field, enter the data
source for the shared color table. Click the Browse button to make a selection from a Picture or a Global data
source available in your system.
505
Creataing Pictures
You can open the Color Expert by clicking on the Color Expert button in the toolbox, or by selecting a specific
Color Animation in the Basic Animation dialog box.
Animating Object Properties with Visual Basic
You can animate object properties by selecting the properties you want to dynamically change, selecting a data
source, and defining how the data will be processed (the data conversion). To create custom animations, you
can write a VBA script. To write a script for an object, right-click the object and select Edit Script from the popup menu. This starts the Visual Basic Editor.
When you write a script to animate an object, the script must define:

The object that you want to animate.

The properties to dynamically change.

The parameters to use when processing data.
The parameters you specify vary depending on the type of data conversion you want to use. For example, if you
want to use a Table data conversion, the parameters are cells of the table. Alternately, if you want to use a
Range data conversion, the parameters are the minimum and maximum input and output values.
After defining these items in your script, you must connect the data source to the object you want to animate.
To connect the data source to the object you want to animate:
1.
Connect the data source to the input of the data conversion.
2.
Connect the output of the data conversion to the object you want to animate.
For more information on writing scripts that animate the properties of an object, refer to the Writing Scripts
manual.
Animating a Grouped Object
In addition to animating individual objects, you can also animate grouped objects. Animating a grouped object
is similar to animating any other object, except that the objects inside the group can have independent
animations. To animate a grouped object, select the group and animate the properties you wish using the
appropriate Expert. The properties of the group are changed to reflect your entries.
To animate the member objects of a group, drill down to the object in the group that you want to animate and
complete the necessary entries in the appropriate Expert. If the group has an animated property, and one of its
member objects has the same property animated in a different way, the most recent animation takes precedence.
For example, if you animate the group's ForegroundColor property, and then in turn animate a nested object's
ForegroundColor property, you will see the nested object's animation when you run the picture.
You can also use the Basic Animation dialog box to animate a grouped object or member objects in a group.
506
Using Key Macros
For more information on working with grouped objects and their members including drilling down, refer to the
Creating Complex Objects section.
Modifying Animations
There may be times when you must change the animations you create. Modifying animated objects is similar to
creating them. The main difference is that when you open either of the Animation dialog boxes, any properties
that have been dynamically changed are indicated by a selected check box (Basic) or an arrow on its
corresponding tab (Advanced), as the following figures show.
Modifying a Fill Animation in the Basic Animation dialog box
To modify an existing Animation in the Basic Animation dialog box, click the Expert button associated with
that animation. This opens the Expert dialog box and allows you to make changes to that animation. Clearing
the check box deletes the existing animation.
507
Creataing Pictures
Modifying a Fill Animation in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
To modify an existing animation in the Advanced Animations dialog box, select the tab containing the property
you want to change and click Animate. Perform any required modifications and click OK.
508
Using Key Macros
Deleting Animations
When you no longer need an animation, you can delete the animation or the object that contains the animation.
Deleting animations removes the animation from the property to which it was assigned.
CAUTION: Deleting an animation permanently destroys your selections. Do not delete an animation unless
you understand the effect it will have on your objects and pictures.
Building Expressions
As described earlier, there are many data sources you can use to animate the properties of an object. Another
valuable option is to use an expression. An expression is a data value or multiple data values connected with
one or more operators. Using the Expression Builder, you can create specific expressions that access data from
unique sources. This gives you more flexibility when assigning dynamic object properties.
You can use the following data values in an expression:

Numeric constants.

Strings enclosed in quotation marks (" ").

iFIX tags.

Proficy Historian tags.

OPC server I/O addresses.

Picture properties.

Object properties.
NOTE: Fetching data limits at runtime for an expression with more than one data source is not supported and
may produce unexpected results at runtime. This is because there could be different tag names in the expression
and it may not be clear which tag to fetch the limits for.
Using the Expression Builder Dialog Box
The Expression Builder dialog box is your tool for creating expressions. This dialog box lets you select the data
source you want to use or create expressions by combining two or more data sources together.
The Expression Builder dialog box is divided into multiple tabs, which are described in the following table.
509
Creataing Pictures
Expression Builder Tabs
The
tab...
Displays...
FIX
Database
Any SCADA servers to which your computer is communicating. Use a data server as a data
source when you want to animate an object or an iFIX tag. The tabbed page includes Node
Names, Tag Names, and Field Names windows to help you specify your selections.
Pictures
The pictures residing on your computer. The Objects window displays each object in the
picture. Use one of these objects as a data source when you want to animate an object with a
picture or object property value. The Properties window displays the properties for the
selected object so that you can select a specific property.
Globals
Global data sources. The tabbed page includes Objects and Properties windows to help you
specify your selections.
Data
Servers
Third party OPC servers. Data source connections to data servers fire at run-time only.
Alarm
Counters
A filtered list of SCADA servers that your computer is communicating with. The tabbed
page includes the Alarm AreaTag Names window that displays a filtered list of alarm areas
on the selected SCADA and alarm counter tags. The Alarm Counter Field Names window
displays a filtered list of fields available from the selected area.
Proficy
Historian
Any Proficy Historian Server to which your computer is communicating. Use a Proficy
Historian Server data source when you want to animate an object. The tabbed page includes
Node Names and Tag Names windows to help you specify your selections.
When you select a data source, it appears in the field at the bottom of the dialog box. You can add strings by
typing them into the field. You can also add operators and numeric constants by typing them into the field, or by
clicking the operator buttons on the right side of the dialog box while the cursor is in the field. To display the
operator buttons, click the Mathematical Functions button.
NOTE: If you have created an object-to-object connection, such as the fill percentage of one tank to another, or
created a connection to a data source, the animated properties display in boldface in the Properties list of the
Pictures tab for the selected object.
The Filter fields and buttons allow you to filter data sources. For more information, refer to the Filtering Data
Sources section. Additionally, you can specify a tolerance, deadband, and refresh rate in the appropriate fields.
These functions are described later in this section.
For more information on selecting data sources from the Expression Builder dialog box, including examples,
refer to the Selecting Data Sources from a List section.
510
Using Key Macros
Customizing the Expression Builder
You can customize the Expression Builder by showing or hiding specific tabs. To do this, you modify
properties in VBA. Refer to the following table.
Showing or Hiding Tabs in the Expression Builder
To show or hide the tab...
Set this property to TRUE or FALSE, respectively...
FIX32 Database
ShowDatabaseTab
Pictures
ShowPicturesTab
Globals
ShowGlobalsTab
Data Servers
ShowDataServersTab
Proficy Historian
ShowProficyHistorianTab
For more information on modifying VBA scripts, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
Specifying Tolerance, Deadband, and Refresh Rate
The Expression Builder also lets you define the tolerance, deadband, and refresh rate of a data source
connection. These three fields, located at the bottom-right of the dialog box, are defined as follows:

Tolerance – the allowable deviation from a value when evaluating an expression.

Deadband – how much the current data value can deviate from the most recent data value.

Refresh Rate – how often the data source connection updates, in seconds.
All three of these characteristics apply to a particular connection; they are not global. For example, if you
connect the object RECT2.PROP1 to source FIX32.NODE.TAG.F_CV, you can specify different refresh rates
for the rectangles properties, even though the object references the same database tag.
To enter a refresh rate enter a rate, in seconds, in the Refresh Rate field. Refer to the following table to
determine how fast the connections will update based on the refresh rate you enter.
Refresh Rates
If you choose a refresh rate of...
Then the data source connection will update no faster than...
0.0
Once per 50 milliseconds.
511
Creataing Pictures
Refresh Rates
If you choose a refresh rate of...
Then the data source connection will update no faster than...
0.1 (default)
Five times per second.
1.0
Once per second.
5.0
Once per 5 seconds.
10.0
Once per 10 seconds.
15.0
Once per 15 seconds.
30.0
Once per 30 seconds.
60.0
Once per 60 seconds.
To enter a tolerance or deadband limit, enter a value in the Tolerance or Deadband fields, respectively.
NOTE: The Tolerance setting in the Expression Builder is for the expression only. To set the tolerance for an
Exact Match Lookup Table, you must use the Animations Dialog box. For more information, refer to the
Classifying Animations Errors section.
For more information on refresh rate, refer to the Increasing the Refresh Rate section in the Setting up the
Environment manual.
The Importance of Syntax
Since the Expression Builder relies on specific data values input by users, the manner in which the data is
presented is crucial. This is why it is important for you to know the proper syntax of your expressions. One of
the most common errors in building expressions is that the expression has been entered incorrectly. Throughout
this chapter, the correct syntax for specific entries is described with specific examples.
Syntax: Required Format for Expressions
Expressions require the following syntax:
value
value operator value
where value is a constant or a data source and operator is a mathematical, relational, or boolean symbol.
512
Using Key Macros
Operators: Applying the Glue to Your Expressions
The operators in expressions are symbols that not only let you connect data values together but also determine
how the values work together to convert the data source. The following types of operators are permitted in your
expressions:

Mathematical operators

Relational operators

Boolean operators
To access these operators, click the Mathematical Functions button on the Expression Builder dialog box and
select them from the expanded operator keypad. You can also add numerals to your expressions by clicking the
appropriate numeral in the Numeric area.
In addition to these operators, the Expression Builder allows you to select a set of functions. These functions are
not shown on the expanded operator keypad and must be entered manually. The following table summarizes the
available functions and their syntax. All trigonometric functions require values entered in radians.
When you select the function...
The Expression Builder calculates the...
Syntax
ABS
Absolute value of number.
ABS (number)
ACOS
Arccosine of number.
ACOS (number)
ASIN
Arcsine of number.
ASIN (number)
ATAN
Arctangent of number.
ATAN (number)
COS
Cosine of number.
COS (number)
EXP
Anti-log of number.
EXP (number)
INT
Integer value of number.
INT (number)
LOG
Natural log of number.
LOG (number)
LOG10
Base 10 log of number.
LOG10 (number)
SIN
Sine of number.
SIN (number)
513
Creataing Pictures
When you select the function...
The Expression Builder calculates the...
Syntax
SQRT
Square root of the number.
SQRT (number)
TAN
Tangent of number.
TAN (number)
For more information on these functions, refer to the Working with Functions section in the Creating Recipes
manual.
The operators and their associated syntax are described in the following sections with examples of each.
Mathematical Operators
Mathematical operators let you add, subtract, multiply, and divide two or more values. Using these operators,
you can create a mathematical expression. You can also change the operator's order of precedence in the
mathematical expression by using parentheses.
Mathematical expressions are evaluated by determining the data value on each side of the mathematical
operator and then performing the mathematical operation. For example, consider the following expression:
5+Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV
When this expression is evaluated, the current value of the iFIX tag AI1 is determined and then it is added to 5.
If the value is 50, for example, the expression evaluates to 55.
Because of the way the expressions are evaluated, the values on both sides of an operator must both be either a
numeric value or a string, but not one of each. You cannot, for example, add the descriptive string "Pump1 for
Main Water Supply" to the data source Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV. However, you can add that same string to
the data source Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.A_DESC.
Syntax: Mathematical Operators
The syntax for each mathematical operator in provided in the following table:
514
Operator
Syntax
+ (addition)
value + value
- (subtraction)
value -value
* (multiplication)
value * value
Using Key Macros
Operator
Syntax
/ (division)
value / value
( (left parenthesis)
(value + value) * value
) (right parenthesis)
(value + value) * value
Example: Mathematical Operators
Consider the following expressions:
Expression
Value
5+Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV
The current value of AI1 plus 5. If AI5 is 100, the
expression evaluates to 105.
"5"+Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.A_CV
The current value of AI1 and the string "5" concatenated
together. If AI1 is 100, the expression evaluates to 1005.
Fix32.SCADA1.AI5.F_CV*OPC1.N35
The product of the iFIX tag AI1 and the I/O address
N35. If the tag's value is 100, and the I/O point's value is
50, the expression evaluates to 5000.
Alarms.Rect1.Width/Alarms.Rect1.Height
The quotient of Rect1's width divided by its height. If
both properties are equal, the expression evaluates to 1.
Alarms.Pump5.HorizontalFillPercentage +
Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV
The value of Pump5's HorizontalFillPercentage property
plus the current value of the iFIX tag AI1. If the
HorizontalFillPercentage property's value is 50 and
AI1's value is 100, the expression evaluates to 150.
Alarms.Prompt.Caption+"Enter tagname"
The value of Prompt's Caption property and the string
"Enter tagname" concatenated together. If the Caption
property value is null, then the string evaluates to "Enter
tagname".
Relational Operators
Relational operators let you compare two values to determine how they relate to each other.
515
Creataing Pictures
Syntax: Relational Operators
The syntax for relational operators is shown in the following table.
Operator
Syntax
= (equal to)
value = value
<> (not equal to)
value <> value
> (greater than)
value > value
< (less than)
value < value
>= (greater than or equal to)
value >= value
<= (less than or equal to)
value <= value
Example: Relational Operators
Relational operators are commonly used in boolean conditions to determine if part or all of an expression is true
or false. An example:
Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV = 50
When this expression is evaluated, the value of the left side of the operator is compared to the right side. If the
two values match, the condition is true. Otherwise, it is false.
You can compare any data value to any other data value. For example, consider the following boolean
conditions:
516
Condition
Value
3>1
TRUE
5 = "Enter tagname"
FALSE
Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV = 100
TRUE, if the current value of AI1 is 100.
Fix32.SCADA1.AI1.F_CV >= OPC1.N35
TRUE, if the current value of AI1 is greater than OPC1.N35.
Using Key Macros
Condition
Value
Alarms.Rect1.Width =
Alarms.Rect1.Height
TRUE, if Rect1 is a square.
Alarms.Prompt.Caption ="Enter tagname"
TRUE, if the value of Prompt's Caption property is "Enter
tagname".
Boolean Operators
Boolean operators let you connect two or more boolean conditions.
Syntax: Boolean Operators
The syntax for each operator is listed in the following table.
Operator
Syntax
AND
condition AND condition
OR
condition OR condition
NOT
NOT condition
Example: AND Operator
The AND operator is used when both parts of the expression must be true. For example, suppose that in a
factory, several ingredients need to be mixed together for up to 5 minutes while the mixture is being heated to
200 degrees. When both of these conditions (5 minutes and 200 degrees) are true, you want to create an
expression to display the following text:
Mixing...
To accomplish these tasks, a rectangle object, MixTime, has been set up as a progress bar to show the time
elapsed as a percentage. A text object, Temperature, has also been animated to show the current temperature.
Next, a text object needs to be created for the Mixing message. This object needs its Visible property animated
with the following expression:
Mixing.MixTime.VerticalFillPercentage < 100 AND
Mixing.Temperature.AnimatedCaption.InputValue < 200
517
Creataing Pictures
This expression is true only when the mixing time is less than 5 minutes and the temperature is less than 200
degrees. When either condition is no longer true, the mixer stops and the message is no longer visible.
Example: OR Operator
Now suppose you want to display instructions to the operator about the next stage of the process when mixing
stops. To do this, you can create another text object and animate its Visible property with the following
expression:
Mixing.MixTime.VerticalFillPercentage >= 100 OR
Mixing.Temperature.AnimatedCaption.InputValue >= 200
Example: NOT Operator
Unlike AND or OR, the NOT operator does not connect two boolean conditions. Instead, it inverts the value of
a condition. For example, if the following condition is true:
Alarms.Tank3.HorizontalFillPercentage>80
then the following condition is false:
NOT Alarms.Tank3.HorizontalFillPercentage>80
Changing the Order of Precedence
When evaluating an expression, iFIX defines an order of precedence for each operator. The order of precedence
determines which operators (and the values on each side of the operator) are evaluated first. The following table
lists each operator from highest to lowest precedence.
Operator
Precedence
( ), NOT, - (unary minus)
1
*, /, AND
2
+, - (subtraction), OR
3
<, <=, >, >=
4
=, <>
5
You can change the order of precedence by enclosing an expression in parentheses. Parentheses are regarded
with the highest priority; thus all expressions within the parentheses are evaluated first. Operators with the same
precedence are evaluated in the order they appear from left to right.
518
Using Key Macros
Example: Changing the Order of Precedence
For example, consider the following expressions:
Expression
Value
6+4/2
8
(6+4)/2
5
Bit Operators for Expressions
The GETBIT function allows for bit-level manipulations of data. The GETBIT function has the following
syntax:
GETBIT ( nBitNumber,, nNumBits, uiSourceToken )
The source token is promoted to the closest unsigned integer data representation that maintains its length. The
corresponding zero based range of bits (bit zero is the most significant bit) is extracted from the source and an
integer is returned which corresponds to the value these bits define if they existed starting in the least significant
bit of their own integer. For example:
GETBIT ( 8, 4,N.T.F)
IMPORTANT: Be aware that you must have spaces in between the operator and operands in expressions.
Modifying Expressions
You can modify an expression by editing the entry in the Data Source field of either the Expert, or the
Animations or Expression Builder dialog boxes. We recommend using the Expression Builder, as you can more
easily enter new data sources by selecting or typing them into the field. To delete an expression, right-click the
expression and select Delete.
How Do I...
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with animations, properties, and
expressions:

Accessing the Animation Dialog Boxes

Selecting a Data Source from a List

Working with Basic Animations

Working with Advanced Animations
519
Creataing Pictures

Modifying Properties

Using Expressions

Data Conversions, Error Defaults, and Threshold Tables
Accessing the Animation Dialog Boxes
iFIX provides the following options for configuring Animations:

Experts – In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the appropriate Expert from the Experts toolbar, or the Task
Wizard (Classic or Ribbon views) or on the Tools tab, in the Animations group, Animations list
(Ribbon view). If the Toolbox is enabled, click the button on the Toolbox.

Basic Animation dialog box – In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click an object or select Animations
from the right-click menu. This dialog box contains many commonly used animations. For a listing of
all animations available to an object, use the Advanced Animations dialog box.

Advanced Animations dialog box – Click the Configure button on the Basic Animation dialog box;
or, if configured, the Advanced Animations dialog box appears when you double-click an object in the
iFIX WorkSpace or select Animations from the right-click menu.
NOTE: To configure the Advanced Animations dialog box to always appear when you double-click an
object or select Animations from the right-click menu, clear the Always Show Basic Animation dialog
box option on the Picture Preferences Tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
Selecting a Data Source from a List
To select a data source from a list:
520
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select an object.
2.
Open either of the Animation dialog boxes.

If you are using the Advanced Animations dialog box, select the tab containing the property
you want to change and select the applicable Animate check box. The dialog box expands to
display the applicable animation properties.

If you are using the Basic Animation dialog box, select the appropriate Animation Expert
button.
3.
Click the Browse button to the right of the Data Source field.
4.
Click the tab containing the data source.
5.
Select the I/O point, tag, or property you want to use as a data source and click OK. The selected data
source appears in the Data Source field.
Using Key Macros
Working with Basic Animations Overview
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with basic animations:

Creating an Animation Using the Basic Animation Dialog Box

Modifying an Animation in the Basic Animation Dialog Box

Animating Grouped Objects

Deleting an Animation in the Basic Animation Dialog Box
Creating an Animation Using the Basic Animation Dialog Box
To create an animation using the Basic Animation dialog box:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select the object you want to animate.
2.
Select Animations from the right-click menu. The Basic Animation dialog box appears.
NOTE: The Basic Animation dialog box appears the first time you access Animations in iFIX. To
configure the Advanced Animations dialog box to always open when you double-click an object or
select Animations from the right-click menu, clear the Always Show Basic Animation dialog box option
in the Picture Preferences Tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
3.
Select the check box of the animation property that you want to add to your object. The associated
Animation Expert dialog box opens.
If the Animation that you want to add is not listed in the Basic Animation dialog box, click the
Configure button to open the Advanced Animations dialog box. The Advanced Animations dialog box
contains all available animations for the selected object. For more information on creating objects in
the Advanced Animation dialog box, refer to the Working with Advanced Animations Overview.
4.
Enter the configuration information for the Animation Expert.
The added Animation property is now selected in the Basic Animation dialog box.
5.
Add any additional animations or click OK to close the dialog box.
Modifying an Animation in the Basic Animation Dialog Box
To modify an animation using the Basic Animation dialog box:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click an object and select Animations. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the button of the animation property that you want to modify. The associated Animation Expert
dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT: If you select the check box, you will delete your animation. To modify an animation,
you must click the button to access the Expert dialog box.
521
Creataing Pictures
3.
Make any required modifications to the animation and click OK to return to the Basic Animation
dialog box.
Animating Grouped Objects
To animate a grouped object:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the group you want to animate, and select Animations. The Basic
Animation dialog box appears.
2.
Click the appropriate Expert button.
3.
Enter the configuration information for the Animation Expert.
Deleting an Animation in the Basic Animation Dialog Box
To delete an animation using the Basic Animation dialog box:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select Animations from the object's right-click menu. The Basic Animation
dialog box appears. If a property contains an animation, the check box is selected.
2.
Clear the check box to delete the animation.
Based on your User Preferences settings, you may be prompted to acknowledge this action by clicking
Yes. To configure whether or not you are prompted upon deleting an animation, modify the Prompt on
Delete option in the Picture Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog box.
IMPORTANT: To delete all animations you configured in the Advanced Animations dialog box, clear
the Advanced Animations check box. If you have assigned multiple animations from the Advanced
Animations dialog box, be aware that you will be deleting all of those animations. If you have multiple
animations assigned in the Advanced Animations dialog box, it is recommended that you delete them
separately within the Advanced Animations dialog box itself.
Working with Advanced Animations Overview
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with advanced animations:

Modifying Animations in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box

Deleting Animations in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box

Displaying the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
Modifying an Animation in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
To modify an animation using the Advanced Animations dialog box:
1.
522
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
Using Key Macros
2.
Click the Configure button. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Select the tab containing the property you want to change.
4.
If necessary, in the Data Source field, change the data source you want to use.
5.
If appropriate, on the Animation Properties tab, change the type of data conversion you want and
complete the related fields.
6.
If appropriate, on the Historical Properties tab, change the start date, start time, time zone, historical
mode, duration, or update rate.
Deleting Animations in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
To delete an animation using the Advanced Animations dialog box:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click the Configure button. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Select the tab containing the animation you want to delete. Look for tabs with arrows to help you
navigate to properties that have been animated.
4.
Clear the Animate check box for the property that contains the animation you want to delete.
5.
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
Entering a Property Value in the Advanced Animations Dialog Box
To enter a property value in the Advanced Animations dialog box:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
NOTE: For some objects, you must right-click the object and select Animations from the pop-up menu.
2.
Click Configure. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Click the tab containing the property you want to change.
4.
In the row containing the property you want to change, click the Animate button. The Dynamic
Settings area appears.
5.
In the Dynamic Settings area, enter the desired value(s) for the property.
Modifying Properties
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with property modifications:

Changing Properties Using the Property Window

Entering Highlight Timeout Intervals
523
Creataing Pictures
Changing Properties Using the Property Window
To change a property using the Properties window:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, right-click the object you want to modify and choose Property Window. The
Properties dialog box appears.
2.
Locate the property you want to change in the left column of the window and double-click its row.
3.
If the property lets you enter a new value, enter that value and press Enter. After you enter the new
value, the object changes to reflect your entry.
NOTE: If the property displays a drop-down list, select the new value from the list. If the property is a
Boolean value, double-clicking will automatically toggle the value. If the property displays an ellipsis
button, click the button to open the appropriate dialog box where you can make the required changes.
Entering Highlight Timeout Intervals
To enter a Highlight Timeout Interval:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the WorkSpace menu, select User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
2.
Click the Picture Preferences tab.
3.
In the Window Properties area, select the Click and Stick Enabled check box.
4.
In the Properties area, enter a value in the Highlight Timeout Interval field to define the time period.
The value must be entered in seconds.
Using Expressions Overview
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with expressions:

Filtering Data Sources

Creating Expressions

Modifying Expressions

Deleting Expressions
Filtering Data Sources
To filter data sources:
1.
524
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click an object. The Basic Animation dialog box appears.
Using Key Macros
2.
Open the Advanced Animations dialog box, or click the appropriate Expert in the Basic Animation
dialog box.
If you are using the Advanced Animations dialog box, select the tab containing the property you want
to change and select the applicable Animate check box. The dialog box expands to display the
applicable animation properties.
3.
Click the Browse button to the right of the Data Source field.
4.
Click the appropriate tab containing the data source you want.
5.
In the Filter field, enter a data source name or select one from the drop-down list. If desired, use the
asterisk wildcard character to search for data source names.
6.
Click Filter or, if you are on the FIX Database or Alarm Counters tabbed page, click F.
Creating Expressions
To create an expression:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click an object. The Basic Animation dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Configure button. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Select the tab containing the property you want to change and select the appropriate Animate check
box.
4.
Click the Browse button to the right of the Data Source field.
5.
Click the appropriate tab and select the data source you want.
6.
If you want to combine another data source in the expression, click the Mathematical Functions button
and enter an operator.
Modifying Expressions
To modify an expression:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click an object. The Basic Animation dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Configure button. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Select the tab containing the property you want to change and select the appropriate Animate check
box.
4.
Click the Browse button to the right of the Data Source field.
5.
Select the desired data source.
6.
If you want to combine another data source in the expression, click the Mathematical Functions button
and enter an operator using the expanded keypad.
7.
Select another data source or enter a numeric value, string, or Boolean condition. Repeat steps 4 to 6
until you create the desired expression.
525
Creataing Pictures
Deleting Expressions
To delete an expression:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click an object. The Basic Animation dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Configure button. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Select the tab containing the animation you want to modify.
4.
Select the property that contains the animation that you want to modify.
5.
Select the desired data source.
6.
Highlight the expression and press Delete.
Using Data Conversions, Error Defaults, and Threshold Tables
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform the following steps with data conversions, error defaults and
threshold tables:

Completing a Range Data Conversion

Completing a Table Data Conversion

Completing a Format Data Conversion

Modifying Animations Error Defaults

Assigning Blinking Thresholds

Setting the Blink Speed
Completing a Range Data Conversion
To complete a range data conversion:
526
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click Configure. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Click the tab containing the property you want to change, and select the Animate check box next to
that property.
4.
From the Data Conversion list, select Range.
5.
In the Minimum Input and Minimum Output fields, enter the minimum input and output values, as
needed.
6.
In the Maximum Input and Maximum Output fields, enter the maximum input and output values, as
needed.
7.
If you want the selected object to read a value from the data source when the picture opens, select the
Fetch Input Range on Open check box.
Using Key Macros
8.
If you want to perform an animation on an object in its current position, not in the absolute position
specified by the logical unit or postscript point value in the Minimum Output field, select the Use
Offset check box.
Completing Table Data Conversion
To complete a table data conversion:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click Configure. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Click the tab containing the property you want to change, and select the Animate check box next to
that property.
4.
From the Data Conversion list, select Table. Make sure you have the correct number of rows in the
table. If you do not, click the Insert Row button to add a row. If you have too many rows, click the
Delete Row button to remove a row from the table.
5.
Select either the Range Comparison option (to define a range of values for each row in the lookup
table) or the Exact Match option (to define a single digital value for each row in the lookup table).
6.
Do one of the following:
7.
8.

Enter the high and low values for each row in the lookup table.

Enter a single lookup value in the Value column for each row in the lookup table.
Enter or select the comparison value for each row in the lookup table by doing one of the following:

If you want to define a color, double-click the color you want to modify and select a new one
from the Color dialog box when it appears.

If you want to enter a string or a numeric value, enter it into the cell.

If you want to select a value from a list, click the down arrow button to display the list of
options and select the value you want.
If you want the object to blink, enter a blink value for each row in the lookup table.
Completing a Format Data Conversion
To complete a format data conversion:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click Configure. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Click the tab containing the property you want to change, and select the Animate check box next to
that property.
4.
From the Data Conversion list, select Format.
527
Creataing Pictures
5.
In the Type field, specify whether you want to write data to the database. In-Place allows the user to
write to the database.
6.
Select the Confirm check box if you want operators to confirm each entry they make.
7.
From the Justify list, select how to justify the data on the screen.
8.
From the Type list, select the type of data.
9.
If the data type is alphanumeric, enter the number of lines to display in the Lines field and the number
of characters per line in the Chars/Line field. If the data type is numeric, enter a value of 0 to 7 in the
Whole Digits field and 0 to 5 in the Decimal field.
10. Select the Raw Format check box if you want to display data in its raw format.
Modifying Animations Error Defaults
To modify animations error defaults:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the WorkSpace menu, select User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
2.
Click the Animations Data Error Defaults tab.
3.
Enter the desired numeric value or text string based on the following guidelines:

For range conversions, enter a numeric string in the appropriate fields of the Linear
Animation Object Defaults area.

For format conversions, enter a text string in the appropriate fields of the Format Animation
Object Defaults area.

For table conversions, enter a numeric or string value in the appropriate Numeric Table
Entries or String Table Entries fields, respectively. To assign a color to the new entry, click
the corresponding field in the Color Table Entries column and select a color from the Select
Color dialog box.
Assigning Blinking Thresholds
To assign a blinking threshold:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, select an object.
2.
In Classic view, click the appropriate Color Expert on the Experts toolbar, or click the Task Wizard
button and select the appropriate Color Expert from the Task Wizard dialog box.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts group, click the Tasks/Experts dialog box
launcher and select the appropriate Color Expert from the Task Wizard dialog box.
528
Using Key Macros
3.
In the Data Source field, enter a data source.
4.
Select the coloring scheme by selecting the appropriate option in the Color By area.
5.
Select the threshold method by selecting the appropriate option in the Color Threshold area.
6.
In the New Alarm area, select the Blink on New Alarm check box.
7.
Click the Blink on New Alarm Color button and select the blink color from the Select Color dialog
box.
Setting the Blink Speed
To set the blink speed:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, double-click the object you want to modify. The Basic Animation dialog box
appears.
2.
Click Configure. The Advanced Animations dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Color tab.
4.
Select the Animate check box for the color property you want (ForegroundColor, BackgroundColor,
EdgeColor, BackDropColor, BackDropBorderColor, BackDropBackgroundColor, or
BackDropFadeColor).
5.
Click the Advanced button and, in the Other Options area, enter a blinking rate (in seconds) in the
Toggle Rate field.
529
Creataing Pictures
Running Your Pictures
Once you have developed your pictures, you are ready to see them go to work for you. All of the development
time you put into your design can now be realized with the click of the mouse.
Because the iFIX configuration environment is fully integrated with the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, running your
pictures is simply a matter of switching environments. You do not have to start another application or leave
your picture. Just click the Switch to Run button on the Standard toolbar (Classic view), or on the Home tab in
the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Run (Ribbon view), or press Ctrl+W. This launches you into the run-time
environment. The Proficy iFIX WorkSpace system tree disables, and the objects in your picture activate. To
return to your drawing, select Switch to Configure from the WorkSpace menu (Classic view), or on the Home
tab in the WorkSpace group, click Switch to Configure (Ribbon view), or press Ctrl+W again.
When working with your pictures in the run-time environment, you have many of the same iFIX WorkSpace
menus available as you did in the configuration environment. The operations you can perform are dependent on
two factors: the type of document that you have open, and the access privileges you are allowed. For example,
typically operators will employ some degree of environmental protection to implement a secure run-time
environment. In this case, some of the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace menus may not be available because access to
specific functions was not granted. For more information on how to implement this type of security, refer to the
Configuring Security Features manual.
The following sections provide detail on the operations you can perform with your pictures while in the runtime environment. For more information on the run-time environment of the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, refer to
the Understanding iFIX manual.
Working with Objects in the Run-time Environment
Objects in your pictures can be controlled, selected, or modified based on the properties you have enabled for
the objects. These properties are enabled in the configuration environment by selecting the appropriate check
box on the Basic Animation dialog box or the General tabbed page of the Advanced Animations dialog box.
The following table details the operations you can perform with objects in the run-time environment based on
the property you have activated.
Object Run-time Attributes
530
By selecting the
check box...
You activate the
property...
Which lets you...
Enable Tooltips
EnableTooltips
Enable tooltips for the object at run-time. Text for the
highlight comes from the Description property.
Using Key Macros
Object Run-time Attributes
By selecting the
check box...
You activate the
property...
Which lets you...
Enable Highlight
HighlightEnabled
Highlight the object at run-time. When the cursor
passes over the object, a single-lined box surrounds the
object.
Enable Select
IsSelectable
Select the object at run-time. When you select the
object, a double-lined box surrounds the object.
Each of the properties can also be animated so that you can perform more specific actions. For more
information on animating object properties, refer to the Animating Object Properties chapter.
Some objects can be modified at run-time by writing and executing Visual Basic scripts. For more detail on
writing scripts to control objects at run-time, refer to the Writing Scripts manual.
Interacting with Alarm Summaries at Run Time
While in the run-time environment you can view and test an Alarm Summary object's configuration. For
example, you can:

Acknowledge the currently selected alarm.

Acknowledge or delete all alarms that match the current filter.

Change the Alarm Summary object's filter or sort configuration.

Change and restore the Alarm Summary object's default settings.

Temporarily disable the alarm refresh rate and instruct the Alarm Summary object to stop updating the
spreadsheet.
For more information on working with Alarm Summary objects in the run-time environment, refer to the
Working with the Alarm Summary Object section of the Implementing Alarms and Messages manual.
Interacting with Charts in Run Time
While in the run-time environment, you can control certain chart properties. Some examples include the
following:

Modifying pen properties using the Chart Customization dialog box.

Zooming in on an area of the chart.

Displaying multiple X and Y axes.
531
Creataing Pictures

Displaying time cursor tooltips to determine plot values and time stamps.
For more information on working with charts in the run-time environment, refer to the Working in the Run-time
Environment section of the Trending Historical Data manual.
Locating Objects
The Locate Object Expert lets you search for an object in the current document or any open documents in the
Proficy iFIX WorkSpace while in the run-time environment. Simply open the Expert and type the object's name
in the Object's Name field. You can access this Expert from the Command Category of the Task Wizard.
Using the Global Time Control
The Global Time Control, which is available on the Historical tab, in the Ribbon view during run mode, allows
you to control the display of objects configured with historical data sources. If the data source configured in an
object is not historical, that is, it uses a real-time data source, the Global Time Control feature has no effect on
it. Using the Global Time Control you can do the following:

Synchronize the time for all historical data sources to the times displayed in the Start Time and End
Time fields (by clicking any of the controls on the Global Time Control). This synchronization applies
to all open pictures where GlobalTimeSync is set to true. The parameters in the Global Time Control
do not persist when you exit run mode.

Set the historical data sources to end at the current time (using the Set to Current Time button)
NOTE: If the historical data source in an object is configured for Current Value mode, the Set to
Current button has no effect on it.

Scroll through the historical data, either forward or backward, quickly or slowly (using the Scroll
buttons).
To use the Global Time Control, the GlobalTimeSync picture property must be set to true. By default,
GlobalTimeSynch is set to true on all pictures. If the GlobalTimeSync is not set to true, than the Global Time
Control and its control buttons has no effect on the open pictures. The GlobalTimeSync property can be
accessed via the picture's Property Window.
Configuring the Global Time Control
To configure the Global Time Control, click Configuration on the Historical tab. This opens the Global Time
Control Configuration dialog box. There, you can set the start time and end time for the historical displays, as
well as the update and scroll rates.
Clicking OK applies the parameters set in the Global Time Control to all open pictures.
The Global Time Control is enabled for all pictures, by default. If you do not want operators to be able to
configure the Global Time Control, then disable this option, by setting GlobalTimeSync to false, via the
Properties window.
532
Using Key Macros
Displaying the Global Time Control
To display the Historical tab, which contains the Global Time Control, you can either:
Click the Historical tab, which will cause it to display until you click elsewhere.
-OrClear the Minimize the Ribbon option from the Quick Access Toolbar, which causes the Historical tab to
display until you leave run mode.
Using the Global Time Control
The Global Time Control has several buttons which control the display. They are pictured in the following
image and detailed in the following table.
Global Time Control
The Global Time Control includes the following buttons:
Global Time Control Buttons
Button
Description
Fast Scroll Back. By default, this scroll value is a percentage of the duration (either
the Duration you entered directly in the Global Time Control Configuration dialog
box, or the duration calculated from the End Time- Start Time in the Global Time
Control Configuration dialog box). Otherwise, this scroll value is the number of
days, hours, minutes, or seconds as defined in the Global Time Control
Configuration dialog box.
Slow Scroll Back. By default, this scroll value is a percentage of the duration (either
the Duration you entered directly in the Global Time Control Configuration dialog
box, or the duration calculated from the End Time- Start Time in the Global Time
Control Configuration dialog box). Otherwise, this scroll value is the number of
days, hours, minutes, or seconds as defined in the Global Time Control
Configuration dialog box.
533
Creataing Pictures
Global Time Control Buttons
Button
Description
Apply the settings from the Global Time Control Configuration dialog box to all
open, or subsequently opened pictures, that have the GlobalTimeSync picture
property set to true.
NOTE: If you have scrolled in your picture, either forward or back, after you click
Apply, the time period displayed in the picture is reset to the period specified in the
Global Time Control Configuration dialog box; the time to which you scrolled is no
longer displayed.
Pause the Historical Update of objects that have a historical update rate configured.
Objects that do not have a historical update rate configured are not affected.
NOTE: Even though a picture is paused, you can still scroll forward or back.
Set the End Time of the Global Time Control to the Current Time.
Slow Scroll Forward. By default, this scrolls the time frame as a percentage of the
duration (either the Duration you entered directly in the Global Time Control
Configuration dialog box, or the duration calculated from the End Time- Start Time
in the Global Time Control Configuration dialog box). Otherwise, this scroll value is
the number of days, hours, minutes, or seconds as defined in the Global Time
Control Configuration dialog box.
Fast Scroll Forward. By default, this scrolls the time frame as a percentage of the
duration (either the Duration you entered directly in the Global Time Control
Configuration dialog box, or the duration calculated from the End Time- Start Time
in the Global Time Control Configuration dialog box). Otherwise, this scroll value is
the number of days, hours, minutes, or seconds as defined in the Global Time
Control Configuration dialog box.
NOTE: Changes made using the Global Time Control apply to historical data sources in all open pictures
which have the GlobalTimeSync property set to true.
The time frame of the data displayed is adjusted to represent the time of your local time zone.
Example
Assume the following settings for the Global Time Control:

534
Duration = 1 hour
Using Key Macros

End Time = 10:00 a.m.

Update Rate = 10 minutes

Slow Scroll Percentage = 10%
Clicking Apply applies these settings to all objects containing historical animations within any open picture that
has the Global Time Control enabled.
In this example, with the preceding parameters configured in the Global Time Control, causes the following to
occur:

Historically animated objects display historical values between 9:00 a.m. and 10:00 a.m.

After 10 minutes, the picture updates, with historical animations displaying values between 9:10 a.m.
and 10:10 a.m.

Clicking Slow Scroll moves the time window for historical animations forward or backward by 6
minutes
Limitations
If you apply a short update rate to pictures that contain a large number of objects with Historical Animations,
you may experience performance issues – your objects may not update at the expected rate.
Using Experts to Expedite Pictures at Run Time
iFIX Experts allow you to perform many different functions at run-time, and several of the Experts provide a
check box that let you specify a function in the run-time environment. The following table details the Experts
that you can use in the configuration environment that let you specify run-time functionality.
NOTE: When using the Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in Run Environment option in the experts,
make sure that the object is highlightable, but not selectable. If the object is selectable when the script is fired,
the script looks at that object for a data source and fails when it cannot find one.
Performing Operations at Run Time Using Experts
To...
Select the check box...
On the Expert...
Open a picture
Select picture to open in Run Environment
Open Picture
Close a picture
Close Current Picture in Run Environment
Close Picture
Replace a picture
Replace Current Picture in Run
Environment
Replace Picture
535
Creataing Pictures
Performing Operations at Run Time Using Experts
536
To...
Select the check box...
On the Expert...
Open a digital tag
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Open Digital Tag
Close a digital tag
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Close Digital Tag
Toggle a digital tag
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Toggle Digital Tag
Write a value to a tag
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Write Value to Tag
Ramp a value to a tag
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Ramp Value to Tag
Turn a tag on scan
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Turn Tag On Scan
Turn a tag off scan
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Turn Tag Off Scan
Set a tag to automatic mode
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Set Tag Auto
Set a tag to manual mode
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Set Tag Manual
Toggle a tag between automatic
and manual mode
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Toggle Tag
Auto/Manual
Enable an alarm
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Enable Alarm
Disable an alarm
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Disable Alarm
Using Key Macros
Performing Operations at Run Time Using Experts
To...
Select the check box...
On the Expert...
Acknowledge an alarm
Use Database Tag(s) for Item(s) Selected in
Run Environment
Acknowledge
Alarm
Acknowledge all alarms
Acknowledge All Alarms for Current
Picture in Run Environment
Acknowledge All
Alarms
For more information on alarm acknowledgment, refer to the Implementing Alarms and Messages manual.
Multiple Picture Instances and Run Mode
At run-time in the iFIX WorkSpace, you can open multiple instances of a single picture. This action is common
for iFIX picture displays in multiple monitor configurations. After opening the picture, you can replace it even
if another instance is already open in the WorkSpace, or choose to close all open instances of the picture.
The following table lists the automation interfaces available for working with multiple picture instances.
iFIX Automation
Interface
Description
OpenPicture Subroutine
Opens the specified picture. Can be configured to open multiple instances of
a specified picture.
OpenTGDPicture
Subroutine
Opens a picture with the specified tag group file. Can be configured to open
multiple instances of a picture with different tag group files.
ReplacePicture Subroutine
Closes a picture and replaces it with another picture. If the picture you select
is already open in the WorkSpace, another instance of that picture opens.
ClosePicture Subroutine
Closes the specified picture. If there are multiple instances of a picture open,
all instances of that picture are closed. If a different alias is assigned to each
instance, you can close one instance using an alias.
Open_QT_Pic_Ex Method
Opens a Quick Trend Picture for the selected object(s) with a set of pens
based on the first eight (8) valid tags. Can be configured to open multiple
instances of a Quick Trend Picture.
537
Creataing Pictures
iFIX Automation
Interface
Description
Open_TCP_Pic_Ex
Method
Opens a Tag Control Panel Picture that displays up to 20 of the valid tags
associated with the currently selected object. Can be configured to open
multiple instances of a Tag Control Panel Picture.
Open_TS_Pic_Type_Ex
Method
Specifies the type of Tag Status picture to open. Can be configured to open
multiple instances of a Tag Status Picture.
Open_TS_Pic_Ex Method
Opens the Tag Status Picture for first found tag for the selected object(s).
Can be configured to open multiple instances of a Tag Status Picture.
Additionally, the following experts allow you to work with multiple picture instances:

Open Picture Expert

Replace Picture Expert

Close Picture Expert
Important Information About Run Mode
In run mode, you can modify the VBA scripting in a new instance of a picture. However, modifications to
scripts in an individual instance of a picture will not be saved. Saving changes to scripts in run mode is not
allowed. To make changes to a script in the main picture, switch to configure mode and edit the script in the
main picture (not the instance). Alternatively, you can edit the VBA script in the main picture (not the
instances) in run mode using the steps below.
To edit a VBA script of a picture with multiple instances open in run mode:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, from the WorkSpace menu, select Visual Basic Editor.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorksSpace group, click the Visual Basic Editor.
538
2.
In the Project tree display, browse to the project you want to edit the script of. Be sure to select the
project with the asterisk (*) next to it. For multiple instances, the asterisk indicates which instance is
one you can save changes to. Changes to projects with the same name, but without the asterisk, will
not be maintained when you switch back to configure mode.
3.
In the Project tree, in your selected project, right-click the object you want to edit and select View
Code. The code will appear in the main editing window.
4.
On the Run menu, select Design Mode.
5.
Make your VBA script changes.
Using Key Macros
6.
On the Run menu, select Exit Design Mode.
7.
Close the VBA Editor.
Now, when you go back to configure mode, you will be able to save your changes.
Using Tag Status and Quick Trend Pictures
The Proficy iFIX WorkSpace run-time environment provides you with three pre-configured picture types that
you can access to view tag information and trends for the currently selected object(s), including alarm summary
objects. These pictures display real-time information about the tags.
These pictures include:

Tag Status (*_TS.grf)

Quick Trend (QuickTrend.grf)

Tag Control Panel (TagControlPanel.grf)
You can access these pictures when the WorkSpace is in run mode.
IMPORTANT: If you create a new iFIX project in the SCU, the TagStatus subdirectory (located in the PIC
directory) is not copied to the new project path. You must copy the TagStatus folder to the new PIC directory.
For more information about creating new projects, refer to the topic Create a Project for Each User Type.
In addition to these pictures, if you select an object (or objects) with one or more associated tags, the title bar of
the iFIX picture displays the tag name of the first tag it finds when the picture opens in run mode.
If you have a single database tag associated with an object, the picture's title bar displays the name of that tag
when that object is selected. The following diagram indicates a single associated database tag.
where:

circles.grf – is the name of the picture the object is a part of.

FIX32.THISNODE – is the name of the name of the SCADA server (where FIX32 is the data system
name, and THISNODE is the alias for the local node name).

ai1 – is the tag name.

f_cv – is the field name whose data is being accessed.
If there are multiple database tags associated with an object, the picture's title bar displays the name of the first
tag it finds, as well as a plus (+) sign to indicate that there are more associated tags. The following diagram
shows a plus sign after the tag name to indicate multiple associated tags.
539
Creataing Pictures
Open a Tag Control Panel picture to view a list of the tags associated with the selected object(s).
NOTES:

An object's IsSelectable property must be set to True so you can select it in the run-time environment,
and the object must be selected to display the tag information in the title bar.

If you clear the Title bar check box in the Edit Pictures dialog box for the current picture, the title bar,
including the picture and tag name information, will not be displayed in the run-time environment.
This is also true for all new pictures, when the Title Bar check box is cleared on the Picture
Preferences tab on the User Preferences dialog box.
Accessing Tag Status, Quick Trend, and Tag Control Panel Pictures
Tag Status, Quick Trend, and Tag Control Panel pictures are available only when the WorkSpace is in run
mode. If a selected object has one or more associated tags, you can right-click the object and choose the picture
type from the menu. You can also select multiple objects and right-click to choose the picture type, as well.
NOTES:

In order to use the Tag Status features, an object must be selectable in the run-time environment. For
information about making an object selectable, refer to Animating an Object's Properties.

You do not have to group objects in configuration mode to access tag status right-click features in run
mode. Simply select multiple objects in run mode prior to accessing the right-click menu.
The following figure shows the right-click menu that appears if at least one tag is associated with the selected
object(s). If only one tag is associated and you choose Quick Trend, the Quick Trend picture for that tag
appears. If there is more than one associated tag, the Quick Trend picture displays a different pen for each valid
tag.
Right-click Menu
If only one tag is associated and you choose Tag Status, the Tag Status picture for that tag appears. If an object
(or objects) has more than one associated tag, then initially, the above right-click menu appears. When you
choose Tag Status, however, a right-click menu like the following one appears.
Right-click Menu Expanded
540
Using Key Macros
This right-click menu allows you to choose the first tag found (in this example, Fix32.THISNODE.ar) or you
can choose Tag Control Panel, which will open the Tag Control Panel picture for this object (or group of
objects).
IMPORTANT: If the VBA Add-on utility has been installed on your machine, and it is configured to use the
RMouseClick Event, the above right-click menus will not be available and you will not be able to access tag
status functionality. Only the VBA utility right-click menu will be available. It is recommended, however, that
you use the Tag Status features because Proficy iFIX 4.0 and greater does not support the VBA Add-on utility.
The Tag Status Picture
Tag status pictures are a set of pre-defined pictures that display information for the selected database tag. One
database tag status picture exists for each iFIX database tag type (for instance, AI, AO, DI, DO, and so on).
The following diagram illustrates what a typical Tag Status picture looks like for an AI database tag type. All
database tags types have their own Tag Status picture and contain similar information.
Tag Status Picture for an AI Database Tag Type
Some tags (that is, database blocks) are designed to work in chains while others are designed to operate on their
own. Tags that can work in chains display the fields Prev Block and Next Block in the Tag Status picture. If the
tags associated with the selected object are configured to work in a chain, the next and/or previous tag in the
chain is displayed in the appropriate fields. You can click these fields to move through the chain and view the
data for the associated tags.
541
Creataing Pictures
Each Tag Status picture contains a real-time trending chart for the selected database tag. The trending charts are
set up to display a 5-minute duration with a 1-second update rate, to a total of 300 viewable points on the chart.
You can enlarge the trending chart by first selecting it then right-clicking and choosing Quick Trend from the
menu. This view of the Quick Trend chart displays only the pen for the selected tag, even if multiple tags are
associated with the object.
Quick Trend Charts in Tag Status Pictures
When a Tag Status picture includes a small Quick Trend chart, you can select this Quick Trend picture and then
right-click it and choose Quick Trend to display an enlarged version for the associated tag. However, not all
tags display a Quick Trend picture or a Quick Trend chart within a Tag Status picture. Only those tags with an
associated F_CV field can display a Quick Trend chart. The following table lists the tags that do not have F_CV
fields:
Tags That Do not Have Quick Trend Chart Capability
Acronym
Description
BB
On-Off Control
DC
Device Control
EV
Event Action
FN
Fanout
HS
Histogram
PA
Pareto
PG
Program
SQD
SQL Data
TX
Text
The Quick Trend Picture
The Quick Trend picture provides you with real-time trending information for up to eight (8) database tags
associated with the selected object(s). The following diagram shows a Quick Trend picture with 5 pens
displaying the data for the associated tags. All of the tags associated with the objects are listed and update the
current value of the tag for the current time. The current time is the time displayed at the right edge of the xaxis.
542
Using Key Macros
Quick Trend Picture Displaying 5 Pens
In this case, there are two AO tags with the same value. These are displayed as a single pen.
For information about Quick Trend charts that appear in Tag Status pictures, refer to Quick Trend Charts in Tag
Status Pictures.
The Tag Control Panel Picture
The Tag Control Panel picture is available from the right-click menu when there are multiple tags associated
with the selected object(s). This picture lets you view the tag names and types, tag values, the last scan times,
units of measure, and alarm information related to each tag associated with the selected object(s).
From the Tag Control Panel picture you can also access the Tag Status or Quick Trend pictures associated with
the selected tags. However, if the tag does not have an F_CV field associated with it, a Quick Trend chart will
not be available. For information on tags that can display a Quick Trend chart, refer to the section Quick Trend
Charts in Tag Status Pictures.
543
Creataing Pictures
Tag Control Panel Picture Displaying 5 Tags
Adding and Deleting Tags
In addition, you can add tags to view their information and the Tag Status and Quick Trend pictures, or you can
delete tags from the list. Adding tags to, or deleting tags from the Tag Control Panel, does not affect their
existence in regard to the selected object(s). Adding and deleting tags are temporary operations; that is, adding a
tag in this picture does not add it to the selected object and deleting a tag, even if it is already associated with
the object, does not delete it from the object.
For example, if the Tag Control Panel picture is full, but you want to view the Quick Trend picture for another
tag, you can delete a tag and add the tag with the information you want to access. The next time you open this
Tag Control Picture the proper tags will be listed; that is, tags you deleted will be visible again and tags you
added will not exist.
Saving and Loading Tag Lists
You can save a tag list that you manually created by using the Save Tag List button. When you have created the
list of tags you want, click the Save Tag List button and save the list to the desired location. When you want to
view a saved tag list, click the Load Tag List button and select the tag list you want to view. Saving and loading
tag lists does not affect the tags that are displayed for the selected object(s).
544
Using Key Macros
Translating Picture Text
Language File Exporter Dialog Box
The Language File Exporter dialog box allows you to export separate language files that you want to translate
for each selected picture.
Export location
Specifies the folder that the language files are exported to. The language files are exported to the PIC folder of
your Proficy iFIX installation location. Language files for Tag Status, Quick Trend, and Tag Control Panel
pictures are exported to the TagStatus subfolder of the main PIC folder.
Select Pictures
Lists all of the pictures in the PIC folder or in the TagStatus subfolder of the main PIC folder.
Show Tag Status Pictures Check Box
Select this check box to display the Tag Status pictures in the Select pictures list. The Export location folder
changes to display the Tag Status folder location.
Always overwrite existing export files Check Box
Select this check box if you want any previously existing language files for the selected picture(s) to be
automatically overwritten. Clear this check box to be prompted to replace existing language files.
Select Language
Specifies the language you want to use for naming the language file.
Select All
Click this button to select all of the pictures in the list.
Deselect All
Click this button to clear your selections from the list.
Export
Click this button to perform the language files export.
545
Creataing Pictures
Exit
Click this button to close the Language File Exporter dialog box without saving any of your changes.
Examples of How to Switch Between Languages
The following examples show you how to use VBA scripting that allows you to change the displayed language
in your pictures when they are opened in run mode.
Example 1 shows you how to set the script at the global level (with SetLanguage). That is, all pictures that have
an exported language file for the set language will display the text in that language when opened in run mode.
Example 2 shows you how to set the script to open a specific picture in run mode (with TranslateOnOpen,
LanguageDesired, and SwitchLanguage) and display the text in the desired language.
Example 3 shows you how to switch the language for a single open picture, dynamically in run mode (with
SwitchLanguage).
TIP: If you want to re-use these examples be sure that you review the important items listed on the Translating
Picture Text topic before doing so, to ensure your configuration is correct.
Example 1: Configure Global Language for all Pictures to Open in Run Mode
The following example shows you how to create a picture that allows you to globally switch between languages
while in run mode, in this case English and Spanish. After you switch the language the first time, any picture
you open from that point onward displays in the specified language, provided a language file exists. You must
close the picture and click another language button to switch the language again. With this example, you must
manually open and close your pictures in run mode.
NOTE: This example assumes that English is the default language that the pictures are created in.
IMPORTANT: If you are using the iFIX WebSpace, it is recommended that you configure the language settings
at the individual picture-level. If you instead configure them globally using this example, you will reset the
language across all pictures for all users. This may be undesirable for your web users. For steps on picturelevel configuration, refer to the second example below.
546
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace configure mode, open the User Preferences and click the Picture Preferences
tab.
2.
In the Cache area, clear the Enable Picture Caching check box if is enabled. This check box must be
disabled if you want to re-open the same picture in the new language, after changing the languages.
3.
In the Picture Translation area, select the Translate Picture on Open check box, and in the Language
drop-down list select Default.
4.
Create a new picture with two push buttons labeled "Open Pictures in English" and "Open Pictures in
Español", as in the following picture.
Using Key Macros
Language Buttons
5.
In configure mode, right-click the Open Pictures in English push button and choose Edit Script. The
Visual Basic Editor appears.
6.
Enter the following script to set the global language:
SetLanguage LANG_English
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6, with the Open Pictures in Español button, but replace the SetLanguage
LANG_English line with SetLanguage LANG_Spanish.
8.
Close the Visual Basic Editor and save the picture with a unique name.
9.
Add some English text to the picture, and save the picture.
10. Export Spanish language files for the pictures that have text you want displayed in Spanish. For steps,
refer to the Exporting Multiple Language Files section.
11. In Notepad, open the Spanish language CSV file for the picture that you generated in the previous step,
and provide translations for the picture text. For steps, refer to the Editing a Language File section.
12. Switch to run mode.
13. Click the Open Pictures in Español button. Any picture that you open after clicking this button will
display the English picture text in Spanish, if the picture has a Spanish CSV file.
NOTE: To display Spanish text for pictures that were opened before clicking the button, close and reopen them. For example, if you close the picture we created in these steps and then re-open it, the text
displays in Spanish.
14. To switch back to English, close any open pictures except the push button picture with the language
settings.
15. Click the Open Pictures in English button and then reopen each picture. The text displays in English.
547
Creataing Pictures
NOTES:

Only one instance of a picture can be open at a time; you must close a picture before opening it to
display the text in a different language.

If a picture does not have a language file for the language you are displaying in, the text will remain in
the default language in which it was created.

You can create as many push buttons as you want to switch between multiple languages.
Example 2: Open a Single Picture in a Desired Language in Run Mode
The following example shows you how to create a picture with push buttons that allow you to open another
picture in run mode and display its text in the desired language; in this case English and Spanish. In this
example, only the picture, MyPicture, will open when either of the buttons is clicked and you can easily switch
between English and Spanish. The OpenPicture command will open multiple instances of the same picture, so
that you can have more than one language version of a picture open at the same time.
NOTE: This example assumes that English is the default language that the pictures are created in.
IMPORTANT: If you are using the iFIX WebSpace to open a picture, be aware that other pictures already
open do not change languages when you open a picture. The language changes only when you open the picture.
TIP: If you want to re-use this example be sure that you review the important items listed on the Translating
Picture Text topic before doing so.
1.
Create a picture with text and name it MyPicture.grf.
2.
Add two push buttons labeled "Open MyPicture in English" and "Open MyPicture in Español", as in
the following picture.
Language Buttons
3.
548
In configure mode, right-click the Open MyPicture in English push button and choose Edit Script. The
Visual Basic Editor appears.
Using Key Macros
4.
Enter the following script to set the TranslateOnOpen, LanguageDesired, and SwitchLanguage:
Dim pic As Object
OpenPicture "MyPicture.grf", , , , , , , , True
Set pic = Application.ActiveDocument.Page
pic.Translateonopen = False
pic.LanguageDesired = 9
pic.SwitchLanguage
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4, with the Open MyPicture in Español button, but replace the
pic.LanguageDesired = 9 line with pic.LanguageDesired = 1034 (1034 is the enumeration that
represents Spanish, where as 9 represents English).
NOTE: For a listing of the enumerations for all supported languages (also called LCIDs) refer to the
Language Letter Acronyms table in the Exporting and Importing Language Files topic.
6.
Close the Visual Basic Editor and save the picture with a unique name.
7.
Add some English text to the picture, and save the picture.
8.
Export a Spanish language file for MyPicture.grf.
9.
Open the language file in Notepad and translate the picture text to Spanish. For steps, refer to the
Editing a Language File section.
NOTE: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel to edit
your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
10. Make sure the Translate Picture on Open check box on the Picture Preferences tab of the User
Preferences dialog box is cleared.
11. Switch to run mode and open the picture with the push buttons.
12. Click the Open MyPicture in Español button. MyPicture.grf opens with the text displayed in Spanish.
13. From the Window menu, choose Tile Vertical to view both pictures.
14. Click the Open MyPicture in English button. The text in MyPicture.grf displays in English.
NOTES:

If a picture does not have a language file for the language you are displaying in, the text will
remain in the default language in which it was created.

You can create as many push buttons as you want to switch between multiple languages. Be sure
that you review the important items listed on the Translating Picture Text topic before doing so,
however.
549
Creataing Pictures
Example 3: Switch the Language of Single Picture to a Desired Language in Run Mode
In the following example, two buttons are created to dynamically switch the language on the currently open
picture in run mode regardless of the TranslateOnOpen and LanguageDesired properties. In this example, the
SwitchLanguage method is used to perform this task.
1.
Create a picture and name it MyPicture.grf.
2.
Add two push buttons labeled "Switch to English" and "Switch to Español", as in the following
picture.
Language Buttons
3.
In configure mode, right-click the Switch to English push button and choose Edit Script. The Visual
Basic Editor appears.
4.
Enter the following script to set the language:
Me.SwitchLanguage 9
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4, with the Switch to Español button, but replace the Me.SwitchLanguage 9
line with Me.SwitchLanguage 1034 (1034 is the enumeration that represents Spanish, where as 9
represents English).
NOTE: For a listing of the enumerations for all supported languages (also called LCIDs) refer to the
Language Letter Acronyms table in the Exporting and Importing Language Files topic.
550
6.
Close the Visual Basic Editor and save the picture with a unique name.
7.
Add some English text to the picture, and save the picture.
8.
Export a Spanish CSV language file for your picture, so you can provide translations for the text you
added in the previous step. For steps, refer to the Exporting a Single Language File section.
9.
Export an English CSV language file for your picture, so that English text displays when you switch
picture languages.
Using Key Macros
NOTE: For each language that you want to use in your picture, prepare a translation file. For
example, if your picture has English, Spanish, and French, you need to create a translation file for
English, Spanish, and French. To create a translation .CSV file, refer to the Exporting a Single
Language File section.
10. Open the Spanish CSV language file in Notepad and translate the picture text to Spanish. For steps,
refer to the Editing a Language File section.
NOTE: If the list separator is a comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel to
edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
11. Make sure the Translate Picture on Open check box on the Picture Preferences tab of the User
Preferences dialog box is cleared.
12. Switch to run mode and toggle between the two languages:

Click the Switch to Español button. Your picture displays text in Spanish.

Click the Switch to English button. Your picture displays text in English.
NOTES:

If a picture does not have a language file for the language you are displaying in, the text will
remain in the default language in which it was created.

You can create as many push buttons as you want to switch between multiple languages. Be
sure that you review the important items listed on the Translating Picture Text topic before
doing so, however.
How Do I...
In the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace, you can perform steps when working with picture text languages:

Configuring the Default Language Settings for All Pictures

Configuring Language Settings for an Individual Picture

Exporting a Single Language File

Exporting Multiple Language Files

Editing a Language File

Importing a Language File in Configuration Mode
Configuring the Default Language Settings for All Pictures
If you develop your picture(s) in one language (in configure mode), but want to provide the text in a different
language for operators viewing pictures (in run mode), you can do this in the WorkSpace. Use the steps below if
you want all pictures set to the same default language for run mode viewing.
551
Creataing Pictures
If you use the global language setting, it is recommended that you do not implement language settings at the
individual picture-level.
NOTE: You will also need to export language CSV files for each picture and provide translations in each of
these files using Notepad or Microsoft Excel to support this feature. A link to these steps is provided below.
IMPORTANT: If you are using the iFIX WebSpace, it is recommended that you configure your language
settings at the individual picture-level. If you instead configure them globally using the steps below, all users
will have the same language settings for all pictures, after the script is run. This may be undesirable for your
web users. For steps on picture-level configuration, refer to the Configuring Language Settings for an
Individual Picture section.
To configure default language for all pictures when opened in run mode:
1.
Open the iFIX WorkSpace in configuration mode.
2.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
3.
Click the Picture Preferences tab and select the Translate Picture On Open check box. (If it is selected,
the LanguageDesired and TranslateOnOpen properties at the picture-level cannot be changed from the
Properties window.)
4.
In the Language drop-down, select the default you want to set for all pictures.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Create language CSV files for your pictures that you want to translate the text for on open. Refer to the
Exporting Multiple Language Files section for steps on how to generate your CSV files.
Configuring Language Settings for an Individual Picture
If you develop a picture in one language (in configure mode), but want to provide the text in a different
language for operators viewing the picture (in run mode), you can do this in the WorkSpace. Use the steps
below if you want a single picture to display a different language in run mode.
If you use the individual picture-level settings, it is recommended that you do not implement the global, default
language settings.
NOTE: You will also need to export a language CSV file for the picture and provide translations for this file in
Notepad or Microsoft Excel to support this feature. These steps are included below.
To configure the language for a single picture when opened in run mode:
552
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace configuration mode, open the picture with the text strings you want to
translate.
2.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click User Preferences.
Using Key Macros
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
3.
Click the Picture Preferences tab and make sure the Translate Picture On Open check box is cleared.
(If it is cleared, the LanguageDesired and TranslateOnOpen properties at the picture-level can be
changed from the Properties window.)
4.
Click OK.
5.
Right-click anywhere in the picture and choose Property Window.
6.
From the LanguageDesired property, select the language you want to use for the language CSV file.
NOTE: If you are entering this information programmatically in VBA instead of using the Property
window, you can find a listing of the enumerations for all supported languages (also called LCIDs) in
the Language Letter Acronyms table in the Exporting and Importing Language Files topic.
7.
From the TranslateOnOpen property, select True so that the displayed picture text will be
automatically translated when the picture is opened in run mode.
8.
Save the picture.
9.
On the Translation Toolbar, click the Export language file button. The language CSV file is saved to
the PIC folder.
10. Open the language CSV file in Notepad or Microsoft Excel and translate the text strings.
IMPORTANT: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel
to edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
11. Open the picture in run mode. The picture's text strings are displayed in the translated language.
Exporting a Single Language File
1.
In the WorkSpace configuration mode, open the picture you want to export a language file for.
2.
In Classic view, on the WorkSpace menu, click User Preferences.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Home tab, in the WorkSpace group, click Settings, and then click User
Preferences.
3.
Click the Picture Preferences tab and make sure the Translate Picture On Open check box is cleared. If
it is selected, the LanguageDesired and TranslateOnOpen properties in the Properties window cannot
be changed.
4.
Click OK to close the User Preferences dialog box.
5.
Right-click in the picture (in an area without any objects) and choose Property Window.
6.
From the LanguageDesired list, select the language that you want to generate a CSV for.
553
Creataing Pictures
7.
From the TranslateOnOpen list, select Yes.
8.
Display the Translation toolbar, if it is not already open. To do so:
9.
a.
In the tree view area, open the Project Toolbar Files folder and then the Toolbars folder.
b.
Double-click TranslationToolbar to open the toolbar.
On the Translation toolbar, click the Export language file button. A message appears letting you know
the language file was successfully exported.
You can now open the language file in Notepad or Microsoft Excel and translate the text strings for the
picture.
IMPORTANT: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel
to edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
Exporting Multiple Language Files
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, display the Translation toolbar, if it is not already open. To do so:
a.
In the tree view area, open the Project Toolbar Files folder and then the Toolbars folder.
b.
Double-click TranslationToolbar to open the toolbar.
2.
On the Translation toolbar, click the Export multiple language files button.
3.
In the Select pictures list, select the check box for each picture you want to export a language file for.
4.
If applicable, select the Always overwrite existing export files check box. If you are exporting a
language file for a picture that already has a language file for the selected language, the existing
language file will be automatically overwritten. If you clear this check box, you will be prompted to
replace the existing language file. Click Yes to replace it and No to keep it.
5.
From the Select language list, choose the language that you want to provide translations for.
6.
Click Export. A separate language file is created for each picture you selected.
You can now open each language file in Notepad or Microsoft Excel, and translate the text strings for
the pictures.
IMPORTANT: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel
to edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
Editing a Language File
1.
554
In Windows Explorer, locate the CSV file for your picture text translations. It is saved in the same
folder as your pictures. By default, this folder is C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC.
Using Key Macros
NOTE: The file name is appended with the language abbreviation. For example, a Spanish translation
file would be appended with _ES, such as MyPicture_ES.csv.
2.
In Notepad or Microsoft Excel, open the CSV file.
IMPORTANT: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel
to edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
3.
Provide translations in the Translated Text segments, and make adjustments to fonts and point sizes as
necessary.
4.
Save the file.
To import a language file in configuration mode:
1.
If you have not already done so, in Notepad or Microsoft Excel, open the picture's language file and
translate the applicable text strings.
IMPORTANT: If list separator is comma in your local regional settings, you can use Microsoft Excel
to edit your .CSV files. Otherwise, it is recommended that you use Notepad to edit your .CSV files. It is
important that you use the proper text editor, so that the list separator, a comma, gets saved properly
using your operating system's native regional settings. If you are unsure of your settings, use Notepad
to edit your .CSV files.
2.
In the iFIX WorkSpace configuration mode, open the picture whose language file you translated.
3.
If applicable, set the LanguageDesired property to the same language letter acronym used in the
language file name.
4.
Display the Translation toolbar, if it is not already open. To do so:
5.
a.
In the tree view area, open the Project Toolbar Files folder and then the Toolbars folder.
b.
Double-click TranslationToolbar to open the toolbar.
On the Translation toolbar, click the Import language file button. The picture text is immediately
displayed in the translated language from the language file.
NOTE: Importing language files is useful if you want to save your pictures with the translated text
strings.
Using Tag Groups in Pictures
Tag groups allow you to create one picture to show multiple representations of your process. For example, you
can use one picture to represent similar lines on a plant floor. You use the iFIX Tag Group Editor
(TagGroupEditor.exe) to create these tag groups in iFIX.
555
Creataing Pictures
A tag group is composed of a symbol, a corresponding substitution, and an optional description field. Symbols
are placeholders for data sources or text in a picture. Substitutions are alphanumeric character strings that
replace symbols in a picture. A tag group file is a binary file that consists of the symbols, substitutions, and
descriptions for each tag group.
You use symbols in areas of your picture where data points are needed to represent specific process values. A
substitution can be a tagname or text, depending on where the corresponding symbol is being used in a picture.
For example, if you want to change a button label when a picture opens, you would enter text for the
substitution.
You can create several tag group files that associate symbols with specific substitutions in the run-time
environment.
Example: Using Tag Groups in Pictures
Suppose you work in a factory that produces both oatmeal and chocolate chip cookies, and each type of cookie
requires a different baking temperature. Your factory has three ovens that are controlled by different databases
with a similar block structure: Analog Input and Analog Output.
Your real-time control strategy calls for operators to monitor the temperature in each furnace. This strategy calls
for you to develop three operator displays. You realize, however, that the only difference between the displays
are the tagnames that reference different databases.
You can use the Tag Group Editor to cut development time and save a considerable amount of disk space by
creating one picture and three tag group files. In the picture, you assign symbols in place of tagnames and then,
at run time, call a tag group file to replace the symbols with real tagnames. You call a different tag group
depending upon which cookie furnace you want to display.
Using the Tag Group Editor
The Tag Group Editor (TagGroupEditor.exe) is a simple spreadsheet interface that allows you to develop
multiple tag group files and apply them to one picture. The tags can reside in different databases.
You enter data into the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet to associate symbols with substitutions. You then save the
data in a tag group file, with the extension TGD. When a picture opens, or when a new picture replaces the
current picture, iFIX reads the tag group file and replaces the symbols with the corresponding substitutions, as
defined in the tag group file.
NOTE: The Recipe Builder requires the .TGE file format when using tag group files. As such, the Recipe
Builder uses the FIX32 Tag Group Editor (TGE.EXE). The iFIX Tag Group Editor (TagGroupEditor.exe) is
used for creating tag groups in iFIX pictures in .TGD file format. The Recipe Builder cannot use these newer
.TGD files.
Getting Ready to Use the Tag Group Editor
Tag groups are most efficiently implemented when your database design is stable and complete. You should
perform the following tasks before you begin to develop tag group files:
556
Using Key Macros

Before you develop your database, adopt a standard naming convention.

For example, for the temperature of Oven1, name the Analog Input block TOV01. For the
corresponding block in Oven2, name it TOV02.

Develop a list of similar tagnames that exist in the same database, or in different nodes or databases.
The list should include the data system, node name, tagname, block type, field name, and symbol.

This list helps you create multiple tag group files quickly and accurately.
Starting the Tag Group Editor
In Classic view, start the Tag Group Editor from the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace by clicking the Tag Group Editor
button on the Application toolbar shown below:
Tag Group Editor Button on the Application Toolbar
In Ribbon view, on the Applications tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
The Tag Group Editor Window
The Tag Group Editor window looks similar to the following:
Tag Group Editor Window
557
Creataing Pictures
Creating and Opening Tag Group Files
Once you start the Tag Group Editor, you are ready to work with tag group files. You can start by creating a
new tag group file or you can open an existing one.
To open an existing tag group file, click the Open button. To open a new, empty tag group file, click the New
button.
You can have only one tag group file open at a time. If you made changes to a file that is currently open, you
will be prompted to save it.
To save a tag group file, click the Save button. Tag group files are automatically saved with the .TGD extension
in the Proficy iFIX\PIC directory.
NOTE: The tag group file must be located in the Proficy iFIX\PIC directory for tag group substitutions to work
correctly.
Column Definitions for the Tag Group Editor
The following table describes the columns of the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet and the information that you
can enter into them.
NOTE: You can access these columns only when a row is active. Click a row to make it active.
Column Definitions for the Tag Group Editor
Column
Definition
Valid Field Values
Symbol
The text that is replaced by a substitution string.
(Required field) Can contain up to 60
characters. The first character must
be a letter.
Substitution
The tagname or text of the substitution,
depending upon where the corresponding
symbol is being used in the picture.
(Required field) Can contain up to 60
characters.
NOTE: Be sure to enter the text exactly as you
want it to appear in the picture. If the
substitution needs to be in a specific format,
make sure the text is formatted correctly.
Get Full
Name
558
When you are using tagnames for substitutions,
displays the fully qualified name for the tag.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended
that you use the fully qualified name
for the tagname.
–
Using Key Macros
Column Definitions for the Tag Group Editor
Column
Definition
Valid Field Values
Description
The text that describes the function of the tag
group.
(Optional field) Can contain up to 60
alphanumeric characters, including
special characters, such as -(*)&+%
and spaces.
Using the Tag Group Editor Toolbar
Many of the commands found on the menu bar have corresponding toolbar buttons. The following table
describes the functions of the buttons that are specific to the Tag Group Editor.
Tag Group Editor Toolbar Buttons
Click this
button...
To...
Cut the contents of the cell where the insertion point is positioned, and move it to the
Clipboard.
Copy the contents of the cell where the insertion point is positioned, and place it on
the Clipboard.
Paste the contents of the Clipboard into the cell where the insertion point is
positioned.
Delete the contents of the cell where the insertion point is positioned.
Add a row to the end of the spreadsheet.
Insert a row above the row containing the insertion point.
Delete the row where the insertion point is positioned.
Retrieve all the symbols from your picture and insert them into the Symbol column of
the spreadsheet.
NOTE: Use this button only if all the substitutions in the tag group file are tagnames
and none are text.
559
Creataing Pictures
Tag Group Editor Toolbar Buttons
Click this
button...
To...
Retrieve the fully qualified name for all tags entered in the Substitution column.
Change the font displayed in the Tag Group Editor.
Using the Tag Group Editor Spreadsheet
You can enter and edit Symbols, Substitutions, and Descriptions in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet.
You can also use some special functions to automate data entry or to manipulate the data in the spreadsheet.
These functions are described in the sections that follow.
Retrieving Fully Qualified Names for Substitutions in a Spreadsheet
A fully qualified tagname consists of four parts:

Data system

Node

Tag

Field
Each element is separated by periods, as shown in the following example:
Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV
In this example, Fix32 is the name of the data system, THISNODE is the node name, AI1 is the tagname, and
F_CV is the field name.
From the Tag Group Editor, you can automatically:

Insert a fully qualified name for an individual tagname.

Retrieve the fully qualified names for all substitutions in a spreadsheet. (All of substitutions in the
spreadsheet must be tagnames; none of them can be text.)
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you use the fully qualified names of tags for substitutions in a
spreadsheet.
560
Using Key Macros
Using the Data Entry Dialog Box to Define Substitutions
Double-clicking the item number in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet displays the Data Entry dialog box, from
which you can:

Access the Data Source Browser expression builder to define the substitution.

Create the data source for a substitution tagname.

Retrieve the fully qualified name for a substitution tagname.
Sorting Data in the Spreadsheet
You can sort the data in any column in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet.
Searching and Replacing Substitutions
You can make multiple changes to tagname substitutions. This involves:

Converting the file to comma separated value (CSV) format

Making the changes in a third-party spreadsheet or text editor

Re-opening and re-saving the file in the Tag Group Editor.
IMPORTANT: GE Intelligent Platforms ships two Tag Group Editors: one is for use with pictures and the
other is for use with recipes. The Tag Group Editor discussed in this manual is intended for use with pictures.
To use the Tag Group Editor with recipes, double-click the icon for the TGE.EXE program, located in your
iFIX root directory.
Retrieving Symbols from a Picture
You may have so many symbols in a picture that entering all of them into the spreadsheet would be very timeconsuming. To automatically retrieve all the symbols from a picture and insert them into the spreadsheet, you
can use the Get Symbols From Picture button on the Tag Group Editor toolbar. The Symbols column is cleared
and all of the symbols from the picture, including symbols that are used in a picture's script, are automatically
inserted into the spreadsheet. You can then alphabetically sort the symbols by clicking the Symbol column
heading.
NOTE: If you add new symbol substitutions on text, pushbutton, or variable objects to a picture, these symbols
will NOT be read into the Tag Group Editor until the picture is resaved. New symbols on the objects in question
will only be read into the Tag Group Editor when the picture is saved.
Using Tag Group Symbols in Pictures
You can enter tag group symbols in a picture for the following object properties:

Command button caption
561
Creataing Pictures

Variable object current value

Text object caption

Animation data source

Chart pen data source (historical and real-time)

Enhanced chart data source (historical and real-time)

Event data source

Data link data source

Historical data link data source
You can also use tag group symbols with the following picture methods in a script:

TagGroupValue

TagGroupSubstitution
Implementing a Tag Group Strategy
There are three major tasks that you must perform to successfully implement your tag group strategy:
1.
Create a picture that uses symbols in areas where data points are needed to represent a specific process
value. For more information, refer to Creating and Opening Pictures.
2.
Create several different tag group files that associate the symbols in the picture with different tags.
3.
Assign the tag group file to load when a picture opens, or when a new picture replaces an existing one.
For more information, refer to Assigning a Tag Group File to a Picture Event.
Entering a Symbol in a Picture
Entering a Symbol in a Picture
When you enter a symbol in a picture, you must type an at sign (@) at the beginning and end of the symbol
name. This allows the iFIX software to differentiate tag group symbols from ordinary text.
NOTE: When defining symbols in the Symbol column of the Tag Group Editor, you only need to enter the
symbol name, not the @ signs.
Example
You want to enter a data link in a picture that displays the value of a temperature output block. You will use this
picture three times to show three similar processes. To use a symbol called Temperature in the picture, enter the
following for the data link:
@Temperature@
562
Using Key Macros
When the iFIX software reads text in this format, it identifies the text as a tag group symbol. When a picture
opens, or a new picture replaces the current one, the symbol is replaced with the assigned substitution.
In the Symbol column of the Tag Group Editor you would enter:
Temperature
For more information, see Syntax Guidelines for Symbols in Pictures.
Using Partial Substitutions
You may only want to substitute a specific section of a tag or a string of text. This is known as a partial
substitution. The Tag Group Editor can perform partial substitutions. However, there are some rules you must
follow:

Make sure there is an @ sign at the beginning and end of the symbol to denote where the symbol name
begins and ends.

Keep track of your @ signs if you are using a symbol in a tagname.
For example, if you want @Tag1@ to be the symbol in a partial text substitution, you must enter:
@Tag1@Ready
For more information, see Syntax Guidelines for Symbols in Pictures.
Partial Substitution Errors in Data Sources
Be careful when using a partial substitution in a data source. If the source of a substitution does not currently
exist in the data system, a connection will be forced. However, you will only know that this has occurred when
you receive an error message at run time. This can happen if you made a typographical error when you entered
a substitution or if you entered duplicate data.
For example, you enter a partial substitution as the source for a data link, as follows:
Fix32.@tag1@
However, in the tag group file, you entered the following substitution for @tag1@:
Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV
When this substitution occurs, the data source is now Fix32.Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV. Since the data
system thinks that this source can be created, it will force the connection.
For more information about using symbols for partial substitutions, see Syntax Guidelines for Symbols in
Pictures.
563
Creataing Pictures
Syntax Guidelines for Symbols in Pictures
To perform a partial substitution for a tag, follow the syntax guidelines below:
Symbols in Pictures – Dos and Don'ts
Enter...
Do not enter...
Because...
Node.@tag1@.f_cv
Node@tag1@f_cv
You must separate elements with periods.
In this example, there must be a period
between the node and the tag, and the tag
and the field.
@tag1@.@field@
@tag1@.@field
You must start and end every symbol
with an at sign (@). In this example, a
substitution will not occur for field
because the symbol must end with an at
sign (@).
Node.@tag1@.@field@
Node.@tag1@field@
You must separate elements with periods.
Also, you cannot share at signs (@). Text
beginning and ending with an at sign (@)
denotes a symbol to be replaced. In this
example, a substitution will occur for
tag1 but not for field.
Node.@unit@@device@.f_cv
Node.@unit@device@.f_cv
You cannot share at signs (@). In this
example, a substitution will occur for unit
but not for device.
@tag1@ + @tag2@
@tag1@+@tag2@
You must enter a space before and after
the mathematical operator (the plus sign
(+) in this example).
( @tag1@ + @tag2@ ) / 2
(@tag1@ - @tag2@) / 2
You must enter a space before and after
the tag group when using parenthesis.
Using Symbols for the Current Value of a Variable Object
When using symbols to represent a data source for the current value of a variable object, you must also assign
the symbol to the initial value of the variable object. The initial value is written to the current value when a
picture opens, which means the symbol will be overwritten by the content of the initial value. If you assign a
symbol to the current value only, you will lose your tag group substitution.
564
Using Key Macros
Using Symbols for Complex Expressions
You cannot substitute a complex expression for a single symbol. For example, you cannot substitute the
following expression:
Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV + 10
for the following symbol:
@tag1@
However, you can use partial substitutions to represent each part of the expression. For example, if you want to
use symbols for the complex expression above, you would use two symbols, as follows:
@tag1@ + @tag2@
where the substitution for @tag1@ would be Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV, and the substitution for @tag2@
would be 10.
Assigning a Tag Group File to a Picture Event
Before substitutions can occur in the run-time environment, you must assign the tag group file to load when a
picture opens.
You can also assign the tag group file to load when a new picture replaces an existing one.
Optimizing Picture Loading in the Run-time Environment
The Tag Group Editor provides a way to get the best possible picture loading performance in the run-time
environment. After you have completed the design process, you can optimize the load performance by choosing
the Resolve Tags command from the File menu. When this action occurs, the picture looks for the tag group
substitutions, replaces the symbols with the substitutions, and establishes connections between the objects in the
picture and the true data sources.
The Tag Group Editor saves these connections, along with information identifying the version number of the
picture and the tag group file, and the identifying strings after substitution, in the tag group storage file (.TGS).
There is only one tag group storage file per node.
Error Log Creation
The Tag Group Editor creates a text file, TGEERROR.LOG, in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy
iFIX\LOCAL path, which contains a list of errors that occur during the resolution process. Make sure that you
open this file and verify any errors. If there are no errors, the log will be empty.
OPC Server Address Substitution
The steps below describe how to use an OPC address substitution with Symbols in the Tag Group Editor.
565
Creataing Pictures
To use an OPC address substitution with Symbols in the Tag Group Editor:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor's Substitution field, paste the OPC address name.
2.
Remove the quotes from the address name.
3.
On the Tag Group Editor's File menu, click Resolve Tags.
Importing and Exporting Tag Group Files
The Tag Group Editor can import and export tag group information that is formatted as a comma separated
value (.CSV) file. Comma separated value files are useful if you want to exchange tag group information with a
third-party text editor, spreadsheet, or word processor.
Comma separated value files have several benefits:

You can enter tag group information into an application, such as Microsoft Excel or a text editor, that
you are more familiar with and then import this information into the Tag Group Editor.

You can generate a report by printing the comma separated value (.CSV) file as a text file. The report
provides a list of all symbols, substitutions, and descriptions defined in the Tag Group Editor
spreadsheet. This list can help you verify your tag groups before you implement them into your
SCADA strategy.
Understanding the CSV File Format
If you use Microsoft Excel or another spreadsheet application that provides a CSV file format option, the
application does all the required formatting for you. However, if you prefer to use a text editor, you must follow
some simple formatting rules to ensure that the text file is successfully imported into the Tag Group Editor.
CSV File Formatting Rules
Each line in your text file represents one row when opened in the Tag Group Editor. Use the following rules
when formatting your text file:
566

Enter the information in the same order as it appears in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet: symbol,
substitution, description.

The symbols, substitutions, and descriptions that you enter into your text file have the same length
limitations as the corresponding component in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet.

Use a list separator to separate each component of the tag group. You must use the list separator that is
defined through Regional Settings, Number tab, in Control Panel. In most cases, this is a comma (,).

Do not include comments or blank lines in your CSV file. If you do, a message appears at the point
that the Tag Group Editor first encounters either a comment or a blank line, and the file will stop
loading.

The first line of your CSV file must contain only the total number of lines, or tag group entries, in the
tag group file. For example, if your CSV file contains six tag groups, the first line of the file should be
the following:
Using Key Macros
"6"
If your CSV file does not contain this line, it will not open in the Tag Group Editor.

If the name of a symbol, substitution, or description contains a quotation mark (") or the same list
separator defined through Regional Settings in Control Panel, you must do the following:

Enclose that item in quotation marks.

Type an extra quotation mark before each quotation mark within that item.
For example, if you are entering a symbol named OVEN"TEMP1 into your text editor, you must type
"OVEN""TEMP1" as your symbol name.
Example: A Sample CSV File
Each line in a CSV file represents a row in the Tag Group Editor spreadsheet, except the first line. The first line
of a CSV file represents the total number of tag groups contained in the tag group file. The following example
depicts a CSV file created by the Tag Group Editor.
"3"
"OVENTEMP1", "Fix32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV", "Oven 1 current temperature"
"OVENTEMP2", "Fix32.THISNODE.AI2.F_CV", "Oven 2 current temperature"
"OVENTEMP3", "Fix32.THISNODE.AI3.F_CV", "Oven 3 current temperature"
As this example shows, tag group components are separated by a list separator and enclosed in quotation marks.
The Tag Group Editor does this as a safeguard even though the only items that require quotation marks are list
separators used within an item, and other quotation marks. In fact, you can delete the quotation marks around
any component that does not contain a defined list separator or quotation mark.
Exporting a Tag Group File as a CSV File
You can export a tag group file to a file in comma separated value (CSV) format. Then you can view the
information in a text editor or in Microsoft Excel or another spreadsheet application that provides a CSV file
format option.
Converting 6.x Tag Group Files
You must convert all tag group files created in the 6.x Tag Group Editor to the current tag group file (.TGD)
format. You do this by opening the file in the 6.x Tag Group Editor, and saving it as a CSV file. You then
convert the CSV file to a TGD file by choosing the Convert CSV Files to TGD Files command in the File
menu.
Tag Group Editor Dialog Boxes
The iFIX Tag Group Editor includes the following dialog boxes (listed in alphabetical order):

Convert 6.x CSV Files Dialog Box
567
Creataing Pictures

Data Entry Dialog Box

Tag Group Editor Main Window
Convert 6.x CSV Files Dialog Box
The Convert 6.x CSV Files dialog box displays the following items:
6.x .CSV File Directory
Enter the path to the directory containing your 6.x CSV files. The path must end with a backslash (\).
CSV File List
Select the files you want to convert. You can select more than one file by pressing and holding down the
<CTRL> key.
Update .CSV File List
Click this button to update the contents of the CSV File List. You must click this button after you enter a file
path in the 6.x .CSV File Directory box.
Select All
Click this button to select all of the files in the CSV File List.
Deselect All
Click this button to deselect all of the currently selected files in the CSV File List.
Data Entry Dialog Box
The Data Entry dialog box displays the following items:
Symbol
Enter a symbol that is defined in your picture. Do not enter the starting and ending delimiters (@). For example,
if you enter @tag1@ as a symbol in a picture, you only have to enter tag1 in the spreadsheet.
Valid values – Can contain up to 60 alphanumeric characters. The first character must be a letter. This field is
mandatory.
568
Using Key Macros
Substitution
Enter a substitution for the defined symbol. You can enter a tagname or text, depending upon where the
corresponding symbol is being used in a picture. Click Browse to open the Expression Builder. Click Modify
Database Block to modify a database block directly without opening the Database Manager.
Valid values – Can contain up to 1024 alphanumeric characters. The first character must be a letter. This field
is mandatory.
Browse
Click Browse to open the Expression Builder.
Modify Database Block
Click Modify Database Block to modify a database block directly without opening the Database Manager.
Get Full Name
Click Get Full Name to get the fully qualified name for a tag. For example, if you enter AI1 in the Substitution
field and have an AI1 database block defined in your database, the Default Data System.Node.AI1.Field is
automatically entered when you click the Get Full Name button. Use this button when you want to perform a
full tag substitution.
Description
Enter text that describes the function of the tag group.
Valid values – Can contain up to 256 alphanumeric characters, including special characters, such as –(*)&+%
and spaces. This field is optional.
Tag Group Editor Main Window
The Tag Group Editor main window displays the following items:
Symbol
Enter a symbol that is defined in your picture. Do not enter the starting and ending delimiters (@). For example,
if you enter @tag1@ as a symbol in a picture, you only have to enter tag1 in the spreadsheet.
Valid values – Can contain up to 60 alphanumeric characters. The first character must be a letter. This field is
mandatory.
569
Creataing Pictures
Substitution
Enter a substitution for the defined symbol. You can enter a tagname or text, depending upon where the
corresponding symbol is being used in a picture. Click Browse to open the Expression Builder. Click Modify
Database Block to modify a database block directly without opening the Database Manager.
IMPORTANT:

It is recommended that you use the fully qualified tagnames or explicitly use the F_CV field in the
substituted text.

If the object of your substitution is an element in an OPC server address that includes double quotes
surrounding its data items, you should not include the double quotes in the tag group substitution
string. Substitution strings enclosed in double quotes may cause issues with partial data source
substitutions.
Valid values – Can contain up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The first character must be a letter. This field is
mandatory.
Get Full Name
Click Get Full Name to get the fully qualified name for a tag. For example, if you enter AI1 in the Substitution
field and have an AI1 database block defined in your database, the Default Data System.Node.AI1.Field is
automatically entered when you click Get Full Name. Use this button when you want to perform a full tag
substitution.
Description
Enter text that describes the function of the tag group.
Valid values – Can contain up to 60 alphanumeric characters, including special characters, such as –(*)&+%
and spaces. This field is optional.
How Do I...
Click any of the following links for more information about the Tag Group Editor:
570

Performing Basic Functions

Entering Data into the Spreadsheet

Editing a Tag Group File

Resolving Tags With a Picture

Assigning a Tag Group File to a Picture Event

Importing and Exporting Tag Group Files
Using Key Macros
Performing Basic Functions
Click any of the following links for more information about performing basic functions in the Tag Group
Editor:

Creating a New Tag Group File

Opening an Existing Tag Group File

Changing the Font

Saving a Tag Group File

Closing a Tag Group File

Exiting the Tag Group Editor
Creating a New Tag Group File
To create a new tag group file:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
Click the New toolbar button.
3.
Enter the symbol, substitution, and description data for all of the tag groups that you want to define.
4.
When you are done, click the Save toolbar button. The Save As dialog box appears. By default, it is set
to the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC path.
5.
Enter a file name, and click Save. The file is saved with a .TGD extension.
TIPS:
 You can have only one tag group file open at a time. If you made changes to a file that is currently
open, you will be prompted to save it. The iFIX Tag Group Editor replaces the currently open file
with a new, empty tag group file.
 The tag group file must be located in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC directory for
tag group substitutions to work correctly.
 You can use an existing tag group file as a template from which to create a new tag group file.
When you are ready to save your changes, make sure that you save this file with a different file
name.
Opening an Existing Tag Group File
To open an existing tag group file:
571
Creataing Pictures
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
Click the Open toolbar button. The Open dialog box appears. By default, it is set to the C:\Program
Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC path.
3.
Select the tag group file that you want to open, and click Open.
TIPS:

You can have only one tag group file open at a time. If you made changes to a file that is currently
open, you will be prompted to save it. The iFIX Tag Group Editor replaces the currently open file
with the file that you selected.
 The tag group file must be located in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC directory for
tag group substitutions to work correctly.
Changing the Font
To change the font:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click the Set Font toolbar button.
2.
Select the font, font style, and size that you want to be displayed in the Tag Group Editor, and click
OK.
Saving a Tag Group File
To save a tag group file:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click the Save toolbar button. If you haven't previously saved the file,
the Save As dialog box appears. By default, it is set to the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC
path.
2.
Enter a file name, and click Save. The file will be saved with a .TGD extension.
TIPS:
572

If information is missing from the spreadsheet, a message will appear:

If you left a symbol cell blank, you must fill in the missing information before you can save the
tag group file. When you have finished, click the Save toolbar button again.

If you left a substitution cell blank, choose Yes to save the file. Choose No to fill in the missing
substitution before you save.

The tag group file must be located in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC directory
for tag group substitutions to work correctly.
Using Key Macros
Closing a Tag Group File
Once the iFIX Tag Group Editor opens a tag group file, it cannot open another until the active file is closed.
To close a tag group file:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click the Open toolbar button. The iFIX Tag Group Editor closes the
active file and opens the file that you selected.
2.
If you made changes to the active file, you will be prompted to save it.
Exiting the iFIX Tag Group Editor
To exit the iFIX Tag Group Editor:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click Exit on the File menu.
2.
If you made changes to a file that is currently open, you will be prompted to save it before the iFIX
Tag Group Editor closes.
Entering Data into the Spreadsheet
Click any of the following links for more information about entering data into the spreadsheet:

Entering Symbols Directly into the Spreadsheet

Entering Substitutions Directly into the Spreadsheet

Entering Descriptions Directly into the Spreadsheet

Entering Data If You Don't Know the Substitution Name
Entering Symbols Directly Into the Spreadsheet
To enter symbols directly into the spreadsheet:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
Create a new tag group file.
3.
Make sure the picture for which you are creating a tag group file is open in the Proficy iFIX
WorkSpace.
4.
Click the Get Symbols From Picture button on the toolbar. The Symbols column is filled in with the
symbols defined in the picture.
TIP: You can also enter a symbol directly into the symbol cell.
573
Creataing Pictures
Entering Substitutions Directly Into the Spreadsheet
To enter substitutions directly into the spreadsheet:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, enter either a tagname or text directly into a substitution cell.
3.
If you are substituting a tagname for a symbol, click the Get Full Name button. The fully qualified
name for that tag is inserted into the substitution cell.
For example, if you enter AI1 in a substitution cell and click the Get Full Name button next to it,
FIX32.THISNODE.AI1.F_CV automatically appears in the substitution cell. If the data source does
not exist, a message will appear asking if you want to create it.
TIP: If you want to retrieve all of the fully qualified names at once, enter all of the tagnames into the
spreadsheet, and click the Get Full Name column heading. The fully qualified names for all of the
tagnames are automatically inserted into the Substitution column.
Entering Descriptions Directly Into the Spreadsheet
To enter descriptions directly into the spreadsheet:
1.
In Classic View, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
In the main window, enter the description directly into the description cell.
Entering Data If You Don't Know the Substitution Name
To enter data if you don't know the substitution name:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
574
2.
Double-click a row number. The Data Entry dialog box appears.
3.
In the Symbol box, enter the text you want to use for the symbol.
4.
From the Substitution list, select a tagname, or do one of the following:

Click Browse to open the Expression Builder dialog box.

Click Modify Database Block to create the data source. You must enter a tagname before you
can use this button.
Using Key Macros

5.
Click Get Full Name to retrieve the fully qualified name. You must enter a tagname before
you can use this button.
In the Description box, enter text that describes the function of the tag group substitution, and click
OK.
Editing a Tag Group File
Click any of the following links for more information about editing a tag group file:

Editing a Cell

Deleting the Contents of a Cell

Inserting a Row

Deleting a Row

Sorting Data Alphabetically in a Column

Searching and Replacing Substitutions

Using OPC Server Address Substitution in the Tag Group Editor
Editing a Cell
To edit a cell:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, select the cell. The text in the cell is highlighted.
2.
Enter text over the highlighted text.
Deleting the Contents of a Cell
To delete the contents of a cell:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, select the cell that contains the data you want to delete.
2.
Click the Delete Cell Contents toolbar button. The content of the cell is deleted.
Inserting a Row
To insert a row:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, select a cell.
2.
Click the Insert Row toolbar button. An empty row is inserted above the row that contains the insertion
point.
575
Creataing Pictures
Adding a Row
To add a row:
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click the Add Row toolbar button. An empty row is added to the end of
the spreadsheet.
Adding a Row
To delete a row:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, select a cell in the row you want to delete.
2.
Click the Delete Row toolbar button. The row that contains the insertion point is deleted.
Sorting Data Alphabetically in a Column
To sort data alphabetically in a column:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, click the heading of the column that you want to sort.
2.
The column is sorted in ascending order. If you click the column heading again, the column will be
sorted in descending order.
Searching and Replacing Substitutions
To search and replace substitutions:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, export your tag group file as a CSV file.
2.
Open the CSV file in a third-party spreadsheet or text editor.
3.
Use the text editor's find and replace functionality (usually found on the Edit menu) to make multiple
changes to tagname substitutions.
4.
When you have finished making changes, save the file as a CSV file, and exit the text editor.
5.
Open the CSV file in the Tag Group Editor.
6.
On the File menu, click Save As to re-save the CSV file as a tag group (.TGD) file.
Using OPC Server Address Substitution in the Tag Group Editor
iFIX requires the following workaround to use the OPC Server address substitution with the Tag Group Editor
(TagGroupEditor.exe). The steps below describe how to use an OPC address substitution with Symbols in the
Tag Group Editor.
To use an OPC address substitution with Symbols in the Tag Group Editor:
1.
576
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor's Substitution field, paste the OPC address name.
Using Key Macros
2.
Remove the quotes from the address name.
3.
On the File menu, click Resolve Tags.
Resolving Tags With a Picture
To resolve tags with a picture:
1.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
2.
On the File menu, click Resolve Tags.
3.
Enter a picture file name, and click Open.
4.
Enter a tag group file name, and click Open. The operation is performed.
TIP: You can select more than one file by pressing and holding the <CTRL> key while you select files
from the list.
Assigning a Tag Group File to a Picture Event
Click any of the following links for more information about assigning a tag group file to a picture event:

Assigning a Tag Group Substitution to Occur When a Picture Opens

Assigning a Tag Group Substitution to Occur When a Picture Replaces Another Picture
Assigning a Tag Group Substitution to Occur When a Picture Opens
To assign a tag group substitution to occur when a picture opens:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, open the picture from which you want to open another picture.
2.
Select a button or shape from which you want to open the picture.
3.
In Classic view, from the iFIX WorkSpace Toolbox, click the Open Picture Expert button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts group, click Commands, and then click Open
Picture.
4.
Enter the file name, or alias, of the picture that you want to open.
5.
Enter the position for the picture to open in. The default position is 0,0.
6.
Select the Enable Tag Group Substitution check box.
7.
Enter the name of the tag group file that you want to apply to the picture upon opening, and click OK.
8.
Save the changes you made to the picture, and switch to the runtime environment.
577
Creataing Pictures
When you click the object, the picture that you selected to open displays, and the symbols in the
picture are replaced with the substitutions that you defined in the tag group file.
TIPS:

If you want to choose the picture to open at runtime, select the Select Picture to Open in
Run Mode check box. When you switch to the runtime environment and click the object,
the Open dialog box appears.

If you want to choose the tag group file to load at runtime, select the Tag Group File in
Run Mode check box. When you switch to the runtime environment and click the object,
the picture to which you want to assign a tag group file appears, and then the Please
Select a Tag Group Definition (TGD) File dialog box appears.

You can open the iFIX Tag Group Editor from the Open Picture Expert dialog box by
clicking the Tag Group Editor button.
Assigning a Tag Group Substitution to Occur When a Picture Replaces Another Picture
To assign a tag group substitution to occur when a picture replaces another picture:
1.
In the iFIX WorkSpace, open the picture that you want to replace.
2.
Select a button or shape from which you want to replace the picture.
3.
In Classic view, from the iFIX WorkSpace Toolbox, click the Replace Picture Expert button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Tools tab, in the Tasks/Experts group, click Commands, and then click Replace
Picture.
4.
Enter the file name, or alias, of the picture that you want to replace.
5.
Enter the file name of the picture that you want to make the replacement with.
6.
Select the Enable Tag Group Substitution check box.
7.
Enter the name of the tag group file that you want to apply to the replacement picture upon opening,
and click OK.
8.
Save the changes you made to the picture, and switch to the runtime environment.
When you click the object, the picture that you selected gets replaced by the replacement picture, and
the symbols in the replacement picture are replaced with the substitutions that you defined in the tag
group file.
TIPS:

578
If you want to replace the current picture at runtime, select the Replace Current Picture in Run
Mode check box. When you switch to the runtime environment and click the object, the current
picture closes and the replacement picture appears.
Using Key Macros

You can open the iFIX Tag Group Editor from the Open Picture Expert dialog box by clicking
the Tag Group Editor button.
Importing and Exporting Tag Group Files
Click any of the following links for more information about importing and exporting tag group files:

Converting One or More 6.x Tag Group Files

Exporting a Tag Group File as a CSV File
Converting One or More 6.x Tag Group Files
The iFIX Tag Group Editor lets you convert multiple tag group files created in version 6.x of FIX.
To convert multiple tag group files:
1.
Start iFIX and open the Proficy iFIX WorkSpace.
2.
In the 6.x Tag Group Editor, make sure you have saved the tag group files as CSV files.
3.
In Classic view, in the iFIX WorkSpace, on the toolbar, click the Tag Group Editor button.
-OrIn Ribbon view, on the Application tab, in the Utilities group, click Tag Group Editor.
4.
On the File menu, click Convert CSV Files to TGD Files. The Convert 6.x CSV Files dialog box
appears. By default, it is set to the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC path.
5.
In the 6.x .CSV File Directory box, enter the path to the directory where your 6.x CSV files are
located, and click the Update .CSV File List button. The path must end with a backslash (\), similar to
the following:
C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC\
6.
Select the files you want to convert, and click OK. The files will be saved with a .TGD extension.
Exporting a Tag Group File as a CSV File
To export a tag group file as a CSV file:
1.
In the iFIX Tag Group Editor, on the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box appears. By
default, it is set to the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC path.
2.
From the Save as type list, select CSV Files (*.CSV).
3.
Enter a file name, and click Save. The file will be saved with a .CSV extension.
TIP: The tag group file must be located in the C:\Program Files\Proficy\Proficy iFIX\PIC directory
for tag group substitutions to work correctly.
579
Creataing Pictures
Working with Dynamo Objects
A Dynamo object is an object or group of objects that you store in a Dynamo Set and can use in all of your
pictures, helping to create a consistent design across your operator displays. All Dynamo objects can be
manipulated like any iFIX object. The Dynamo object is closest to the group object in behavior. For instance,
you can drill-down into Dynamo objects within pictures to change individual objects.
You can create Dynamo objects out of both simple custom objects and objects with animations. In objects with
animations, you can assign meaningful user prompts to Dynamo properties. These user prompts appear in the
Dynamo Properties dialog box that opens when you double-click the Dynamo or when you first copy the
Dynamo into a new picture.
Each Dynamo object includes five additional object properties:

Dynamo ID – You cannot edit this field; it is a system assigned value. This value is a Globally Unique
Identifier (GUID). The identifier is the same for a Master Dynamo in a Dynamo Set and all instances
of the Dynamo object throughout all pictures. Use this identifier to identify instances of a Dynamo
object with the Master Dynamo in a Dynamo Set.

Dynamo Description – Provides a short description of the specific usage of the given Dynamo
Instance. The number of characters that you can enter in this description are recorded in the
Max_Dynamo_Desc_Length field. The Dynamo Description can be different for each Dynamo
Instance. For the Master Dynamo, the description is empty and read-only.

Master – You cannot edit this field; it is a system assigned value. When True, the selected Dynamo is
a Master Dynamo (within a Dynamo Set). When False, this Dynamo is a Dynamo Instance (within a
picture).

Max_Dynamo_Desc_Length – You cannot edit this field; it is a system assigned value that is
currently set to 40 characters. This field describes the maximum number of characters that you can
enter into the Dynamo Description property, which is currently set at 40 characters.

Revision – You cannot edit this field; it is a system assigned number for the revision. When you save a
Master Dynamo inside of a Dynamo Set, and the Master Dynamo contains changes, the revision
number is incremented. It's only when the Master Dynamo changes and then you save the Dynamo Set
that this number increments on the Master Dynamo. iFIX uses Dynamo revision numbers during an
update to determine when a Master Dynamo is newer than the Dynamo Instances created from it.
Revision numbers are not updated when a Dynamo Instance within a picture is modified. During an
update, when a Dynamo Instance does not equal the Master Dynamo revision number (that is, the
revision number of the Dynamo Instance is lower than the Master Dynamo), the revision number on
the Dynamo Instance is updated to match the Master Dynamo.
When you create a Dynamo and save it in a Dynamo Set, you create a Master Dynamo. You can use this Master
Dynamo in your system pictures by dragging the Dynamo object from the Dynamo Set into a picture. If you
assigned User Prompts to the Dynamo's Object Properties, the Dynamo's Property dialog box appears. This
dialog box allows you to change the data sources for the Dynamo's properties.
580
Using Key Macros
You can create a report of Dynamo objects in your pictures, or pictures that contain specific Dynamos, by using
the Cross Reference Tool. A Quick Report is generated when you run the Quick Dynamo Updater or the
Dynamo Updater Wizard, both of which are available from the Dynamo Toolbar (Classic View) or on the Tools
tab, in the Dynamos group, in the Dynamos list (Ribbon View).
Master Dynamos and Dynamo Instances
A Master Dynamo is any Dynamo object that exists in a Dynamo Set. This term applies only to Dynamo
objects. It does not include pre-built Dynamos or Dynamos created in versions of iFIX earlier than 4.5. A
Master Dynamo includes an identifier so that you can identify which Dynamo objects in a picture are instances
of that particular Master Dynamo. The Dynamo ID is the same in the Dynamo Instances that are derived from
the master. Master Dynamo's exist only within Dynamo Sets. Once placed into an iFIX picture, a Master
Dynamo becomes a Dynamo Instance.
A Dynamo Instance is a Master Dynamo that has been placed into a picture. A Dynamo Instance can be
uniquely identified with one and only one Master Dynamo. Dynamo Instances exist only within iFIX pictures.
When placed into a Dynamo Set, a Dynamo Instance becomes a Master Dynamo, possibly replacing a preexisting Master Dynamo or simply becoming a new Master Dynamo based upon the option selected by the user.
Each Dynamo Instance can have its own Dynamo description, describing how the Instance is used in the
picture.
When a group containing Dynamo Instances is promoted to a Master Dynamo, as in the case when it is dragged
into a Dynamo Set, the contained Dynamo Instances are converted to sta